JP6656748B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning-type gaming machine (also referred to as a “pachislot machine” or a “slot machine”).

  In a general conventional spinning-type gaming machine (game machine), a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and a symbol display area in which a part of the plurality of symbols attached to each reel is displayed. Is provided. In such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number of gaming values (for example, medals) are multiplied and a start operation such as operating a start lever is performed, an internal lottery of a winning combination is performed, and the winning combination is performed. The reel is controlled based on the reel. Thereafter, when a stop operation such as operating a reel stop button is performed, each reel stops at a stop position based on the winning combination, and a combination of symbols attached to the reel (symbol combination) is displayed to the player. . As a result of the game, a bonus is provided (payout of a game value accompanying a winning of a winning combination, transition to an advantageous game state, and the like).

  In such a gaming machine, a symbol combination based on a winning combination is shown through a reel stop operation by a player, and thus a winning combination of the game may be distinguished from the symbol combination in some cases. Knowing the winning combination of the game is one of the pleasures in the game, and there are players who try to determine the winning combination positively. For such a player, there has also been proposed a gaming machine having a predetermined stop operation for enabling a discrimination with respect to a specific winning combination which is difficult to determine when an arbitrary stop operation is performed. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014030570A

However, although knowing the result of the game is one of the pleasures, there are not a few voices that desire a gaming machine with further devising to make the game entertained .

In view of the above-described problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is further devised so as to entertain a game .

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a lottery means for performing a lottery regarding a winning in a plurality of types of hits included, and a symbol display in which a symbol combination based on a result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed. A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a result of the one lottery, even though the result of the lottery by the lottery means is one in one game. In one first game, a symbol combination that is not the same symbol but is composed of the same type of symbol is displayed as a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and is performed after the first game. In the second game, a symbol combination that is not the same symbol but is composed of the same type of symbol is displayed as the symbol combination based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means. In the game of the third game, which is the next one game, said a composed symbol combination from the same a was in and the same pattern as the type of the displayed symbols in the first game, the second game allows the display of multiple symbol combinations by displaying composed symbol combination from the same and the same pattern as the type of the displayed symbols by a, and in the third game, the same In the situation where the symbol combination of the type and the same symbol is displayed a plurality of times, the symbols are displayed by the temporary stop accompanied by the swing fluctuation in each of the plurality of times, and are the symbols of the same type and the same symbol After the combination is displayed by the temporary stop with the fluctuation, the next symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol is changed to the temporary stop with the fluctuation. There is a predetermined time before is displayed, the symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol is displayed by the temporary stop with swing fluctuation, then the next same type In addition, a special effect can be executed during the predetermined time until a symbol combination composed of the same symbols is displayed by a temporary stop accompanied by swing fluctuation.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is further devised to entertain a game .

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. It is a perspective view of the slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part of FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state in which a connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state where the door-shaped front member is omitted. (A) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7, and (b) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7 showing a state where a connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of the case member explaining the temporary fixing state of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of a stopper showing other forms. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of the design change display device which shows other forms of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between the case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine without the medal discharge device. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat dissipation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-sectional partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view showing the state where the power supply device was looked up from below. FIG. 9 is a sectional view of a main part of a side plate of an outer main body and a power supply device, which shows another embodiment. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate. FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of a door-shaped front member to which a transparent plate is attached, corresponding to the line of FIG. It is a disassembled and assembled perspective view of a hinge fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the connection tool in the longitudinal direction. It is a principal part cross-sectional plan view of the door type front member which shows the example of another hinge fitting. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 42 in the middle of opening. It is a perspective view showing the state where the image display and the frame member were opened in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member with the connection tool connected. It is the development view which developed the symbol row of the reel band in plane. It is an enlarged view near the symbol display window of the slot machine viewed from the front. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination. It is a figure which shows each winning combination and the condition apparatus established corresponding to these each winning combination. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the payout number of medals, etc. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the payout number of medals, etc. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the payout number of medals, etc. 40 is a flowchart showing a basic procedure of one game in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a starting process. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a game state transition control processing. It is a figure for explaining the flow of a rough process of instruction function processing. It is the flowchart (the 1) which shows the detailed processing procedure of the indication function generation processing. It is the flowchart (the 2) which shows the detailed processing procedure of the indication function generation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a pointing function related process. It is a figure for explaining a lottery table used for an additional number of initial games lottery. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table used for initial game number addition game number lottery. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table used for AT initial winning lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor game number lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor game number lottery. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor game number lottery. It is FIG. (4) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor game number lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state transition lottery A. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state shift lottery A. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state transition lottery A. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table used for special state shift lottery. It is a figure for explaining the lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state shift lottery B. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state shift lottery B. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for state shift lottery B. It is a figure for explaining transition of AT lottery game state in instruction function generation processing of each example. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 1) for explaining the indication function display of the first example. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the first example. It is a figure for explaining the indicator used by the indication function display of the 2nd example. FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 1) for explaining the indication function display of the second example. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the indication function display of the 2nd example. It is a figure for explaining the example of a specific display of the indication function display of the 2nd example. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) for describing a display example of an instruction function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 2) for describing a display example of the instruction function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. It is a figure for explaining an example of a group display in instruction function display. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the first example. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a display period of various displays and the like. 9 is a timing chart illustrating another example of a display period of various displays and the like. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a continuous production generation lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a continuous production generation lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining the lottery table used for a continuous production content lottery. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a continuous production content lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram (No. 1) for explaining a first type of expectation display (pattern 1). FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) for explaining the first type of expectation display (pattern 1). It is a figure for explaining expectation display (pattern 2) of the 1st type. It is a figure for explaining expectation degree display (pattern 1) of the 2nd type. It is a figure for explaining expectation degree display (pattern 2) of the 2nd type. It is a figure for explaining the example of a display at the time of giving priority display (expected degree priority display). It is a figure for explaining the example of a display at the time of giving priority display (instruction function priority display). FIG. 9 is a diagram for describing a display example when a layer priority display (expected degree priority display) is performed. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a display example when a layer priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed. It is a figure for explaining expectation degree display which produces the display propriety of a specific mode. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a determination process. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of bonus game end determination processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram for describing a data block of a RAM. It is a figure for explaining an error display by a special display LED. 6 is a flowchart (part 1) for describing processing when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 9 is a flowchart (part 2) for describing an error occurrence process according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure of a power interruption recovery process according to the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 1) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (No. 2) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 3) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 4) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 115 is a timing chart illustrating an example (1) of display periods when the power interruption recovery processing illustrated in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. 115 is a timing chart illustrating an example (2) of display periods when the power interruption recovery process illustrated in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing an example (3) of display periods when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. It is a flowchart (the 1) for explaining the process at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1b. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error occurrence in the slot machine 1b. 16 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. It is a flow chart (the 1) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1c. It is a flow chart (the 2) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1c. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. It is a flow chart (the 1) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1d. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of an error occurrence in the slot machine 1d. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. It is a flow chart (the 1) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1e. It is a flow chart (the 2) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1e. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. It is a flow chart (the 1) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1f. It is a flow chart (the 2) for explaining processing at the time of error occurrence in slot machine 1f. 20 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. It is the flowchart (the 3) which shows the detailed processing procedure of the indication function generation processing. It is an example of the lottery table used for AT addition lottery. It is an example of the lottery table used for reincarnation lottery. It is an example of the lottery table used for the reincarnation game number lottery. It is an example of the lottery table used for the reincarnation stacking game number lottery. It is an example of the lottery table used for AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation loading. It is an example of the lottery table used for AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release. It is a figure for explaining a game progress at the time of reincarnation production. It is a figure for explaining an example of a liquid crystal display and a reel display at the time of reincarnation production. It is a figure for explaining a signal outputted from an external relay terminal board. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining information indicated by a combination of type signals. It is a figure for explaining an example of a data display. It is a figure for explaining output of a making signal and a payout signal.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8 (a) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8 (b) is an enlarged view of a Z2 part of FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing a main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of the slot machine showing a back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of a wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view of the wiring relay member with a cover body omitted, FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of a connector holder, 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of main parts showing a guide structure of the case member, and FIG. 23 is a partial perspective view of the symbol variation display device showing the form of FIG. 23, FIG. 23 is a perspective view of a main part showing a relationship between a case member and a stopper on the outer body side, and FIG. 24 is a relationship between a wiring window and a reel of the symbol variation display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal ejection device omitted, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 shows heat dissipation from the back of the slot machine FIG. 29 is a partial cross-sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply seen from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another embodiment, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member in which a transparent plate and a light-emitting unit are disassembled. Is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate in an exploded state, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the door-shaped front member with the transparent plate taken along line A-A of FIG. 33, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of a hinge fitting. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member being opened, and FIG. FIG. 41 is a perspective view of the upper part of the door-shaped front member viewed from the back side, and FIG. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of a door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing the door-shaped front member of FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the connecting members are connected.

[1. First Embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a slot machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer main body 100 having an open front surface, and has a rotating shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer main body 100 to open horizontally. It has a door-shaped front member 200 rotatably mounted in a door shape, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by driving means, and an opening 401 on the front surface which is detachable from the outer main body 100 and is detachable. It has a case member 400 and an image display 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed at the top of the side plates 102, 102, and has a vertically long “mouth” in front view. The frame is shaped like a letter, and a back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box having only a front opening. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a rearwardly inclined state, so that the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearwardly inclined state. In addition, the top board 103 has a plurality of (in the embodiment, in an area facing) the upper cross 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island when installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) are formed.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
Inside the outer body 100, a shelf-shaped partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in a front view having a projecting step 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. Are fixed to the inner surfaces of the side plates 102, 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 for mounting. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 has a cylindrical projection (not shown) formed by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the diameter of the pilot hole with a punch). The cylindrical projection is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to be positioned. An opening 109 for wiring is formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 at the innermost portion on both sides.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition-lower space]
In a space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal discharging device 110 that discharges a medal, which is a game medium, to a medal tray 201 at a lower front portion of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal discharging device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-partition-lower space-medal discharge device]
The medal discharge device 110 has a medal storage hopper 110b attached to an apparatus main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on a front surface of the apparatus main body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging overflowed medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the tip of the overflow gutter 110d. The medal discharge mechanism of the medal discharge device 110 may employ any of the currently known mechanisms, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-partition-lower space-power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 has three members, that is, a bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100, a side plate 102 on the left side as viewed from the front, and a back plate 104, which are attached to inner corners where they are orthogonal to each other. I have. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electric components such as the medal discharge device 110 and the like, and is a component that easily generates heat. The mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, so that it is easy to find unauthorized manipulation of the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper surface plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r that covers the bottom (see FIG. 30). On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. Will be blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a step-like guard portion 102b, and under the guard portion 102b, the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a. It is designed to sneak in one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the seam between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard plate 102b is It is designed to fit into the groove.

  As described above, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a The substrate 112s and the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to cover the open surface after the substrate 112s and the like are assembled in the device case 112a.

  The top plate 112b, the side plate 112e, the slope plate 112f, the rear plate 112c, the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a are provided with a large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g, etc. so that heat is not stored inside. . The device case 112a is raised on a raised floor by legs 112h, 112h,... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise relatively cool air can be introduced into the apparatus case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cool air behind the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. It should be noted that if an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a can be increased. The ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiating port 104a even if the height is misaligned.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-partition-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The outer body 100 is fixed to the outer body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat radiating opening 104 a formed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

  That is, the outline of the heat radiation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the rear face plate 112c of the device case 112a. Therefore, the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation hole 104a. A projection 112m projecting from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat radiation port 104a, and a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiation port 104a in order to resist the floating operation of the power supply device 112. It comprises a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protruding piece 112m-2 inscribed in the longitudinal side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, simply pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat radiation port 104a will raise the rear surface (rear side) of the device case 112a upward (upward) as shown in FIG. The fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the leftward direction in FIG. With a simple operation of merely fitting the protrusion 112m, the movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted except for the direction in which the power supply device 112 is pulled toward the user.

  On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are formed in the mounting piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d, and at least one of the through holes 112p is fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through a wood screw 112q. Accordingly, the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction in which the power supply device 112 is pulled forward, so that the power supply device 112 can be securely fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power supply from outside is connected to the power supply 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided beside the heat radiating port 104a, and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, in this position, there is a high risk that the power cord may be slid on the ground even if the power cords are bundled. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during the manufacturing process, and the power cord must be put out of the outer body 100 in preparation for such a case. During the movement of the slot machine, there is a risk that the power cord may slide on the ground or get under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and be pinched.

  On the other hand, in the heat radiating port 104a of the embodiment, the cord outlet 104b is extended upward from the upper side, and the power cord is pulled out therefrom. This ensures a sufficient height to hang the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of erroneously damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the mounting is completed only by setting the power supply device 112 to the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and screwing one wood screw 112q. Significant labor saving of the mounting work is possible. Further, in the present invention, since the fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, particularly when the part to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to visually recognize and can be fixed securely. . By the way, conventionally, it is necessary to screw the plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112 with screws, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 are difficult to visually recognize, and thus may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is required as a cooling means of the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, extra steps and costs are hardly generated. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting protrusion 112m can be integrally formed, so that almost no cost is required. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the related art.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is a merit that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented with little cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is accommodated in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as a core of wiring means to be described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. It is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a vent 133 for heat radiation is formed in the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door type front member]
FIG. 3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 below the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided substantially at the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one of the medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409 described below. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing the insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (release command by settlement) of medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stop buttons for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Down 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is one example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  A medal selector 207 is provided behind the slot 203, and a medal gutter 212 is connected beside the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected below. The medal selector 207 is a known type that switches a flow path by turning on / off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In a game state where the player waits for a medal to be inserted, the flow path is shifted to the medal gutter 212 side. Also, in a gaming state in which the insertion of medals is rejected, such as the insertion of medals exceeding a specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in the closed position over the front surface of the outer body 100, the tip of the medal gutter 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medals flowing to the medal gutter 212 through the hopper reach the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the medal tray 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing to the return gutter 213 from the slot 203 through the medal selector 207 return to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door type front member-see-through window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is large enough to cover the entire front surface of the outer body 100, and the upper half thereof is a transparent window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be seen side by side vertically, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. If the size of one transparent plate 214a is set to cover both the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 is switched. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door type front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a rubber-containing methacrylic resin having excellent impact resistance, abrasion resistance, and optical characteristics; in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.). ) Is an upside-down form in which a trapezoid is substantially inverted, and edge members 214b bulging to the front side with the side facing the player as the front side around three sides (left side and top side) excluding the bottom side. 214b, 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is formed integrally with the periphery of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b becomes a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear side (not a solid but a shell-like structure having a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having, for example, a pattern or text on its surface are incorporated in the internal space.

  34, the light emitting unit 217 is illustrated as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the illustrated one, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided at least on any one side.

  33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a, and a screw passing through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), and is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge members 214b. The fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration in appearance, while the fixing member 218 has a through hole 200a, 214d (see an enlarged view in FIG. 33) provided in a corner portion above each of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214 a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and reference numeral 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitting body 217a. The reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set at an angle such that the light of the rod-shaped light emitter 217a is largely reflected toward the periphery of the slot machine 1 as shown in FIG. In the embodiment in which the light-emitting unit 217 is incorporated into the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light-emitting body 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that the light-emitting body 217a is like a lighthouse at the tip of a cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. The reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect the light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) largely upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be lit during a game, particularly when a big hit occurs, and can perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of the big hit to the surroundings. By performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings in this way, the player who has won the jackpot can be noticed, and the eyes of many people can give the player a sense of superiority. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will be increased and the operating rate will be improved by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot has been generated.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and has a plate-like bottom side of the door-shaped front member 200 with respect to the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. It is inserted obliquely from the front and fitted in a fitting manner. In this state, the transparent plate 214a is erected, and all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b are brought into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It is fixed with a screw 603 (see FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cutaway view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player temporarily removes foreign matter from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. , There is little room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, an excellent security effect is exhibited.

[3-2. Door type front member-lock device]
On one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200, a lock device 215 that is opened and closed using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided.

[4. Symbol variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. And a device case 302 for playing a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surface of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

  The device case 302 is a modified hexagonal prism form in which three sides toward the front (a player) are removed from an octagonal prism that is laid down, and has a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. , A left side plate 307 on the left side, a vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, an upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, a bottom plate 304, and a rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front of the apparatus case 302.

  The top plate 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be switched between a use state in which a finger can be hooked and an unused state in which the top plate 305 is laid down. To carry.

  The configuration in which the handle 311 that can be changed as described above is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, and thus the opening 401 of the case member 400 has sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. However, since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes a hindrance to putting the device case 302 into and out of the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made to be changeable and laid down on the top plate 305 as in the embodiment, since the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Therefore, only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in a direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

  Although the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between a standing use state and a prone non-use state, a structure capable of changing the handle 311 between a use state and a non-use state is described in the following. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314 and 314 are cut and raised in the top plate section 305, and the belt loops 314 and 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather and have retaining portions 315 and 315 at both ends. The use state in which a finger can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up from the folded unused state in FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to a non-use state in which it is flat.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is protruded from the bottom plate 304 of the apparatus case 302 of the embodiment, and the lower case 316 is grasped and the apparatus case 302 is pushed or pushed. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out of the case member 400.

[5. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on both left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. A rear plate 405 is provided upright on the rear edge, and a top plate 406 that covers the upper surfaces of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404, and has a box shape having an opening 401 on the front surface.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402, which crosses the opening 401, extends between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is set as the installation area of the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is set as the installation area of the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409, which is a main control board, is mounted on an inner wall surface of a rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board other than the main board 409 (for example, a sub board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  On the top plate 406 of the case member 400, skylight portions 443 and 443 are formed as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two portions with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the ceiling plate 406 therebetween, and each of the portions is connected to an axis passing through the through-holes 132 of the outer main body 100. It is located in a region including the intersection, and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132. However, the front edge of the skylight 443 is moved closer to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through-hole 132 can be found by groping with reference to the periphery of the skylight 443, so that even if the operator cannot look inside the skylight 443, the position of the through-hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylights 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  A plurality of bosses 410, 410 are protruded from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, FIG. 5, FIG. 6, and FIG. The boss holes 114, 114 pre-processed into the holes 104 are fitted and positioned. The bosses 410, 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, while the boss holes 114, 114 on the outer body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. The positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step 412 fits into the projecting step 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end of the concave step portion 412 on the rear face plate 405 side, and the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400 are guided by the tapered portion 413. The fitting with the concave step part 412 can be performed smoothly. As described above, the case member 400 is guided straight into the interior of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the projecting step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A groove member-shaped rail member 115 is laid or integrally formed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Is also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a convex rail member 116 is laid on the partition plate 105 or integrally formed by press molding, while flanges 415 and 415 are formed at both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  The case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. The stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and two mounting members 118, 118 which are suspended from the top plate 103 as shown in FIGS. In the forward direction on the partition plate 105 of the case member 400, the operating position in which the case member 400 is engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operating position in which the case member 400 is not engaged as shown in FIG. Regulate movement. When the stopper 117 is formed in a key shape as shown in FIG. 19 and is engaged with the hook 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the mounting member 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating through a corner of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. When the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position, the operating posture and the non-operating posture can be switched from inside the case member 400.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating through the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 is provided. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. And the horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or may be thought of as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409). It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as a “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. Further, recesses 419, 419 are formed outside the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, as wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 is mounted on the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and a horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, with the lower limit being the lower limit, that is, the height of the lower side within the range. In other words, they are arranged.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of displaying an image, which is constituted by at least a liquid crystal display (otherwise, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like), and can open and close a front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes at the same time. Note that the image display body 500 has a hinge member 420 attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the hatched portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge member 420. It is freely supported.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44, a sub-substrate 510 is mounted on the back side of the image display body 500. Therefore, it is possible to integrally form the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-substrate 510, to facilitate handling, to omit wiring for connecting the two, and to perform wiring work in the case member 400. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-substrate 510 appears so as to protrude from the inside of the case member 400, so that workability with respect to the sub-substrate 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image Display-Hinge Hardware]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. Since the hinge fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will mainly be described. The hinge fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a to be attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a rotating member 420b to be attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see a broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and a fixing to the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d connecting the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of a long link 420d is provided on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and a short link is provided on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is rotatably mounted on a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a lateral bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf, and one end of a long link 420d is provided on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f is provided. One end of the short link 420c is rotatably mounted on a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixing piece 420e, the shaft bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-bar rotating chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37. A so-called double lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain shaft bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), the two lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory of the door-shaped front member 200 about the rotation axis 100a. For this purpose, the respective pin positions are set. In other words, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the outside of the rotation of the image display body 500 are changed. The distance from the rim is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h set so as to overlap vertically with the image display body 500 rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is bulged in a triangular shape so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c by inserting a rod-shaped stopper pin (not shown), thereby locking both lever mechanisms and displaying the image display body. It is for fixing 500 in the open position.

[6-2. Image Display-Lock Piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, a lock is provided on the reinforcing member 407 (the right side in FIG. 11) of the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420. When the lock piece 421 is pivoted clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 engages with the receiving portion 508 protruding from the rear side of the image display body 500. The image display 500 is locked at a position where the upper part of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is turned in the opposite direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 can be turned around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while, when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image is not displayed. The lock of the display body 500 is released so that the display body 500 can be freely rotated.

[6-3. Image Display-Connecting Tool]
By the way, the case member 400 is provided with the image display body 500 that can be opened and closed separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, so that the case member 400 can be visually recognized or worked inside the case member 400. In this case, first, it is necessary to open the front door member 200 on the front side and then further open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may cause a reduction in workability or inconvenience. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. The image display body 500 is opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 also rotates in the same direction via the connecting member 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 rotates along with the door-shaped front member 200, and it becomes possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one horizontal opening operation.

  As described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment are connected to each other by the levers of the hinge fitting 420 so that the rotation locus of the image display body 500 is changed by the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Is approximated to a rotation trajectory having a rotation center as a rotation center, but there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the connecting tool 700 of the embodiment forms the fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is put in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) by a stop shaft 703 so as to be rotatable. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it were an accessory to the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connecting member 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative displacement of the movement.

  Note that the maximum protruding length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when the image display body 500 is opened by 90 °). The distance is set based on the distance between the rotation outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (the position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotation outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be reduced to a necessary minimum length, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the coupling tool.

  The stop shaft 703 is vertically movably mounted on support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215, and is constantly urged downward by a spring 703a. Have been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the bias of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connecting member 700 can be attached and detached by moving the stop shaft 703 upward to float the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 is inserted from above into the shaft hole 702a formed at the distal end of the rod 702, and can be held by the urging force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connecting tool 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is fixed to the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and engages with a catching wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent blind movement of the rod 702. The rod 702 is provided with a knob 706 protruding from a side surface thereof in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction. The lock of the stopper 704 is released by gripping the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It has become. Further, on the bottom surface on the distal end side of the fixed sheath member 701, a retaining prevention piece 701a is hung down and inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The stopper preventing piece 701a comes into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 projects most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 near the coupler 700 denotes an engagement portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the outer edge side of the rotation. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 at the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided with a slide-type guide portion 402 a that is inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (exchangeably) attached to the image display body 500. I have.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation locus of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 can be reduced by using a flexible wire in addition to the above-described telescopic rod-type connecting tool 700. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting member is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped with the door-shaped front member 200 open at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, and the smoothness will be impaired. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to always urge in the closing direction. By doing so, at the time of the closing operation of the door-shaped front member 200, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 does not collide with the image display body 500. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge fitting 420, which is one element for swiveling in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, and is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

  The image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be turned in a door shape. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, for example, for checking the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, in which case the image display body 500 can block important components (for example, the main board 409 and the sub-board 510) in the wiring work space 408, which is effective in improving security performance. .

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is moved by a finger passing through the gap 10. You can grab it. A handle 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylights 443 and 443), and a finger passed through the handle opening 422 is used to hold the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can appropriately use the handle port 422 and the gap 10 appropriately depending on the place and posture of the case member 400 to be handled. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry the case member 400 in a bag form using the grip opening 422. On the other hand, in a state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, as shown in FIG. As described above, since the handle opening 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 and does not allow a finger to enter, the finger is hooked on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10 and the case member 400 is pulled out. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. The lower handle 316 is pushed or pulled to hold the outer body 100. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws, and thus the lower handle 316 is provided to project from the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[6-4. Image Display-Frame Member]
The image display body 500 is large enough to cover almost the entire area above the reinforcing bar 402 in the opening 401 of the case member 400. Further, a frame member 501 surrounding the area below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, the front area of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame-like manner is provided below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol change display device 300 are framed by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light source such as an LED, a light emission control board for controlling the light source, and a decorative member disposed in front of the light source and capable of transmitting light. Part is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44).

[6-4-1. Image Display-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the illumination device 502 illuminates the symbol of the symbol variation display device 300 brightly. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light amount as compared with the conventional lighting device.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a lighting device 502 exemplified as an embodiment has a strip-shaped substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the drawing (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a column 503. The lower lighting device 502 includes the LEDs 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed by, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper lighting device 502 is configured such that the LEDs 504 face down in a translucent cover 507 that is, for example, milky white and has a U-shaped cross section.

  The upper lighting device 502 is installed with the lighting direction obliquely downward from directly below to the player side, that is, toward the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (refer to the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is directed obliquely to the transparent plate 214 a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-shaped light-emitting body such as a fluorescent lamp is employed as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-shaped or concave-shaped reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the center line of the main irradiation area directed by the sum of the reflected light may obliquely hit the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, if the irradiation target of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if some of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no effect.

  According to an experiment, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed toward the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and become hard to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated via the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are not illuminated. It was confirmed that a wide area became bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 is reflected on the transparent plate 214a fitted to the see-through window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused throughout, or the reel 301a is illuminated brightly by the transparent plate 214a. It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper lighting device 502 as described above can be adopted also for the lower lighting device 502, and can be adopted only for the lower lighting device 502 as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 32 shows the upper lighting device 502 in FIG. 4 arranged on the lower side and the lower lighting device 502 arranged on the upper side. And “bottom” to “top”.

  By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the illumination device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) a conventional method of driving at a low voltage to drive at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V at operation). (B) Longer life than cold cathode tubes, (c) more durable than cold cathode tubes that are glass tubes, (d) Width of production because multicolor emission is possible (E) It is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, so that there is an advantage that a load on a hinge fitting 420 supporting the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, each of the input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter, collectively referred to simply as “medal discharge device 110, power supply device 112, and operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200” attached to the outer main body 100, for example. For example, the main board 409 and the like in the case member 400 (in some cases, the case member-side electric components are simply referred to as “case member-side electric components”) are electricity. Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, a reasonable wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (the housing side electric component) and the case member side electric component.

[7-1. Wiring Means-Wiring Relay Member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. I have. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body-side wirings 119 connected to the main body-side electric components and the case-side wirings 423 connected to the case member-side electric components, and is provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter, referred to as “two” in the embodiment) accommodated between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120. "The connector connection terminal board" may be used.) 122, 123.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed and freely movable state, and therefore, is an enlarged view of FIG. As shown in (1), it can move up and down, and can also move left and right. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that is paired with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 that is connected to a case member-side electrical component other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are of a board fixed type which is fixed to a printed board by a fixing means such as soldering, and are inexpensive according to the DIN standard.

  The cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding at a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-shaped wiring duct 129 projecting forward from the front.

  The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 pass through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or are bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 is distributed to the side plates 102, 102 side of the outer main body 100 as shown by the dashed line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed almost vertically near the corners of the side plates 102, 102 and the back plate 104, and most of them are Through the wiring openings 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105, they are respectively connected to the main body side electric components. Of course, if there is a main body side electric component (for example, an external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in a region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is positioned between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation centers of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height where the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a wiring relay member 113 for relaying the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric components and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric components is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path for passing wiring is formed along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100.
(D) The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 are guided to the side of the case member 400, and are connected therefrom to the main body side electric components through the wiring path.

  In the gaming machine provided with the above components (a) to (d), the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are not passed. The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to bypass the wiring route provided along the side (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)). The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass substantially behind the center of the back plate 104 and pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[7-2. Wiring Means-Connectors 425, 427]
The two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 as described above include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electric components are respectively connected.

  These two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 substantially at the center and protruding from both sides of the holder main body 429, A well-known button-shaped panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. The attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 as the fixing means, and further to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 are not disconnected.

[7-2-1. Wiring relay board-connectors 425, 427-temporary holding shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, that is, during the period from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

  The temporary holding shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inwardly-facing claws 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. A space is provided between the center one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. The one bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a finger to the finger hook 436 and applying a force in the X direction shown in FIG. The attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 in such a state that the attachment piece 431 is easily disengaged like a leaf spring. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook 436 is bent in a key shape, whereby the removal of the connector holder 428 can be performed as if pressing a button as indicated by an arrow Y. Easy to do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary holding shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it says temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400. Therefore, until the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the components inside the case member 400, and the components are of course There is no risk of damage to itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8 (b) → FIG. 8 (a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is warped outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary holding shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its own attachment piece 431 contacts the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. The fitting pieces 431 are locked into the support cylinder 128 by pushing the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attaching piece 431 in that state. At this time, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if guide rails 440 for guiding are provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 to the back. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable using the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base, is separated from the case member, and does not come in contact with the case member. Even if the 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, no excessive load is applied.

From the description so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) an outer main body having a box shape having an open front surface and a back surface covered with a back plate, and having a power supply device and other main body-side electric components;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol change display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachable from the outer main body and other case member-side electric components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to a back plate of the outer main body to relay wiring on the main body side connected to the electric component on the main body side and wiring on the case side connected to the electric component on the case member side;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before the model unit is mounted on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine wherein the connector holder is replaced from a temporary fixing member to a fixing means in a state where the model unit is mounted on the outer main body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the gaming machine described above, the attachment of the model unit 50 to the outer body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, this method has a problem that when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector coupling portion, and there is a concern about reliability. is there.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may be unstable. There is a problem that a new security structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After connecting the connector holder 428 to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is connected to a component (the wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and during a game. Further, only the model unit 50 is to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not to be replaced. Therefore, the burden on the game hall for changing the model is reduced.

[7-2-2. Connection of connectors 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are mounted on one connector holder 428. In this way, the connection between the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, the structure in which the independent components of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered and integrated into one unit is a difficult problem of “accurate positioning” of the connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four components of the two connectors 425, 427 and the connectors 124, 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not all accurate, the connectors 425, 124 and the connectors 427, 125 cannot be collectively connected. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of a mass-produced product. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of joining without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, according to the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 serving as a board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively mounted thereon, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction perpendicular to the coupling direction between the connector 427 and the connector 125 by being non-fixedly accommodated in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 (the “perpendicular” here is not limited to strict 90 degrees). Means about 90 degrees according to the conventional wisdom). In this configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is reduced. The connector 427 and the connector 125 can be connected because they are moved to perform the correction.

From the description so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(1) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with the respective connectors, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these. Is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, and one of the connector groups is fixed to the board supporting member, and the other connector board is connected to the board supporting member in the direction in which the connector is connected to the board supporting member. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the game machine. "
(2) A plurality of symbols are formed on an outer body having a power supply unit and other main body-side electrical components, and a case member detachable with respect to the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a design variation display device to be varied and other case member-side electric components, main body-side wiring connected to the main body-side electric components, and case-side wiring connected to the case member-side electric components. A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wiring, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, and a board which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and which is fixed to a printed board for use The connector connection, comprising: another connector group formed by a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate and having the connector of the other connector group fixed thereto. The terminal board for connection is divided for each connector, one of which is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other terminal board for connector connection is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be freely movable in the direction orthogonal to the coupling direction of the connector. A gaming machine characterized by doing so. "
(3) "In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to a board supporting member via a connector board. Attach another connector group paired with these to one connector holder, further fix one connector in the connector group to the connector holder, and connect the other connector to the connector holder in the connection direction of the connector with the connector holder. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in a direction orthogonal to the game machine. "
(4) A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a power supply unit and other main body-side electric components, and a case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay a model unit provided with a design variation display device to be varied and other case member-side electric components, main body-side wiring connected to the main body-side electric components, and case-side wiring connected to the case member-side electric components. A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wiring, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more connectors as a connector group, and the connector Fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, and a board which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and which is fixed to a printed board for use The connector holder, comprising: another connector group of a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate, and fixing the connector of the other connector group. A game machine characterized in that one connector in a connector group is fixed and another connector is mounted on a connector holder so as to be freely movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. "

  If the above gaming machine operates the connector holder while aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to a manufacturing error in the relative position of the other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation, and absorbs the error, it is also possible to connect the connectors which are not aimed at the connection. Therefore, it is possible to connect a plurality of connectors collectively using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, the DIN standard which is used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the wiring relay member by the fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark), and further to the back plate of the outer body via the wiring relay member. On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder. . Therefore, even if relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with the outer body alone and does not receive interference from the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  Note that, as in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is made movable and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are defined as the basis of the coupling is different from the reverse configuration in that the connectors 425 and 124 , 427 and 125 can be easily combined. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that the erroneous correction can be easily performed. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 9, the chamfered portions C (at the peripheral corners of the tips of the convex connectors 425 and 427 and / or the insertion ports of the concave connectors 124 and 125). If a straight chamfer or a curved chamfer can be formed, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connection between the connectors better.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side can be movable. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. FIG. 17 shows a specific example of the connector holder 428. In this example, a receptacle 429a with female threads is projected from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having play holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receptacle 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted in the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the diameter difference between the play hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group. However, the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 12, the recess is formed on the back side of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438, 438 are formed in the vicinity of both ends of the cable groove 437 so as to penetrate the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400. The wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 are used to connect the symbol variation display device 300 to the main board 409 and the like. A cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel board 312 provided on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 is drawn out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is accommodated in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from another wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. It should be noted that cable stoppers 439 are provided at predetermined intervals in the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 does not fall out of the cable groove 437.

  Since the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electric components in the case member 400, there is no need to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 in the case member 400 to detour the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel board 312 is determined on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for connecting and disconnecting a connector in a limited space. Is preferable. Conversely, if the reel board 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) and the reel board 312 will be in close proximity. Because they face each other, it is not possible to secure a wide working space necessary for connecting and disconnecting the connector.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, if the connection part of the boards (the main board 409, the sub-board 510, the image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. , The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be bitten when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 in the case member 400 so as to bypass the cable 313 to the outside, the trouble of the cable 313 described above does not occur. Further, it is better to carry out the wiring work in a state where the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is not limited to the wiring cost. There is room to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is slackened in a state where the apparatus case 302 is set at a predetermined position, and the slack of the cable 313 is increased depending on the amount of pull-out. When such slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the corner at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The slack part of can be escaped.

  When the cable groove 437 is expanded toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, the cable groove 437 is expanded between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that the wiring using the wiring ports 438, 438 and the cable groove 437 does not need to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel board 312, but can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal plate.

  In the slot machine 1 configured as described above, the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100, and the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory in a state of a completed product in which necessary wiring is completed. Then, the completed product is attached to the gaming machine installation island of the game arcade. At this time, as shown in the imaginary line in FIG. 25, the top plate 103 of the outer body 100 and the upper bar 600 of the gaming machine installation island are connected with wood screws or the like. When fixing with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver to securely connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island. Since a plurality of through holes 132 are provided, the through holes 132 can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper rail 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail 600 can be selected. Further, when the whole gaming machine is replaced, by changing the through hole 132 to be used, it is possible to prevent a problem that a hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (a so-called fool hole).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, through the gap S from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 to the vent 133 of the back plate 104, from there, it escapes into the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier to block the gap S over a wide area, so that the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked at this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat radiation effect is high.

[8. Design of each reel, pattern row]
As shown in FIG. 46, on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged at regular intervals (a total of 21 symbols indicated by array numbers 0 to 20). Symbol) is attached to the reel band (symbol band). FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows described on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, the said arrangement | sequence number is described for convenience for identifying the symbol arrange | positioned in the symbol row. In FIG. 46, the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached is shown as a left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached is a middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached is shown as a right reel. In the description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are also described as necessary.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of continuous symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (a symbol display window; The display window 401 is unified (see FIG. 47 described below).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of the symbols are “7” symbols painted in red (hereinafter referred to as “red 7 symbols”) and “7” symbols painted in blue (hereinafter “7” symbols). Blue 7 design)), "BAR design", "cherry design with cherry design", "watermelon design with watermelon design", "replay design", "bell design" "Bell design", "design" described as "right" (hereinafter referred to as "right design"), and "design" described as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "positive design") is there. In addition, the bell design can be divided into "Bell 1 design" in which one star is drawn and "Bell 2 design" in which two stars are drawn according to the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

  In FIG. 46, the “red 7 symbol” has two of the array numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of the array numbers 12 in the reel band 321b, and the array number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 symbol" corresponds to one of the array numbers 16 in the reel band 321a, one of the array numbers 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array numbers 15 in the reel band 321c. The “BAR symbol” corresponds to one of the array numbers 11 in the reel band 321a, two to the array numbers 6.9 in the reel band 321b, and one to the array number 2 to the reel band 321c. "Cherry symbol" is one of the array numbers 10 in the reel band 321a, three in the reel band 321b, the array numbers 1, 14, and 17, and the reel band 321c is the array numbers 7 and 14. The two correspond. "Replay symbols" are five in the reel band 321a, namely, array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, are array numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, and 11. In the reel band 321c, five of No. 16, No. 16, No. 8, No. 13, No. 13 and No. 17 correspond. "Bell 1 symbol" has three arrangement numbers 13, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321a, and five arrangement numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321b. In the reel band 321c, three of the array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond. The "bell 2 design" corresponds to three arrangement numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and two arrangement numbers 0 and 4 to the reel band 321c. The “watermelon design” is three in the reel band 321a, ie, the sequence numbers 9, 14 and 19, the reel band 321b is two in the sequence numbers 4 and 13, and the reel band 321c is the sequence number 3 No. 6, No. 11, No. 20 correspond. The “definition design” corresponds to one of the array numbers 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the array numbers 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. The "normal pattern" corresponds to one of the array numbers 0 in the reel band 321a, one of the array numbers 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. Note that the types of symbols are only examples, and are not limited to these types.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view of the vicinity of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 viewed from the front. According to FIG. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed at the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators (corresponding to “various indicators” described later) around the symbol display window 401, such as lamps and LEDs. Are shown. Then, a part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. In addition, above the frame member 501, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged, and the images and the like (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 can be visually recognized by the player. Has become. Hereinafter, each of the above-described configurations illustrated in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

[9-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, from the symbol display window 401, of the symbols in the symbol row of each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, three consecutive symbols can be visually recognized. From the top, the three positions where the symbols are displayed are referred to as “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where the “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), and “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , The position on the reel 301b where the “replay symbol” is displayed) and the “lower (or lower position)” (for example, the position where the “bell 1 symbol” on the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “the number of stages × the number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Accordingly, in the slot machine 1, nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 at maximum based on “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left end of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, hereinafter, unified as the display panel 501) (left side as viewed from the symbol display window 401), among which "BET1" and "BET2" "And" BET3 "are the BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (numbers 1, 2, and 3 of" BET1, "" BET2, "and" BET3 ") are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is one bet (the number of medals bet is one), and "2" is one. Two bets (the number of medals bet is two) and "3" correspond to three bets (also called MAX bet, the number of medals bet is three).

  The effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “valid arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if the respective symbols constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination are individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if the respective symbols are not arranged on any of the activated lines (that is, the predetermined symbol is not displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the activated line), it is not determined that the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this manner, when the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combinations are not arranged on the activated line, it is determined that the various combinations of the symbols (that is, the combinations of the lost symbols) are displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the activated line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as an example, in a normal game state (general game state) and a bonus internal state, a game with three cards is specified or recommended (specified number of three). However, as will be described later, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in a bonus state controlled during a bonus game, a game of two-slot play is performed (a specified number of two). Further, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are two lines of a straight-line arrangement rising to the right (up-right line) and a linear arrangement falling to the right (down-right line). Specifically, in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47, a line (that is, a line rising upward) 623b in which “BAR symbol-replay symbol-significant symbol” is displayed, and “bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol” Are displayed as the effective lines only.

  Note that the bet number and the activated line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be any line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, one or a plurality of straight lines, a mountain shape, a V-shaped line, or the like. Further, the number of valid lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of valid lines may be set. Furthermore, the number of activated lines may be changed according to the number of medals bet in the game.

  The combination of the symbols on the activated line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is “Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol” displayed on the lower right line 623a which is one of the activated lines. Since this combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (replay combination), in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting a medal, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It is possible to do. Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the activated line, it is difficult for the player to understand at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, the combination of the symbols “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is displayed on the middle line that is not the activated line, so that the player can know that the player has won the replay. In addition, like the above-mentioned replay combination (re-playing combination), it is difficult to grasp the established combination at a glance on the activated line, but it is difficult to grasp the established combination in the entire symbol display window 401. For, the symbol combination may be prepared in the other winning combinations as well. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance using the activated line alone, it is possible for the player to easily understand the winning of the winning combination when viewed through the entire symbol display window 401.

[9-2. Various displays]
As shown in FIG. 47, on the display panel 501, a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be turned on (or flashed) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1 are arranged around the symbol display window 401. I have. Among the plurality of indicators, various indicators other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or blinks) when any trouble, failure, or the like (hereinafter, referred to as an “error”) occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and that an error is currently occurring. Is a lamp having a role of notifying a player or the like (including a person in charge of a hall, etc.). In FIG. 47, near the error lamp 604, an error is abbreviated and “ERR” is drawn. Since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error only by turning on or blinking the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the special display LED 612 provided separately. .

  The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay (that is, the player can play the game again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 47, near the replay lamp 606, the letters "REP" are drawn for short.

  The start lamp 608 is a lamp that starts lighting (or blinking) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of urging the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 47, near the start lamp 608, the character “STR” is drawn for short.

  The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp that plays a role of urging a player to bet by continuing to light (or blink) until the number of bets reaches a maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, near the medal IN lamp 610, the character “INS” is drawn for abbreviation of insert (input of gaming value).

  The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored medals (game value) that can be used by the player by inserting a medal by the player or paying out a medal according to the game result. This indicator has a role of notifying the player of the number of stored medals, and is constituted by two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (a stored number display LED 613a on the left side and a stored number display LED 613b on the right side). For example, when the upper limit of the number of stored medals that can be used by the player is 50 and the upper limit is stored, “5” is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a, and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying “0”, the stored number of medals of “50” is displayed so as to be identifiable by the player.

  The BET lamp 614 (614a to 614c) displays the BET number when a bet operation for betting a medal (gaming value) is performed up to a specified number before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. The indicator has a role of indicating the bet number (BET number) of the game value in one game by displaying, and includes three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the number of BETs is one, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, and when the number of BETs is two, the BET lamp 614b is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the number of BETs is the upper limit of three (MAXBET). Then, the BET lamps 614a are further turned on, so that all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

  It is assumed that the display of these displays is controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

  In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of the bonus game described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game and the like, and counting the bonus game are separately provided. Is also good.

  Further, the display such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the display can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from “7” (14 seg or 16 seg), or LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, or the like may be used instead of LED. You may.

[9-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of a payout number display for notifying the player of the payout number of the game value by displaying the payout number when a medal (game value) is paid out according to the game result. The display is composed of two horizontally arranged 7-segment LEDs (the special display LED 612a on the left and the special display LED 612b on the right). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the timing at which the medals are paid out one by one is determined. By changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15”, the player can be notified of the payout status of the gaming value (medal) in real time.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of an instruction function for displaying the content of an instruction by the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of the display of the number of payouts. The details of the "instruction function" will be described later, but as an overview, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the generation of the instruction by the "instruction function" is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 is displayed. As the instruction function display, information indicating the pressed positions of the reels 301a to 301c and the stop order (replaced with the pressed orders and pressed positions of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) and the like are displayed, and according to the contents of the display. When the reel 301 is stopped, an advantageous game result for the player is provided.

  In the instruction function, the performance affecting the generation of the instruction (specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function and the management of the state transition, etc.) are controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function. The main board 409 manages not only the control of the status transitions but also the indication function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, the display function (for example, the image display body 500) other than the display destination of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display is displayed. May be displayed, but such display may be controlled by a peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) other than the main board 409. FIG. 48 illustrates the connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub board 510.

  Explaining in a specific example, when the push order small combination (any of AT1 to AT10) is selected as a winning combination during the AT game, the selected push sequence small combination under the control of the main board 409 (in particular, the CPU 1110). Is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, when the player understands the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612, the player can recognize an appropriate pressing order. On the other hand, by transmitting the same information as the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 that has received the command determines “appropriate An image indicating “the pressing order” can be displayed on the image display body 500 (navigation display). A specific display example of the instruction function display will be described later in [11-3-4].

  In the slot machine 1, such an instruction function display can be performed in such a manner that any of the displays on the display panel 501 also has a function (in this example, the special display LED 612 that displays the number of payouts is displayed. Is done). That is, in the special display LED 612, the indication function display and the payout number display are performed. For example, by dividing each display period, the display can be performed without confusing both. In the present embodiment, the display unit also has a function of displaying the number of payouts. However, a display unit having other functions may also be used, or a display unit exclusively for displaying an instruction function may be provided.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 is turned on to notify the occurrence of the error, and the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. Also, it has a function of displaying error information. The display timings of the instruction function display, the number-of-payouts display, and the error information display will be described later in [11-3-5] and [11-3-7].

[10. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically illustrates the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for integrally controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 409 is mounted with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like. The main board 409 is a function that influences the result of the game (acquisition of a game value), specifically, for example, a lottery such as a winning combination, a bonus, an AT, and the control and instruction of a game state based on the lottery result. It determines the instruction by the function and manages the payout based on the winning combination.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 includes, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 48, a door open detection switch that detects an open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (a stored medal clearing switch), a medal selector 207. And a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) and the like that can be turned on around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

  The above-described one-sheet insertion buttons 205 and 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, the storage release switch 209, and the like are all connected to the main board 409. These operation buttons use sensors (not shown). Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the symbol variation display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a , 211b, 211c, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is output to the main board 409.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. The devices include a symbol variation display device 300, a medal discharge device 110, and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be independently rotated and stopped. Is displayed while changing.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting reference positions for rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, stop position information of each reel can be obtained on the main board 409.

  In the medal selector 207, the above-described solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b are provided. The insertion sensor 207b detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is off, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the insertion of medals is not accepted. The medals that have flowed through the return gutter 213 to the return trough 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, since the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, neither the betting nor the storing of medals by inserting medals is performed.

  The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting paid out medals one by one in the discharge opening 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Have been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined amount, a detection signal indicating that the medals exceed the predetermined amount is sent to the main board. 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, and the like perform an error display to notify the abnormality of the medal storage, thereby notifying the player or the hall employee that the abnormality has occurred (see FIG. 111 described later). (Corresponds to "Auxiliary storage full error").

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. In addition, a drive signal is input to the medal discharge device 110 from the main board 409 in accordance with the type of combination of symbols stopped on the activated line, and in response to this, the medal discharge device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110, or if there is no medal at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, a payout medal abnormality signal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 reports that an abnormality has occurred in medal payout. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display body 500, or the like, to notify that the player, the hall employee, or the like has an abnormality (for example, the “medal empty error” shown in FIG. Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators via a corresponding port. Lighting and display can be operated.

  The slot machine 1 includes a sub board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (Audio). Amplifier 1126, a sound source IC 1128, and the like. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409 and controls display of the image display body 500, light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal plate 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal plate 131. The external relay terminal plate 131 has a role of relaying various signals (insertion medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. Note that the connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) other than the main board 409 may be connectable to the external relay terminal plate 131. Various signals can be transmitted from the various substrates connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various pieces of game information managed by the sub-board 510 and urgent information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunction or malfunction of the components of the slot machine 1) are stored in the hole. The data can be output to the computer 1200.

  The hall computer 1200 is one of external devices connected to the slot machine 1 so as to be able to communicate with the slot machine 1, and a so-called data display is also included in the external device. A signal cannot be output from the external device to the slot machine 1, but is limited to output from the slot machine 1 to the external device (one-way communication, one-way communication). The external output of the signal from the slot machine 1 to the external device will be described in detail from [12].

  In addition, the power supply device 112 includes a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed outside the slot machine 1, and can only be operated by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is used to cancel an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when setting is changed together with the setting key switch 112t. Note that these switches described above may be provided on the main board 409.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game using the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state in which the number of medals to be wagered is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are controlled to stop. When all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is determined from the combination of the symbols on the activated line, and the necessary result is determined. In accordance therewith, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded.

  As described above, the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c are respectively attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content (combination of the symbols displayed on the activated lines) of the symbol displayed on the symbol display window 401 is changed to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. It is determined whether the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-described effective lines (the upward-sloping line 623b and the downward-sloping line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

  In this example, the number of activated lines is described as two. However, when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of activated lines, a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on each of the activated lines. Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the symbol combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are displayed, medals are paid out in a total number of the payout numbers corresponding to the displayed winning combinations. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as an upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out each time. In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on a plurality of activated lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals of the upper limit are paid out and the upper limit is exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, there is no way to pay out the excess of the upper limit value by dividing it into the next and subsequent games.

  In the following, a case where the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the activated lines is referred to as a symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as a winning combination symbol). It is said that the combinations are complete or the winning combination symbols are complete.

  The design of the slot machine 1 includes "red 7 design", "blue 7 design", "BAR design", "cherry design", "replay design", "bell 1 design", "bell 2 design", "watermelon design". , "Proper design" and "regular design" as described above, among which "red 7 design", "blue 7 design" and "BAR design" are more prominent than other designs. The pattern is easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification means the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbols, including the state where the reels are rotating and the reels are stopped. These symbols are easy to stop and aim at so as to be stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs the stop operation because of the color and the size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push). Further, as can be seen from FIG. 46, the "right design" and the "right design" can also be read as "justice" in the form of a circular shape formed by the two designs "the right design" and the "right design". As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged vertically adjacent to each other, and only one reel is arranged.

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols by themselves (one symbol alone does not correspond to the winning combination), but when a predetermined combination is obtained, the combination becomes a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is provided. In the following, a description will be given of combinations of symbols that are allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG.

[10-1. Combination of winning role and design]
Here, a winning combination (including a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 to 53. FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination. The lottery table (also referred to as a hit value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance. Although details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery of a winning combination, and such a lottery is also called “internal lottery”.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination, which are stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. In FIG. 50, a blank column in the table means that the condition device with the corresponding condition device number is inactive (OFF), and “1” in the table indicates the corresponding condition device number. Means that the set condition device is activated (ON). FIGS. 51 to 53 are diagrams (1 to 3) showing combinations of symbols and payout numbers of medals corresponding to each condition device, which are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  It is assumed that the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described below has an AT (Assist Time) function using a small pressing order as an example of a function of the gaming machine. The pressing order small combination corresponds to the winning combination of “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49, and when these winning combinations are won, the bell symbols can be displayed. Call. In a gaming machine having an AT function, an AT hit is determined by a lottery (AT lottery) performed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110), and if the AT is won as a result of the determination, the AT game is executed. In the AT game, the instruction is performed in accordance with the instruction by instructing or notifying an appropriate pushing order that can be expected to pay out the most medals, mainly in the case where the pushing order small combination is selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery of the winning combination. The player who has performed the reel stop operation can acquire many medals. On the other hand, during a game period other than the AT game (non-AT), by not teaching or notifying the above-mentioned pressing order, it is possible to make the medal acquisition in an appropriate pressing order uncertain, and to determine the medal in each game state. Thus, a difference can be brought between the expected number of medals obtained and the consumption pace of medals. Such an AT function is an example of an instruction function provided in the slot machine 1, and its detailed processing will be described later.

  Further, regarding the pressing order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the pressing order (stopping order of the reel 301) is "left-middle-right", "left-center-right". There are six types: right-middle, middle-left-right, middle-right-left, right-left-middle, and right-middle-left. In the following description, the respective pressing orders are referred to as “forward pressing”, “pinch pressing”, “middle forward pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse pinching pressing”, and “reverse pressing”, respectively. Note that, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the same reel stop control is performed regardless of whether the stop operation is performed in the “middle forward push” or the “middle reverse push”. Without distinguishing these two pressing orders, they may be simply referred to as “middle pressing”. In this case, there is practically a five-push order.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as a stop operation procedure for stopping the reel 301, a game in which the pushing order is not taught such as a period during which the AT game is not performed (non-AT). It is assumed that "left push (" forward push "or" pinch push ")" in which the left reel 301a is stopped first (that is, a stop operation is first performed on the reel stop button 211a) is recommended. If a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed by stopping the right reel 301c first or the like, a disadvantageous measure for the player such as a temporary stop of the AT lottery may be performed.

  In such a slot machine 1, for example, when the winning combination is the winning combination corresponding to the small pressing order (in this example, the pressing order bell), the reel stop button 211 (individually the reel stop button 211a, The appearance of the stop appearance differs depending on the pressing order of 211b, 211c). Such a difference in stop appearance can be realized, for example, as follows. In other words, as the winning combination corresponding to the “push order bell”, a plurality of types of winning combinations (specifically, “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIGS. When the winning combination is “AT1”, a forward push (left, middle, right) is equivalent to the “appropriate pushing order”) is prepared, and a different combination is used for each winning combination selected by the internal lottery. The operation of a plurality of types of condition devices (corresponding to the accessories shown in FIG. 50) is permitted. Then, at this time, according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211, the symbol pull-in control when stopping the reel 301 is performed under a different priority control (for example, “number of sheets priority control” or “symbol combination number priority control”). By being set to be executed, the mode of the stop appearance can be made different based on the pressing order, and as a result, the payout number can be made different.

  Here, the "number priority control" means that when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, the condition device that gives the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is given priority, and among the "drawable symbols" Means that the symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is drawn on the activated line and stopped. In addition, the “symbol combination number priority control” means that, when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted, the condition device in which the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by the “retractable symbols” is the highest is given priority. This refers to pull-in control in which a symbol corresponding to the condition device is drawn onto an active line and stopped.

  Specifically, for example, when “AT1” in which the forward pressing is set to “appropriate pressing order” is selected as a winning combination, the condition devices that are permitted to operate are: accessory 1, accessory 4, accessory 6, accessory 7, They are accessory 9, accessory 12, accessory 14, accessory 15, and accessory 17 (see FIG. 50). Here, when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is “appropriate pressing order (left, middle, right)”, the pull-in control by the above “number priority control” is performed, and “inappropriate pressing order” is performed. ", It is determined that the pull-in control by the" symbol combination number priority control "is performed. At this time, in the case of the “appropriate pressing order”, the condition device (small item 17) of the nine-prize combination with the largest payout number at the time of winning is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the nine-prize combination is drawn on the activated line. On the other hand, in the case of “inappropriate pressing order”, the condition device of one piece (small article 9, small article 12, small article 14, small article 15) or the condition of two piece combination, in which the number of design combinations that can be displayed is larger than that of the small article 17 The device (small item 1, small item 4, small item 6, small item 7) is given priority, and the symbol combination of one or two pieces is drawn on the activated line. Thus, when "AT1" is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in the "appropriate pushing order", nine reels are awarded, while the reels are placed in the "inappropriate pushing order". When 301 is stopped, it is possible to win a winning combination (one winning combination, two winning combinations) having a smaller number of payouts than nine winning combinations.

  Note that the symbols that can be drawn on the activated line when the reel 301 stops are limited based on the position of the reel 301 at the time of performing the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (specifically, for example, a maximum of four frames). Depending on the timing of this stop operation (push timing), a retractable symbol and a non-retractable symbol are generated. As a result, the appearance of the stop appearance differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also set in advance.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, when the winning combination associated with the “appropriate pressing order” is won, the operation of a plurality of condition devices is allowed, and the different priority control regarding the drawing control of the symbol on the reel 301 is performed. Is set, when the game based on the “appropriate pressing order” is performed, the advantage (for example, the comparison) is more advantageous for the player than when the game based on the “incorrect pressing order” is performed. It is possible to stop at a stop roll at which a number of medals can be paid out).

  Although not illustrated in FIGS. 49 to 53, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, a pressing order replay as another pressing order small combination. Hereinafter, such a pressing order replay will be briefly described. Strictly speaking, the replay combination is not "small win" because the gaming value is not paid out even if the corresponding symbol combination stops on the activated line, but is included in "push order small win" for convenience. . Also, since the pressing order replay is one of the replaying roles, no matter what pressing order or pressing position is stopped at the time of winning, the symbol combination of any replaying role must be on the activated line. At the same time, and the bonus of the replay is still given.

  When the push order replay is used in the slot machine 1, a plurality of winning combinations of the push order replay are prepared according to the number of the push orders, as in the case of the above-described push order bell. A combination of a plurality of condition devices that are allowed to operate is prepared. By setting a priority control such that a “specific symbol combination” is stopped when a stop operation is performed in a “specific pressing order” for a combination of the plurality of condition devices, A special symbol combination can be realized when a stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "", and the appearance of the "specific symbol combination" allows the symbol display window 401 to be displayed. Can be made a characteristic mode. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined pressing order replay is won, only when a stop operation is performed in a “specific pressing order” of reverse pressing, “blue 7” is displayed on a predetermined line in the symbol display window 401. "Specific symbol combination" in which "symbol matching" is displayed can be stopped.

  As an example of such a use method of the push order replay, when the “specific symbol combination (blue 7 symbols are aligned in the symbol display window 401)” appears, a gaming privilege other than the payout of gaming value is provided. (There is no payout of gaming value because it is a replay role). The provision of the game privilege specifically includes, for example, adding the number of AT games, shifting to an advantageous state, and the like. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned gaming privilege is awarded by winning in the pushing order replay, the "specific pushing order" is instructed based on the instructing function, whereby the "specific symbol" is designated. The player can be notified of a game method in which the "combination" can be stopped, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. If the above-mentioned gaming privilege is not given at the time of winning the push order replay, the stop operation is not performed in the “specific push order” (for example, a stop method other than the “specific push order” is instructed. Is preferred.

  The outline of the small push order in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment has been described above. In the following description, an AT game using the above-described small push order is an example of a special game advantageous to the player. However, a special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is an AT game. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be another advantageous game state (for example, a bonus game, an ART game, an RT game, or the like). Also, the AT function is not limited to the AT function using the pressing order small combination. For example, the pressing position small combination (the privilege given based on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is changed) It may be an AT function or the like that utilizes the acquired role.

[10-1-1. Kind of winning role]
First, the lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared according to the gaming state. FIG. 49 shows a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state as examples of the gaming state in the slot machine 1. Here, the general state is a normal gaming state in which the bonus game is not being performed and the bonus flag is not established. The bonus internal state is a gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, two types of BBs to be described later) is won by an internal lottery, and the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, two types of BBs described later) is won by an internal lottery and the game shifts based on a display of a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus. In FIG. 49, two types of BBs (second type special characters) are shown as bonuses. However, other types of bonuses that can be mounted on the slot machine 1 may be so-called BB bonuses and RBs. A bonus, a single bonus (SB), or the like may be provided. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a game state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each game state is omitted because it is the same as that of a general game machine.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a winning probability (or number) for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, and is prepared in advance for each gaming state. The internal lottery is performed using the selected lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the activated line, as described below. Reel stop processing is performed. Then, when any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In paying out medals based on a winning combination, the payout number of medals may be set to be different depending on the gaming state or the number of medals to be played (specified number). At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table corresponding to the specified number.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, one condition device and one reel control pattern correspond one-to-one. Therefore, when it is desired to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, In some cases, a plurality of conditions may be satisfied for one winning combination (see FIG. 50 described later). By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of stop appearances (symbol combinations displayed on the activated lines) for one winning combination.

  The winning combination shown in FIG. 49 can be broadly classified into a bonus combination, a small combination, or a replay combination (re-playing combination). Here, “outside” is not strictly a winning combination. However, similarly to the case where the result of the internal lottery relating to the winning combination is each winning combination shown in FIG. 49, when the result of the internal lottery relating to the winning combination is “missing”, based on the result ( In other words, since the subsequent internal processing is set (as if the winning combination of “losing” has been won), the following description may include “losing” as a winning combination for convenience.

  To briefly explain each of them, the “bonus role” is a role that triggers execution of the bonus game, and specifically, “two types of BB” corresponds to the bonus role. The “replay combination (replay combination)” is a combination that enables the next game to be executed without reinserting medals (replay combination). Specifically, “replay” corresponds to the replay combination. “Small role” is a role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning the prize, and specifically, “Push order bell”, “Push order bell regardless”, “Weak watermelon”, “Strong watermelon”, “Weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance eyes”, “strong chance eyes”, and “strongest eyes” correspond to small roles. As described above, the winning combinations “AT1” to “AT10” shown in FIG. 49 may be collectively referred to as “push order bell”. In FIG. 49, the number of payouts of the pushing order bell is described in a plurality of ways because the payout number may vary depending on the stop order and the stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, the winning combinations “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are bells that can always stop the bell symbol regardless of the pushing order, and therefore may be collectively referred to as “Bell in any order”. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

  Further, "missing" means that no winning combination has been selected as a result of the internal lottery relating to the winning combination. In the case of "losing", the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the state of establishment of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state). On the other hand, in the case of “losing” in the bonus internal state, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may stop. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the lottery table as shown in FIG. 49 is used, the above-mentioned situation (“loss” in the bonus internal state) is set so as to rarely occur (1). / 65535) In addition, since the winning probability of “2 types of BB” which is a bonus combination is extremely low (1/65535), there is a very small chance that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and the bonus game is executed. Low, most gaming states are controlled to a general state or bonus internal state.

  According to FIG. 49, in the general state, there is a possibility that “out” is selected (15453/65535), but in the bonus internal state and the bonus state, there is almost no possibility that “out” is selected. (Each 1/65535). Further, in the bonus state, the winning probability of the bell in the pushing order is set to be much lower than in other game states (1/65535), and almost no winning is achieved. It is set high (32059/65535). Nine pages are dispensed regardless of the order in which the bells are pushed, whereas two or less pages are not dispensed if the order of the bells is improper. Therefore, by performing the allocation of the numbers in this manner, when the game is controlled to the bonus state (bonus game), the number of medals held by the player can be increased without substantially reducing the number of medals.

  Also, even if the result of the internal lottery is not "losing" but one of the winning combinations (bonus role, replay role, small role) is won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning role executes the pull-in control described later. A stop operation (an operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) at an appropriate timing (push position) so as to stop within the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective lines 623a and 623b) within a possible range. Otherwise, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the activated line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if a combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the activated line even if one of the winning combinations is won, the same as when "losing" is selected will be described later. In step S6 of FIG. 54, it is determined that the game result is lost. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when a game result is lost despite winning a certain winning combination, the symbol combination of “losing” is not displayed at random, but the winning combination is determined. A predetermined symbol combination (stop appearance) indicating that the winning based on the winning combination has been eliminated and zero is controlled to be displayed in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stop appearance) displayed at the time of such a loss is hereinafter referred to as “zero (or zero)”.

  In the description of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the expression “bell zero (bell zero)” is used for “push order bells (AT1 to AT10)”. Bell zeroing means that when the bell is pressed, the stop sequence is performed in an improper pressing order when the pressing order is determined. This means that another symbol combination in which the bell combination is eliminated is displayed without stopping the symbol combination of the bell combination for which the payout is obtained. In the case of such a bell zero, the bell zero is displayed as a stop roll, and a payout (including no payout) smaller than the original bell alignment is performed. More specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device numbers 1 to 32 in FIG. 51 is a symbol combination with no bell, and at this time, the payout number of one or two is set. As described above, the “zero zero” is different from the “zero zero” at the time of the loss.

  In addition, in the description of the present embodiment, apart from the above “zero (zero)”, the expression “separate (separate)” may be used. The term “discrete (discrete eyes)” is not “consistent eyes” in which a player can easily recognize the characteristics of discontinuity points, but rather stop appearances in which seemingly disjointed symbols are combined (so-called “disjoint eyes”). "Rose eyes"). In other words, the "split eye" is one of the divisions related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even if the spatter eye is not a loss, a medal may be paid out.

[10-1-2. Winning form of winning role]
The winning combination illustrated in FIG. 49 is a winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity. When the sole combination is won, the reel stop control is performed later based on the activation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1, a winning combination (simultaneous winning combination) in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected may be prepared. Such simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning combinations are selected at the same time in one lottery opportunity, for example, a case where a plurality of small roles (for example, a plurality of bell roles) are simultaneously selected, The bonus role and the small role may be selected at the same time.

  When the simultaneous winning combination is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous activation of the condition devices based on the respective winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. In the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority order (for example, a priority order such as "replay> small win> bonus" or "replay> bonus> small win") , The reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, and the payout of the privilege according to the winning combination is performed. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of the small winning combinations, the method of setting the activated lines, and the like, control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combinations can be won together. Is paid out in accordance with the winning combination of. In any case, the small role is a “non-carry-over role” that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning state of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game is not carried over after the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the role is selected, the payout of the medal according to the small role is not performed for the small role that could not win in the winning game.

  Further, when the bonus combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, the combination selected in such a combination is also called a duplicate combination. In the case where the bonus combination and the small combination are simultaneously won, similarly to the case of the simultaneous combination of the small combinations, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations are simultaneously operated and the predetermined priority (for example, “re-set”). Reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted in accordance with the priority order such as “game> small combination> bonus” or “re-game> bonus> small combination”, and according to the winning combination. The award is paid out. However, as for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination state of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. "Carryover role". Specifically, the two kinds of BBs are “carry-over role”. The replay role and the small role (for example, the bell role) are “non-carryover roles”. As described above, even when the “carryover combination” and the “non-carryover combination” are simultaneously won due to the winning of the overlapping combination, which symbol combination is permitted to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. Then, if the symbol combination corresponding to the "carryover combination" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the "carryover combination" is carried over to the next game and thereafter. However, in such a “next game”, when another small role is won, both the “carryover role” and “another small role” are in a winning state. In this case, Since they are selected at mutually different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to overlapping roles.

  In the case of the simultaneous winning, which symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed with higher priority on the activated line is determined based on the setting of the priority in the reel stop processing.

  In the following, the winning combinations roughly classified above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

[10-1-3. Bonus role]
The winning combination “2 types BB” shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination relating to the 2nd type special bonus. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device “BB1” is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a bonus is awarded based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “BB1” (all “red 7”) is displayed on the activated line, so that a two-type BB bonus game (BB game) is executed. This bonus game is a game in which a player is provided with an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In the present embodiment, for example, when the specified number of games is two, the bonus state shown in FIG. The bonus game is advanced using the drawn lottery table. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of bonus games exceeds a specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or when the total number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds a specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game ends, the gaming state shifts from the bonus state to the general state.

  Here, the symbol combination corresponding to “2 types BB” (“7 red”) is in an array that cannot necessarily be drawn on the activated line depending on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 (FIG. 46). However, “2 types BB” is a carryover that can carry over the winning flag, and even if “7”, which is the corresponding symbol combination in the winning game, is not displayed (not aligned), the next game and the subsequent games are executed. Until the winning state is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped, the game is performed as a bonus internal state.

  Then, when the internal lottery is controlled and the result of the internal lottery results in the winning of the replay combination or the small combination, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority order is “replay (replay combination)> small combination> bonus”. At this time, even if the state of establishment of two kinds of BB is maintained as the bonus internal state, two kinds of BB are maintained. The opportunity to display the symbol combination is limited to a case where neither the replay combination nor the small combination is won in the internal lottery (that is, a loss). However, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the rate of deviation in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state is set to be extremely small (1/65535). Therefore, in most games, there is no opportunity to display the two BB symbol combinations, and the game state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state.

[10-1-4. Replay role]
The winning combination “Replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of a replay (replaying game). When the replay combination is won, the condition device for replay (see FIG. 50, replay 1) is activated, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed on the activated line (one of the lines 623a and 623b). Then, based on this, a reel stop process described later (step S5 in FIG. 54) is performed. In the slot machine 1, at the time of winning the replay, by controlling so that the symbol combination of the replay combination is always displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is complete, and as a result, as a benefit of the replay combination In the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting a medal again or performing a betting operation (an operation for inserting a stored medal), and a replay of executing the same game as the previous game again becomes possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  The feature of the gaming privilege of this replay game is that, instead of paying out medals, it is not necessary to consume new medals (new medals) in the next game. Further, since the replay is a winning combination without paying out medals, even if the winning frequency increases, for example, by increasing the winning probability, there is little disadvantage to the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, the probability of winning in the normal state (general state) is approximately once every 6 to 7 times. This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain range. In other words, the winning combination called replay can have a role of suppressing excessive consumption of medals in the progress of the game.

  Further, the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are arranged evenly on each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the symbols constituting the combination of the replay combination are also used for the replay combination). By changing the number of other symbols (symbols that do not constitute the combination mode of the symbol corresponding to the replay role) arranged between the symbols constituting the corresponding symbol combination mode from one to a maximum of four symbols, The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination can be arranged without the need for eye contact. In such a case, if the priority of the winning combination to be displayed is “replay (replay combination)> small combination> bonus”, the condition device of the replay combination and other combinations (small combination and bonus combination) are temporarily set. Even if the condition device is operated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to other combinations is not stopped and displayed.

[10-1-5. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. This bell is a winning prize that can be expected to pay out medals at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, several types of bell roles are prepared, and an example thereof will be specifically described below.

[10-1-5-1. No matter the order of the bell
First, a description will be given of a pressing order irrelevant bell (common bell) in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of payout medals based on the winning) at the time of winning does not change depending on the pressing order of the reel 301.

  The specific winning combinations of the “bell in any order of pressing” shown in FIG. 49 are “bell 1” and “bell 2” shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, when “Bell 1” is selected as a winning combination, the condition device of the accessory 17 is activated, and when “Bell 2” is selected as a winning combination, the accessory 17 and the accessory 18 are selected. The condition device operates. Here, the condition device for the small articles 17 and the small articles 18 is configured such that any of the corresponding symbol combinations can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the pushing order and the pushing timing of the reels (see FIG. 51 and the like). . Therefore, when such a condition device is activated, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop sequence and the stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, and the combination of the bell combination is won, and the winning combination is achieved. Payout (9) according to is given as a privilege.

  Referring to FIG. 49, in the general state and the bonus internal state, the winning probability of “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” is relatively low, and can be included in “Low winning combination (rare combination)” described later. On the other hand, in the bonus state, the player wins "Bell 1" or "Bell 2" with a probability of about 50%, and thus becomes one of the main winning combinations in the bonus game.

  It should be noted that “Bell 1” and “Bell 2” are distinguished from each other in strength according to the degree of expectation for the privilege that can be given at the time of each winning. The privilege may be, for example, an expectation degree regarding the AT (eg, an AT winning or an AT game winning probability), or an expectation degree regarding a transition between gaming states such as a low-probability state or a high-probability state. Specifically, “Bell 2” having a lower winning probability is defined as a strong bell, and “Bell 1” having a higher winning probability than “Bell 2” is defined as a weak bell.

[10-1-5-2. Push order bell]
Next, a description will be given of a pushing order bell in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of payout medals based on the winning) at the time of winning can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

  The winning combinations "AT1" to "AT10" shown in FIG. 49 are the winning combinations of the pushing order bell which are prepared mainly for surely giving the player a privilege in the AT game. Each of “AT1” to “AT10” is associated with one of the five proper pressing orders (see FIG. 50).

  In FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10” are equalized, and when they are added together, the winning probability of “push order bell” becomes 32000/65535, but the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10” are obtained. The respective winning probabilities may be arbitrarily allocated under the condition satisfying the sum. In this way, the winning probabilities can be evenly distributed for the five appropriate pushing orders (forward pushing, pinching pushing, middle pushing, reverse pushing, reverse pinching pushing) in the “push order bell” (each winning probability of the 5-choice bell). Can be made equal), and it is possible to make it difficult to select a specific pressing order in an appropriate pressing order. Specifically, for example, the winning probability of “AT1” to “AT4” in which the left reel 301a is selected as the first stop reel as the appropriate pushing order is 2000/65535, and the appropriate pushing order is other than the left reel 301a (medium). If the respective winning probabilities of “AT5” to “AT10” in which the reel 301b or the right reel 301c) is selected as the first stop reel are 4000/65535, the left reel 301a is set as the first stop reel in an appropriate push order. The winning ratio of the forward bell can be markedly lower than the winning ratio of the pushing bell with the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c as the first stop reel in an appropriate pushing order. In such a case, in the base game in which it is recommended that the left reel 301a be stopped for the first time, it is possible to suppress the ratio of winning in the pushing order bell, and to reduce the payout rate in the base game by the amount of the AT game or the like. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in special games.

  As shown in FIG. 50, when “AT1” to “AT10” are selected as the winning combination, a plurality of condition devices out of the small items 1 to 16, the condition device of the small item 17, and the small items 24 to 26 Of the condition devices 0 to 2 are simultaneously operated. The symbol combinations and the like corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. In addition, the accessory 1 to the accessory 16 are condition devices corresponding to the symbol combination of “Bell Zero” (one or two payouts), and the accessory 17 is the symbol combination of “Bell Role” (9 pieces). This is a condition device corresponding to (payout). In addition, the accessories 24 to 26 are originally condition devices relating to the weak chance and the strong opportunity described later, and when the push order bell is won, even if they are activated, their priorities are higher than those of other activated condition devices. Is suppressed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small items 24 to 26 is not actually stopped.

  Then, for the plurality of condition devices that operate simultaneously, different priority controls are set for the drawing control of the symbols based on the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211 (individually, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) in the stop operation of the player. Thus, it is possible to display different stop numbers depending on the proper pressing order and the incorrect pressing order (incorrect pressing order). In other words, while the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is being performed in a proper pressing order corresponding to the winning combination (for example, in the case of AT1, the small item 17) is controlled based on the above-described “number priority control”. If the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and the stop operation is performed in the proper pressing order until the end, the symbol combination of the bell combination is stopped on the activated line and nine medal payouts can be given as a privilege. it can. On the other hand, at the stage where the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is performed in an inappropriate pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device other than the accessory 17 is stopped based on the “symbol combination number priority control” described above. Thus, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 17 is prevented from being stopped on the activated line, the symbol combination without the bell is stopped on the activated line, and the privilege (1 or 2) (Medal payout).

  According to FIG. 50, “AT1” and “AT2” are the winning combinations of the small pressing order in which the forward pressing is performed in an appropriate pressing order, and “AT3” and “AT4” are the pressing orders in the proper pressing order. "AT5" and "AT6" are the winning combinations of the pushing order in which the middle pressing is the proper pushing order, and "AT7" and "AT8" are the reverse pushing. Are the winning combinations of the small pressing order of the pushing order, and “AT9” and “AT10” are the winning combinations of the small pressing order of the pushing order in which the reverse pinching is the proper pushing order. Therefore, when FIG. 50 is used, the “push order bell” in the present embodiment is a so-called “5” in which the proper push order is divided into five types (forward push, pinch push, middle push, reverse push, reverse push). Choice bell ". Naturally, such an appropriate pressing order can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the stage of designing the gaming machine. For example, even if a three-choice bell based on only the first stop reel is used, Alternatively, a six-choice bell based on the first stop reel and the second stop reel may be used.

  As described above, the pressing order bells “AT1” to “AT10” are the winning combinations in which nine medals can be paid out as if the bell were awarded only when the stop operation was performed in an appropriate pressing order. Yes, if the stop operation is performed in an improper pressing order, the winning combination is given as "zero zero" and a privilege (one or two medal payouts) smaller than that at the time of winning the bell combination is given. .

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the non-AT state, which is not the AT state, it is recommended to push left (forward push or pinch push). Therefore, when the game is performed according to the recommended procedure in the non-AT state, the player wins a push order bell (specifically, AT5 to AT10) in which a proper push order other than the left push (forward push or pinch push) is performed. You can't win the Bell role. However, in the AT state, an appropriate pressing order is taught, and a stop operation according to the teaching content is permitted, so that it is possible to easily win the bell combination when the pressing order bell is won. Note that, when the player performs a stop operation different from the recommended procedure and unfairly obtains medals during non-AT, measures such as temporarily stopping the AT lottery are performed so that the entire medal payout is performed. May be adjusted appropriately.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific pressing order as described above. For example, when a specific pressing order is not set as the recommended procedure, except when instructed by an instruction function such as during AT, the player may perform a stop operation in an arbitrary pressing order, and in such a case, Since there is no recommended procedure, there is no need to make adjustments (measures such as temporary suspension of the AT lottery) in the above-described case where a medal is unfairly obtained by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure. Become. If a specific pressing order is not set as the recommended procedure, it is desirable to make the winning probability for each pressing order in the small pressing order the same. By making the winning probability the same for each pressing order, the expected value of the payout can be equalized regardless of which pressing order the game is played, so that the player can enjoy the game in the desired pressing order with confidence. it can.

[10-1-6. Cherry role]
Next, the cherry winning combination as a winning combination will be described. This Cherry role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (two) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, two types of cherry roles, weak cherry and strong cherry, are provided. The weak cherry and the strong cherry are provided with a difference between the strength and weakness mainly in the degree of expectation regarding the AT (AT winning, the winning probability of the AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description of the AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak cherry" is won, the condition devices for the small items 19 and 20 are activated, and when the "strong cherry" is won, the condition devices for the small items 19 to 21 are activated (each condition device). (See FIG. 52 for the symbol combination corresponding to.) The detailed description of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected will be omitted, but if the symbol combination based on the small articles 19 and 20 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the weak cherry or the strong cherry is selected. It is known that one of the cherries has been won, and when the symbol combination based on the accessory 21 is stopped and displayed on the pay line, it is known that the strong cherry has been won.

[10-1-7. Watermelon role]
Next, a watermelon combination as a winning combination will be described. This watermelon combination is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (5 coins) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, two types of watermelon combinations, a weak watermelon and a strong watermelon, are provided. The weak watermelon and the strong watermelon are provided with a difference in strength mainly depending on the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning, winning probability of AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description of AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak watermelon" is won, the condition device for the accessory 22 is activated, and when the "strong watermelon" is won, the condition devices for the accessory 22 and the accessory 23 are activated (corresponding to each condition device). See FIG. 53 for symbol combinations and the like. The detailed description of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected will be omitted, but when the symbol combination based on the accessory 22 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, either the weak watermelon or the strong watermelon is displayed. It is known that the crab has won, and when the symbol combination based on the accessory 23 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, it is known that the strong watermelon has been won. Supplementally, when the weak watermelon is won, there is a possibility that the watermelon symbols will be aligned on the rising line or the downward line, and when the strong watermelon is won, there is a possibility that the watermelon symbols will be stopped on the middle line. is there.

[10-1-8. Chance]
Next, the chance combination as a winning combination will be described. This chance is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (one piece) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, two types of chance combinations, a weak opportunity and a strong opportunity, are provided. The weak chances and the strong chances are provided with a difference in strength mainly depending on the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning, winning probability regarding AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the description regarding AT).

  As shown in FIG. 50, the condition device for the accessory 24 is activated when the "weak chance" is won, and the condition device for the accessory 25 and the accessory 26 is activated when the "strong chance" is won (each condition device is activated). See FIG. 53 for the corresponding symbol combinations. A detailed description of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected will be omitted, but if the symbol combination based on the accessory 24 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the player has won the weak chance. When the symbol combination based on the accessory 25 and the accessory 26 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, it is understood that the winning has been made on the strong chance.

[10-1-9. Strongest]
Next, the strongest winning combination will be described. The strongest is a winning combination in which a medal can be paid out (one piece) at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 50, at the time of winning the “strongest”, the condition device of the accessory 27 operates. The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 27 cannot be stopped unless the reel stop button 211 is operated at an appropriate push timing in the arrangement of the constituent symbols, but the strongest is achieved by the operation of the appropriate push timing. When a prize is won, a "correct" symbol is displayed on the middle line.

  The strongest winning probability is set to an extremely low probability of 1/65535 (see FIG. 49) in any gaming state, and can be positioned as a so-called premium combination. At the time of winning such a premium role, a freeze control may be added at the time of controlling the rotation of the reel 301, so that the player can easily understand that the special winning role has been won. , Can enhance the interest of the player.

  The above is the combination of the winning combinations and the symbols corresponding to the winning combinations in the slot machine 1.

  Note that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and the combinations of the symbols described above. Further, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided in addition to the above symbols. Then, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the above-mentioned winning combinations are not necessarily limited to providing all of them, and a necessary type of winning combinations may be appropriately selected.

  For example, a double winning of a bonus combination and a small combination (or a replay combination) may be set. Which symbol combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line when such an overlapping combination is won is controlled by reel stop processing.

  In addition, instead of the pushing order small combination prepared for the AT game, a pushing position small combination may be prepared. Although a detailed description is omitted, the small pressing position is defined as a case where the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at a proper stop timing (push position) and a case where the stop operation is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. , Small winning combinations showing different winning modes. In the case where such a small push position is mounted, in the AT game, by performing a teaching or notification so that the player can easily recognize an appropriate push position, the winning of the small push position is achieved. Thus, the player can easily win the corresponding role, and it is possible to obtain many medals.

  In addition, the player of the slot machine 1 determines the lottery probability of the winning combination (FIG. 47), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination and the number of payouts (FIGS. 51 to 53), the arrangement of the symbols (FIG. 46), and the like. In some cases, it is possible to find a game method that can expect the maximum payout in a situation where the winning combination selected by the internal lottery cannot be known. Hereinafter, such a game method is temporarily referred to as a “maximum efficiency hitting method”. When playing a game with the maximum efficiency batting method, depending on the stop position of the reel, it is difficult to draw the symbol combination with the largest payout number corresponding to the winning combination onto the activated line (watermelon role, cherry role) , Taking into account the winning probability and the number of payouts, any one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed at a specific timing such that the expected payout is the maximum payout, and the game is stopped. By pressing the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol mode, symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn in, and a large number of payouts can be obtained. In other words, the maximum efficiency batting method can be said to be a game method that minimizes the loss of the winning combination.

[11. Game processing]
Next, a flow of a game process in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 and the like).

  FIG. 54 shows a general procedure of one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initialization for preparing for a game start is executed. In particular, when starting up the power supply, the connection and operation status of the above-described various devices are checked, and the presence or absence of backup data is checked. Execute If there is no backup data, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or one-insertion button 205) when there is already stored medals. Then, the operation of the starting lever 210 is awaited. That is, the BET process is executed until the number of bets for one game is determined and the start lever 210 can be operated. In the case where the slot machine 1 is a dedicated three-slot machine capable of executing a game by inserting three medals, the single-insert button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which is in the operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Execute. This internal lottery process is performed at a stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c whose rotation starts in the subsequent step S4 are in a stopped state (being stopped by a player's stop operation). Is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of the game is a lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to one of the winning combinations, when the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is displayed on the activated line. It is permissible to stop.

  Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process relating to an AT instruction function (so-called AT navigation). In the instruction function process, not only the winning of the AT game and its start, etc. are determined, but also a sign effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the AT game is started, the transition to the sign game in which the sign effect is executed. Are determined, and if an AT game is being performed, an AT navigation for instructing a player on a pressing order and the like is executed. Details of the instruction function process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57 and the like.

  In the instruction function processing of the present example, central control relating to the AT function including the precursor of the AT game (lottery of AT winning, determination of the number of AT games, execution of the AT game, transition of the game state, display of the instruction function, etc.) Are all managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, it is assumed that the sub-board 510 manages auxiliary control (such as navigation display on the image display body 500) related to the AT function. Even in such a case, the sub-board 510 displays the navigation on the image display body 500 or the like. The display contents of the display are limited to those according to the result of the determination of the instruction function by the main board 409 (contents different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display content of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display content of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 or the like are one-to-one. The correspondence is not limited to one, and may be one-to-n (a plurality of patterns). In other words, when any instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub-board 510 executes the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display. The specific display mode of the navigation display need not be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of types of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 or the main board 409 may specify which display mode the navigation display is to be performed. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all processes related to the instruction function process.

  In the instruction function process of step S31 shown in the present example, the processing content related to the instruction function of the AT is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function process be completed before the reel rotation process of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3 is executed. In this reel rotation processing, when the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are validated. Then, an operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c operation by the player is received, and the operation enable lamp is turned off in the order of the reception, and the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c is stopped. Execute

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state, the winning combination symbols are aligned on the "active line" (if any of the winning combinations corresponds to the winning combination). A determination process for determining a winning combination is performed based on whether the combination mode is displayed). Specifically, by comparing “display contents displayed on the activated line (combination of symbols)” with “symbol combinations allowed to stop on the activated line corresponding to the winning combination” Judge the winning combination. In addition, the determination process of step S6 may be performed based on only the “display content displayed on the activated line (combination of symbols)”. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the line (the downward-sloping line 623a) displaying “Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol” illustrated in FIG. 47 and “BAR symbol-Replay symbol-Definition” The two lines of the line on which the symbol is displayed (the line 623b rising to the right) are defined as “effective lines”.

  In step S7, a medal payout process is executed based on the contents of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination accompanied by a change in the game state, such as two kinds of BBs, the change of the game state (change of the game state shown in FIG. 49) and the re-game And the like to give various game benefits.

  The above is the basic processing procedure of one game of the slot machine 1. Here, Steps S2 (BET processing) to Step S4 (reel rotation processing) are performed by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player as internal processes. Therefore, these processes (Step S2, Step S3, Step S31, Step S4) are collectively called a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described specifically.

[11-1. Startup process]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each processing performed in the starting processing.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the insertion of a medal or the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or medal insertion, the determination at Step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S102. This determination is made for the insertion of medals corresponding to the MAX bet (that is, insertion of three or more medals in the case of a game with the specified number of three, and insertion of two or more medals in the case of the game with the specified number of two) It is assumed that the condition is satisfied only when there is an operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 to be a MAX bet.

  In the next step S102, the number of bets (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and an effective line lamp corresponding to the number of bets is turned on. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number is three, two lines, a right-up line 623b and a right-down line 623a, become effective lines and indicate this. Turn on the effective line lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 has been validated, and in this case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 has been accepted. If the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled in the previous step S103 and the operation of the starting lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S105.

  If the player does not perform a bet operation or insert a medal in step S101 or does not reach the MAX bet, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S104. In this case, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S101 and repeats the subsequent processing.

  Further, in the replay game, it is not necessary to newly bet a medal. This means that when a MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in a replay game process described later, the MAX bet state is automatically set. Thus, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, and a random number is extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process moves to the next step S107. The timing of extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the operation of the starting lever 210, or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or the like during the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

  In step S107, it is determined whether the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for reel) is 0 or not. Here, the reincarnation release counter (for reel) is one of the variable data managed by the main board 409, and is stored in the RAM 1114. Details thereof will be described later in [11-8] (particularly, step S1003 in FIG. 137). Also, the reincarnation storage counter referred to in the subsequent step S108 is managed by the main board 409 and is held in the RAM 1114. Details thereof will be described later in [11-8], step S1002 in FIG. 137, and the like.

  The relationship between the rebirth release counter (for reels) and the rebirth storage counter will be briefly described. In the stacking zone of the rebirth effect, information on the game is stored in the rebirth storage counter for each unit game (one game) and rebirth. The count value of the ejection counter (for reel) is incremented by "1" (see steps S1002 to S1003 in FIG. 137). Therefore, after passing through the stacking zone over a plurality of games, a plurality of “information about the game” is stored in the reincarnation memory counter, and the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for reels) is stored in a plurality of games in the stacking zone. The number is recorded.

  If it is determined in step S107 that the counter value of the rebirth release counter (for reel) is 0 (YES in step S107), a flag process in step S111 is performed. If it is determined in step S107 that the counter value is not 0 (NO in step S107), in order to execute the pseudo game in the release game of the reincarnation effect, the processing of steps S108 to S110 is performed by a reincarnation release counter (for a reel). After repeating the number of times indicated by the counter value in ()), the flag processing in step S111 is performed.

  In steps S108 to S110, the information for the unit game (one game) is extracted from the information on the game stored in the reincarnation storage counter (step S108), and the extracted information (for example, flag information of the winning combination) , The pseudo game information is set (step S109), and the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for reel) is decremented by "1" (step S110). The pseudo game information is information necessary for determining the operation mode of the reel 301 in the pseudo game, and is held in, for example, the RAM 1114. Note that the processing in steps S107 to S110 may be performed after the flag processing in step S111.

  Here, a pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the slot machine 1, the game value is set as a game different from a game (also referred to as a main game to distinguish it from a pseudo game) performed by multiplying a game value (for example, a specified number of medals) for each unit game. A pseudo game (pseudo game) by reel operation (rotation and stop of the reel 301) similar to the main game can be executed without consumption. The operation of the reel 301 in the pseudo game is controlled by the main board 409, as in the main game. When a predetermined condition for performing a pseudo game is satisfied, the main board 409 temporarily adds a freeze control to the rotation control of the reel 301 to temporarily suspend the reel operation for the main game. The reel operation of the pseudo game is realized by controlling the operation content of the reel 301 based on the data prepared for the game (for example, the pseudo game information in step S109). Therefore, the pseudo game is an example of an effect involving freeze control (freeze effect).

  Here, the pseudo game in the slot machine is generally to stop the reels 301 (individually the reels 301a to 301c) by operating stop buttons (for example, reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). The pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, even if it is not possible to receive a stop operation for the stop button, the rotation and stop (or temporary stop including swing fluctuation) of the reel 301 are performed in a series. It may be executed as an effect operation. By doing so, expectations can be given to the lighting of the LED of the operation effective lamp, which indicates whether or not the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are enabled.

  Further, in the pseudo game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when operating means other than the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c (for example, the MAX input button 206, the chance button 204, the starting lever 210, etc .; see FIG. 47). The rotation and stop (or temporary stop including swing fluctuation) of the reel 301 may be performed. Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform the game in the flow of the operation for advancing the game, because the effect of shortening the game time can be obtained. As a more specific example, after a game result is obtained (after stopping all reels), the player inputs a game value (for example, a medal) as an operation flow for the next game. Since it is conceivable to press the MAX input button 206 when performing the action, the MAX input button 206 is pressed at such timing (after all reels stop) to rotate and stop the reel 301. preferable.

  In addition, when expressed as a pseudo game in the following description, it includes the various forms of the pseudo game described above. Further, as described above, the pseudo game is merely an example of the effect accompanied by the freeze control (freeze effect), and the method of realizing the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment is not limited to the pseudo game, and for example, another freeze operation is performed. It may be directing.

  In the case of the main game, the gaming value may be paid out as a result of the game after the reel 301 is rotated and stopped, but in the case of the pseudo game, the gaming value is not consumed. Therefore, it is not possible to pay out the game value as a result of the pseudo game. However, based on the result of the pseudo game, it is possible to give a privilege different from the gaming value (for example, a winning of shifting to an AT game, an increase in the number of AT games, and the like).

  In addition, the pseudo game is generally executed within the game period of the unit game in which the main game is performed. Specifically, for example, the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed by multiplying the game value. Later, before the operation control of the reel 301 corresponding to the main game is performed, the reel operation by the pseudo game is performed, or after all the reels 301a to 301c are stopped in the main game, the reel operation by the pseudo game is performed. Or Further, during one main game (during a unit game of one game), a reel operation by a pseudo game may be executed a plurality of times (a plurality of pseudo games). For example, when a plurality of pieces of pseudo game information are set by repeating the processing of steps S108 to S110, the number of pseudo games corresponding to the plurality of pieces of pseudo game information can be continuously executed.

  The pseudo game information is information necessary to determine the operation mode of the reel 301 in the pseudo game, but specifically, for example, a predetermined stop corresponding to the winning combination flag stored in the reincarnation storage counter. Various settings such as the stop order of the reels 301, the rotation speed, the rotation time, and the rotation direction can be made in addition to the stop positions of the reels 301 for stopping the appearance. When a plurality of pseudo games are continuously executed, a standby time between the pseudo games can be set. When the main board 409 controls a pseudo game, the sub-board 510 may cause a display such as the image display 500 to execute a predetermined effect corresponding to the pseudo game. Thus, the pseudo game can be impressed on the player as a characteristic game effect.

  Then, in step S111, a win determination (collation of random number values, flag processing) as to which winning combination corresponds from the random number value extracted by the random number extraction in step S106 (hereinafter, referred to as an extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number value is collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value matches (matches or matches) the random number value of the winning combination determined in advance. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to one of the winning combinations, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). Note that the winning probability for each winning combination in the hit determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the hit determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag processing, when a hit value determination table serving as a criterion for determination is determined when matching the extracted random number value in the game, the game state flag such as a BB game flag described later is referred to. A hit value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (game state flag) that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. As the game state flag, it is assumed that flags corresponding to the game state are prepared, and for example, it is assumed that there are a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the inside bonus flag and the inside bonus flag are in the OFF (= 0) state, the flag in the general state is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S111 that the extracted random number does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, the result is “losing” that does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, and none of the condition devices are operated (see FIG. 50). ). Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when it is activated / established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices is established, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the activated line. Steps S106 and S111 described above are performed by performing random lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are referred to collectively as internal lottery or internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random numbers to the flag processing corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 55, this instruction function process may be executed as a part of the flag process in step S111 in FIG. 55, or after the flag process in step S111 is completed, step S114 May be executed before the time-up of the wait timer expires.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing at which the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, a group of condition devices permitted to operate based on the winning combination, an instruction content of the instruction function to be generated, and the like. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) by command communication (corresponding to an “instruction information command” described later). It should be noted that the command for notifying such information may be a command that is appropriately combined.

  The command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) as a result of performing the instruction function processing in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command mode. . In other words, the winning combinations are divided into groups based on their types (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) and the pressing order (forward pressing, middle pressing, regardless of the pressing order, etc.), and the winning role selected by the internal lottery. In contrast, the command can be transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) in a form in which the group including the winning combination can be identified. Note that the classification criterion in the grouping of the winning combinations is not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the presence or absence of the pressing order is added to the classification criteria, all the bell roles (AT1 to AT10) included in the pressing order bell are grouped into one group, and the bell roles (bell 1, bell 2) included in the pressing order unaffected bell ) Is a separate group, so that the role of the bell can be divided into groups according to the presence or absence of the pressing order. At this time, the role of the bell is divided into a group of bells in the pushing order and a group of bells in any order. The same applies to the replay combination. For example, the replay combination may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (push order does not matter). In addition, all the winning combinations may be grouped based only on the presence or absence of the pressing order. In such a case, all the winning combinations can be divided into a group with the pressing order or a group without the pressing order. Instead of grouping the winning combinations, the condition devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. In the following, a command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

  First, regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, when the indicating function display is executed, a command that can understand all the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (a command capable of so-called “complete navigation”). May be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as the type of the selected winning combination and the pressing order, so that a reel stopping method advantageous to the player is provided. Can be surely taught (so-called “complete navigation”).

  In addition, when the instruction function display is executed with respect to the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command (for example, only the first stop can be taught that allows a part of the breakdown of the grouped winning combination to be understood) “Partial navigation”) may be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize some information regarding the selected winning combination, a navigation display (for example, only the first stop only) that can partially teach the reel stopping method advantageous to the player. So-called "partial navigation") can be displayed.

  In addition, when the instruction function display is not performed with respect to the transmission of the command for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that does not know the breakdown of the grouped winning combination may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether the instruction function display can be executed based on the group indicated by the command. , Cannot recognize any further information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the pushing order bells, the proper pushing order and the specific breakdown of the winning combination (which one of “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) are not described. It can be recognized to the extent that they do not know. It should be noted that a command for notifying a winning combination grouped when such an instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a “condition device command” described later with reference to FIG. 60 and the like.

  Further, when the instruction function display is executed, it is not necessary to limit the small roles to be grouped to the pressing order bell, and the other small roles are grouped together (for example, the pressing sequence bell and the pressing sequence replay). You may do so. In other words, in this case, regardless of whether the pressing order bell is selected as the winning combination or the pressing order replay is selected, if the proper pressing order is the same, a command indicating the same group shall be transmitted. Means Further, even when the instruction function display is not performed, it is not necessary to limit the small roles to be grouped to the pressing order bell, and the other small roles are grouped together (for example, the pressing order bell and the pressing order replay). However, in such a case, the type of the winning combination (whether replay or bell) cannot be determined on the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) that has received the command, and the indication function display means Since the winning combination cannot be taught in an unrelated state (for example, when the instruction function is not executed, the replay navigation indicating that the replay has been won cannot be displayed on the image display body 500, etc.). It is preferable that commands are transmitted by grouping by the type of the small pressing order, for example, by separating the pressing order replay from the pressing order replay.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting the command for notifying the winning combination grouped in this way, and the peripheral board side can independently determine the winning combination and the winning combination. Judgment of the pressing order can be suppressed.

  After the end of the flag process in step S111, in step S112, it is checked whether or not pseudo game information for pseudo game is set. If the pseudo game information is set, the reel 301 is operated based on the pseudo game information. Then, a pseudo game is executed (step S113: pseudo game process). If the pseudo game information has not been set in step S112, or after the pseudo game process in step S113 has been completed, the process in step S114 is performed.

  In the pseudo game processing in step S113, when a plurality of pieces of pseudo game information are set, instead of executing a plurality of pseudo games based on the pseudo game information all in one unit game, Some pseudo games may be carried over to the next main game. Further, a main game that can execute the pseudo game process may be designated. By doing so, it is possible to make a pseudo game appear over the main game of a plurality of games, or to make a pseudo game appear at a specific main game, and to accompany the pseudo game (including the reincarnation effect described later). An effect that enhances the gameability can be expected.

  In addition, in steps S108 to S109, it has been described that the pseudo game information is set for each unit game (one game) based on the information stored in the reincarnation storage counter. In this case, the order in which the pseudo games appear in step S113 can be determined according to the order in which the information is extracted and set in the pseudo game information. By changing the order in which the pseudo game information is set, it is possible to change the playability in the release game of the reincarnation effect, and to produce various effects. Details will be described later in [11-8-3].

  In the next step S114, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start processing (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has timed out (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). Note that this timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Things. Here, if the wait timer has timed out (4.1 seconds have elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S115. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S115, the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. When the rotation speed of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started rotating continue to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until a stop operation (a press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) by the player is received. .

  Next, in step S116, the wait timer is reset, the wait timer is started until the next start processing, and the start processing ends.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number) is allowed as a winning combination (hereinafter, referred to as a winning combination) corresponding to the game. If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is operated, and the information on the operated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery. Judgment processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values at the time of performing random number extraction (this is called an extraction range) is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 to the 14th power = 16384 random numbers). In the first embodiment, the random numbers in the extraction range are set to 1 to 65535 for convenience, but it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this. When the range of random number extraction is expanded, the range of random numbers that can be extracted (so-called denominator) becomes larger by that amount, so that an event that a specific random value is unbalancedly extracted hardly occurs.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to the respective winning combinations are further assigned in advance. For example, if the random number corresponding to the winning combination “two kinds BB” among the random numbers within the extraction range (from “1” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment) is “1”, When the extracted random number value becomes "1", the result of the internal lottery is "winning two types of BB", and BB1 which is a condition device of two types of BB is processed as an information command in the game. Will be done. Also, by using this, the winning probability of the two BBs (the probability that the two BBs are selected as a result of the internal lottery, the lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random number values corresponding to the two BBs. . In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of two types of BBs in the general state is 6553/65535 because [total number of random values corresponding to two types of BB / total number of random numbers in the extraction range] is 6553/65535. The winning probability of the seed BB is about 1/10.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all the winning combinations are determined, and these random numbers are called winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (two types of BB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is a hit value corresponding to the two types of BB. When there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of the predetermined combination is a continuous random number “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” in the extraction range, the predetermined combination is The range of values is from random value “1” to “4”. Then, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (collated), it means that “the predetermined combination has been won” as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single role (for example, two kinds of BBs, cherries, replays, etc.) to be won only for one winning role is prepared. As described above, in addition to such a single role, a simultaneous winning role in which a plurality of winning roles are simultaneously won (including a “double role” in which a bonus role and a small role are simultaneously won) may be prepared. When such a duplicate combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicate combination is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

  From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of the winning value of any of the winning combinations in the internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, a loss occurs. That is, the range of the winning value of the loss is outside the range of the winning value of all the winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be called a winning allowable value.

  By the way, the single combination corresponds to one winning combination for one extracted random number value, and the simultaneous combination combination corresponds to a plurality of (for example, two) winning combinations for one extraction random number value. Is the corresponding one. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that all of the plurality of winning combinations have been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (the operation is permitted). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are simultaneously established, the priority of the condition devices with respect to the simultaneous winning combination is set. It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if the replay combination and the bonus combination are won at the same time, and if the replay combination is to be given priority, the reel stop processing in step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is given priority. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order and the timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the activated line, and is always replayed. Will be stopped.

  Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the bell in the pushing order (Bell 1 and Bell 2) and the hit value of the replay which can be expected to win (or be established) without depending on the pushing timing and the pushing order in the stop operation are extracted. Occupies more than the majority of the range. Specifically, among the 65535 lottery values in the extraction range, the number of lottery values allocated to replay is 30993, and the number of lottery values allocated to the bell in any order is 32059, so that the total is 63052. Account for 96% or more. In the first embodiment, the prescribed number during the bonus is two, and when the replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming the medal, and when the bell is awarded regardless of the pushing order, the number is nine. Medals will be paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals are paid out during the execution period of the bonus game (during the bonus).

[11-3. Game state control processing]
Hereinafter, a control process of a game state performed in the slot machine 1 will be described.

[11-3-1. Game state transition control processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (BB game) is being performed (step S151). If it is determined that the bonus game is being performed (YES in step S151), whether the end condition of the bonus game is satisfied It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S152). If the bonus game end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the routine returns with the gaming state during the bonus maintained.

  If the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game is ended and the game is shifted to the general state (step S153). In the general state, when the game is executed for a certain period, the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game during the certain period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases with the execution of the game by the player.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB game) is not being performed (NO in step S151), it is determined whether the bonus game is being performed (internal bonus state) (step S154). In other words, when a bonus combination (2 types of BBs) is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line, the operation continues even after the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the state is the bonus internal state, then it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S155). If it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination has been displayed on the activated line (YES in step S155), the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. You. If a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the routine returns with the gaming state inside the bonus maintained.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S154 that the state is not the bonus internal state, it is determined whether or not a bonus combination (here, two types of BB, but may be a double combination including two types of BBs) is won in the internal lottery. Is determined (step S157). If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has been won (YES in step S157), the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). If the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line in the game that has won the bonus combination, the game in the bonus internal state is not performed, the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state, and the bonus game is executed. You. If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in step S157), the routine returns with the gaming state controlled to the general state.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the main board 409 controls the gaming state to one of the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the AT function, but the execution of the AT game by the AT function is basically controlled by a different system from the above-described control of the game state. You. That is, the AT game can be executed in any of the general state and the bonus internal state. However, this is not always the case if the restrictions of rules or the like are violated. For example, it is assumed that the AT game cannot be executed in the bonus state. Hereinafter, the control process of the game state related to the AT function will be described in detail.

[11-3-2. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table), When the main processing of the instruction function processing is performed by the main board 409 and the generation of an instruction is displayed by the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) has the same instruction function. Can be effected and displayed on another display or the like (navigation display, instruction generation effect). The display modes of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, but it is required that both displays have display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the general flow of the instruction function process. In FIG. 57, a series of processing executed on the main board 409 and a series of processing executed on the sub-board 510 in response to a command from the main board 409 are described in conjunction with the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1. ing. FIGS. 58, 59, and 137 are flowcharts (parts 1 to 3) showing detailed processing procedures of the instruction function generation processing executed by the main board 409 in the instruction function processing shown in FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the instruction function-related processing executed by sub-board 510. In [11-3-2], first, the outline of the instruction function process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. After [11-3-3], the instruction function process will be described with reference to FIGS. Details of each process included in the process will be described.

  Although various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function process, these flags are stored in a memory (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main substrate 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub substrate 510) in the board that executes the instruction function process. This is an internal flag that is held, and is rewritten or read by a CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each substrate. When flags having the same name are used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), these internal flags basically have a common data format, and , The value of the flag is synchronized.

  In addition, variable data may be used in addition to the internal flag described above. These variable data are also stored in the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, in the case of the main board 409, the RAM 1114 and the In this case, the value is held in the RAM 1122, and the value is read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 for the main board 409 and the CPU 1118 for the sub-board 510).

  First, in step S61 of FIG. 57, the main board 409 executes processing (instruction function generation processing) related to whether or not to generate an instruction function. More specifically, it determines an AT win, determines whether or not to start an AT game, and determines the number of AT games to be continued. Further, whether or not to execute the indication effect of the AT game is also determined by the instruction function generation processing.

  Then, as a result of the instruction function generation process, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 performs a process of displaying the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game on the special display LED 612 (step S62). ). By this indication function display, it is possible to indicate an appropriate stop order of the small pressing order established during the AT, or to indicate that predetermined symbols should be aligned in the predetermined stop order.

  In the case of the game in which it is determined in step S61 that the main board 409 does not need to perform the instruction function display, the specific instruction function display using the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

  The main board 409 performs the indication function display in step S62 based on the result of the indication function generation processing in step S61, and transmits the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the indication function display to the peripheral board (command) or the like. (Instruction information command). When the indication function is not displayed, the fact may be notified by an indication information command or the indication information command may not be transmitted. However, when the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine that the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) can not only recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also display the instruction function display. The display contents (instruction contents) can also be grasped.

  Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub-board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 in FIG. 57 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function processing shown in FIG. 57, the instruction function generation processing (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processing by the main board 409 and the sub-board 510 (specifically, step S61) The processing in S62 and the processing in steps S63 to S65) do not limit the execution timing of each other's processing.

  First, in step S63, the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines whether or not the instruction function display is performed (or performed) in the game, and the instruction function display is performed (or performed). ) (YES in step S63), an instruction generation effect process is performed as the process in step S64. When the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510) determines in step S63 that the indication function display is not performed (or not performed) (NO in step S63), an instruction is given as the processing in step S65. Performs function-related processing.

  The instruction generation effect processing in step S64 is for displaying an “instruction generation effect” for instructing the player on the stop order and the stop position (the target symbol) of the reel 301 on the image display body 500 and other display devices. This is a process for displaying a so-called AT navigation or the like. In addition, the teaching content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display processing. For example, it is not allowed that the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "reverse pressing", even though the instruction content indicating the "forward pressing" is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display. Further, even if the instruction content indicating “forward push” is displayed on the special display LED 612, and the instruction “the left reel 301a should be stopped first” is indicated as the instruction based on the instruction production effect content, Is not permitted even if the reel 301b to be stopped is not taught. In addition, the fact that the teaching content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described order of pressing, and the indication of the pressing location in the instruction function display. Is also applied when is determined. That is, for example, despite the instruction function display indicating that the special display LED 612 indicates that "all seven reels should be aimed at the seven symbols", the teaching content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "BAR symbol". It is not allowed to aim at the "7 aiming at the red 7 symbol only at some of the reels".

  In addition, as for the specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect forms are conventionally known, such as displaying a pressing order and a design on a liquid crystal screen, and turning on an LED associated with each of the reels 301a to 301c. And any one or combination of them may be used.

  The instruction function-related processing in step S65 is related to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game in a non-AT mode, or a game in which the player wins the pressing order regardless of AT). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen (for example, an effect screen display corresponding to an indication effect) and the like, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, among the above-mentioned `` push-order-unreliable winning combinations '', not only the winning combinations that can be expected to pay out the maximum number of cards regardless of the game method at the time of winning, such as a bell in the push order, but also depending on the gaming method Some winning combinations may not be expected or the payout may not be obtained for the maximum number of payouts. To be more specific, in addition to a winning combination (for example, a watermelon combination) that can be obtained when playing in a game method (equivalent to the above-described “maximum efficiency batting method”) in which the maximum payout can be expected, A winning combination that cannot be obtained when playing the game with the “maximum efficiency batting method” (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 with the symbol combination of the watermelon described above is prepared, This is a single-course combination which is determined to be a winning by stopping the symbol combination, and includes a so-called chance combination.

  The instruction function process ends when the processes in steps S61 to S65 are performed. Hereinafter, each processing (steps S61 to S65) performed as the instruction function processing will be described in detail.

[11-3-3. Instruction function generation processing]
[11-3-3-1. Instruction function generation processing of first example]
The instruction function generation process shown in step S61 of FIG. 57 will be described in detail with reference to a specific example of an extraction table. FIG. 58 mainly describes processing in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. 59 illustrates processing in the special mode. The “special mode” will be described later. FIG. 137 illustrates a process relating to “reincarnation effect” that can be controlled during the AT game. The description of the “reincarnation effect” including FIG. 137 will be mainly described collectively from [11-8].

  First, in step S601 in FIG. 58, it is determined whether the AT flag is ON. The AT flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the game is in the AT game. When the flag is ON (= 1), it means that the game is in the AT. Means not in AT, that is, in non-AT. If the AT flag is ON (YES in step S601), the instruction function generation processing ends without performing any remarkable processing. If the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601), it is determined in step S602 whether the AT internal flag is ON (= 1). The AT internal flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not a state in which an AT game is determined to be won (AT internal state) although the AT is not in the middle of the AT. After the winning, the AT internal flag is turned ON when the game is in the non-AT state until the AT game is started. Further, when the AT has not been won or during the AT, the AT internal flag is set to OFF (= 0). In step S602, if the AT internal flag is ON, the process of step S603 is performed, and if the AT flag is OFF, the process of step S621 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the AT flag is turned on, the predetermined initial game number (for example, 30 games) is included in the variable data for “the number of AT games” for counting the number of internal AT games. Suppose it is set. Note that, in addition to the fixed predetermined number of games, the initial game number of the AT game is determined by setting the initial game number determined by lottery from among a plurality of candidates for the initial game number as the AT game number. Various methods can be adopted, such as setting the initial game number determined in the game period to the AT game number via a specific game period for determining the initial game number, or the like. .

  In step S603, an AT addition lottery is performed. In the AT addition lottery in step S603, it is first determined whether or not to add the initial game number of the AT (the initial game number addition / non-additional lottery). (The initial game number added game number lottery). In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a predetermined game period (for example, a period of a precursor game described later) may be provided before the start of the AT after the winning of the AT. It is assumed that when the condition is satisfied, the initial game number of the AT may be added. When the process in step S603 is performed, the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601) and the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S602), which means that a precursor game is in progress. Therefore, an AT-additional lottery is performed. During the precursor game, a “precursor game flag” which is one of the internal flags is ON.

  Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used in the initial game number addition / non-permission lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process (see step S3 in FIG. 54) is “replay”, “push order bell”, “two types of BB”, or “out”. In most cases (65534/65535), a non-winning is selected, and no addition is made. On the other hand, the winning combinations selected by the internal lottery process are other than the above, that is, “push-order bell”, “watermelon (weak / strong)”, “cherry (weak / strong)”, “chance eyes (weak / strong) ) "Or" the strongest ", the winner is won at a certain ratio (16384/65535), and an additional is selected.

  Note that the two winning combination groups shown in FIG. 61 are repeatedly used in the following description for the sake of simplicity. The role will be referred to as the "winning role of group A", and the winning roles other than group A, that is, "bell in any order", "watermelon (weak / strong)", "cherry (weak / strong)", "chance" The winning combination of “eye (weak / strong)” and “strongest” will be referred to as “the winning combination of group B”. Needless to say, such a division of the winning combination by the group A and the group B is merely an example for explanation, and may be a division of a different winning combination or a division of three or more in practice. The winning combination may be different for each lottery table.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used in the initial game number addition game number lottery. The initial game number additional game number lottery is performed when the initial game number additional game lottery is won. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 62, the distribution pattern of the number of added games is set to be different depending on whether the winning combination is the winning combination of the group A or the winning combination of the group B. In general, in the case of the winning combination of the group A, a relatively small number of games is often selected, and only a maximum of 200 games are selected. On the other hand, in the case of the winning combination of the group B, it is the same that a small number of games is easily selected, but a higher number of games is more easily selected than in the case of the group A, and further, a number of games larger than 200 games is selected. There is a possibility that it will be.

  After the AT addition lottery is performed in step S603, it is determined whether or not the initial game number addition lottery lottery is won (step S604). A process of adding the number of additional games selected in the initial game number additional game lottery to the “initial game number” is performed (initial game number addition). "AT initial game number" is variable data for indicating the number of AT games set at the start of the AT. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S606. If it is determined in step S604 that the initial game number addition lottery lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, "the number of precursor games" is decremented by one. The "number of precursor games" is variable data for indicating the number of "precursor games" in which a precursor effect of the AT (details will be described later) may occur.

  Next, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become zero. If the number of precursor games is not 0, that is, if the period of the precursor game remains (NO in step S607), the instruction function generation processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of precursor games is 0 in step S607 (YES in step S607), it means that the precursor game has ended, and since the AT internal flag is ON, the AT game is started. Therefore, the "AT flag" is turned ON (step S608). Thereafter, the AT internal flag and the precursor game flag are turned off (steps S609 and S610), the "special state flags" and "each state flag" are also turned off (steps S611 and S612), and the instruction function generation processing ends. .

  Here, the “special state flag” is an internal flag that is turned ON when the game proceeds in the “special mode”. In the first embodiment, the “special mode” is not a mere production mode, but a special mode in which a winning probability or the like relating to an AT lottery is favored. Conditions and the like when shifting to the “special mode” will be described in each step described below. In the following description, the AT lottery game state controlled in the “special mode” will be described in the following description. Be performed. Derived examples will be described later. When there are a plurality of “special states” (special state 1, special state 2, special state 3) (for example, see FIG. 63), a plurality of states are managed by one special state flag (for example, special state). OFF when the status flag is 0, special status 1 when it is 1, special status 2 when it is 2 and special status 3 when it is 3), or special status according to each special status. A flag may be provided (for example, a special state 1 flag, a special state 2 flag, and a special state 3 flag are prepared). In any case, in the following determination that the special state is ON or OFF, it is determined to be ON when controlled to any special state, and to OFF when not controlled to any special state.

  In addition, “each state flag” includes a plurality of “AT lottery game states” (for example, a low-precision state, a high-precision state, an ultra-high-precision state, This is an internal flag for indicating the control state of each state (special states 1 to 3, hell state, etc.). Therefore, it can be understood that each status flag includes a special status flag and a hell status flag. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the case of “turning off each state flag”, the state flags relating to all AT lottery game states are returned to the initial settings (in this example, the low-probability state is turned on). In the case of "turn on each state flag", the state flag corresponding to the AT lottery gaming state selected by the immediately preceding state transition lottery is turned on (other state flags are off). ) Means that. When “turning off each status flag” is referred to, each status flag when not in AT (for example, low-precision state, high-precision state, ultra-high-precision state, etc. All of the state flags for each state may be turned off, or a predetermined state may be turned on. Details of “special state”, “each state”, “state transition lottery (state transition lottery A, B, C, special state transition lottery)” and the like will be described later.

  If the AT flag is OFF in step S602, that is, if a non-AT and the AT has not been won internally, it is determined in step S621 whether or not the special state flag is OFF (= 0). Is determined. The processing when the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the special state flag is OFF in step S621 (YES in step S621), an AT initial winning lottery is performed (step S622). The AT first hit lottery is a lottery in which a winning in the AT game is determined in a state where the AT game has not been won. The condition in which the processing in step S622 is performed is that the AT is not being performed (AT flag is OFF in step S601), the AT is not internally won (AT internal flag is OFF), and the mode is not special mode (special flag is OFF). Therefore, it can be considered that the game is in a normal state in which neither the AT nor the precursor game is won, or that the precursor game in which the AT is not won (during the drawback).

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the AT initial hit lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 63, the winning probability for the first AT win is set based on the gaming state controlled when the first AT winning lottery is performed and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. I have.

  Here, the gaming state described in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is a “gaming state related to the winning combination lottery” (specifically, a different number is set in the internal lottery of the winning combination as shown in FIG. 49). , General state, bonus internal state, bonus state), but rather a “game state related to AT” in which different numbers are set in a lottery for an AT initial hit, an AT precursor game, etc. Call.

  According to FIG. 63, as a specific example of the AT lottery game state, the hell state, the low-precision state, the high-accuracy state, the ultra-high-accuracy state, the special state 1, and the special state 2 are arranged in the order in which the winning probability at the beginning of the AT is generally higher. , And special state 3 are prepared.

  To briefly explain each AT lottery game state, first, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning at the first time of the AT regardless of what winning combination is selected. Next, the low-probability state is an initial state of the AT lottery game state, and is a low-winning role that is relatively difficult to win by an internal lottery (also referred to as a “rare role”, specifically, a watermelon role, a cherry role, a chance In the case where a bell in any order other than the bonus state may be included in the rare role, it is possible to expect a certain amount of AT first win. In particular, comparing the winning probabilities of the same type of rare combination (for example, weak watermelon and strong watermelon), it is set to be easier to win in the “strong” system than in the “weak” system. These tendencies are the same in other AT lottery gaming states. In addition, when a winning role other than the rare role (non-rare role), that is, a high winning role (specifically, replay and pushing order bell) which is relatively easy to win by an internal lottery is selected, Even in the lottery game state, it is almost impossible to expect winning in the AT first hit.

  In the present example, the “low winning combination (rare role)” that is relatively difficult to win by the internal lottery is a winning combination having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, an AT first hit) related to an advantageous game, and is therefore “high”. Expectations ". On the other hand, the “high winning combination (non-rare role)” other than the rare combination is a “low expected combination” because it is a winning combination having a lower degree of expectation regarding the advantageous game than the “high winning combination”.

  The high-accuracy state is a gaming state in which the winning expectation at the beginning of the AT is generally higher based on each winning combination than the low-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state has a higher winning expectation than the high-accuracy state It is a high gaming state.

  The special states 1 to 3 are exclusive game states controlled in the “special mode” in this example. The special states 1 to 3 have a higher expectation of winning the AT first hit than the aforementioned AT lottery gaming states (low-precision state, high-accuracy state, ultra-high-accuracy state), and the winning role is a rare role. , The player wins the AT first hit with a probability of at least 55000/65535 or more. According to FIG. 63, the special state 2 is higher than the special state 1 and the special state 3 is higher than the special state 2 in the expectation of winning the AT first hit, and the gaming state is more advantageous.

  Note that the distribution in the lottery table shown in FIG. 63 is an example. For example, if the winning combination is a rare combination in a special state, the distribution such as always winning at the first time of the AT may be performed. Good. Further, each of these states may shift to another state based on the winning combination. Such an AT lottery game state shift lottery will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, FIG. 74, and the like.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the “game state related to the winning combination lottery” is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state, the “game state related to the AT” is set to one of the above-mentioned AT lottery game states. Controlled. Which of the AT lottery game states is controlled is managed by ON / OFF of "state flags". “Each state flag” is an internal flag provided corresponding to each of the AT lottery game states, and includes a low-precision state flag, a high-precision state flag, an ultra-high-precision state flag, and a special state flag (special state 1 flag to special state flag). Special state 3 flag) and a hell state flag. A plurality of these status flags are not turned on at the same time. When only one of the status flags is turned on, the other status flags are turned off. For example, when the state is controlled to be in the ultra-high accuracy state, among the state flags, the ultra-high accuracy state flag is turned on, and the other state flags are turned off. Note that the “state flags” need not be individual flags corresponding to the types of AT lottery game states, but may be internal flags that collectively manage all the AT lottery game states (for example, a flag value of 1). May be a low-accuracy state, 2 may be a high-accuracy state, and an internal flag that can be managed.

  In step S623, it is determined whether or not an AT initial hit has been won by the AT initial hit lottery in step S622. If an AT initial hit is won (YES in step S623), the process of step S624 is performed. If an AT initial hit is not won (NO in step S623), the process of step S632 is performed.

  In step S624, a precursor lottery is performed to determine whether to execute (shift) the “progress game”.

  Here, the “aura game” and the “aura effect” in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the "aura game" is a special game in which the "aura effect" can occur, and the aura game is played for a predetermined number of games (a plurality of games) selected by lottery. Then, the "prompt effect" is an effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the transition to the advantageous game state (in this case, the transition to AT) is based on the result. The “progressive effect” is an effect that is continuously performed over a plurality of games. As specific examples of the effect, for example, a “continuous effect” performed over a plurality of games and a suggestive effect that is completed in one game (For example, navigator teaching, title display, etc. of a small role). Details of the “continuous effect” will be described later in the description of the instruction function-related processing by the peripheral board (see FIG. 60).

  In the present example described with reference to FIGS. 58, 59, etc., a predictive effect is always performed over a plurality of games in the predictive game, and the final game of the predictive effect is the final game of the predictive game. Therefore, the success / failure result of the AT transition indicated by the sign effect can be regarded as a result of the sign game. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the precursor game is played in any of the case where the player wins the AT initial hit (at the time of AT winning) and the case where the player does not win the AT initial hit (at the time of the AT non-winning). May be started. A precursor game (or predictive effect) performed at the time of winning the AT is referred to as a "main predictor", and a predictive game (or predictive effect) performed at the time of non-AT winning is referred to as a "gase warning". In the case of this sign, it indicates that AT transfer is to be performed at the end, and for the case of gaseous sign, it is indicated that AT transfer is not to be performed at the end.

  In addition, the precursor game whose execution is determined in the instruction function generation processing according to the present invention includes not only the “continuous effect” in which the “continuous effect” is performed as described above but also various other effects. It is feasible. For example, it is not a continuous production with continuity, but a “wrinkled production” in which some predetermined production occurs more frequently than usual (for example, a characteristic background production frequently occurs, or the color of a character's dialogue etc. Or a changing effect frequently occurs).

  Then, when such a “roughing effect” is used, as a pattern example of the precursor game (the forerunner), a pattern of “roughness effect A” + “continuous effect A (a precursor effect)”, “continuous effect A” + “ A pattern such as "Raw effect A" + "Continuous effect B (foreign effect)", a pattern such as "Continuous effect A" + "Raw effect A" + "Raw effect B" + "Continuous effect B (forewar effect)" can be executed. It is. In the case of the forerunner, it is necessary to finally notify the player of winning the AT transition, so that an award effect is preferably performed at the end.

  On the other hand, as an example of the pattern of the precursor game (both omen), since the AT transition is not finally won, there is no need to perform the omen effect at the end of the bogus omen, so in addition to the pattern possible with this omen, It is also possible to execute a pattern such as only “roughening effect” or a pattern in which “continuous effect” and “irritation effect” are combined and finally end with “irritation effect”. In addition, in the case of a pattern that ends with “roughing effect” at the time of the gaseous omen, the end of the “continuous effect (forewarning effect)” performed before that is presumed to be the end of the precursor game, and the “irritation effect” is a game after the precursor game. You may pretend that it is displayed. Further, in any of the forewarning games (forewarning or gaseous foreshortening), in addition to the “continuous effect” and the “irritation effect”, a “normal effect” which is the same as the normal time may be mixed.

  As described above, the precursor game determined by the instruction function generation processing according to the present invention can be executed in various patterns. ), The game proceeds in a pattern of “normal effect” + “continuous effect (foreboding effect)”. At this time, as described above, the predictive effect is always performed for a plurality of games among the predictive games, and the final game of the predictive effect can be the final game of the predictive game.

  In the sign lottery in step S624, since the AT first hit has been won in step S622, it is determined whether or not to execute the sign game (final sign) before starting the AT. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the foreboding lottery is performed even if the first lottery for the AT has not been won (for example, step S633 to be described later). It is determined whether or not a game (gase omen) is to be played. In the case of a gas omen, an omen effect that allows the player to expect that the game may shift to AT is executed, but actually, No transition to AT is shown.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 determines whether or not the sign game can be executed (for example, the sign lottery in step S624), and determines the number of sign games that are the number of the executed games (for example, step S626). Process until the precursor game number lottery), and then perform the process related to the production of the precursor game (e.g., perform a display indicating that the precursor game is in progress, determine the production content of the precursor effect and the continuous production, and determine the execution timing, It is preferable that the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) that receives the precursor game number command from the main board 409 performs the effect such as executing an effect according to the determination result. This is because, when the main substrate 409 performs all or most of the above processing, the amount of processing by the main substrate 409 becomes excessive, and the processing capacity of the main substrate 409 (the upper limit of the capacity is defined) overflows. This is to prevent that. In recent gaming machines, as the types and effects of effects have been enhanced, the amount of data necessary for processing related to effects has increased. In view of such a background, there is a limit in performing the processing related to the effect on the main board 409, and by dispersing the processing load between the main board 409 and the peripheral board as described above, the processing of the main board 409 is performed. Not only the processing capacity can be suppressed, but also the effect content (effect pattern) by the peripheral substrate not restricted by the capacity limitation can be enhanced. The details of the processing related to the effect of the precursor game will be described later in the instruction function-related processing by the sub-board 510 (FIG. 60 and the like).

  FIGS. 64 to 66 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the precursor lottery. According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the precursor lottery, whether or not to execute the precursor game (yes / no) is determined based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. FIG. 64 is an example of a lottery table used in the sign lottery performed at the time of the AT winning, in other words, a lottery table used in the sign lottery of the present sign. FIG. 65 shows a precursory lottery performed in a non-special mode (for example, a state in which the game is performed by controlling the AT lottery game state to a state other than the special state) and the first AT is not won (AT non-winning). FIG. 66 shows an example of a lottery table used in a special mode (for example, a state in which an AT lottery game state is controlled to a special state and a game is played), and a precursory lottery performed when an AT is not won. Shows an example of a lottery table used in. In other words, FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are the lottery tables used for the sign lottery of the gassing sign.

  The lottery table of FIG. 64 is used in the precursor lottery of step S624. In the case of using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 64, in any AT lottery game state, the execution of the precursor game is determined, but the presence / absence is changed and the precursor game is not executed. May be prepared.

  Next, in step S625, it is determined whether or not the predictive lottery in step S624 has been won, that is, whether or not the execution of the predictive game has been determined. If the game has not been won (NO), the process of step S631 is performed.

  In step S626, a precursor game number lottery for determining the number of games in which the precursor game is performed (the precursor game number) is performed. FIGS. 67 to 70 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 4) for explaining a lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. Like the lottery table used for the precursor lottery (FIGS. 64 to 66), the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery depends on the presence or absence of the special mode when the lottery is performed and the presence or absence of the AT winning. Different lottery tables are provided. FIG. 67 is an example of a lottery table selected at the time of AT winning in a mode other than the special mode, FIG. 68 is an example of a lottery table selected at the time of non-AT winning in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected at the time of AT winning in the mode, and FIG. 70 is an example of a lottery table selected at the time of non-AT winning in the special mode. In step S626, the lottery table of FIG. 67 is used.

  According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, in the precursor game number lottery, the precursor game number is selected based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. Then, a precursor game is performed during the number of precursor games selected by the lottery, a precursor effect appears on the way, and at the end, notification is made as to whether or not to shift to AT. In addition, regarding the distribution by the winning combination in each lottery table, in FIG. 67 to FIG. 70, the winning combination is grouped into the “rare role” and the “other than the rare role (non-rare role)”. These lottery tables may be implemented by being divided into different lottery tables for each winning combination. However, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, by making the lottery tables as common as possible, the data held by the main board 409 is maintained. This has the effect of reducing the capacity.

  67 to 70, a relatively small number of precursor games (specifically, four games) are selected in the special mode, whereas a relatively long number of precursor games (other than the special mode) are selected. Specifically, eight or more games) are selected.

  Also, comparing FIG. 67 with FIG. 68, the number of precursor games (ie, the precursor of gassing precursor) at the time of AT non-winning at the time of AT win (FIG. 67) and at the time of non-AT win (FIG. 68) other than the special mode. The number of games) is slightly easier to select than the number of precursor games at the time of winning the AT (that is, the number of precursor games of the main precursor). Further, while the maximum number of precursor games at the time of non-AT winning is 32 games, the maximum number of precursor games at the time of AT winning is distributed to 36 games, so that the number of precursor games is a certain number of games (32 games). In the case where the value exceeds ()), it is possible to produce a special effect that at this time, it is determined that this is a precursor to the AT win.

  After the sign game number lottery is performed in step S626, the sign game number selected in the lottery is set in the variable data for the "sign game number" (step S627). By turning on (= 1) one of the internal flags, that is, the precursor game flag (step S628), and turning on the AT internal flag (step S629), the precursor game starts in the subsequent games. Is set. Then, starting the precursor game means that the game is not in the special mode (special state), so that the special state flag is turned off (step S630), and the instruction function generation processing ends.

  In step S631, the AT flag is turned on in order to shift to the AT without performing the predictive game number lottery since the AT initial winning lottery has been won but the predictive lottery has not been won. To end.

  In step S632, a process is performed when it is determined in step S623 that the initial winning lottery has not been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the precursor game flag is OFF (= 0). . If it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is OFF (YES in step S632), the process of step S633 is performed, and if it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (step S632). NO), the process of step S641 is performed.

  In step S633, a precursor lottery for determining whether to execute the precursor game is performed. The precursor lottery in step S633 is a lottery process similar to that in step S624 described above. However, since no win has been made in the initial AT in step S623, whether or not to make a gassing precursor using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. Is drawn by lottery. According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, when a winning role other than the rare role (non-rare role) is selected, the execution of the precursor game is almost not selected, but the weaker rare role (weak watermelon, weak cherry, If the weak chance is selected as the winning combination, there is a high possibility that execution of the precursor game is selected. If the winning combination is a strong rare combination, the possibility that the precursor game will be executed is further increased, and if the winning combination is the strongest, execution of the precursor game is always selected.

  Next, in step S634, it is determined whether or not the predictive lottery in step S633 has been won, that is, whether or not the execution of the predictive game has been determined. If the win has been determined (YES), the process of step S635 is performed. If not, the process of step S638 is performed.

  In step S635, a precursor game number lottery for determining the number of precursor games for performing the precursor game is performed. In step S636, the precursor game number determined by the lottery is set in the variable data for “the precursor game number”, In step S637, the "a precursor game flag" is turned ON (= 1). The processing in steps S635 to S637 is the same as the processing in steps S626 to S628 described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S637, the process of step S638 is performed.

  In step S638, a lottery relating to the state transition of the AT lottery game state (state transition lottery A) is performed. When the current AT lottery gaming state is the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, or the ultra-high-accuracy state, the state transition lottery A is performed in any of the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, or the ultra-high-accuracy state. It is a lottery to make a transition to the gaming state (including the continuation of the current state). In step S678 and the like in FIG. 59 to be described later, when the current AT lottery game state is the special state (special states 1 to 3), any one of the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state is determined. A state transition lottery B for performing a lottery to determine whether to transition to the AT lottery game state is shown.

  Here, FIG. 71 to FIG. 73 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. FIG. 71, FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 are lottery tables for a state transition lottery A used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-precision state, a high-precision state, and an ultra-high-precision state, respectively. This is an example. When performing the state transition lottery, it is possible to recognize which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled by referring to the value of each state flag.

  The features of the lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 will be briefly described. Referring to FIG. 71 used in the low-accuracy state, in the low-accuracy state, there is almost no transition (promotion) to the ultra-high-accuracy state except for the case where the winning combination is the strongest. As for the gender, it can be seen that when the winning combination is a rare combination, a transition (promotion) to a high-accuracy state can be selected. In particular, it is easy to be promoted to the most accurate state in the case of a weak role of a rare system. Specifically, promotion to the more accurate state is selected at 16384/65535.

  Referring to FIG. 72 used in the high-accuracy state, in the high-accuracy state, if the winning role is a rare role, the low-probability state is not shifted (relegated), and the winning role is a replay, a pushing order bell, and two types. It can be seen that there is a possibility of demoting only with a very low probability (1310/65535) in the case of BB, out. It can be seen that there is a possibility of transition (promotion) to some extent in the super-high-accuracy state, which is the upper-rank state, when the winning combination is a rare combination (particularly, a bell with no particular order of being pushed or a weak system rare combination). In the high-accuracy state as a whole, the state is almost always maintained or promoted, and is rarely demoted to the low-accuracy state.

  Referring to FIG. 73 used in the super-high-accuracy state, in the ultra-high-accuracy state, if the winning role is a rare role, there is no transition (demotion) to a lower status, and the winning role is replayed and the pushing order bell It can be seen that there is a possibility of being demoted to the low-accuracy state or the high-accuracy state only at a considerably low probability in the case of two types of BB and miss. That is, in many cases, even if the state transition lottery A is performed in the ultra-high-accuracy state, the ultra-high-accuracy state is maintained, so that the state in which the AT benefits are high is maintained.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state transition lottery A relating to the transition of the state of the AT lottery gaming state is not performed only during the AT game, but is performed in any game state during the non-AT game (for example, a general game state). State or bonus internal state). In such a state transition lottery A during the non-AT game, the same lottery table as illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 may be used, or a different allocation in which a different distribution is set according to the game state. May be used.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the state transition of the AT lottery game state is determined by lottery using the lottery table in which different transition probabilities are set based on the winning combination, the winning probability of each winning combination is determined. The number of games in which each AT lottery game state is continuously controlled (the so-called average stay game number) can be calculated based on the selection ratio of the transition destination state. Specifically, for example, using FIG. 49 (the lottery table of the winning combination lottery) and FIGS. 71 to 73 (the lottery table of the state transition lottery A), the average number of stay games in each AT lottery game state in the bonus internal state is determined. When calculated, the average number of staying games in the low-accuracy state is about 120 games, the average number of staying games in the high-accuracy state is about 25 games, and the average number of staying games in the ultra-high-accuracy state is about 36 games. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the average number of stay games in each AT lottery game state is not limited to the above calculation example. For example, each average number of stay games is set in advance and the In such a case, the winning probability of each winning combination and the selection ratio of the transition destination state may be adjusted.

  In the above calculation example, the longest average staying game number is about 120 games in the low-probability state, and the shortest average staying game number is about 25 games in the high-probability state. On the other hand, the number of staying games in the “special state”, which is another AT lottery game state, is selected from between 2 games and 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later). , The number of games staying is shorter than the average number of staying games in any of the low-probability state, the high-probability state, and the ultra-high-probability state. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the preceding paragraph, the average number of staying games in each AT lottery game state can be arbitrarily set, but the average number of staying games in the special state is different from other AT lottery games. It is preferable that the number of games stayed is relatively shorter than the average number of stay games in the state (low-probability state, high-probability state, ultra-high-probability state).

  After the state transition lottery A in step S638 is performed, each state flag is turned on so as to correspond to the transition destination state determined in the lottery (step S639), and the instruction function generation processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (NO in step S632), a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the variable data of “number of precursor games” is performed as the process of step S641. Then, in a step S642, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If it is determined that the number of predictive games is 0 (YES in step S642), it means that the predictive game has ended, and the predictive game flag is turned off (step S643). If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S642), it means that the precursor game is continuing, and the process of step S649 described later is performed.

  After the process of step S643 is performed, a special state shift lottery for performing a lottery to determine whether to shift to the “special mode (special state)” is performed (step S644).

  Here, conditions for shifting to the special mode (special state) in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a precursor effect of displaying (suggesting, teaching) whether or not to shift to AT can be performed as a result, but the precursor effect ends in the precursor game. After that, not only the pattern returning to the game state (the game state here means the AT lottery game state) before the start of the precursor game (or the precursor effect), but also another special game state (special state) (Transition to special mode). If the transition to the AT is determined by the indication effect, the AT game is started as it is, so that the transition to the special mode is not performed. Therefore, such a special state is a special AT lottery game state that can be controlled only after the indication game does not indicate a transition to the AT (that is, a drawback), and in this example, the special state is controlled to the special state. The progress of the game is called "special mode".

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, after the end of the drawback, it is determined whether to shift to the special mode (whether to control to the special state) or not, and if the lottery is won, the state is controlled to the special state. The period of time (number of special state games) is determined by lottery. Then, the game is advanced in the special mode until the number of special state games is exhausted, and an AT lottery, a precursor lottery, and the like are performed again based on the winning combination selected during that time. Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, one of the features is that the lottery regarding the AT in the special mode is performed in a more preferential condition than before the execution of the gaseous omen. Is prepared, even if the transition to the AT is denied by the fake omen, it is possible to shift to the special mode in which the degree of expectation for the AT is high. , And the expectation for the special game (AT game) can be maintained. In addition, the fact that the lottery relating to the AT is preferentially performed in the special mode means that, for example, in the lottery table of the AT initial hitting lottery shown in FIG. Has been shown to be. The special state 1 to the special state 3 are gaming states that are set so that the degree of such preferential treatment is different, and the preferential treatment degree is high in the order of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3.

  In this example, it is assumed that which of the special state 1 to the special state 3 is to be controlled is determined based on the game state when the transition to the special state is determined. Specifically, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low-probability state, the special state 1 is selected as the transition destination special state, and similarly, in the high-precision state, the special state 2 is selected. In the case of the ultra-high accuracy state, the special state 3 is selected. In this way, the special state of the transition destination is favored according to the degree of advantage of the game state before the transition to the special state (low-precision state <high-precision state <ultra-high-precision state) (special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3). Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state before the transition and the special state at the transition destination are not limited to one-to-one correspondence as in the above example. As another example, for example, when the transition to the special state is determined in the low-probability state, either the special state 1 or the special state 2 is drawn as the transition destination state, and similarly, the high-precision state is determined. In such a case, either the special state 2 or the special state 3 may be selected by lottery. In the case of the super-high accuracy state, the state may always be shifted to the special state 3.

  In the processing shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, a special state transition lottery is performed in the last game of gassing omen, and when the lottery is won, the game is shifted to the special mode immediately after the gassing omen ends. By performing such processing, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the transition to the special mode is not performed until the gaseous omen reaches the final game, so that the AT transition is not denied. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not to win the AT transition until the final game, even if it is a omen.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the timing at which the mode is shifted to the special mode after the end of the gassing omen is not limited to the above-described immediate shift after the end of the gassing omen. For example, a relatively short standby period (standby game) may be provided before the transition to the special mode after the end of the drawback (however, the standby game period may be shorter than the number of games of the drawback). preferable). When such a stand-by game is provided, it is preferable to control to a specific effect state during the stand-by game. The specific effect state is, for example, a high-frequency effect mode in which a predetermined effect frequently occurs. By controlling to the high-frequency effect mode during the standby game, an effect can be generated over a plurality of games in the standby game, so that an effect similar to the omen effect (short omen) can be generated over a plurality of games. It can be realized and expected to improve the gameability. Also, in the case where a standby game is provided, even if the precursor game is a fake precursor, if an effect that can be guessed to be a standby game is generated after the end game, the transition to the special mode can be expected. Can be expected to have the effect of maintaining the interest of the elderly.

  In step S644, a special state transition lottery for performing a lottery to determine whether to shift to the special mode as described above is performed using a predetermined lottery table. FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table of the special state transition lottery is set to a special state based on the winning combination of the current game and the current AT lottery gaming state (low-precision state, high-precision state, ultra-high-precision state). The winning ratio to be controlled (transition to the special state) is set. Specifically, when the winning combination is a rare combination, the transition to the special mode is always won regardless of the AT lottery game state. If the winning combination is a non-rare role, the higher the AT lottery gaming state is, the easier it is to win the transition to the special mode. Even a non-rare role wins the transition to the special mode at a rate of more than half (32768/65535). As described above, when the transition to the special state is determined, the special states 1 to special are determined based on the gaming state (low-precision state, high-accuracy state, ultra-high-accuracy state) at the time of the decision. Assume that it is determined which of state 3 is to be controlled.

  Then, in step S645, it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode has been won in the special state transition lottery in step S644. When the process is performed and the transition to the special mode is not won (NO in step S645), the process in step S649 described later is performed.

  In step S646, in response to the winning in the special state transition lottery in step S644, a period (number of special state games) for controlling to the special mode is determined by lottery (special state game number lottery). FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. According to FIG. 75, the number of special state games is determined by a lottery depending on whether the winning combination is a rare combination or a non-rare combination (non-rare combination). In some cases, the game is selected from 2 games to 9 games. When the winning combination is a rare combination, the game is selected from 2 games to 20 games. In the case of the lottery table of FIG. 75, when the winning combination is a rare combination, not only the expectation of the maximum number of games is high, but also the average number of games is large, so that the special mode can be expected to continue for a long time. Since the special mode is more preferential with respect to the AT than the gaming state before the execution of the precursor game (or the precursor effect), the longer special mode means that the expectation of the AT is higher. .

  Next, in step S647, the number of special state games selected in the special state game number lottery in step S646 is set in variable data “number of special state games” indicating the number of special state games, and then the special state flag is set. It is turned ON (step S648), and the instruction function generation processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S642 that the number of precursor games is not 0, and if it is determined in step S645 that the transition to the special mode has not been won, a state transition lottery A is executed as processing in step S649. Is performed. The state transition lottery A in step S649 is the same as the state transition lottery A described in step S638, and the transition destination state is determined using the lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) corresponding to the current AT lottery state. It is determined.

  Then, in step S650, each state flag corresponding to the state of the transition destination determined by the state transition lottery A in step S649 is turned ON, and the instruction function generation processing ends.

  The above is the description of each process shown in FIG. Hereinafter, each process shown in FIG. 59 will be described. The processing illustrated in FIG. 59 is processing that is subsequently performed when it is determined in step S621 in FIG. 58 that the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621). In FIG. 59, when the same processing as that described in FIG. 58 is performed, detailed description thereof may be omitted.

  First, in FIG. 59, in step S661, an AT initial winning lottery is performed. The AT initial winning lottery in step S661 is the same as the process described in step S622, and thus details are omitted.

  Next, in step S662, it is determined whether the hell state flag is OFF (= 0). As described above, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning at the first time of the AT regardless of what winning combination is selected. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a special state is controlled after the end of a precursor game (gase precursor) in which the winning effect for the transition to the AT is not shown by the precursor effect. Then, when the rare role is selected as the winning combination during the game period (special mode) controlled to be in the special state and the first winning is achieved in the AT, a precursory effect indicating the winning result for the transition to the AT is given. An aura game (aura) that occurs is executed. During the period in which the precursor is executed, since the transfer winning to the AT is determined, even if further AT winning is performed, it becomes a useless game. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the first sign is won in the special mode and the real omen is executed, by controlling the period of the real sign to “hell state”, the wasteful AT victory is performed. To prevent it from occurring. Further, even when the mode is shifted from the special mode to the gaseous omen, the hell state can be controlled.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when controlling to the “hell state” as described above, not only the AT winning is suppressed but also a benefit that is advantageous to the player may be given. Specifically, for example, an AT addition lottery for adding the number of AT games may be performed (the AT addition lottery may be more easily performed than during the normal AT game). Note that the process related to the AT addition lottery may be similar to the AT addition lottery performed in the AT internal state described in step S603.

  If it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is OFF (YES in step S662), the process of step S663 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not OFF (is ON) ( (NO in step S662), the process of step S681 described below is performed.

  In step S663, it is determined whether or not the winning combination of the game is other than the replay, the push order bell, the two types of BB, or the "losing" (that is, whether or not the winning combination is the "rare combination"). It is determined by referring to the activated condition device. In this example, the winning combination serving as a criterion for the determination is “rare role” for the sake of simplicity of explanation, and is not necessarily limited to only the “rare role”. It may be limited to “rare role”. If it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is "rare combination" (YES in step S663), the process of step S664 is performed, and if it is determined that the winning combination is other than "rare combination" ( (NO in step S663), the process in step S671 is performed.

  The processing in step S664 is performed when the rare combination is won in the special mode. Referring to FIG. 64 (a lottery table used in the foreboding lottery performed at the time of the AT winning), it can be seen that when the AT is won when the winning combination is the rare combination, the precursor game always occurs. Also, referring to FIG. 66 (a lottery table used in a precursor lottery performed when the AT is not won in a state where the special mode is controlled), when the winning role is a rare role, the AT first hit lottery is performed. It can be understood that a precursor game always occurs even if no win is made (AT non-win) (corresponding to a situation when the processing of step S672 described later is performed). Therefore, before the process of step S664 is performed, by making a precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown), the transition to the precursor game can be determined.

  As described above, when the rare mode is selected as the winning combination when the special mode is controlled, a precursor game always occurs even if the lottery for the first time of the AT is not won (AT non-winning). Therefore, the game state is easy to be connected to a continuous effect (a precursor effect in a precursor game). Therefore, a screen display such as “preparing for continuous production” may be displayed as a display in the special mode, for example, to indicate to the player that the game is in a gaming state in which continuous production is likely to occur. Also, paying attention to the fact that a precursor game (and continuous production) will occur if a rare role is won during the special mode, a screen display such as "If you draw the rare role now?" For example, the player may be expected to win the rare role. In any case, the special mode can be regarded as a mode that leads to a subsequent sign game (or a sign effect or a continuous effect). Can also include special modes.

  Then, in step S664, since the execution of the precursor game has been determined, a precursor game number lottery is performed, and as a process subsequent to the lottery, the setting of the number of the precursor game selected (step S665) and the setting of the precursor game flag are performed. ON (step S666) is performed. Note that the processing in steps S664 to S666 is the same as the processing described in steps 626 to S628 in FIG. 58, and thus details are omitted. However, in the precursor game number lottery in step S664, the processing shown in FIG. 69 or FIG. A lottery table (a lottery table selected at the time of AT winning / AT non-winning in the special mode) is used.

  Thereafter, in step S667, it is determined whether or not an AT initial hit has been won by the AT initial hit lottery in step S661. If it is determined that the AT first hit has been won (YES in step S667), the AT internal flag is turned on (step S668), and then the process of step S669 is performed. If it is not determined that a win has occurred at the beginning of the AT (NO in step S667), the process of step S669 is performed.

  In step S669, since it is determined that the precursor game is to be started (the precursor game flag ON) from the elapsed time, the special state flag is turned OFF. Further, during the execution of the precursor game (during the precursor game), the state is to be controlled to the hell state. Therefore, in step S670, the hell state flag is turned ON, and the instruction function generation processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is other than the “rare combination” (NO in step S663), it is determined in step S671 whether or not an AT first-winning lottery has been won by the AT first-winning lottery in step S661. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the determination processing of step S671 that the first win of the AT has been won (YES in step S671), the processing of step S672 is performed. When the process of step S672 is performed, a situation in which a precursor game is always generated, as described above in step S664. Therefore, before the process of step S672 is performed, by making a precursor lottery (not shown) as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58, the transition to the precursor game can be determined.

  Then, in step S672, a precursor game number lottery is performed, and thereafter, the precursor game number selected in the lottery is set in the variable data “precursor game number” (step S673), and the precursor game flag is turned ON (step S673). Step S674). The processing in steps S672 to S674 is the same as the processing described in steps S664 to S666 and steps 626 to S628 in FIG. Thereafter, the AT internal flag is turned on (step S675), and the processing from step S669 described above is performed.

  If it is not determined in the determination processing of step S671 that the winning at the first time of the AT has been won (NO in step S671), the processing of step S676 is performed.

  The process of step S676 is performed in a situation where the rare combination has not been won in the special mode, and the winning has not been achieved even in the first AT. Referring to FIG. 66, the precursor game is not executed in such a situation. Therefore, before the process of step S676 is performed, by performing the aforesaid lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown), it is possible to determine not to shift to the a precursor game.

  Then, in step S676, the value of the "number of special state games" which is variable data for indicating the number of games in the special mode is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S677, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of special state games is 0. If it is determined that the number of special state games is 0, it means the end of the special mode. After the processing is performed, the instruction function generation processing ends. If it is determined in step S677 that the value of the number of special state games is not 0, it means that the special mode is continued, and the instruction function generation processing is terminated without performing the processing in steps S678 to S680. I do.

  In step S678, a lottery relating to the state transition of the AT lottery game state (state transition lottery B) is performed. In the state transition lottery B, when the current AT lottery gaming state is one of the special states 1 to 3, the state transitions to any one of the low-probability state, the high-precision state, and the super-high-precision state. (Including the continuation of the current state).

  Here, FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams (Nos. 1 to 3) for explaining a lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. FIG. 76, FIG. 77, and FIG. 78 respectively show state transition lottery B lottery tables used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to special state 1, special state 2, or special state 3. This is an example. When performing the state transition lottery, it is possible to recognize which AT lottery gaming state is currently controlled by referring to the value of each state flag (especially a special state flag).

  In each of the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the state of the transfer destination is randomly selected based on the winning combination. Referring to FIG. 76, if the special state 1 is controlled, the state does not shift to the super high accuracy state, and if the winning combination is a rare role, the shift to the high accuracy state is always selected. When the winning combination is a non-rare combination, the transition to the low-probability state or the high-probability state is selected at substantially the same level. Referring to FIG. 77, when the state is controlled to the special state 2, the state does not shift to the low-accuracy state, and the shift to the high-accuracy state or the ultra-high-accuracy state is selected, although the degree varies depending on the winning combination. Is done. Note that there is a tendency that the transition to the super-high-accuracy state is more easily selected when the winning combination is a rare combination than when the winning combination is a non-rare combination. Referring to FIG. 78, when the state is controlled to the special state 3, the state does not shift to the low-accuracy state or the high-accuracy state, and the shift to the ultra-high-accuracy state is always selected. Thus, comparing FIG. 76 to FIG. 78, the AT lottery game state having a high degree of advantage in the relationship of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 (low-precision state <high-accuracy state <ultra-high-accuracy state) It can be understood that the transition is easy to select, and from this point also, the special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3 has a high degree of advantage.

  Then, after the state transition lottery B is performed in step S678, the special mode flag is turned off since the special mode ends (step S679), and the state of the transition destination determined by the state transition lottery B in step S678 is returned. The corresponding status flags are set to ON (step S680), and the instruction function generation processing ends.

  Next, processing in step S681 and subsequent steps performed when it is determined that the hell state flag is not OFF (is ON) in step S662. The situation in which the processing in step S681 is performed is that the AT internal flag is not ON (step S602), the special state flag is not OFF (step S621), and the hell state flag is not OFF (step S662). For example, this corresponds to a state in which an AT game is not executed and the predictive game (both predictor) is executed after the special mode is set.

  The processing performed in steps S681 to S689 is the same as the processing described in steps S641 to S648 in FIG. 58 except for the processing in step S688, and thus details are omitted, and only a simple flow will be described.

  First, the number of precursor games is subtracted (step S681), and it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become zero (step S682). If the number of precursor games has become zero, the precursor game flag is turned off (step S683), a special state transition lottery is performed (step S684), and it is determined whether or not a transition to the special mode has been won. (Step S685) When the transition to the special mode is won, a special state game number lottery is performed (step S686), and the number of the lottery games is set to “special state game number” (step S687). After the status flag is turned ON (step S689), the instruction function generation processing ends. However, at this time, since the mode shifts from the hell state to the special mode, a process of turning off the hell state flag is additionally performed between step S687 and step S689 (step S688).

  If the transition to the special mode has not been won in the processing of step S685, a state transition lottery C is performed (step S690). Here, in the state transition lottery C, similarly to the state transition lottery A described in step S638 of FIG. 58 and the like, the transition destination of the AT lottery game state is selected. However, in the present example, in the state transition lottery C, the transition to the low-probability state is determined with a probability of 100%, so that the next game is forcibly dropped to the low-probability state with a low advantage.

  Here, the situation where the processing of step S690 is performed is such that when the AT internal flag is OFF (NO in step S602) and the hell state flag is ON (NO in step S662), the number of precursor games becomes 0 (step S682). YES), and when the transition to the special state is denied in the special state transition lottery (NO in step S685). Explaining in a specific game situation, the special mode is switched to the special mode after the end of the sign production, and the sign production is performed again by winning the rare role during the special mode (during this time, the hell mode is controlled) Regardless, this corresponds to the case where the AT has not been won, and in this case, in such a case, after the end of the precursor effect after the special mode (that is, at the end of the hell mode), the state is forcibly changed to the low-probability state. Move to

  In the first embodiment, winning the rare role, which is a highly expected role during the special mode (meaning that the game is controlled to the hell state in terms of the AT lottery game state) is simply a precursor game. It is a game situation that is extremely advantageous for the player as compared to shifting to the special mode afterward (however, a mere game or a transition to the special mode is also an advantageous game situation for the player). is there). However, even if such an extremely advantageous game situation can be achieved, but the special game (AT) cannot be won as a result, the low accuracy state in which the degree of advantage is significantly lower than other game states is achieved. I'm trying to fall. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if a game state with a very high degree of advantage (rare role winning in the special mode) appears, but an advantageous result (AT winning) cannot be obtained, a reaction is performed. By setting the worst state (low-precision state), the game machine can be realized with sharpness without providing specifications that are only sweet for the player. In addition, from the viewpoint of the hall side, a gaming machine provided with only modes that are advantageous to the player (specifically, a precursor mode, a special mode, a precursor effect after the special mode, etc.) is less likely to disadvantage the hall. However, if the result of the extremely advantageous game situation ends in failure (AT non-election), the worst state can be shifted to secure the profit on the hall side. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game period controlled to the special state is shorter than the other general AT lottery gaming states (low-probability state, high-probability state, ultra-high-probability state) on average. By doing so, the game balance can be maintained.

  After the state transition lottery C in step S690 is performed, a process of turning off the hell state flag is performed to transition from the previous hell state to the gaming state drawn in the state transition lottery C (step S691). After each state flag (that is, the low-probability state flag) corresponding to the state of the transfer destination selected in the state transfer lottery C is turned on (step S692), the instruction function generation processing ends.

  As described above, the processing of each step shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is performed, whereby the instruction function generation processing (step S61 in FIG. 57) by the main board 409 is performed, and based on the result of the processing, FIG. The processing after step S62 of the indicated instruction function processing is performed.

  Note that the instruction function generation processing performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the contents of each processing described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, but may be applied to processing based on various derived patterns as described below. Can be replaced. In addition, in [11-3-3-3] described later, a derivative pattern of the instruction function generation processing will be described as the instruction function generation processing of the second and third examples.

  For example, in the description of FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, whether or not the precursor game flag is ON (more strictly, whether or not the number of precursor games in the precursor game is 0) is used as a determination trigger to enter the special mode. Although the transition was drawn by lot (for example, steps S632, S642, and S644 in FIG. 58), as an example of a derivative pattern of the instruction function generation process, a strong game (strong warning and weak warning) is provided in the precursor game. The transition to the special mode may be facilitated. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately adjust the degree of transition to the special mode, so that the gaming ability of the slot machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Also, the special state transition lottery and the timing of the state transition based on the lottery result are not limited to the case where the number of precursor games has become zero. For example, the special state transition lottery is performed at an appropriate timing during the precursor game. To the special mode. In such a case, the omen game and the special mode are displayed in a different manner from those shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 by making the omen game and the special mode thereafter look like a series of “aura mode”. Can be configured. More specifically, a game period of 32 games is selected as the “forewarning mode”, and it is determined that the forewarning game is being performed in the game period. By switching to the special mode, the remaining game period of the "aura mode" can be set to the special mode. At this time, even if the precursor game ends as a fake omen, the special mode will be in a gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than before the execution of the fake omen, so if you can transition to the special mode at an early timing, the special mode will take a long time Subsequently, the degree of expectation for AT winning can be increased. Conversely, if the timing of shifting from the precursor game to the special mode is delayed, it is expected that the display of the AT winning result by the precursor effect performed in the precursor game will be long, and the special mode controlled thereafter will re-enter the AT winning. Expectations can be made.

  Also, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by adjusting the distribution of the lottery table regarding the transition to the precursor game (the precursor effect) and the subsequent transition to the special mode (the special state), the precursor game can be performed without transition to the special state. If the winning combination that triggers the execution of the precursor game is the rare role, the pattern in which the AT winning is announced only by the indication effect is 1/2, and the winning role that triggers the execution of the precursor game is the rare role. If it is a non-rare role, it can be set to 100% (may be almost 100%). In this way, when a non-rare role that is normally hard to win in the AT is selected, when the game is developed into a precursor game (or precursor production), the degree of expectation of winning in the AT can be significantly increased.

  In the example shown in FIG. 59, as described in step S663, when the rare role (low winning role) is selected as the winning role during the special mode, the occurrence of the precursor game is preferentially performed. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, the transition from the special mode to the occurrence of the precursor game does not need to be limited to the rare role winning. For example, even when a non-rare role (high winning role) is selected as a winning role during the special mode, the distribution may be made to such an extent that a precursor game is expected to occur. (The order of the bells, regardless of the order of the rare roles, and the order of the bells for the non-rare roles may be regarded as "bells", or the order of the non-rare roles may be regarded as the main "bell.") At this time, the occurrence of the precursor game may be determined at 70% or more. Also, the winning of the first AT in the special mode (step S661 in FIG. 59) may be set to a degree that can be expected for the AT winning even when the high winning combination (for example, bell) is won. At times, 50% or more may win the AT. At this time, in the sorting table illustrated in FIG. 63, the winning value corresponding to the pressing order bell may be changed. By doing in this way, during the special mode, it is possible to obtain a winning combination that can be expected even if a high winning combination that cannot normally be expected for the occurrence of a precursor game or an AT winning can enhance the interest of the player. be able to.

  However, as described above, when the high winning combination is included in the preferential treatment for the sign game occurrence and the AT winning from the special mode, the special mode has an extremely high degree of advantage. From the viewpoint of maintaining, it is preferable to extremely shorten the game period of the special mode (the number of games controlled to the special state). By doing so, while raising the likelihood of the occurrence of a precursor game from the special mode and the AT winning, while shortening the game period of the special mode, the player's expectation of the special mode for a short period of time is increased. Can be even higher.

  When the game period (number of games) in the special mode is extremely shortened as described above, the specific number of games can be determined as follows, for example.

  First, as a first example, when a pushing order bell among high winning combinations is to be a preferential target, an integer value based on a reciprocal of a winning probability of the pushing order bell is set as a special mode game period. According to the lottery table of the winning combination shown in FIG. 49, in the gaming state (general state, bonus internal state) other than the bonus state, the winning rate of the pushing order bell is about 0.49 (calculated from 32000/65535). Therefore, the reciprocal is about 2.04. Therefore, as an integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of the pushing order bell, “2” is used when an integer value approximate to the reciprocal is adopted, and “3” is used when an integer value obtained by rounding up the decimal part of the reciprocal is adopted. Becomes

  In the case where the game period of the special mode is “2 games”, the number of games is the number of games that the player can feel as if it is possible to win a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the pushing order bell) during the game period. Therefore, an effect of increasing the player's willingness to play and feeling of expectation can be expected. When the game period of the special mode is “3 games”, the number of games is theoretically the number of games that can be won in a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the pushing order bell) within the game period (that is, Since the expected winning value is 1 or more), it is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege (the occurrence of a precursor game or the AT winning) is given through the special mode, and it is possible to further increase the player's expectation.

  Next, as a second example, when the push order bell and the replay of the high winning combinations are targeted for preferential treatment, the winning probability of selecting the winning combination to be preferentially treated is higher than in the first example (FIG. According to No. 49, the probability that the push order bell or replay is won is about 0.63 in the general state and about 0.96 in the bonus internal state. Is also shortened, for example, to be limited to “one game”. In the case where the game period of the special mode is set to “1 game”, an opportunity to control the special mode and overturn the failure result is provided only for the next game in which the failure result due to the gaseous omen is shown. Motivation can be sharply increased.

[11-3-3-2. Effect of Instruction Function Generation Processing of First Example]
Note that, when the slot machine 1 has performed the instruction function generation processing (the instruction function generation processing of the first example) as described in [11-3-3-1], the following effects are also provided. Can be realized.

  First, according to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, so that "the gaming machine capable of executing the expected effect expected to shift to the advantageous game is performed during the predetermined game period. Even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied by the expected effect, the transition to the special game state (special mode), which is more advantageous than a plurality of types of the normal game state, in a relatively short game period after the predetermined game period. "Gaming machine to get".

  The above-mentioned “expected effect” corresponds to the “forewar effect” described in the instruction function generation processing of the first example. In the instruction function generating process of the first example, a “prompt effect” can be executed to suggest or teach a player whether or not to shift to an advantageous game (AT game), as described in step S624 in FIG. 58 and the like. As described above, the precursor game in which the precursor effect is performed includes the main precursor indicating that the game is going to the AT game (AT winning) and the gassing precursor indicating that the game is not going to the AT game (AT non-winning). In addition, the precursor game can be said to be a continuous effect game that is performed in a delay period from the game in which the lottery relating to the transition to the AT game (AT initial hit lottery) is performed to the game in which the result is displayed.

  Then, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, after the start of the lottery of the AT, the drawback is executed, and even if the transition to the AT game is denied as a result, the special mode ( Special state). Specifically, this corresponds to shifting to the special mode (special state) when the special state shift lottery shown in step S644 of FIG. 58 is won. When the process of step S644 is performed, the slot machine 1 is in a state where the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 in a state where the AT has not been won (internally not won). In other words, it is possible to shift to the special mode when the end is completed after the gassing omen is performed (see FIG. 74 for the lottery table).

  Further, when the instruction function generation processing of the first example is performed, the special state controlled when the special state transition lottery is won is, as described in FIG. 63 and the like, another AT lottery game state (so-called normal state). The game state corresponds to the game state, specifically, the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state). It can be said that this is an advantageous mode (special mode). In the example of FIG. 63, when the winning combination is "rare combination" while being controlled to the special state, the AT first hit with a considerably high probability of at least about 84% (55000/65535) or more. You can win. However, in the instruction function generation processing of the first example, the situation in which the game is played in the “special mode” is the non-AT state, and the superiority of the “special mode” is not as high as in the special gaming state (AT state).

  The point that the period of transition to the special mode is “relatively short game period” is, for example, that the average number of staying games in the low-accuracy state, the high-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state, which are normal game states, is more special. This is based on the fact that the number of games controlled in the mode (the number of special state games) is small, and this detailed description will be described later.

  From the above, the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed is described as “a gaming machine capable of executing a sign effect expected to shift to an advantageous game, shifting to an advantageous game by an sign effect. May be shifted to a special mode that is advantageous to the player even if the result is negative. " In the conventional gaming machines, if the result of the precursor effect ends in failure (AT non-winning), the gaming value spent for digesting the gassing precursor in which the precursor effect was performed becomes useless for the player. As a result, there is a problem that the player's sense of loss is increased and the interest is reduced. However, according to the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, as described above, the game can be shifted to the special mode that is advantageous to the player even after the gaseous omen, so that the slot machine 1 consumes the gaseous omen. The compensated game value can be compensated (compensated for), and the sense of loss of the game value due to the gaseous omen can be suppressed, so that it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play the game.

  Further, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, three types of low-accuracy state, high-accuracy state, and ultra-high-accuracy state are given as the AT lottery game state before the indication game (indication effect) is started. However, the special states (special states 1-3) can be more advantageous states for the AT than any of them (see FIG. 63). According to the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, even if the shift to the advantageous game is denied by the precursor effect, it is more advantageous than before the precursor effect is executed. It is possible to shift to a special mode (for example, a special state), and it is possible to provide a game state with a high degree of expectation on the contrary by the occurrence of a gaseous precursor. Originally, the gaseous omen could discourage the player by being notified of a result that does not lead to an advantageous game (for example, an AT game). However, the slot in the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed is performed. According to the machine 1, by connecting to the special mode having a high degree of expectation via the gaseous omen, it is possible to provide an expected value that can supplement the game value consumed by the player for the gaseous omen.

  Further, in the instruction function generation process of the first example, the state relating to the advantageous game (corresponding to the AT lottery gaming state) even during the execution of the gaseous omen having the result of denying the shift to the advantageous game. A transfer lottery can be performed. Specifically, it corresponds to the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. In the state transition lottery A, the state transition is determined by lottery using the lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 based on the AT lottery game state controlled at the time point. Except in the case where the state is controlled to the highest super-high-precision state at the time point, the promotion probability of transitioning to a more advantageous state than the time point is set higher than the demotion probability of transitioning to a disadvantageous state at the time point. For example, in FIG. 71, the status is changed from the lowest-probability state to the lottery state. Also, for example, in FIG. 72, the rate of demoting to the low-probability state is 600/65535 even when the most probable non-rare role is elected, whereas the rate of promotion to the ultra-high-confidence state is 63625/65535. It is overwhelmingly promoted.

  As described above, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example, the state transition lottery can be performed even while the gaseous omen is being performed, and the advantage can be increased by the state transition lottery. Is executed and the transition to the advantageous game is denied, but the transition to the high-priority state can be expected to compensate for the loss caused by the negative result, and the player's willingness to play is reduced. It has the effect of suppressing.

  In the instruction function generation process of the first example, when the gassing omen is performed, the AT lottery game state (low-probability state, high-probability state) that can be controlled normally in the specific game in which the number of remaining omen games has become 0 Since it is possible to perform a lottery to shift to the special mode which is more advantageous than the super-high accuracy state), when the lottery is won, the lottery table (a lottery table for the special state) which is advantageous in the subsequent game is used. A shift lottery to an advantageous game (AT initial hit lottery) can be performed. More specifically, the transition lottery to the special mode corresponds to the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 in FIG. 58 or step S684 in FIG. 59, and the subsequent transition lottery to the advantageous game is performed in step S661 in FIG. This is equivalent to a lottery at the beginning of AT. In the AT initial winning lottery, the lottery table according to the AT lottery game state is used as shown in FIG. 114. According to FIG. 114, any one of the low accuracy state, the high accuracy state, and the ultra high accuracy state It can be seen that the special states 1 to 3 have a higher probability of winning the first AT.

  Also, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, it has been described that the special state transition lottery is performed when the number of remaining signs games is 0. The special state transition lottery may be performed when the number of precursor games of is a predetermined number other than 0 without being limited to zero. By doing so, the state transition lottery (special state transition lottery) can be executed even during the gassing warning, so that even during the gassing warning, a state more advantageous than the current AT lottery gaming state. (Special mode) becomes possible, and even if a gossip that cannot be expected to go to an advantageous game is executed, all investment in the game value (medals) required to consume the gossip is wasted. It can be expected to have the effect of making up for the investment.

  In other words, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, a transition is made to a special mode (for example, a special state) in which a good lottery table is used in the specific game during the gaseous sign (or immediately after the gaseous sign). The feature is that a lottery can be performed.

  Further, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the period controlled in the special mode is a “relatively short game period (relatively short period)”, and the game period is the normal game state (low accuracy). State, high-accuracy state, ultra-high-accuracy state). More specifically, as described in the state transition lottery A of the instruction function generation processing (for example, step S638 in FIG. 58), when the lottery tables in FIG. 49 and FIGS. The average number of staying games in the certain state is about 120 games, the average number of staying games in the high certainty state is about 25 games, and the average number of staying games in the very high certainty state is about 36 games. On the other hand, the number of staying games in the special state (special state 1 to special state 3) is selected from 2 games to 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), so that the number of staying games is smaller than each state in the normal gaming state. A short period. Then, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generating process is performed, when the precursor game advantageous to the player is the drawback (ie, when the shift to the AT game is denied), the comparison is made. Since it is possible to shift to such a special state for a short period of time, even if the expected effect in the precursor game ends in a failure result, an opportunity for a re-chance can be given by the special state. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, it is possible to realize a gaming ability different from the gaming ability of the conventional gaming machine in which the precursor state and the normal state are repeated. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Further, according to the instruction function generating process of the first example, when the rare role which is the high expected combination (low winning combination from the viewpoint of the winning probability) is selected as the winning combination in the above-mentioned special state, the high combination is set. The precursor game is started again with a probability (100% in the description of FIG. 59), but if the precursor game ends in a failure, the gaming state after the precursor game is low with a low degree of advantage. It is forcibly dropped to a certain state (see state transition lottery C in step S690 of FIG. 59). Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in which such an instruction function generating process is performed, even if an advantageous precursor game ends in failure, the high expected combination (low winning combination) is won in a relatively short period thereafter. As a result, a plurality of situations that are advantageous to the player can be provided in a multiplex (or continuous) manner, since the precursor game can be controlled to an advantageous special mode that can appear again. However, on the other hand, in spite of the fact that such multiple advantageous situations are provided, if those results are unsuccessful (without shifting to the AT game), the subsequent game state is set as a reaction. By forcibly dropping to a low-probability state with a low advantage (in this example, the lowest gaming state), it is possible to provide a gaming machine that not only has a sweet gaming machine but also considers the profit of the hall side Can be.

  In addition, from the viewpoint of securing the profit on the hall side, the special state is an advantageous gaming state for the player (that is, disadvantageous for the hall side). Although it is not preferable, in the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the period in which the special state is controlled as described above corresponds to the normal gaming state (low-precision state, high-precision state, ultra-high-precision state). Since the number of stay games is shorter than the average number of stay games, the disadvantage on the hall side can be suppressed.

  In the instruction function generation processing of the first example, the transition to the special mode (special state) is performed by the special state transition lottery described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. May be displayed as points or the like to indicate to the player. The timing for giving points and the like is not particularly limited. Further, such a suggestion effect may be performed by a peripheral substrate (for example, a sub substrate 510) instead of the main substrate 409. And when such a suggestion effect is performed, it can be expected to raise the interest of the player.

  In the instruction function generating process of the first example, when the special mode as described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59 is performed after the end of the gassing omen, a special effect (special state suggestion effect) indicating that the special mode is being performed. ) May be executed. In the special state suggestion effect, for example, the content of the continuous effect (the content of the indication effect to return) which may occur when the rare role is won during the special mode may be suggested. Further, when a special state suggestion effect is executed, a continuous effect having a higher degree of expectation may be easily selected from a plurality of types of continuous effects. Specifically, taking the lottery tables of FIGS. 94 and 95 as an example, when a special state suggestion effect is executed, when a precursor effect (continuous effect) occurs, a weak system effect (weak story) , Weaker battles) than strong productions (strong stories, strong battles). By doing in this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player only by the appearance of the special state suggestion effect.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1, the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, so that "the gaming machine capable of executing any one of the plurality of effects including the specific effect indicating the determination result regarding the shift to the advantageous game" In the game after the specific effect is executed, it is also possible to realize a gaming machine that can execute a predetermined effect at a stage before the result of the success or failure in the specific effect is displayed.

  The above “specific effect” corresponds to the “continuous effect” described in the instruction function generation process of the first example, and “in the game after the specific effect is executed, before the result of the success / failure in the specific effect is indicated. The state in which the “predetermined stage effect” is executed is, for example, the “special mode” described in the instruction function generating process, or the precursor game (“the special mode”) executed again based on the fact that the rare role has been won in the “special mode”. Or continuous production in the precursor game).

  More specifically, according to the instruction function generation process of the first example described in [11-3-3-1], the “continuous effect” appears in the precursor effect performed in the precursor game, It is possible to teach the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game) (see the description of step S624 and the like in FIG. 58). The sign effect including the continuous effect is included in the main sign indicating transition to the AT game (AT win) or the gas sign indicating not transition to the AT game (AT non-win). Therefore, the continuous production performed with the gaseous omen does not indicate a shift to the advantageous game.

  In addition, the “continuous effect” may be a mode in which one game is completed and the transition to the AT game is taught, but in many cases, a continuous effect is performed over a plurality of games. In addition, in the case where the “predictive effect” in the first embodiment is regarded as one of the “continuous effects”, the effect is necessarily performed over a plurality of games. Further, the “plural games” here may be constituted by a game in which an internal lottery regarding a winning combination is performed once for each game (a so-called main game), or a pseudo-game during one main game. The game may be constituted by a game that creates a mode of a plurality of games (so-called pseudo game, pseudo game), or may be a mixture thereof.

  Here, with a conventional gaming machine capable of producing a continuous production during a precursor game, if the result of the continuous production denies winning the advantageous game, for a while thereafter, the interest of the player will be increased. There was not a small problem that the data continued to decrease. To give a specific example, if a continuous production during a precursor game appears by, for example, winning the rare role in a high probability state of AT winning, the player strongly expects the AT winning. When continuous production ended in failure, disappointment caused a sudden drop in expectations, and the reduced interest was sometimes not immediately restored.

  On the other hand, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, in the slot machine 1, it is assumed that the result of the precursor effect (continuous effect) does not indicate the winning to the advantageous game (transition to AT). (Ie, even if the precursor effect is a gaseous omen), after the gaseous omen has ended, it is possible to shift to the special mode that leads to the occurrence of the next precursor game, so when the failure result is shown in the first precursory effect It is possible to reproduce the effect of the previous stage. In addition, since the sign game can be executed again based on, for example, winning the high expected role (rare role) during the special mode after the gaseous sign, the sign effect in such a subsequent sign game can be performed. It is possible to reproduce an effect state at a stage earlier than when a failure result is shown in the first precursor effect.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the interest of the player is continuously increased due to the negative result of the continuous effect as in the case of the conventional gaming machine described above. Even if the continuous production shows a result that denies winning the advantageous game without lowering it, by making it possible to re-appear in the stage at the stage before the result showing whether the winning to the advantageous game is shown or not This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example as described above is performed, after the result indicating that the winning of the advantageous game is denied in the “preceding continuous effect” is indicated, Even if the `` effect '' appears, the result of winning the advantageous game is not necessarily indicated by the effect following the `` preceding effect '' or the `` preceding effect '', and the winning of the advantageous game is denied. Sometimes. When the `` previous stage effect '' appears by transitioning to the special mode after the end of the gaseous omen, whether or not the winning result for the advantageous game is indicated is determined during the transition to the special mode or during the special mode It is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, winning combination).

  In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example as described above is performed, the “previous stage effect” indicates that the same effect as the “continuous stage effect” appears again. The effect may be any effect that can be suggested, and need not be an effect included in the “continuous effect”. Then, even if the “previous stage effect” appears, whether or not the same effect as the “continuous stage effect” appears is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, winning combination).

  Further, the special state controlled in the special mode is characterized in that the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is higher than the state before the execution of the continuous production (for example, the low-precision state, the high-precision state, the ultra-high-precision state). Therefore, according to such a slot machine 1, the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is controlled to be different between before and after the continuous effect, so that the continuous effect is achieved. Even if the result does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game, the player's expectation can be maintained until after the continuous production.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machines, continuous production that can be expected to shift to advantageous gaming increases the expectation of the player itself, but when the result of the continuous production ends in failure (for example, AT non-winning). Has the aspect that the degree of expectation drops at a stretch. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generating process of the first example, even if the result of the continuous production does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game and is a continuous production in the gaseous omen, Since the special mode that can be controlled (for example, the special state) has a higher advantage than before the appearance of the continuous production, even if the result of the continuous production fails, a higher expected state is created thereafter. It has a special effect in that it can be used. In other words, the failure result of the continuous production is not merely an end of the expected period, but a stepping stone to a more superior high expected period, thereby increasing the interest of the player over multiple stages and increasing the expectations of the player. The effect is that the feeling can be maintained for a long time.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation process of the first example is performed, the transition ratio for transitioning to the special mode after the failure of the continuous production is determined based on the production mode of the produced continuous production. A difference may be given to the ratio. Specifically, for example, as the continuous production with a low degree of expectation appears, the probability of transition to the special mode when the result of the continuous production ends in failure may be increased (high probability). . In such a case, if a continuous production with a low degree of expectation appears, the player's expectation that the result of the continuous production will be successful (the player will win the transition to the advantageous game) is relatively low. On the other hand, however, since the probability of transition to the special mode having a higher degree of advantage than before the appearance of the continuous production becomes higher, the expectation of the player to the special mode is raised, and as a result, the player's Expectations can be sustained.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the state transition lottery can be performed even during the execution of the continuous effect, and the specific game (for example, the final game) during the execution of the continuous effect can be performed. In), the state transition lottery can be performed using a lottery table that is better than the normal state transition lottery. Specifically, the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. 58 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed during the execution of the continuous effect. Further, the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 in FIG. 58 or step S684 in FIG. 59 corresponds to a state transition lottery performed using a better table than the normal state transition lottery in the specific game in which the continuous effect is being executed. . In this way, the slot machine 1 enables the state transition lottery with different degrees of advantage during the execution of the continuous effect (including the end time), thereby enabling the state transition relating to the advantageous game during the execution of the continuous effect. In addition to expecting (state transition lottery A), in a specific game, it is possible to expect a state transition (special state transition lottery) relating to an advantageous game in a situation with a higher degree of advantage. Therefore, during the continuous production, the player is expected not only to expect the result of the transition to the advantageous game indicated by the continuous production but also to be expected to win the future advantageous game by the state transition. It is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

  In particular, when the special game in which the special state transition lottery is performed is the final game of the continuous production, whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the superior special mode in the game when the transition to the special mode is performed. Not only can the player be entertained, but also in the game before the transition, the player can enjoy whether or not to transition to the advantageous game (AT transition) depending on the result of the continuous production until the final game of the continuous production. Therefore, the interest of the player can be particularly enhanced.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, when the game of the next game of the final game in which the continuous effect is performed is started (for example, at the time of the start operation of the start lever 210), the state is changed. A transfer lottery may be performed. In such a case, as in the case where the final game of the continuous production is the specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed as described above, the game is shifted to the advantageous game depending on the result of the continuous production until the final game of the continuous production. Even if the continuous production ends in a failure while the player enjoys whether to perform (AT transition) or not, the special state transition lottery that can transition to the special state is performed thereafter, which is advantageous. Since the player can enjoy whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the special mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation over a long period of time and to particularly enhance interest.

  Also, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, a screen display such as "preparing for a continuous effect" or "Is it going to be a rare role now?" Even if the continuous production in the precursor game executed before the transition to the special mode ends in a failure result, the player can be greatly expected that the precursor game and the continuous production will occur again. Discouragement of the player due to the failure result can be suppressed.

  When the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed in the slot machine 1, the "special mode" is not a simple production mode, but a winning probability or the like (for example, an AT initial hit probability) related to a special game or a special state. This is the preferred mode. For example, in the case of the instruction function generating process described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, if the winning combination is “rare combination” in the “special mode”, the preferential treatment of always winning at the first time of the AT is given. Measures are in place. Also, in the "special mode", the probability that a precursor effect (which may be read as a continuous effect here) reoccurs is set to be high, so that the expectation for the AT winning due to the reoccurrence of the continuous effect may be increased. it can. Regarding the gaming state controlled in such a “special mode”, in the case of the AT instruction function generation processing described in [11-3-3-1], the following cases are conceivable.

  The first case is a case where a state in which transition is possible only when a specific condition is satisfied and a state in which the state is selected using a dedicated lottery table are set. Specifically, the “special modes 1 to 3” shown in FIG. As described in the description of FIG. 63 and the like, “special states 1 to 3” are states in which transition is possible only when specific conditions in the precursor game are satisfied, and are selected using a dedicated lottery table. It is an AT lottery game state. In the slot machine 1, when a special special game state is set in the “special mode” as described above, a special game state that is not selected in other situations can be used. It is possible to extremely enhance the superiority of a game to be played.

  The second case is a case where any one of the states that can be shifted from the normal state is set, not only when the specific condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, the “ultra-high accuracy state” shown in FIG. 63 is given. The “ultra-high-accuracy state” is an AT lottery game state that can be shifted from the normal state to the low-accuracy state and the high-accuracy state, but since it is the highest level of advantage among them, The AT lottery game state controlled in the "special mode" is also preferable. When the “ultra-high-accuracy state” is selected by the state transition lottery performed in the predetermined game of the continuous production, the game in the “special mode” is started. In the slot machine 1, by setting a specific game state that can be shifted from the normal state in the "special mode", an increase in the necessary area of the memory due to preparing a new dedicated game state is suppressed. In addition, it is possible to realize a wide range of playability while suppressing the amount of processing by the CPU 1110.

  In addition, when the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, a predetermined lottery (specifically, a special state shift lottery of step S644 in FIG. 58 or step S684 in FIG. 59) is performed, so that after the continuous effect, Although it is possible to shift to the special mode, the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to the special mode may be displayed as a point or the like to indicate to the player. The timing for giving points and the like is not particularly limited. Further, such a suggestion effect may be performed by a peripheral substrate (for example, a sub substrate 510) instead of the main substrate 409. When such a suggestive effect is performed, it can be expected that the player's interest in shifting to the special mode will be increased.

  In the instruction function generation processing of the first example, in the processing flow after the winning of the special state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the continuous production of the gaseous omen, and the special state transition (I.e., the transition to the special mode) is determined, the control immediately shifts to the special mode after the end of the continuous production. Further, as described above, in the special mode, the state is controlled to a state different from that before the execution of the continuous effect (a more superior state). By immediately shifting to the special mode after the continuous production in this way, the slot machine 1 can change the degree of expectation in the game before and after the execution of the continuous production, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's expectation. it can. In particular, in the case where the degree of expectation is higher after the execution of the continuous effect than before the execution, the player's expectation can be strongly maintained.

  Also, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, the processing example of performing the special state transition lottery when the number of remaining predictive games at the time of gassing predictive time is 0 has been described. Since a continuous effect (a part of the predictive effect) is always performed during the game, a situation where the number of remaining predictive games is 0 means the final game of the continuous effect. According to such a slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the transition control to the special mode is determined in the final game of the continuous production. In this case, the transition to the special mode is performed before the final game ( That is, since the loss due to the continuous production is not confirmed and displayed, the player can enjoy the possibility of the winning result (AT transition winning) by the continuous production.

[11-3-3-3. Another example of instruction function generation processing (second example, third example)]
Next, another example (second example, third example) of the instruction function generation processing in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The instruction function generation processing of the second and third examples is mainly described in [11-3-3-1] in terms of control processing of a game state (AT lottery game state) determined by the instruction function generation processing. Since the present embodiment has a feature different from that of the instruction function generation processing (the instruction function generation processing of the first example), the description of the same configuration and processing as those of the first example will be omitted to avoid duplication, and differences will be mainly described. .

  FIG. 79 is a view for explaining transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation processing of each example. Specifically, FIG. 79 (A) shows a transition example in the instruction function generation process of the first example, FIG. 79 (B) shows a transition example in the instruction function generation process of the second example, and FIG. C) shows a transition example in the instruction function generation processing of the third example. FIG. 79 shows a gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) controlled over time and the degree of expectation. The expectation here is mainly an expectation regarding winning of a special game (transition to AT), and in FIG. 79, the higher the expected value in the vertical axis direction, the higher the expected value, and the lower the expected value. It means that the value is low. In addition, a plurality of points (a1 to a5, b1 to b5, c1 to c7) in the figure indicate characteristic timings in respective transition examples. Hereinafter, the control of the characteristic game state in the instruction function generation processing of the second and third examples will be described in comparison with the control of the game state in the instruction function generation processing of the first example.

  First, the transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation process of the first example will be described along the transition example shown in FIG. 79 (A) while showing the correspondence with each process of FIGS. In FIG. 79 (A), the game is started from a normal game state in which the AT has not been won (and no internal AT has been won), and at this time, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low-probability state. Then, at a1 in the middle of the normal gaming state, as a result of the state transition lottery (step S639 in FIG. 58), the AT lottery gaming state transitioned to the high-accuracy state.

  Thereafter, the game proceeds in a normal game state, and at a2, the award winning lottery is selected (step S633 in FIG. 58) by selecting the winning combination of the rare role, for example, so that the aura game (aura game A) is started. Was. However, the precursor game A started at a2 is assumed to be a gaseous precursor that has not been won at the beginning of the AT. At the start of the game A, which is an abortion sign at a2, the state transition lottery A is performed for the transition of the AT lottery game state (step S638 in FIG. 58), but it is assumed here that the high-accuracy state has continued.

  In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, the transition of the AT lottery game state is not particularly different from the normal game state while the precursor game A is performed by the gaseous precursor. Then, at a3, the precursor game A is terminated after the precursor game number determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has elapsed, but the special state transition lottery performed at the end (step S644 in FIG. 58). If it is determined that the game has won the shift to the special mode, the game in the special mode is immediately started by controlling the AT lottery game state to the special state (one of the special states 1 to 3) (FIG. 58). Step S648). Note that while being controlled in the special mode, the game is played in a state where the advantage is higher than the normal state (low-precision state, high-precision state, ultra-high-precision state) until then [11-3-3]. -1].

  Next, in a4, it is assumed that in the special mode game started from a3, a precursor game (a precursor game B) is started, for example, when the winning combination of the rare role is selected (step S666 in FIG. 59). Note that the precursor game A started at a4 is a gaseous precursor that has not been won at the beginning of the AT. When the foreboding game B is started at a4, the transition to the AT lottery game state is controlled to the hell state by turning off the special state flag and turning on the hell state flag (FIG. 59). Steps S669 and S670).

  In the case where the instruction function generating process of the first example is performed, in the game controlled to be in the hell state, the lottery of the precursor game is not performed (or a lottery table that is difficult to win is used) without winning the initial AT lottery. The precursor game B is executed during the number of precursor games determined in (Step S664 of FIG. 59).

  Then, at a5, the precursor game B ends, the result of the AT non-winning is notified by the precursor effect (continuous effect) in the final game, and thereafter, the game returns to the normal game state. In the case where the precursor game B is the real precursor when the first winning of the AT is won, the transition to the AT game (AT winning) is notified at a5, and the AT game is started thereafter.

  Next, transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation processing of the second example will be described with reference to the transition example of FIG. 79 (B).

  In the instruction function generation process of the second example, when the execution of the expected effect over a plurality of games indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous game state is performed is determined, the expected effect is performed by the internal lottery performed during the execution of the expected effect. It is characterized in that another opportunity that can lead to execution is suppressed. When the expected effect is executed in response to a certain internal lottery result, the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed has an execution form corresponding to the expected effect determined to be executed. In the case where the effect of the expected effect is determined based on the result of the internal lottery such as the winning combination lottery, the purpose of treating the result of the internal lottery as important can be realized.

  In the instruction function generation process of the second example, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), as a specific control example of the game state for realizing the above-described purpose, when the execution of the expected effect is determined. Then, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the lottery state is controlled to a low expected state (for example, a hell state) to suppress the shift to the advantageous gaming state.

  First, the processing of b1 shown in FIG. 79B is the same as the processing of a1 in FIG. Next, in b2 of FIG. 79 (B), the foreplay lottery game A of the gaseous omen is started by winning the precursory lottery (step S633 of FIG. 58), for example, by selecting the winning combination of the rare role. Here, in the instruction function generation process of the second example, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low expectation state (specifically, for example, a hell state) while the precursor game A based on the gaseous precursor is performed. By controlling to the hell state, even if the rare role is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination performed during the precursor game A, it is possible to prevent the AT winning or the execution of the new precursor game from being selected. .

  Then, at b3, when the precursor game number determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses and the precursor game A ends, the special state shift lottery performed at the end (step S644 in FIG. 58). If the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (one of special states 1 to 3), and the game in the special mode is immediately started (step S648 in FIG. 58). . It should be noted that during the special mode, the game is played in a state where the advantage is higher than the normal state (low-precision state, high-precision state, ultra-high-precision state) up to that point. The same is true.

  Thereafter, if the execution of the precursor game B is determined during the special mode game, the precursor game B is started at b4, and the precursor game B ends at b5 when the number of the precursor games elapses and the precursor game B ends. The result (AT non-win / AT win) is shown. The processing of this series of flows is the same as a4 and a5 in FIG.

  Note that the instruction function generation process of the second example is not limited to only the process of realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79 (B). , A precursor effect, or a continuous effect), it is possible to control the game state so as to make it difficult to win the advantageous game state.

  Further, when the instruction function generating process of the second example is performed, the slot machine 1 determines whether or not the expected state is to be executed at least at any predetermined timing from when the execution of the expected state is determined to when the expected state is completed. The lottery state can be lowered to a low expected state.

  Next, transition of the AT lottery game state in the instruction function generation processing of the third example will be described with reference to the transition example of FIG. 79 (C).

  In the instruction function generation process of the third example, when an expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is performed is executed, an advantageous winning combination having a high degree of expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state (corresponding to “high expected combination”). If a rare role is selected as the winning role, it is possible to execute another expected performance triggered by the fact that the advantageous winning role is selected while teaching the result of the above-mentioned expected performance. It is characterized by doing. In the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, when an expected effect is executed in response to a certain internal lottery result, the execution mode of the expected effect is determined based on another internal lottery result. For example, if the player wins the execution of another expected effect based on the result of another internal lottery described above, both the earlier expected effect and another expected effect It is a gaming machine that can realize respectful control.

  In the instruction function generation process of the third example, as shown in FIG. 79C, execution of an expected effect (an earlier expected effect) as a specific control example of a game state for realizing the above-described object. If the execution of another expected effect (later expected effect) is determined during the execution, the execution of the previous expected effect is continued, and at the end thereof, the result of the expected effect is displayed. Is executed.

  First, the processing of c1 shown in FIG. 79 (C) is the same as that of c1 in FIG. Next, in c2 of FIG. 79 (C), the award winning lottery is selected (step S633 of FIG. 58), for example, and the winning combination of the rare role is selected, so that the precursor game A of the gaseous precursor is started. Here, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, during the execution of the precursor game A based on the drawback, special transition control (specifically, hell) as in the instruction function generation process of the second example regarding the AT lottery game state is performed. It is assumed that the state transition lottery A is performed, for example, similarly to the instruction function generation processing of the first example, without performing the transition control to the state.

  Thereafter, it is assumed that the winning combination of the rare combination is selected at c3 during the execution of the precursor game A. At this time, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, a precursor lottery based on the rare combination is performed, and if an execution of a new precursor game (a precursor game C) is won by the precursor lottery, the execution of the precursor game C is A process of delaying at least after the end of the precursor game A is performed. At this time, the number of predictive games for the predictive game C is also drawn, but the selected number of predictive games is set in variable data different from the number of predictive games corresponding to the currently running predictive game A. In addition, the precursor game C is a gaseous precursor that has not been won at the beginning of the AT, and as a result of the state transition lottery (for example, the state transition lottery A) based on the winning combination of the rare role being performed in c3, the AT lottery game state is extremely high. Assume that you have been promoted to high-accuracy status.

  Then, at c4, the precursor game number determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses and the precursor game A ends, and at the end, the precursor game A results (AT Transfer non-election) is taught. Thus, the precursor game A ends at c4, but since the precursor game C whose execution has been delayed at c3 is stocked, the precursor game C is started. In FIG. 79 (c), no special lottery is performed for the AT lottery game state from the end of the precursor game A to the start of the precursor game C.

  As one of the processes included in the instruction function generation process of the third example, a predetermined connection period may be provided between the end of the precursor game A and the start of the precursor game C in c4. Alternatively, a stir effect that may be used to predict the start of the precursor game C during the connection period may be performed.

  Then, the foreboding game C is performed until the number of foreboding games determined by the foreboding game number lottery elapses, and at the end thereof, the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the foreboding effect (continuous effect). Then, at c5, if the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the precursor game C and the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (one of the special states 1 to 3). The game in the special mode is started immediately.

  Next, at c6 in the special mode game started at c5, when the execution of the precursor game (the precursor game B) is determined, for example, when the winning combination of the rare role is selected, the precursor game B is executed. Be started. Then, as shown in c7, when the precursor game B is a fake precursor, the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the precursor effect (continuous effect) at the end of the elapse of the precursor game number, and thereafter, returns to the normal game state. . If the precursor game B is the precursor, the transition to the AT game (AT win) is notified at the time of c7, and the AT game is started thereafter.

  Supplementing such processing of FIG. 79 (C), if the rare role that triggers the execution of the precursor game C is won during the execution of the precursor game A (gase precursor), the predetermined number of precursor games is reduced. The precursor game A is continued without being changed, and after the precursor game A ends, the precursor game C is started. Specifically, for example, when the number of the precursor games of the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, even if the rare role is won in the tenth game (the remaining six games), the precursor game A is the remaining six games. Continued.

  Note that the instruction function generation processing of the third example is not limited to the processing for realizing the transition example shown in FIG. 79C, but is based on an expected effect (corresponding to a precursor effect or a continuous effect in a precursor game). While teaching the result, another expected effect can be executed when the advantageous winning combination (high expected combination, rare combination) is selected. " Hereinafter, some other processing examples will be described.

  First, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, when an opportunity that leads to the execution of another expected effect is established during the execution of the expected effect (the rare role of determining the execution of the precursor game C during the execution of the precursor game A is useful). In the case of winning, the number of predictive games in which the predictive game C is executed may be determined by a lottery in the established game of the opportunity as described with reference to FIG. The sign game lottery may be performed when the sign effect is completed.

  Further, in FIG. 79 (C), when it is determined that another gasse omen (an omen game C) is executed in response to a win of a highly expected combination (for example, a rare role) during the gaseous omen (an omen game A), It is assumed that the precursor game C is executed in such a manner that the gaseous omen is reset after the end of the previous gaseous omen, but in the case where the rare role is won a plurality of times during the gaseous omen, all rare role elections (however, If an aura game (gase warning) is reset for an AT-winning rare role, the aura game may continue forever. In the instruction function generation process of the third example, in order to solve such a problem, when a plurality of highly expected winning combinations are won in a precursor game (especially during a precursor), a precursor game (a precursor) is reset. May be limited. As a specific example of the process of limiting the upper limit number of the precursor game (gase precursor) that is reset when a plurality of high expected combinations are won during one precursor game (gase precursor), the upper limit number Until it reaches, it may be processed to determine the resetting of the predictive game each time it wins the high expected combination, or a plurality of winnings of the high expected combination in a single predictive game may be collectively determined as the upper limit. Processing may be performed to determine the number of precursor games to be reset within the range of the number of times. Note that the upper limit number can be set to an arbitrary number. However, the gaseous omen tells a disadvantageous result to the player that the AT is not won. Therefore, in order to prevent the disadvantageous result from being repeatedly taught, the upper limit is set. It is desirable to set the number of times to at least one.

  Further, in the instruction function generation processing of the third example, during the gaseous omen, among the highly expected roles, the higher highly expected roles that are particularly highly expected (for example, strong cherries, strong watermelons, strong opportunities such as strong chance eyes, etc.) If the role is won a plurality of times, the gaseous omen may be forcibly reset after the end of the current gaseous omen. More specifically, in the case where the strong rare role is won a plurality of times during the precursor game A, even if the execution of the precursor game C is not determined by the precursor lottery based on each strong rare role winning, After the completion of A, the precursor game C may be forcibly executed. In addition, the number of wins of the high-ranking expected combination for forcibly resetting the precursor game can be set to any number from one to a plurality of times.

  Further, in the instruction function generation process of the third example, the presentation mode in the precursor game (the precursor game C) set after the end of the forewarning precursor game (the precursor game A) is the same as that of the simple precursor game. It may be displayed, but may be displayed in an effect mode that allows the player to feel the connection with the precursor game A.

  For example, the precursor game C may be executed while making it appear as if the precursor game A is continuing. In such a case, by not deleting both the number of games of the precursor game A and the number of the precursor games C, it is possible to respect the game period allocated to both the precursor games, and the precursor game A is apparently smaller than usual. Since it can be seen that the number of games has been extended, it can be expected that the expectation of the player is maintained and improved as a special situation.

  Further, for example, the result of the precursor game A may be always displayed in a continuous effect (replaceable with the precursor effect), and then the precursor game C may be started. In such a case, an effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the precursor game A is performed, so that the winning combination (internal lottery result) that triggered the execution of the precursor game A is taken care of. At a different timing, an effect (continuous effect) for determining the result of the precursor game C is performed, so that the winning combination that has triggered the execution of the precursor game C can be important. In the instruction function generation process of the third example, from the viewpoint of cherishing the internal lottery result, the effect form (the precursor game C as if the precursor game A is continued) shown in the previous paragraph is more important than the effect form shown in the previous paragraph. Is desirably controlled to the effect mode shown in (1) (the result of each precursor game is surely taught).

  In the instruction function generating process of the third example, as described above, when the execution of the precursor game C is determined during the execution of the precursor game A, the precursor game C is reset in a mode in which the precursor game is reset after the completion of the precursor game A. Is executed, but a period from when the execution of the precursor game C is determined to when the remaining game number of the precursor game A is consumed (for example, when the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, the 10th game For the precursor game A when the execution of the precursor game C is determined (six remaining games for the precursor game A), the result display (the indication of whether or not to shift to the AT) is displayed in each of the precursor games A and C based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination. ) May be shortened by a predetermined amount within a range that does not hinder the above. In the specific example, when the number of remaining signs game A is six, this corresponds to changing the number of remaining signs games so that the sign game A ends with three games. By performing the instruction function generating process of the third example, an expected effect (corresponding to an effect that appears in a precursor game) based on each internal lottery result can be executed, and the result display is taught. be able to. Since the running of the precursor game (the precursor game A) is shortened, the start timing of the reset precursor game (the precursor game C) can be advanced. The expected performance can enhance the interest of the player.

[11-3-3-4. Effect of instruction function generation processing of second example]
According to the slot machine 1, by executing the instruction function generating process of the second example, the "advantageous game advantageous to the player under any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation degrees" In the gaming machine in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state in which is executed is performed by lottery, and the expected production indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is performed based on the result of the lottery is performed over a plurality of games, the execution of the expected production is performed. Is determined, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that can change the appearance ratio of the expected effect so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect in the game after the determination. is there.

  The “advantageous game state” corresponds to the “AT state” in the instruction function generation processing of the second example, and similarly, the “expected effect” corresponds to the “sign effect”. In the instruction function generating process of the second example, the hell state flag is turned ON when the start of the precursor game period in which the precursor effect is performed is determined (steps S666 and S674 in FIG. 59) (step in FIG. 59). By performing S670), the hell state is controlled during the precursor game. When the game is controlled to be in the hell state, the winning at the beginning of a new AT is suppressed (see FIG. 63). It is also determined that the indication effect is always executed when the start is determined). In other words, the suppression of the winning of the new AT first hit in the hell state also suppresses the appearance of a new sign game, so that the appearance ratio of the sign effect is made variable in a direction to be suppressed. As a result, during the precursor game, a new precursor game is not generated, and the precursor effect related to the ongoing precursor game can be displayed in the execution mode at the time of execution determination.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “gaming machine that can be realized by performing the instruction function generating process of the second example” is more specifically described as “a gaming machine having any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations. The transition to the advantageous game state in which the advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed is drawn by lottery, and the expected effect indicating whether the transition to the advantageous game state is appropriate or not is executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the lottery. In the gaming machine to be executed, when the execution of the expected effect is determined, the lottery state is controlled at a predetermined timing thereafter to a low expected state among a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation degrees, and the state is switched to the advantageous gaming state. It can also be said that a gaming machine that can maintain the expectation for the expected effect regardless of the winning combination in the subsequent game by suppressing the shift. At this time, the “low expected state” corresponds to the “hell state”.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine, when a continuous effect over a plurality of games is executed, the player's attention is concentrated on the effect, so the inside of the winning combination performed in each game during the effect is performed. There was a tendency for the result of the lottery to be neglected.

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed even while the continuous production is being performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (for example, a highly expected winning combination such as a rare role). If a role is selected), another new effect will be generated, and the current effect will be canceled, or another new effect will not be generated to continue the current effect, etc. However, there is a problem that the effect of the continuous performance may be affected, and the player's sense of expectation for these effects may change (mainly decrease).

  More specifically, when the previous effect is canceled, it is known at that time that the previous effect is a loss result, and the player's sense of expectation is reduced. In addition, if the later production does not occur, it is assumed that the result of the lottery transition to an advantageous game such as AT was lost even though the highly expected winning combination was selected, so that the player's expectation Decrease. Also, if the previous production is rounded up and a later production occurs, there is a strong tendency for the result display by the previous production to be rounded up, so the expectation of the player is also discarded. There is a risk that it will.

  However, according to the slot machine 1 in which the instruction function generation processing of the second example is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes care of the result of the internal lottery in each game. More specifically, when it is determined that a predictive game (especially a fake predictor) is to be executed, a low-probability state (a hell state) is determined at a predetermined timing thereafter (for example, when the predictive game flag is turned ON). ), The result of the internal lottery performed during the precursor game does not lead to the expectation of the special game. In other words, this is to provide a game situation (production situation) that does not confuse the development content based on each lottery result of a plurality of lottery opportunities, and thus has an effect of treating the result of the internal lottery in each game as important. Can be.

  In the case where the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed in the slot machine 1, the "predetermined timing for dropping to a low probability state (hell state)" can be classified as follows, and the respective effects are obtained. Can be expected.

  First, when the game immediately after the execution of the gaseous omen or the start game of the gaseous omen is set to a predetermined timing for dropping to a low probability state (hell state), during the subsequent game (before shifting to the gaseous omen, No matter what the winning combination is, even if some preparation period is provided), it is possible to suppress the expectation of the special game by the winning combination, and it is a factor of determining the gassing omen during execution. The importance to the winning combination can be ensured, and the player's expectation of the result of the gaseous omen being executed can be ensured.

  In addition, in the case where the predetermined timing of dropping somewhere during the execution of the gaseous omen to a low probability state (hell state) is set, at least the winning combination in the internal lottery after the low probability state is dropped, Since it is possible to suppress a change in the degree of expectation of the player, it is possible to contribute to assuring an effect execution that emphasizes the result of the internal lottery in each game. Here, in the instruction function generation process (see [11-3-3-3]) of the second example, as the effect pattern of the gaseous omen, in addition to “continuous effect (or omen effect)”, “wrinkled effect” and “ Although it is possible to interweave the “normal production”, for example, if it is assumed that these three types of productions are performed with the gaseous omen, the player will be warned at the stage where the “normal production” appears. Although it may not be possible to detect that the game is a game, it is assumed that the game is a precursor game at the time when the "ruffled production" appears even before the "continuous production (or predictive production)" appears. I can do it. However, if the player drops the state with a low probability after being able to guess that it is a precursor game, there is a possibility that the player's sense of expectation will decrease if the player wins the rare role during that time. When the predetermined timing for dropping somewhere in the low-probability state is set as the predetermined timing, it is preferable that the timing is at least when the “roughening effect” appears.

  In the case where the instruction function generation process of the second example is performed, in the slot machine 1, in order to suppress the influence of the execution mode of the expected effect (foreboding effect) to be executed, the gaming state is set to have a degree of expectation lower than usual. There is a period of forcible drop into a low low probability state (hell state). In the case of forcibly dropping to the low probability state as described above, the payout rate generally falls, so that the slot machine 1 cancels the drop amount by using the high probability state (for example, the high probability state or the super high state). It is possible to increase the period / probability of the certainty state), to improve the initial hit probability when the rare role is drawn, and to improve the probability of winning the rare role in the first place. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation processing of the second example is performed, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that takes care of the result of the internal lottery and raise and improve a situation advantageous to the player. Can be. In addition, since the payout rate can be sharpened, the playability can be improved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the instruction function generation processing of the second example is performed, the appearance ratio of the expected effect is variably changed so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect (a precursor effect) to be executed. As described above, the processing is not limited to forcibly dropping to a low-probability state (hell state) having a lower expectation than usual for a predetermined game period as described above. Other methods that make it difficult to win the advantageous gaming state (AT) for the gaming period may be used. Specifically, for example, in the predetermined game period, the winning probability may be changed by changing a lottery table used for the lottery (the game state itself is changed), or the predetermined game period is performed. The number of times the internal lottery is executed may be suppressed by making it appear that a plurality of games are played by the pseudo game. Further, other processing that makes it difficult to establish a rare role that is likely to be connected to the expected effect winning may be used. Even in the case of performing such processing, in the game after execution of the expected effect is determined, the appearance ratio of the expected effect can be made variable so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect. The slot machine 1 in the case where the instruction function generation processing of the second example is performed can have the same effect as in the case where the hell state is controlled for a predetermined game period.

[11-3-3-5. Effect of Instruction Function Generation Processing of Third Example]
According to the slot machine 1, by performing the instruction function generating process of the third example, the "advantageous game advantageous to the player under any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectation degrees" In the gaming machine in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state in which is executed is performed by lottery, and based on the result of the lottery, the expected rendering indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is executed is performed over a plurality of games, the expected rendering is performed. In the case where an advantageous winning combination (e.g., a rare combination) that is easier to win than other winning combinations is selected as a winning combination during the transition to the advantageous gaming state, while teaching the result of the expected effect, , A gaming machine that can execute another expected effect triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning combination.

  The above-mentioned “advantageous game state” corresponds to the “AT state” in the instruction function generation processing of the third example, and similarly, the “expected effect” corresponds to the “forewar effect”, the “continuous effect”, or the “forewar game”. . In the instruction function generation process of the third example, when an expected effect (for example, the precursor game A) is executed based on the internal lottery result (the result of the lottery of the winning combination), the high expected combination is won during the execution of the expected effect. When the execution of another expected effect (for example, the precursor game C) is selected by being selected as the role, the precursor game A is continuously executed, and after the precursor game A ends, the precursor game C is executed. Then, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 teaches the result of the expected effect (the precursor game A), but also the expected effect (the precursor game C) due to the high expected combination being selected. ) Can be separately executed, thereby realizing control that respects both the expected effect and the other expected effect, and maintaining the expectation for the internal lottery result that triggered each of the expected effects. The effect can be achieved.

  In a conventional gaming machine, when a continuous production over a plurality of games is performed, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed even while the continuous production is performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery. (For example, when a highly expected winning role such as a rare role is selected), a new continuous production is generated to cancel the current continuous production, or to continue the current continuous production. In such a case, processing such as cancellation of another continuous production was performed. In a gaming machine in which such processing is performed, the result of each continuous production is not sufficiently taught because a part of the continuous production that could originally occur in each is not exhibited, thereby reducing the interest of the player. There was a risk of doing so. In addition, there is also a problem that the result of the internal lottery that triggered the execution of the continuous production is neglected because a part of the continuous production that can occur is not displayed.

  On the other hand, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 determines whether the slot machine 1 is currently executing the “first expected effect” and the internal lottery result performed during the “first expected effect”. With respect to the `` later expected effect '' determined as described above, by executing the expected effects of both, and by teaching the result of each expected effect to the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player, This has the effect of respecting not only the expected performance but also the results of the internal lottery.

  In addition, when the instruction function generation process of the third example is performed, as described above, the slot machine 1 controls both of the precursor games even if the player wins another precursor game during the precursor game (gase precursor). However, it is not necessary to forcibly change the lottery state (AT lottery game state) related to the special game state during execution of the precursor game in order to realize such control. That is, by making it possible to execute the precursor game in a lottery state that is the same as in the normal state before the start of the precursor game, the player feels the expectation for the AT winning and the precursor effect (continuous production) felt when the player wins the highly expected combination. Can be maintained. Then, by not forcibly changing the lottery state relating to the special game state during the precursor game as described above, the special game state is extremely reduced compared to the case where the instruction function generation processing of the first example or the second example is performed. The period during which it is difficult to win can be reduced.

  In the case where the instruction function generation processing of the third example is performed, in the slot machine 1, after the "last gassing sign" is executed after the "last gassing sign" ends, the slot machine 1 executes the first and second examples. As in the case where the instruction function generating process is performed, since the mode is immediately shifted to the special mode in which the degree of expectation to the special game state is higher than before, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player and to reduce the player's expectation. Feeling can be maintained or improved over a relatively long period. That is, even if gasp precursors occur continuously and the result of the AT transition failure is taught, the player is shifted to a special mode having a higher advantage, and the player can at least until the special mode ends. You can keep expecting. Also, when the rare role is won in the special mode, the sign game is started again, so that the player's expectation can be further increased.

  Further, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, the slot machine 1 is set when the high expected combination is frequently won during the precursor game (gase precursor), as shown in the derivative example. The number of gaseous precursors can be reduced. According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to control a plurality of expected effects (foreboding effects), while avoiding a series of redundant gaseous foreshortenings, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player. .

  Further, when the instruction function generation processing of the third example is performed, as shown in the derivative example, when the slot machine 1 wins a predetermined number of times as the high-ranking high expectation hand during the precursor game (gase precursor), the slot machine 1 is forcibly made. You can set a gassing omen. According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to increase the ratio of starting a precursor game for a high-high-expected role originally having a high degree of expectation. Can be provided to the player.

  Further, when the instruction function generating process of the third example is performed, as shown in the derivative example, when the slot machine 1 wins a plurality of highly expected combinations during a predictive game (especially during a drawback), the slot machine 1 The upper limit number of the set omen game (during the omen) may be limited. According to such a slot machine 1, for example, in a case where the winning of the highly expected combination is won a plurality of times in a short period of time during the precursor game, the resetting of the precursor game is repeated, and the precursor game is performed for an excessively long time. It can be expected that the interest of the player will be enhanced over an appropriate long period.

[11-3-4. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main board 409 determines to generate the instruction function as a result of the instruction function generation processing (specifically, for example, when the push order small winning combination in the AT game is won). Then, the instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display processing). In the instruction function display processing, the main board 409 selects a display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, holding display data in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Hereinafter, the indication function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

[11-3-4-1. Indication function display (first example)]
First, a first example of the instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment will be described. In the first example, as shown in FIG. 47, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side. The indication function is displayed by displaying the characters and digits of the digits.

  FIGS. 80 and 81 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the first example. FIG. 80 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 81 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, the “segment display” column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the “content” column shows the contents that the displayed alphanumeric characters mean. Further, in FIG. 81, the display outline of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed is shown in the “navigation display” column, and The scenes and situations where the display is used are indicated. The navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 will be described later in [11-3-5].

In the instruction function display of the first example, the following rule is provided as an example of the rule relating to the instruction function display.
(1) An instruction function display is performed using two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating the standard of the pressing place, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pressing order.
(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started and the last reel 301 being rotated is started at least until reception of a pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started. The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 on which the reel stop operation corresponding to is performed. That is, the period of the instruction function display and the period of the payout number display do not overlap. Note that, as a result of the game, when the gaming value (medal) is not paid out, that is, when the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, when the instruction function display is performed and the payout number display is not performed, the instruction function display is canceled (not displayed) at the same timing as when the payout number display is performed. Alternatively, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.
(3) In the game in which the indication function is displayed on the special display LED 612, when any of the spinning reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the indication function ( The special display LED 612b) indicates that the reel is not the reel to be stopped first (that is, if a reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or the timing of pressing the reel stop button 211 indicates the instruction function. Even when the timing does not correspond to the position indicated as a guide of the pressing place in the (special display LED 612a) (that is, when the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction content), The display mode of the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 ends.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 determines what instruction content is to be displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display. Determined based on the winning combination. First, the contents of instructions that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81 (details will be described later).

  The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the content of the indication of “approximate push location” based on the winning combination of the game, with respect to the content of the indication of “approximate push location” displayed on the special display LED 612a. be able to. More specifically, for example, when “BB1 (seven red symbols)” is selected as a winning combination, the main board 409 determines an instruction content that causes the special display LED 612a to display “2” (red seven symbols). Alternatively, other than that, since the game method aiming at “red 7 symbols” is not denied, an instruction content that displays “0” (no designation) may be determined.

  In addition, the main board 409 displays the “appropriate pressing order” based on the winning combination of the game with respect to the “pressing order” instruction displayed on the special display LED 612b, similarly to the instruction content of “approximate pressing location”. Can be arbitrarily determined within a range not to deny. For example, it is assumed that the push order bell (AT1, AT2) that sets the forward push to “appropriate push order” generates an instruction function in a game selected as a winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of the “push order” to be “left / middle / right” (6-select push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 81 (details will be described later). , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, as the instruction content for clarifying only “left” of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, “first left (two choices)” may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example 81 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, from the condition that the “appropriate pressing order” is not denied, it is sufficient that the instruction content of the pressing order includes at least a game procedure based on the “appropriate pressing order”. That is, as the instruction contents having the possibility of the first stop of the left reel 301a, “left first or right first” (segment display “E” in FIG. 81) or “left first or middle first” (FIG. 81). 81 (segment display “F”) may be used as the instruction content, or furthermore, the instruction content for making the pressing order unknown (segment display “0” in FIG. 81) may be used.

  Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 80, four indications of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red seven symbol)”, and “3 (BAR symbol)” are used as indications of the pressing place. Numbers are set for display. When “0” is displayed as a guide of the pressing place, it indicates that the guide of the pressing order is not specified, that is, the operation at the specific stop timing is not instructed in the game, but in such a case, Even if there is a pressing operation (unspecified stopping operation) of the reel stop button 211 without considering the stop timing, the symbol combinations based on some winning combinations are not necessarily aligned on the activated line. That is, in the case where the symbol combination based on the winning combination is to be surely stopped in the game in which “unspecified” is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed as in the case of the maximum efficiency batting method described above. It is required to perform a stop operation. Specifically, for example, when the push order bell (AT1 to AT10) is won during the AT, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is stopped by an appropriate push order. If there is, it is possible to arrange the symbol combination of the bell role irrespective of the stop timing (without missing). On the other hand, for example, when “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a when the winning combination is a combination that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon combination), the stop timing is not considered. If the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed, there is a possibility that the watermelon combination may be missed. It is necessary to perform the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 at the appropriate timing.

  Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guide of the pressing location is a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating, but a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing with aiming at the symbol used as a guide. Even if it does, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the activated line.

  In addition, for the symbols respectively corresponding to “1” to “3” shown in FIG. 80, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the “chance design” targeted by “1” may be a “correct” design or a “right” design, or may be applied to other designs. Further, the target symbol of “2” may be a “blue 7” symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. Note that the seg display shown in FIG. 80 is merely an example, and the seg display pattern can be set by increasing or decreasing the seg display pattern within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a seg display may be added for a symbol other than that illustrated in FIG. 80 (for example, a watermelon symbol). Also, the symbol set as a guide of the pushing place is not limited to one, and for example, a segment display such as “either a red 7 symbol or a blue 7 symbol” is set as a guide of the pushing location. You may. Although common to FIGS. 80 and 81, the correspondence between “contents” and “segment display” does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of “segment displays” indicating the same “contents” are prepared. You may.

  Next, referring to FIG. 81, 16 display patterns are set for display, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as display contents of the segment display. . Hereinafter, the meaning of each display pattern will be described in detail. Note that when displayed in seven segments, uppercase letters “B” and “D” may not be distinguishable from numbers “8” and “0”, respectively, and therefore, in FIG. 81, “b” and “d” are used. It is displayed in lowercase.

  The display "0" on the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order is not specified). However, as described in the “Usage” column, it is not used only when the winning combination does not matter in the pushing order. Can be used if not. The winning role regardless of the pushing order includes a pushing order bell and a replay, and also includes a low winning role (rare role) such as a chance eye, watermelon, cherry and the like. Therefore, when the indication function is displayed when the rare role is won, the display on the special display LED 612b is “0”. At this time, in the navigation display, the expected display such as “chance!” And the type display of the rare role are displayed. You may make it perform. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach the player that the game is different from normal and has a high degree of expectation. Also, in the latter case where the pressing order is not dared to be taught in the case of a winning combination which can win a prize by selecting one, since the proper pressing order is not taught, the navigation display example is "?????". .

  The indications "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as an appropriate push order, and display a so-called six-select push order. Can be. When the six-selection pressing order is displayed in the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are taught in the navigation display. Thirdly, the reels to be stopped are evident from the elimination law, but may be explicitly specified.

  The indications “7” to “9” on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined which one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first as an appropriate pushing order. Thus, a so-called three-selection pressing order can be displayed. When the three-selection pressing order is displayed in the instruction function display, the reel to be stopped first is taught in the navigation display.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 48, FIG. 49, and the like, a 5-choice push-order bell is prepared. Since the display pattern is insufficient, it is only necessary to use the 6-selection push order display or to use only a part (only in the case of the middle-pressing order bell) of the 3-selection push order display.

  When the pressing order such as “1” to “9” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, when the stop operation is performed according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b, the most payout A game result that is advantageous to the player is provided, for example, a pressing order bell wins in a stop form of the number of copies. As described above, in order to obtain the stop system with the largest payout number, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed, as described above.

  Further, “providing a game result advantageous to a player” described in the preceding paragraph includes “suppressing provision of a disadvantageous game result to a player”. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described. For example, a push order replay in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order is prepared, and at the time of the winning of the push order replay, if a stop operation is performed according to a “specific push order”, blue 7 symbol alignment stops. I can do it. For example, when the blue 7 symbol arrangement is won in the push order replay during the AT and it is internally determined that the number of AT games is to be added, it is used as one of the effects for teaching the additional. I do. At the time of winning the push order replay, if the number of AT games is added, displaying the instruction function of “specific push order” leads to the provision of “game results advantageous to the player”. On the other hand, if the number of AT games is not added even if the player has won the push order replay and the instruction function of “specific push order” is displayed, the stop operation according to the instruction stops the blue 7 symbol alignment. However, since the "game result advantageous to the player" of adding the number of AT games is not provided, the "game result disadvantageous to the player" is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such “game results disadvantageous to the player”, if the number of AT games is not added at the time of the above-mentioned push order replay winning, the “specific push” A pressing order that avoids the “order” can be displayed on the instruction function. By playing the game in accordance with such an instruction function display, a blue 7 symbol array in which the number of AT games is not added does not appear, so that "a game result that is disadvantageous to the player is provided. Suppression "can be achieved, and as a result," a game result advantageous to the player is provided ".

  On the other hand, the displays “A” to “F” on the special display LED 612b are different from the cases where “1” to “9” are displayed, and indicate “parts” of the pressing order that can lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display "A" indicates only that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (two alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Further, for example, in the case of the display “d”, it is indicated only that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and it is not indicated which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if an appropriate pressing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected in the first stop, any of the remaining two reels 301 being rotated (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) is again selected in the second stop. Is stopped, and as a result, four alternatives can be obtained. In addition, if the proper pressing order is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, two alternatives can be performed.

  As described above, when the pressing order such as the above “A” to “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, even if the stop operation is performed according to the displayed content, the pressing order is not always necessarily proper. However, if a proper pushing order can be finally selected, a gaming result advantageous to the player is provided, such as a pushing order bell prize in a stopped form having the largest payout number.

  The display examples of the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above. In practice, however, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game. FIG. 89 described later shows a specific display example.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the contents of the instruction can be easily grasped. An appropriate reel stop operation can be performed while watching the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and a more advantageous game result can be expected than when no instruction function display is performed. Further, by facilitating the player's attention to the display on which such instruction function display is performed, it is possible to create a gaming property that has not been provided in conventional gaming machines.

  Further, in the display examples as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide of the pressing place are not necessarily required, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it is expected that the amount of data required for the main board 409 to perform the instruction function display can be reduced.

[11-3-4-2. Indication function display (second example)]
Next, a second example of the indication function display in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment will be described. In the instruction function display of the second example, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes one 7-segment LED with a dot (special display LED 612c shown in FIG. 85), and the instruction function is displayed by displaying a predetermined pattern on the special display LED 612c. Display.

  FIG. 82 is a view for explaining a display device used in the indication function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, a 7-segment LED with a dot (special display LED 612c) is used as a display for displaying the instruction function. As shown in FIG. 82, the special display LED 612c is configured by adding a dot LED to a so-called seven-segment LED, and is a segment LED having a total of eight illuminable parts. FIG. 82 shows an example of the lighting rule of the special display LED 612c. Eight lighting possible parts are represented by each digit bit of data represented by an 8-bit binary number (1 bit, 2 bits,. .., 8 bits). Therefore, by indicating the target data indicating the contents of the instruction (data for displaying the instruction function) in an 8-bit binary number, it is possible to realize the instruction function display corresponding to the target data with the special display LED 612c. Specifically, for example, when the second bit of the target data is set (the value of the second lowermost digit is “1”), the lightable portion indicated by “2 bits” in FIG. Is done. Note that such a display rule is merely an example, and for example, a predetermined process may be performed so that the value of the target data is not easily read, and the display data may be turned on.

FIGS. 83 and 84 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, the following rule is provided as an example of the rule relating to the instruction function display.
(1) Instruction function display is performed using one dot-segmented 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c). Lighting control of the special display LED 612c is performed in accordance with each digit bit of "instruction function display data" represented by an 8-bit binary number. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, of the “instruction function display data”, information indicating the standard of the pressing place is held in the upper 4 bits (5 to 8 bits) (FIG. 83), and Four bits (1 bit to 4 bits) hold information indicating the pressing order (FIG. 84).
(2) Same as rule (2) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.
(3) Same as the rule (3) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, what kind of instruction content is to be displayed on the special display LED 612c as the instruction function display is the same as in the first example. The board 409 is determined based on the winning combination in the game. Also, the specific instruction contents illustrated in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84 correspond to the instruction contents illustrated in FIG. 80 and FIG.

  First, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 83 will be described. FIG. 83 illustrates a specific example of the high-order 4 bits indicating the indication of the pressed location in the instruction function display data. Specifically, if the standard of the pressed location is “unspecified”, “1” is set in the fifth bit, and if the standard of the pressed location is “chance pattern”, “1” is set in the sixth bit. When the standard of the pushing place is “red 7 design”, “1” is set in the seventh bit, and when the standard of the pushing place is “BAR design”, “1” is set in the eighth bit. Can be Then, "segment display" corresponding to each "content" is performed on special display LED 612c according to the lighting rule shown in FIG.

  Next, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 84 will be described. FIG. 84 illustrates a specific example of the lower 4 bits indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display data. Specifically, different instruction contents are set for each of the 16 lower four bits “0000” to “1111”. Then, "segment display" corresponding to each digit bit is performed on the special display LED 612c.

  Since the upper 4 bits shown in "binary display" in FIG. 83 and the lower 4 bits shown in "binary display" in FIG. 84 are displayed in different digits, the indication function display actually used is displayed. The data for use can be represented by binary 8-bit data obtained by combining upper 4 bits (FIG. 83) indicating the standard of the pressing location and lower 4 bits (FIG. 84) indicating the pressing order. In the function display, the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits can be displayed simultaneously.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for describing a specific display example of the instruction function display of the second example. In FIG. 85, a display example of an instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612c based on the examples of FIGS. 83 and 84, and a table of a navigation display displayed on the image display body 500 or the like corresponding to the instruction function display Examples are shown. Note that the details of the navigation display will be described later in [11-3-5] as a specific example of the instruction function display of the first example, with reference to FIG. Here, the description is omitted.

  According to FIG. FIG. 1 shows a display example in which the instruction content is “no designation” (No. 0 in FIG. 83) and the pressing order is “unquestioned” (No. 0 in FIG. 84). I have. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the binary 8-bit indicating function display data of "00010000", which is a combination of the upper four bits "0001" and the lower four bits "0000". More specifically, only the lightable portions corresponding to 5 bits are turned on.

  Next, in FIG. 2 shows a display example in which the instruction content is “No designation” (No. 0 in FIG. 83) and the pressing order is “Left / Right / Middle” (No. 2 in FIG. 84). It is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the binary 8-bit indicating function display data of "00010010", which is a combination of the upper 4 bits "0001" and the lower 4 bits "0010". More specifically, the lightable parts corresponding to 2 bits and 5 bits are turned on.

  Next, in FIG. In the case of No. 3, the instruction content is such that the standard of the pressing location is “Red 7 symbol” (No. 2 in FIG. 83) and the pressing order is “Right first (two choices)” (No. 12 in FIG. 84). Is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the binary 8-bit indicating function display data of "010011100", which is a combination of the upper 4 bits "0100" and the lower 4 bits "1100". More specifically, the lightable portions corresponding to 3 bits, 4 bits, and 7 bits are turned on.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the second example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the contents of the instruction at a glance. Even if the player notices that the indication function is being displayed on the display LED 612c, a new playability is created in which the instruction content cannot be immediately grasped. For example, it can be expected to have an effect of arousing curiosity to know the display rule of the indication function display in the special display LED 612c. Further, even if it is extremely difficult to grasp the instruction content from the display mode of the special display LED 612c, the navigation display based on the instruction content is performed so that the correct reel stop operation is taught to the player. Therefore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment does not become a disadvantage to the player, and can enhance the entertainment interest of the player when the instruction function display is performed.

  In the indication function display as in the second example, since the indication function display data in binary notation generally used in the calculation process is used, the main board 409 determines the instruction content of the indication function, and It is possible to easily realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the instruction content, while reducing the processing load when causing the display LED 612 to display the instruction function. More specifically, it is assumed that the condition device number registered in the program (the number assigned to the group when grouped) is represented by an 8-bit binary number, and such a condition device number is directly displayed as an instruction function. By enabling the output of the instruction data as the application data, unnecessary conversion processing can be suppressed, and the processing load on the main board 409 can be reduced. In such a case, it is possible to realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the instruction content without intentionally changing the condition device number to another number or the like.

  As described above, as shown in the first and second examples, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize the instruction function display by employing various display methods under the control of the main board 409.

[11-3-4-3. Change of display mode]
Next, a description will be given of a change in the display mode on the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function is displayed.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 can cause the special display LED 612 to display the instruction content based on the winning combination as an instruction function display. Here, since the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display is a game method (that is, an appropriate reel stop operation) that can provide an advantageous result for the player, a game timing at which the player can execute the reel stop operation is provided. By the time the indication function display needs to be displayed. In other words, when the instruction function is displayed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next at a specific timing before the press operation on the reel stop button 211 can be accepted. The correct instruction content (for example, for which reel stop button 211a to 211c which stop position should be used as a guide) should be displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function. In the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612, “specific timing” described below has such a meaning.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a principle regarding the display timing of the instruction function display is applied to the special display LED 612, while the instruction to the special display LED 612 is made as described in [9-3] and the like. Information other than the function display can be displayed (for example, a payout display, an error display, and other effect displays).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the indication function is displayed on the special display LED 612, the display mode at the “specific timing” on the special display LED 612 is changed to the “appropriate reel stop operation to be executed next”. As long as there is only an instruction function display of the correct instruction content regarding "", the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed to another display mode at a timing other than the above "specific timing". Hereinafter, the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed as described in detail below, the display mode is changed before and after the change so that the player can easily notice the change. Alternatively, a component other than the special display LED 612 may be used to suggest or teach the change so that the player can easily notice the change. Specifically, for example, a predetermined display (LED, lamp, or the like) is turned on or blinked, a specific sound is output from a speaker, or “Look at special display LED 612!” On the liquid crystal display surface of image display body 500. Such an effect screen may be displayed. Further, when a predetermined effect screen is displayed on the image display body 500, by temporarily stopping the progress of the effect screen displayed so far, the player can be more surely aware of the display change. Can be made.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed so as to be easily noticed by the player, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment ensures that the display mode is changed (or is changed) by the player. Since the recognition can be performed, the player is given an impression that a special effect different from the usual effect is being performed, and has an effect of increasing the player's sense of expectation for giving a special privilege or the like. Further, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the instruction content of the instruction function display displayed after the change is an instruction content that can lead to a more advantageous game result.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode may be changed so as to be easily noticed by the player as described above, while the display mode may be changed in a mode that is hardly noticed by the player. You may. Specifically, it is possible to change the display itself on the special display LED 612 in a mode that is hard for the player to notice, without performing an effect for making the player noticeable as described above. More specifically, for example, the display of “8” is changed to “0” in the special display LED 612 so that the difference between the lighting locations before and after the change is relatively reduced, or a dot seg with a narrow lighting area is lit (blinks). Or turning off the light, or changing the luminance of the segment (including changing the degree of luminance by gradation control in addition to the simple ON / OFF switching).

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of realizing an effect as if the display mode had been changed without the player noticing the change in the display mode that was difficult for the player to notice. A great surprise can be given to the player who notices the display change at any timing, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, since the player can always be aware of when the display mode is changed, the concentration on the game can be increased.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display mode is changed in a state in which the player is hardly noticed in a state where all the reels 301 are not stopped (a state in which all the reels 301 are rotating). However, it is desirable not to change the instruction content regarding the first stop reel (the order of pressing the reel 301 to be stopped first and the standard of the pressing place). When such a change of the display mode is performed on the special display LED 612, it is preferable that the instruction content by the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like is not changed from the instruction content regarding the first stop reel.

  More specifically, first, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the pressing order is that if the instruction content related to the first stop reel is changed by changing the display mode, the player who does not notice the changed instruction content may This is because the game is advanced according to the instruction content before the change (the game operation is performed in a pressing order contrary to the latest instruction content), which may be disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by not changing the instruction content related to the first stop reel, it is possible to avoid a disadvantage of the player and suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Also, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the indication of the pressing place is, for example, the instruction content A as if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is operating (for example, the pushing order is reversed, The guide of the location is a red 7 symbol, and when the display mode is changed after generating the display mode of indicating that the red 7 pattern can be aligned when all the reels are stopped), a reel stop button is provided for the first stop when the display mode is changed. Before the button 211 (in this case, the reel stop button 211c is pressed in the reverse direction), the instruction content B (for example, the instruction content) indicating that another condition device that is not aligned even when aiming at the seven red symbols is operating. The display mode of the same stop operation as A (instruction indicating that the red 7 symbols cannot be aligned when the third stop reel is stopped, although the pressing order is reversed and the indication of the pressing location is red 7 symbols) When thus changed, because it is not aligned even aimed Red 7 symbols would be known in advance to the player, there is a possibility that the game excitement is reduced. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode after the change from the instruction content A is the instruction content C that does not deviate from the instruction content A (at least, the pressing order is the first stop of the right reel, and red 7 In this case, the display is made to include the symbols, and the display mode of the instruction content which does not deny the possibility that the red 7 symbols will be aligned when the reels are completely stopped) is displayed before the change until at least the first stop of the right reel 301c by the player. It is preferable to be able to expect a game result (seven symbols in red) according to the specified instruction content A.

  In addition, as a specific example of the display mode based on the instruction content C, "the pressing order is reverse, and the standard of the pressing location is a red 7 symbol or a BAR symbol" is mentioned. In the case of such an instruction content C, there is no stop position in the reel band 321c (the right reel 301c) at which both the red 7 symbol and the BAR symbol can be pulled in (see the symbol array in FIG. 46), so the right reel 301c When the first stop is made, the player can select (select) which of the red 7 symbol or the BAR symbol should be aimed as a guide of the pressed place. If the player performs a reel stop operation in a proper pushing order and at a timing capable of pulling in the red 7 symbol while the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is operating internally, the red 7 Symbol alignment stops. In addition, if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is not operated internally, or if the stop operation with the proper pressing order and timing is not performed, the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop. It should be noted that the instruction content for causing the player to select the push location can be performed by the second stop and the third stop of the reel.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the instruction content (approximate push position) regarding the first stop reel is not limited to the above example (change from the instruction content A to the instruction content C). As another example, the instruction content C may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the display mode of the instruction content C is indicated by the special display LED 612, only uncertain information that the red 7 symbol alignment may be stopped by the reverse push is provided, but thereafter, the first Before the operation on the stop reel is performed (the freeze processing may be performed in parallel), the display mode is changed to the display mode based on the instruction content A, so that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the reverse push. Is provided, and before the reel 301 is stopped, it is possible to expect the player to give a privilege based on the seven sets of red.

  Further, as another example of the change of the instruction content (indicative of the pressing place) regarding the first stop reel, the instruction content B may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the display mode of the instruction content B is indicated by the special display LED 612, even if the player pushes in the reverse direction to aim at the red 7 symbol, the non-uniform finalization information that the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop is provided. By changing the display mode to the display mode based on the instruction content A before the operation on the first stop reel is performed, the determination information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the reverse push is provided. Here, when the change of the display mode from the instruction content B to the instruction content A is performed in such a manner that the player is easily noticed by performing freeze control or the like, if the reel 301 is stopped, the interest of the player may be increased before the reel 301 is stopped. Can be enhanced. On the other hand, when the display mode is changed from the instruction content B to the instruction content A in a manner that is difficult for the player to notice, when the player does not notice the confirmation information of the instruction content A, the user may change the display mode of the reel 301. A stop operation may be performed, but even in such a case, after stopping all the reels 301, the red 7 symbols are aligned against the recognition of the player who thought that the red 7 symbols were not aligned. , The player can be surprised and delighted, and can be expected to improve interest.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction content relating to the first stop reel is intentionally changed in accordance with the change of the display mode, the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is accepted by interposing a freeze control or the like. It is desirable to prohibit the player from performing an erroneous game operation that does not comply with the changed instruction content by delaying the start time of the stop button press acceptance for starting the game.

  Further, as an example of such a change of the display mode, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game is performed in a game procedure that is not originally intended (for example, a pressing order mistake), the player notices. The display mode can be changed (including erasure) in a difficult mode (the details will be described later in [11-3-4-3-1]). According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure, so that the game can be continued with peace of mind.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, when controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as an AT state, an appropriate stop operation is taught by the image display body 500 or the like. There was a problem that it was easy to work. On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the instruction function display for instructing the stop operation on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, and makes the player notice the display mode of the special display LED 612. Since the change can be made in an easy mode or in a mode that is difficult for the player to notice, it is possible to add a variety to the game effects of the slot machine 1 unlike the conventional gaming machines.

[11-3-4-3-1. Display change timing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function is displayed, any timing satisfying the condition that even if the player presses the reel stop button 211, the pressing operation is not accepted as a valid operation ( At the timing when the reel stop operation cannot be accepted), the main board 409 can change the display mode of the special display LED 612. In the following, a typical example of such a display change will be described, and a specific processing example accompanying the display change will be described.

(1) Start lever press-stop button press accept start First, as a representative first change timing, when the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game (start lever press), the reel stop buttons 211a to 211a are started. There is a period until the reception of the pressing operation on the 211c is started (the start of the pressing of the stop button is started). Strictly, instead of changing the display mode immediately before the start of pressing the stop button, the player can notice the change in the display mode before starting the stop operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It is preferable to change the display mode at a timing when a certain time is secured before the start of accepting the press of the stop button.

  In the slot machine 1, when the start lever 210 is operated, an internal lottery relating to the winning combination is performed by the main board 409, and the instruction content of the instruction function display is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery. When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the first change timing, for example, the first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a timing after the start lever is pressed, and then the reel is stopped. Before the pressing operation on the button 211 can be accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed to the second display mode.

  At this time, it is more preferable to add freeze control during the rotation control of the reel 301 and change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to the second display mode during execution of the freeze control. By changing the display mode during execution of the freeze control in this manner, the display mode can be reliably changed during the period in which the reception of the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 is not started, and the player is provided with some special mode. An effect of making it easy to notice that the effect (here, the change of the display mode) is performed can also be realized.

  In such a case, the second display mode is required to be the display mode of the instruction function display indicating the correct instruction content regarding the reel 301 to be stopped first, while the first display mode is correct. The display mode may be a display mode of the instruction function other than the instruction content, or a display mode other than the display of the instruction function. A specific display mode example will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2]. Further, another display mode may be displayed between the first display mode and the second display mode.

  As described above, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the first change timing, so that the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is changed at least once, so that a special effect is performed. And the player can feel it, and can enhance the entertainment interest of the game. In particular, when the display mode is changed during execution of the freeze control, the special feeling can be further enhanced by interposing the freeze control which is obviously different from the normal reel control. Note that if such a freeze control is performed when a lottery result with a high degree of rarity is obtained, the degree of expectation of the player can be significantly increased.

  When the display mode is changed at the timing immediately before the start of the first stop button press acceptance among the first change timings, as described in [11-3-4-3], the first stop reel is changed. It is desirable that the instruction contents (firstly, the order of pressing the reels 301 to be stopped and the standard of the pressing place) should not be changed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode is changed at an arbitrary timing within a period from immediately after the start lever is pressed to immediately before the start of the stop button press acceptance as the first change timing. be able to. In particular, when the player changes the display mode at “timing immediately before the start of the first stop button press acceptance” where it is difficult for the player to change the operation mode of pressing the first stop button, the instruction content regarding the first stop reel is maintained. By changing the display mode, disadvantages of the player can be avoided. Further, when the player changes the display mode at “timing when a certain time is secured before the start of the stop button press reception (including during freeze control)” which can change the operation mode of pressing the first stop button, The change can increase the player's expectation.

(2) Pressing the first stop button to start accepting pressing the second stop button (or pressing the second stop button to starting accepting pressing of the third stop button)
Next, as a representative second change timing, when any one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed (for example, the first stop button is pressed), the reels corresponding to the remaining rotating reels 301 are started. There is a period until the reception of the pressing operation of the stop button 211 is started (for example, the reception of the pressing of the second stop button is started). Also, in the case of the second change timing, as in the case of the first change timing, if possible, a certain time is secured before the end of the period (for example, the start of accepting the press of the second stop button). It is preferable to change the display mode at a timing.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the second change timing, for example, after the game is started and the reel 301 starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed (one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed first). Until the operation is performed), the first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612, and after the first stop button is pressed, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed until the reception of the press of the remaining stop button is started. Change to the second display mode.

  Specific situations in which the display mode is changed at the second change timing include a display change originally intended and a display change originally not intended. Here, since the first display mode is displayed immediately before the first stop button is pressed, it is necessary that the first display mode be an instruction function display indicating “correct instruction contents” at least for the first stop button. . On the other hand, as described in detail below, the second display mode can adopt different types of display modes depending on whether the display change was originally intended or the display change was originally not intended. .

  First, the originally intended display change means that the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode with the progress of the game by the main board 409 in advance ( This means that the display is changed when it is determined (at least before the first stop button is pressed).

  In the case of such originally intended display change, after the first stop button is pressed, freeze control is executed or the like, so that the pressing operation of the second stop button (remaining reel stop button 211) cannot be accepted. It is preferable that the display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode during the freeze control. Then, at this time, in the second display mode, an instruction function display indicating “correct instruction content” regarding the second stop button is displayed.

  Note that when the display is originally intended to be changed, the instruction content indicated by the first display mode need not be the same as the instruction content indicated by the second display mode. For example, the instruction content indicated by the first display mode may be changed. The content may be "group display" for the first stop button, and the instruction content shown in the second display mode may be "segment display" that can specify the pressing order of all reels. The “group display” will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  In addition, when the display content originally intended is changed, the instruction content indicated by the first display mode and the instruction content indicated by the second display mode are set to be the same. The display may be changed. Different display modes indicating the same instruction content will also be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  Next, the display change that was not originally intended is performed in advance by the main board 409 (at least, the first stop button is pressed, for example, when the progress of the game is performed in a game procedure that was not assumed). (Previously) means that a display change that has not been determined is made. Specifically, if the reel stop button 211 corresponding to a reel different from the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display (in this case, the first display mode) is pressed when the first stop button is pressed, A so-called push order mistake may be considered.

  When a pressing order error occurs, for example, when the pressing order error occurs when the first stop button is pressed, the indication function of the remaining indication of the second stop button or the third stop button is continuously displayed on the special display LED 612 so far. Even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the game operation according to the instruction content cannot be performed. Specifically, for example, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop, despite the fact that the pressing order of “right / left / middle” is indicated as the instruction content, the instruction content is continued as it is. Then, the target reel to be stopped second becomes the left reel 301a that has already been stopped, and there is a possibility that the player may be confused about what kind of game to play. In such a case, the main board 409 of the slot machine 1 can roughly perform the following three types of control.

  The first control is a control that continues to display the instruction function of the present office even if a pressing order error occurs. In this case, it is not necessary to change the display from the first display mode to the second display mode. However, a second display mode according to a special display mode that teaches that the pressing order is wrong is prepared, and when a pressing order error occurs, the display is changed to the second display mode. You may. At this time, it is preferable to notify the player that the pressing order error has occurred even in the image display body 500 or the like. In the case of performing such control, even if the instruction content of the instruction function display is not changed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the pushing order has been mistaken, so that the instruction content of the instruction function display and the subsequent game Even if the procedure is incompatible, the game can be convinced and the game can be advanced.

  The second control is a control for, when a pressing order error occurs, deleting the indication function display that has been displayed so far. When such control is considered as one of the changes of the display mode, the change of the display mode eliminates a situation in which the game operation according to the instruction content cannot be performed, and prevents the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure. can do. Further, after the instruction function display according to the first display mode is deleted, a display mode notifying that the instruction function display has been deleted may be displayed on the special display LED 612 as the second display mode. Such a change in the display mode allows the player to recognize the reason why the first display mode has disappeared, thereby promoting the continuation of the game without having to worry about subsequent games. Can be.

  The third control is to display the instruction function in the second display mode so that when the first stop button is pressed and an error occurs in the pressing order, the remaining stop operation is instructed to give an operation procedure that is slightly advantageous. This is the control to change to.

  For example, like the pushing order bells (AT1 to AT10) described with reference to FIG. 51, the number of medals to be paid out at the time of prize is one of nine, two, and one by the pushing order. In the case where the instruction function is displayed, if a correct stop operation is performed in accordance with the original instruction contents (first display mode), it is possible to win the bell role and pay out nine medals. However, if a pressing order error occurs and the reel stop button 211 that is different from the instruction content is first stopped, the following two reel stop buttons 211 are changed depending on the priority operation of the condition device. Even if a stop operation is performed, it cannot be expected to pay out nine medals. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even in such a situation, an operation procedure that can be expected to pay out two medals is renewed as a second display mode as a slightly advantageous operation procedure. An instruction function can be displayed.

  In a specific example, when the AT 10 is won, the instruction content (“05” according to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81) that the standard of the pressing place is “unspecified” and the pressing order is “right / left / middle” is It is assumed that it is displayed (first display mode). Here, if the player presses the reel stop button 211b by mistake in the pressing order, the cherry symbol or the BAR symbol stops on the activated line of the middle reel 301b (see FIG. 51). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed, the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are stopped. Before the next reel stop button can be pressed, for example, the right reel may be aimed at the BAR symbol. The display mode is changed to the appropriate instruction content ("34" according to FIGS. 80 and 81) (second display mode). When the remaining reel stop operation is performed according to the instruction content of the second display mode, the BAR stops on the active line of the right reel 301c, and the Bell 1 symbol or the bell is displayed on the active line of the left reel 301a. 2 symbols stop. As a result, the symbol combination of the accessory 2 or the accessory 8 stops on the activated line, so that two medals can be paid out.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when a display change that is not originally intended is performed, the display mode is changed by changing the display mode so that the instruction content is slightly advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to relieve a player who receives an unfavorable game result due to a mistake in the pressing order. By providing a gaming machine capable of performing such rescue control, it can be expected that the player who has made a mistake in the pushing order will not be discouraged excessively and will maintain his / her motivation to continue the game.

  In the example of the pressing order bell described above, the maximum number of payouts (9) cannot be expected when the pressing order is incorrect with the first stop button. Even if the push order was incorrect with the stop button, the remaining stop operation was performed with the aim of a specific symbol and a specific push order in a form corresponding to each winning role of the push order small part as the push order of the rescue measures In such a case, a “push order for rescue” that can be expected for the largest number of payouts may be prepared. When a pressing order error occurs, the display is changed to the second display mode in which the rescue pressing order is instructed, so that even if the pressing order is erroneous, the maximum number of sheets can be given to the player. Since a medal acquisition opportunity can be given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest of the player.

  When the display on the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the above-described third control, the image output by the image display body 500 and the audio output by the speaker are used together. It is preferable that the player can reliably detect the change.

  The above is the typical change timing at which the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed when the instruction function is displayed. However, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to these change timings. In other words, the display mode of the special display LED 612 may be changed at other timings (for example, after all the reels 301 are stopped or after the payout process is completed) as long as the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not accepted. Can be.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the display mode of the special display LED 612 in accordance with the progress of the game at a predetermined change timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not received even during the game. Can be changed. In particular, even when a game operation that is not originally intended, such as a pressing order error, is performed, by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 based on the game operation, an appropriate instruction content for the next game operation can be obtained. Can be shown. As a result, even if an improper game operation is performed in an unintended manner such as a pushing order error, it is possible to provide relief for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, in a conventional gaming machine, the line of sight of the player tends to concentrate only on the reels and the effect display device (corresponding to the reel 301 and the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1), and the player's interest in the entire gaming machine is increased. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the indicator (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function is displayed is changed at a timing at which the reel stop operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, the player can be interested in the display. As a result, it is expected that the player's attention to the entire gaming machine will be increased as compared with the conventional gaming machine by expanding the target of attention by the player.

[11-3-4-3-2. Display change example]
In the following, examples of changes in the display mode of the special display LED 612 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment other than those described above will be given.

(1) Display change between instruction function displays First, a display change example in which a special display LED 612 changes a display mode between instruction function displays will be described. As described above, in the instruction function display, one or a plurality of instruction function display modes may be set for one instruction content. Therefore, when the instruction function is displayed on the special display LED 612, one display mode (for example, the above-described first display mode) is changed to another display mode (for example, the above-described first display mode) showing the same instruction content. (Second display mode).

  FIGS. 86 and 87 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining display examples of the instruction function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. “Seg display 1” and “seg display 2” shown in FIG. 86 are display examples of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612a, and “seg display 1” and “seg display 2” shown in FIG. 87 are the special display LEDs 612b. 7 is a display example of an instruction function display in FIG. It should be noted that “segment display 1” in FIGS. 86 and 87 is the same as the display example of “segment display” in FIGS. 80 and 81, respectively, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  According to FIGS. 86 and 87, “segment display 1” and “segment display 2” are set as a plurality of display examples indicating the same instruction content on the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). Looking at the individual displays, “4” to “7” are sequentially displayed in the display example of “segment display 2” corresponding to the display examples “0” to “3” of “segment display 1” in the special display LED 612a, respectively. In the display example of “Seg display 2”, “F” to “0” are set in correspondence with the display examples “0” to “F” of “Seg display 1” on the special display LED 612b, respectively (FIG. 86). The settings are set in the reverse order to the case of the segment display 1 (FIG. 87).

  Comparing the “segment display 1” and the “segment display 2”, the display on the special display LED 612 (the display combining the special display LEDs 612a and 612b) indicates the instruction function display of the same instruction content. , The segment display is always different. As a specific example, the display of “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” when the indication of the pressing location is “red 7 symbols” and the pressing order is “right / middle / left”. First, in the case of “segment display 1”, “2” corresponding to the indication of the pressing position of “red 7 pattern” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and “right / middle / left” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. “6” corresponding to the pressing order is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of “segment display 2”, “6” corresponding to the indication of the pressing position of “red 7 symbol” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and “right / middle / “9” corresponding to the pressing order of “left” is displayed. That is, when viewing the special display LED 612 as a whole, "26" is displayed in the case of "segment display 1", and "69" is displayed in the case of "segment display 2". Display.

  Then, “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 are set to the first display mode and the second display mode as described in [11-3-4-3-1-1]. This allows the display mode of the special display LED 612 (612a, 612b) to be changed while the instruction function display indicates the same instruction content. In the specific example described above, the display mode of “26” can be changed to the display mode of “69”. In this way, by changing the display between the easily identifiable display modes, in the slot machine 1, it is possible for the player to play the game at first glance as if the instruction content indicated by the special display LED 612 has been changed. It is possible to realize the effect, and even if the contents of the instruction before and after the change of the display mode are grasped, if the display mode is intentionally changed with the same instruction, a special effect is performed. An impression can be given, and a sense of expectation for the game result can be increased.

  As another example of the display change between the instruction function displays, the instruction function display in an easily identifiable display mode (hereinafter also referred to as “clear display mode”) as illustrated in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, these are displayed in a first display mode and a second display mode by using an instruction function display in a display mode that is difficult to identify (hereinafter, also referred to as an “obfuscated display mode”). Alternatively, the display mode of the special display LED 612 may be changed. 80 and 81 use two 7-segment LEDs without dots, and FIGS. 83 and 84 differ in using one 7-segment LED with dots. Is used, it is also possible to display by a 7-segment LED without dots, and the influence of this difference is eliminated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by changing the display between the “clear display mode” and the “unclear display mode”, the change in the degree of clarity of the display mode on the special display LED 612 is determined by the player. , And the player's expectation of the game can be increased. In particular, when the display mode is changed from “unclear display mode” to “clear display mode”, clear information is provided to the player, such as easier understanding of the instruction content. Thus, the player's sense of expectation can be further increased.

  Further, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when performing a display change that changes the degree of clarity of the display on the special display LED 612, performs the display change in a manner that is easily noticed by the player, It is possible to give a strong impression to the player that a special effect is occurring. Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can make the player aware that the display mode of the instruction function display may be changed for each game. This has the effect of increasing interest in the LED 612 and enhancing gaming interest.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612 is not limited to one change from the first display mode to the second display mode. As a specific example using FIG. 81, when the bell role (AT7) in the six-selection pressing order in which the reverse pressing is an appropriate pressing order is selected as the winning combination, the first display mode on the special display LED 612b is “ It is assumed that “C” indicating the pressing order of “first right (two choices)” is displayed, and thereafter, during a period that satisfies the condition of the display change timing as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. , "C" and "6" are alternately displayed at high speed, and "6" indicating the pressing order of "right / middle / left" is displayed as the final second display mode. It may be. When such a change of the display mode is performed, even if “C” is displayed on the special display LED 612b until the first stop button is pressed, the reel stop button 211c should be first stopped. Since it does not change, the instruction function display of the correct instruction content is performed. This is the same even if “6” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. If the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to “6” by the time the second stop button is pressed, it becomes clear that the reel stop button 211b should be secondly stopped. The stop operation can be performed in an appropriate pressing order. On the other hand, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b remains “C” until the second stop button is pressed, the player can select the reel stop button for the second stop operation from one of the reel stop buttons 211a and 211b. However, when the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to "6", the answer of the appropriate pressing order in the game is displayed (correct answer display).

  In the case where the correct answer display regarding the stop operation is performed by changing the display mode in this manner, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the special display LED 612 is limited to an appropriate pressing order, and the main correct answer display (for example, , Etc.) may be performed by a display (for example, the image display 500) managed by the sub-board 510. However, if the correct display is performed by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 before all the reels 301 stop (before the reels are completely stopped), the instruction content indicated as the correct answer stop operation in the changed display mode However, there is a possibility that a stop operation for a reel that has been stopped is instructed. Therefore, it is desirable to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 so as to display an appropriate pressing order (the correct pressing order) after the reels are completely stopped, and to turn off the special display LED 612 after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable to do. However, even if the reel 301 is stopped in an incorrect push order, if a medal (game value) is paid out, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the correct push order is not displayed. It is desirable to make the special display LED 612 display the payout immediately after the reel has completely stopped. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by performing the above-described process of displaying the correct answer, it is possible to entertain the player through the unit game while preventing a decrease in interest due to an unknown answer during the game. .

  When the display mode is changed with the high-speed change as described above, the display mode indicating the correct instruction content is included in the display modes changed at a high speed, and one of the display modes is finally changed. The display mode may be displayed, or the display mode indicating the correct instruction content may be finally displayed after the high-speed change is performed without the display mode indicating the correct instruction content. If a plurality of high-speed change patterns are prepared, the degree of expectation can be made different depending on the change patterns, so that the playability can be improved. Note that such a change pattern of the display mode is not limited to the “high-speed” change, but may be any change pattern that allows the player to recognize that the display mode has changed. Specifically, for example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds. Further, for example, the display mode is changed in the shortest time from the pressing operation of the start lever 210 to the start of accepting the stop button press (the time required when the wait timer is up and there is no wait). Is also good. Further, for example, assuming a case where the index position of the reel 301 is at the farthest place, the display mode may be changed by the time required for the reel 301 to make one round.

  Further, as still another example of the display change between the instruction function displays, there is an example in which a display mode of the grouped instruction function displays is used. Here, the “display mode of the grouped instruction function display” means a display mode (group display) set in accordance with a predetermined rule, in which a plurality of instruction contents are grouped and set in correspondence with the group. For example, it is possible to group instruction contents in which reels to be stopped (reel stop buttons) are the same.

  FIG. 88 is a view for explaining an example of group display in the instruction function display. FIG. 88 shows a display example of the special display LED 612b. The description other than the “group display” column is the same as that of FIG. 81, and thus the description is omitted. According to FIG. 88, it is assumed that the group content “L” is displayed for the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 1, 2, 7, and 10) in which the first reel to be stopped is the left reel 301a. For the instruction content (specifically, No. 3, 4, 8, 11) in which the reel to be stopped first is the middle reel 301b, a group display “c” is performed. It is assumed that a group display “r” is performed for the instruction contents (specifically, Nos. 4, 5, 9, and 12) of the right reel 301c.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed by using the "group display" shown in FIG. 88, as a first display mode, "group display" of the correct instruction content regarding the reel to be stopped first is displayed as the special display LED 612b. As a second display mode, the special display LED 612b displays "Seg display" of the correct instruction content regarding the reels to be stopped after the second. Specifically, for example, when the bell role (AT7) in the 6-selection pressing order in which the reverse pressing is an appropriate pressing order is selected as the winning combination, “r” is displayed as the first display mode, and then [ 11-3-4-3-1], “6” is displayed as the second display mode during a period that satisfies the display change timing condition as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. When such a display change is performed, while the first display mode is being displayed, the player can only obtain information that the right reel 301c should be stopped first, but the second display mode is used. At the time of the change, information on the reels to be stopped after the second time can also be obtained, so that interest in changing the display mode can be made.

  In addition, the display change between the instruction function displays as described above is particularly performed during a game period (for example, a chance zone) in which the degree of award of a privilege is changed depending on whether or not a proper pressing order is hit. High effect can be brought. That is, the player who is playing such a game period desires that the display mode is changed to change the partial instruction content to the complete instruction content, and pays attention to the display trend of the special display LED 612. Therefore, the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 can be increased as well as the gaming ability.

(2) Display Change Between Instruction Function Display and Instruction Function Display As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is depressed on the reel stop button 211. At the specific timing at which the operation can be accepted, it is only necessary to indicate the correct instruction content regarding the “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next. For example, a game period before (or after) the specific timing In, a display mode other than the instruction function display may be displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, in the following, as a display change example between the indication function display and the indication function display, a simple display change example from the display mode other than the indication function display to the indication function display mode in the special display LED 612 will be described. Show.

  For example, a 7-segment LED is used as the special display LED 612, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode at the first change timing described in [11-3-4-3-1]. It is assumed that the display mode is changed to the display mode. Seg display of “0” to “3” is prepared as a first display mode. The first display mode is a display mode other than the instruction function display, that is, a display mode that is not included in the “segment display” used in the instruction function display, and the instruction content is not associated. On the other hand, segment display of “4” to “7” is prepared as a second display mode. The second display mode is a display mode used in the instruction function display, and the instruction content is associated with each of them.

  In such a case, first, after the start lever is pressed, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as a first display mode, and the freeze control of the reel 301 is executed before the reception of the stop button press is started. Then, during execution of the freeze control, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is sequentially changed to “1”, “2”, “3”, and before the freeze control ends, for example, as the second display mode, Display “5”. Then, after the freeze control ends, the reception of the press of the stop button is started, and the player performs the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 according to the instruction content indicated by the display mode of “5”. Here, “5” displayed in the second display mode is determined in advance based on the result of the winning combination lottery. By performing such a change of the display mode, what is initially displayed as “0” is increased and displayed during the freeze control, so that the number can be increased or the player can be given a pleasure. it can. If the higher the final numerical value is, the more advantageous the game result is, the player can be more interested in the result of changing the display mode.

  In the above simple example, as a display mode other than the instruction function display, a display similar to the display mode by the instruction function display (in this example, all are similar in terms of numbers) is used, so that the display mode before and after the change of the display mode is used. Can make the player feel continuity. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to use a similar display, and the display may be changed from a different display that is clearly different from the display mode of the instruction function display. In such a case, at the point when the special display is displayed on the special display LED 612, the player can be forewarned that the display mode will be changed, and the player's expectation can be increased.

(3) Other Display Modification Examples The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can implement the instruction function display by employing various display methods under the control of the main board 409, but the special functions other than those described above are applicable. An example of a display change in the display LED 612 will be described.

  An example of such a display change is to perform a display change using a different type of display from the segment LED used in the description above as a display (special display LED 612) for displaying the instruction function. . Such a different type of display corresponds to, for example, a segment LED (so-called full-color LED display) capable of displaying a plurality of colors, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a lamp, and the like.

  For example, when the special display LED 612 is a full-color LED display, the indication function display is normally performed in green, while the display color can be changed to red when the display mode is changed. In general, if it is assumed that red is more noticeable to the player than green, the display color is changed to change the display mode in this way, so that the player is more likely to notice the change in the display mode. be able to. Also, when the display colors at the time of normal and at the time of change are visually relatively similar colors (for example, colors of warm colors such as red and orange, colors of cool colors such as blue and purple) In addition, it is also possible to add a fine gaming property that only a player who plays a game while carefully watching the display color of the special display LED 612 can quickly recognize that the display mode is changed.

  For example, when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, not only can the display color be changed as in the case of using a full-color LED display, but also the brightness of the display itself can be changed. That is, when the display mode is changed, if the display brightness of the special display LED 612 is set higher than usual, the player can be forewarned that the display mode will be changed, and the effect of enhancing the gaming interest is enhanced. Can be expected. Further, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where segment LEDs are used.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a dot display, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where the segment LED is used. Although the dot display is inferior to the liquid crystal display in the variety of display modes, the dot display has advantages over the liquid crystal display in terms of suppressing power consumption and monotonous control signals. Further, even if the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or the like as described above, it is still managed by the main board 409.

  As described above, as described in [11-3-4-3] and thereafter, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that displays an instruction function display on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed during one game (unit game). Here, regarding the basic flow of the instruction function display in the slot machine 1, the instruction content of the instruction function is determined based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery (winning lottery) relating to the winning combination, and the instruction content is determined. An instruction function display showing the contents is performed. Then, the winning combination lottery is performed only once in the unit game. Therefore, from the player's viewpoint, the instruction function display is shown in one display mode based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed in the unit game, the special display is performed even though the winning combination does not change in the unit game. The LED 612 can display a plurality of types of display modes. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the lottery result has changed in the unit game. More specifically, even if a display mode (for example, “00” in the instruction function display of the first example) indicating an instruction content with a high possibility of a low expected combination is indicated, the possibility of a high expectation combination is high. It can be expected that the display mode changes to a display mode (for example, “2C” in the instruction function display of the first example) indicating the instruction content, and the effect of maintaining the player's entertainment interest throughout the unit game. To play.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 by enabling the display mode of the special display LED 612 to be changed in the unit game as described above, It is possible to provide a game style in which a game is advanced while paying attention to the special display LED 612. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, compared to the conventional gaming machine in which the effect display on the liquid crystal display (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1) tends to be excessively emphasized. By providing a novel game style, it is possible to enhance a player's entertainment interest.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a carryover role (for example, a bonus role such as “two kinds of BB” shown in FIG. 49) that can carry over a winning flag after the next game is selected as a winning role. In the case where the instruction function display related to the winning combination is performed, the instruction function display does not need to be completed in one game of the winning game, and the instruction function display is displayed over a plurality of games from the winning game or subsequent games. You may do so. Specifically, for example, when the BB role (carry-over role) and the watermelon role (non-carry-over role) are simultaneously won by the winning combination lottery, the winning game indicates an instruction content for aligning the symbol combination of the BB role. Assume that an instruction function display is performed. However, in this winning game, if the symbol combination of the BB combination does not stop on the activated line and the BB combination does not win, the instruction function display displayed in the winning game is continuously displayed until the next game. It may be. Further, even if the indication function display is temporarily erased between the winning game and the next game, the indication function display of the next game may be performed in a display mode that takes over the indication function display of the winning game. By doing in this way, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment enables the indication function display over a plurality of games, teaches an opportunity to obtain an advantageous result for the player beyond the unit game (one game), and Can greatly increase the expectations of the elderly.

[11-3-5. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 performs the instruction function display with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation processing, while displaying the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the contents of the instruction are notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510). As described above with reference to FIG. 55, when the instruction function occurs, the instruction information command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board can identify the group including the winning combination selected in the game. Sent in the form (command in which the winning combinations are grouped).

  Such a command in which the winning combinations are grouped will be described with a specific example. First, for example, “AT1”, in which the forward pressing is the proper pressing order, is selected as the winning combination, and when all the proper pressing orders are displayed on the instruction function display, as a command in which the winning combinations are grouped, In the order of pressing, the bell group was elected. " Here, the winning combination "AT2" is also grouped into the "push order group of forward push" because the proper push order is forward push. Therefore, when "AT2" is selected as the winning combination when all the proper pressing orders are displayed on the instruction function display, the same command as in the case of "AT1" is notified. Further, for example, when “AT1” is selected as a winning combination and only the first stop reel is displayed in an appropriate pressing order in the instruction function display, a command in which the winning combinations are grouped as “1st stop is The winning reel group has been elected as the left reel. " Here, the winning combinations “AT2” to “AT4” are also grouped into a “push order bell group in which the first stop is the left reel” because the first stop in the appropriate push order is the left reel. Therefore, when only one of the first stopped reels is displayed in the proper pressing order in the instruction function display, any of “AT2” to “AT4” is selected as the winning combination, and the same as in the case of “AT1” The command will be notified. Then, upon receiving such an instruction information command, the sub-board 510 displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) according to the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect processing).

  That is, when generating the indicating function, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment displays the indicating function with the special display LED 612, and displays the navigation display having the same contents as the indicating contents in the indicating function on the image display body 500. Thereby, the content of the instruction is notified in such a manner that the player can easily recognize the instruction.

  As described above in the description of step S31 in FIG. 54 and the like, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. It is not necessary that the sub-substrate 501 determine the display mode for the navigation display from among a plurality of display modes as long as the display content does not violate the instruction content by the instruction function display (one-to-n correspondence). ).

  FIG. 89 is a view for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the first example. FIG. 89 illustrates a display example of the navigation display in a form corresponding to the display example of the instruction function display illustrated in FIGS. 80 and 81. According to FIG. 89, first, when the indication function display is “00”, this is the case where “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. At this time, since there is no substantial instruction content, the player does not need to aim for a special symbol, and may arbitrarily select the pushing order. Such a display is made when, for example, the player wins a replay in any order during the AT. Therefore, "?" Is displayed on all reels as a display example of the navigation display.

  Next, when the indication function display is "02", this is the case where "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a and "2" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. It is not necessary to aim at a special symbol, but it is required to stop the reel 301 in the stop order of pinching (left, right, middle). Such a display is performed when the push order bell of “AT3” or “AT4” is won during the AT. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, "1" is displayed at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" is displayed at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and "2" is displayed at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c. The stop order of right / middle pinching is taught. In the navigation display, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is changed to yellow reminiscent of the bell or to the reel to be stopped next (for example, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell has been won). When all the reels 301 are rotating, the reels are stopped first, and when the two reels are rotating, the reels are stopped second). It may be highlighted.

  Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the contents of the instruction to be displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. Specifically, the reel to be stopped first Is a left reel 301a, an example of outputting a sound such as "Left!" At a timing before the first stop of the reel is performed. When performing audio output, different audio outputs (for example, characters, dialogue, speech, etc.) are based on the type of the winning combination (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) and the gaming state (high accuracy state, low accuracy state, etc.). (Intonation is different). By providing the navigation display including the audio output in this way, the notification of the instruction content to the player is more reliably provided, and the navigation display that changes according to the game situation is provided to enhance the interest of the player. Can be expected.

  Next, when the indication function display is “2C”, this is the case where “2” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “C” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Is required to first stop the right reel 301c while aiming at the red 7 symbol, and thereafter, is required to select either the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b to perform the second stop while aiming at the red 7 symbol. It is. Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, for example, when preparing a special replay combination having a different stop form depending on the pressing order, when such a special replay combination is won, by displaying such an instruction function, an appropriate pressing order can be obtained. , It is possible to realize a reel effect in which a specific symbol alignment stops when a stop operation is performed. Therefore, as an example of the navigation display, the stop position is indicated by “1” at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c and “?” Indicating the stop order is unknown at the corresponding positions of the other reels 301a and 301b. Teaches only the first stop of the right reel 301c. Furthermore, in order to teach the standard of the pressing place, the effect display of "Aim at the seven red symbols" is displayed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the content of the instruction by the instruction function can be more reliably transmitted to the player.

  FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period of various displays and the like. In FIG. 90, various indicators and the like are described on the vertical axis, and a display period such as at which timing in the course of one game progressing the display or transmission is shown in the horizontal axis direction. .

  First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 90 will be described. In the following description, other timing charts will be used in the same format, but since the timing charts are viewed in the same manner, the description of the items will be omitted.

  The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmission”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and no instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510.

  The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main board 409. When the instruction function 802 is ON, it means “display”, and the special function LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the instruction function is not displayed by the special display LED 612.

  The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of game values paid out as a result of the game. When the payout number 803 is ON, it means "display", and the payout number is displayed by the special display LED 612. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. Note that information on the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and can be displayed again even after the power is turned off, depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 or program processing.

  The seg error 804 is equivalent to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the segment LED when the error is detected. When the seg error 804 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 Is notified of the details of the error (error display). When the seg error 804 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

  The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to a navigation display of an instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means “display”, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is performed with contents that do not conflict with the display contents of the instruction function 802. Although detailed description is omitted, data related to the display on the sub-board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and the data can be read back as appropriate even if a power failure occurs. And

  The liquid crystal error 806 is equivalent to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected. When the liquid crystal error 806 is ON, it means “display”. The details of the error are reported on the liquid crystal screen of the display body 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not reported on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal error 806, an error is reported with a content that does not violate the report in the seg error 804.

  The error occurrence 807 indicates the state of occurrence of the error. In the present drawing, the error occurrence 807 may be read as that the main board 409 has detected the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred (error has been detected) at the timing of turning ON, and when the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (error has been detected). Not). Note that if the error occurrence 807 is turned off after being turned on, it means that the error has been eliminated at the timing of turning off.

  The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the seg error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

  In FIG. 90 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is a reel stop button 211a to 211c corresponding to the reels 301a to 301c being rotated, and a reel stop button 211 that is pressed first. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 on which the reel 301 was stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (ie, last) reel 301 Means the reel stop button 211 for which the stop operation has been performed.

  Next, a display period (including a transmission period and the like) of each display device illustrated in FIG. 90 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 90 shows a situation in which the game is played without an error during the AT in which the instruction function is executed, and no payout occurs in the game.

  In FIG. 90, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all the reels 301 from the timing at which the press operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (the third stop button is pressed). Will be displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of the rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 90, the start of the navigation display is earlier than the start of the instruction function display, but the navigation display is displayed based on the content of the instruction information command, and the content of the instruction information command is indicated by the instruction. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is still performed with the content that is not different from the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited.

  In the timing chart of FIG. 90, the timing of “start accepting press of the stop button” and the timing of turning on the instruction function 802 look the same, but strictly speaking, after the start of accepting the press of the reel stop button 211, The display of the instruction function by the special display LED 612 is not started. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of “start accepting pressing of the stop button”, and in the processing by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409 on the program. Also, the instruction function display is executed prior to the timing when the stop button press acceptance is started. The timings of the “start of accepting pressing of the stop button” and the “instruction function display” are the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

  In FIG. 90, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is the start timing of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-mentioned display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing during a period from the time when the pressing operation of the start lever 210 is performed to the time when the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable. May be started.

  Next, an example of a display period in a situation different from that in FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing another example of a display period of various displays and the like. The timing chart of FIG. 91 is the same as FIG. 90 in that the game was played without an error during the AT in which the instruction function is executed, but shows a situation in which a payout has occurred in the game. Different. In FIG. 91, in addition to the progress of the game shown on the horizontal axis in FIG. 90, "payout start" in which the payout of the game value (medal) is started after the reels are completely stopped, and "payout completed" in which the payout is completed. And "medal insertion (BET possible)" for starting the next game.

  According to FIG. 91, when the payout of the game value is performed, the payout number is displayed on the special display LED 612, and the display function is also the instruction function displayed until the “third stop button is pressed” on the special display LED 612. It can be seen that the display period does not overlap with the display. Also, in FIG. 91, the period during which the instruction function 802 is displayed is up to “pressing the third stop button”, but as another example, it may be displayed continuously until “payout start”. Even in such a case, the display period of the instruction function 802 does not overlap with the display period of the payout number 803.

[11-3-6. Instruction function-related processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 60, an instruction function-related process using a peripheral board (specifically, for example, the sub board 510) will be described. The start timing of the instruction function-related processing does not necessarily need to be after the completion of the instruction function generation processing (step S61 in FIG. 57), and may be performed in parallel with the instruction function generation processing, for example. In such a case, it is possible to reduce the time required for the entire process, but it is preferable that the time is at least after the timing at which the above-described instruction information command and the condition device command can be received.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 60, the condition device command transmitted from the main board 409 is received. In the condition device command, information on a condition device (in some cases, a plurality of condition devices) permitted to operate based on a winning combination selected by an internal lottery on a winning combination performed on the main board 409 is converted into a command format. It is something.

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the above-mentioned condition device command does not have enough information that the receiving side (sub-board 510) of the command can completely specify the winning combination. It is preferable that the information on the condition device notified by is such that the winning combination (or condition device) grouped can be identified. In particular, when the instruction function display is not executed, the command transmitted from the main substrate 409 prevents the sub-substrate 510 from identifying or judging an appropriate pressing order and pressing position of the winning combination in the game. Is required. Specifically, for example, although it is understood that the sub-board 510 that has received the command has won the pressing order bell, the breakdown of the winning combination (which of “AT1” to “AT10” is the winning combination) is not known. It is preferable that it is not. In this regard, as described in [11-1], a command for notifying the winning combination grouped when the instruction function display is not executed may be regarded as a “condition device command”. Note that the specific format of these commands may be any command format that is generally used. For example, among the bits assigned to all the winning combinations, the bits assigned to the winning combination in the game are And a format for notifying an identification number associated with a winning combination group in the game.

  Although not shown, the sub-board 510 sets each state flag (special state flag, hell state flag, etc.) used in the instruction function generation processing by the main board 409 before or after receiving the condition device command in step S701. ) Is received by a command or the like. It is also assumed that an AT flag, an AT internal flag, and the like are transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 and the like by an appropriate command or the like. The above-described instruction information command is also transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. The command transmitted from the main board 409 may be transmitted in a mode in which individual commands are transmitted at individual timings, or a command in which some pieces of command information are combined into one is transmitted. May be used.

  After receiving the condition device command in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether the hell state flag is ON. If it is determined that the hell state flag is ON (YES in step S702), the process of step S703 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not ON (is OFF) (step S702). NO), the process of step S721 described below is performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not a “precursor game number command” for notifying the number of predictive games has been received. The “precursor game number command” is transmitted as a command to the peripheral board at an appropriate timing when execution of the predictive game is determined in the instruction function generation processing of the main board 409 (precursor game flag ON). . If it is determined that the precursor game number command has been received (YES in step S703), the process of step S704 is performed, and if it is determined that the precursor game number command has not been received (NO in step S703), As the processing of step S718, processing for performing various effect displays is performed, and the instruction function-related processing ends.

  When the process of step S718 is performed, the game is not in the hell state, and the precursor game has not been started. Therefore, as a specific “various effect display”, for example, the rare role is selected as the winning combination. In such a case, a predetermined cut-in effect or an effect effect screen indicating a winning combination is displayed.

  In step S704, it is determined whether the “continuous effect flag” is OFF. The “continuous effect flag” is an internal flag that is turned “ON” when the “precursor effect” including the “continuous effect” is being executed.

  Here, “continuous production” in the first embodiment will be described. The “continuous effect” corresponds to an effect in which, for example, a display effect is performed in a continuous effect content for a predetermined number of games from one game to a plurality of games in the precursor effect performed during the precursor game. At the end of the "continuous effect", an effect result for instructing (suggesting / notifying) whether or not the game is a special game (here, AT) is displayed. Therefore, the result of the continuous production is also the result of the precursor production, and more specifically, the result of the precursor game.

  Here, a description will be given of an example of the relationship between the “foreboding effect” and the “continuous effect” in the first embodiment. For example, “title display” is performed in the first game of the precursor effect. The title display may be a display indicating the content of the subsequent continuous production (for example, “the main character vs. the battle of enemy A has started!”), Or a display simply indicating the start of the continuous production (for example, “start of judgment chance”). !)). Then, in the second and subsequent games of the precursor effect (corresponding to the first and subsequent games of the continuous effect), the effect contents of the continuous effect (corresponding to “continuous effect contents” described later) are displayed. Then, in the final game of the continuous production (which is also the final game of the precursor production), the result of the continuous production (in this case, whether or not the AT transition is allowed, but the transition to another advantageous game state may be notified). (Suggest / teach). In addition, you may make it notify the result by the said continuous production as the last game of a continuous production which made display of the content of the continuous production finish.

  In the following description relating to the instruction function-related processing, “continuous production” means such continuous production related to AT transition. In addition, when it is assumed that the precursor effect and the continuous effect are performed over “a plurality of games”, the “plural games” are a plurality of games (games) in which an internal lottery regarding a winning combination is performed for each game. The game may be a pseudo multiple game created by changing the reel 301 a plurality of times during one game.

  In step S704, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag is OFF (YES in step S704), the process of step S705 is performed, and when it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (ON). (NO in step S704), the process in step S711 is performed.

  In step S705, a continuous production generation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a “predictive production (may be regarded as a continuous production)”. In the example described above, when an indication effect is generated, the title display is performed in the first game of the indication effect, and a continuous effect is generated in the remaining game of the indication effect. It can also be considered that it is determined whether or not to make it.

  FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a lottery table used for a continuous effect generation lottery. FIG. 92 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is ON, and FIG. 93 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is OFF. 92 and FIG. 93, both of them are sorted so as to randomly determine whether or not to execute a sign effect (or a continuous effect) based on the number of sign games at that time (that is, the number of remaining sign games). Is set.

  According to the examples of FIGS. 92 and 93, when the number of remaining signs games is 5 games or more or 1 game or less, there is no winning for the sign effect, and the number of remaining signs games is 2 to 4 games. Only in that case will the opportunity to win the occurrence of the precursor effect be given. In addition, in the lottery tables of FIGS. 92 and 93, at least when the number of remaining sign games becomes two, the sign effect is always won (255/255). Comparing the case where the AT is internally won (FIG. 92) and the case where the AT is not internally won (FIG. 93), the case where the AT is internally won is better than the case where the AT is internally won. In the stage where the number of remaining predictive games is large, it is easier to win a predictive effect than in the case where no win has been internally selected. By performing a continuous production generation lottery using such a lottery table, when a precursor effect (or a continuous production) occurs, the degree of expectation that, as the production continues, the AT win results in a more advantageous result for the player. Can be higher.

  A description will be given of a breakdown example of the sign effect according to the number of remaining sign games. In the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining predictive games is 2 and a win is generated for the predictive effect, the title is displayed in the first game (since it is immediately executed, the number of remaining predictive games is 2). In the second game (the number of remaining precursor games is 1), the display of the first game of the continuous production content (the first game of the continuous production; hereinafter the same) is performed, and the result of the precursor production (or the continuous production) is performed. Is displayed.

  Further, in the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining predictive games is 3 and the player wins the predictive effect, the title is set in the first game (the number of remaining predictive games is 3 because it is immediately executed). In the second game (the number of remaining signs game 2), the first game (the first game of the continuous effects) is displayed in the second game, and in the third game (the number of remaining signs game 1). The display of the second game of the continuous effect contents (the second game of the continuous effect) is performed, and the result of the precursor effect (or the continuous effect) is displayed.

  In addition, in the continuous effect generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining predictive games is four and the winning of the predictive effect is won, the title is set in the first game (the number of remaining predictive games is four because it is immediately executed). In the second game (the number of remaining signs game 3), the first game (the first game of the continuous effects) is displayed in the second game (the number of remaining signs game), and in the third game (the number of remaining signs game 2). The display of the second game of the continuous production (the second game of the continuous production) is performed, and the display of the third game of the continuous production (the third game of the continuous production) in the fourth game (the number of remaining precursor games is 1). Is performed, and the result of the indication effect (or the continuous effect) is displayed.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not the consecutive effect generation lottery in step S705 has been won, and if it is determined that the winning has occurred (YES in step S706), the process of step S707 is performed, and the winning is performed. If it is determined that the instruction function has not been performed (NO in step S706), the instruction function related processing ends.

  Then, in step S707, a continuous effect content lottery for determining the contents of the precursor effect (or the continuous effect) is performed for the precursor effect won in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705. FIG. 94 and FIG. 95 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a lottery table used for a continuous production content lottery. In the case other than the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 94 is used, and in the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 95 is used.

  In FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, four types of production contents, “weak story”, “strong story”, “weak battle”, and “strong battle” are prepared, and based on ON / OFF of the AT internal flag, respectively. The lottery is performed with different distribution. These four types of production contents have a relationship of "weak story" <"weak battle" <"strong story" <"strong battle" as the degree of expectation (reliability) that leads to the AT winning. In the production contents (story system, battle system), the production of “strong” has higher reliability than the production of “weak”.

  From the above, the reliability (expected degree leading to the AT winning) in the predictive effect (or the continuous effect) is determined by the number of continuous games of the predictive effect (determined by the continuous effect generation lottery using FIGS. 92 and 93) or It can be understood that it is variably realized by the effect contents of the precursor effect (determined by the continuous effect content lottery using FIGS. 94 and 95).

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the continuous production content lottery is performed in the special mode (using FIG. 95), the selected production content is determined to always be continued for four games including the title display. In other words, when the state is controlled to the special state, in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705, when the number of remaining predictive games is four, it is ensured that the predictive effect is always won. No matter what effect content is selected in the subsequent continuous effect content lottery in step S707, the precursor effect can be continued for four games. The breakdown of the forerunning effects of these four games, as described above, is that the first one game has a title display and the remaining three games show the content of the continuous effect, and in particular, the result of the forehead effect (or continuous effect) in the final game. Is displayed.

  When the effect contents of the continuous effect displayed in the precursor effect are determined by the above-described continuous effect content lottery, in step S708, the generation of the precursor effect based on the determined effect content is started. Then, since the indication effect is being executed, the continuous effect flag is turned ON (step S709), and the instruction function-related processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (that is, during the execution of the predictive effect), it is determined in step S711 whether the number of predictive games is 0 or not. The number of precursor games can be confirmed by referring to the precursor game number command confirmed to be received in step S703. Then, when it is determined that the number of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S711), the processing of step S712 is performed as processing accompanying the end of the precursor game. When it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S711), since the precursor game is being executed and the precursor effect is being executed, as the process of step S717, the currently executed precursor effect is executed. The display (continuous effect display) is performed. The indication effect displayed by the process of step S717 is an indication effect based on the effect content determined in step S707. By referring to the number of games since the start of the indication effect, the indication effect is accurately determined. The effect can be displayed.

  In step S712, it is determined whether the special state flag is ON. As described above, ON / OFF of the special state flag is set in the instruction function generation processing by the main board 409. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, a precursor game (a precursor effect) is executed. After the operation is completed, the state may be controlled to a special state (special mode may be set). If it is determined that the special state flag is ON (YES in step S712), a predetermined display (special state screen display) that allows the player to recognize the special mode is performed in step S713. After the output, the instruction function related processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S712 that the special state flag is not ON (is OFF) (NO in step S712), it is determined whether the AT internal flag is ON (step S714). If it is determined that the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S714), it means that the continuous production and the precursor game have ended in the AT internal winning state, and the AT game is started. As a process, a predetermined display (AT start screen) indicating the start of the AT is output, and the instruction function related process is ended. If it is determined that the AT internal flag is not ON (is OFF) (NO in step S714), as a process in step S716, various effect displays are output, and the instruction function-related process ends.

  Next, processing after step S721 will be described. The processing after step S721 is performed when the hell state flag is ON, that is, when the hell state is controlled. The situation of being controlled to the hell state is, for example, when the precursor game is performed after the special mode. When the lottery table of FIG. 63 is used, the hell state does not win the first hit of the AT.

  As such a process in the hell state, first, in step S721, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is OFF. This process is the same as the process in step S704, and thus the details are omitted.

  Then, when it is determined in step S721 that the continuous production flag is OFF, a continuous production generation lottery is performed (not shown, but similar to step S705), and then a continuous production content lottery is performed in step S722. In step S723, generation of an indication effect according to the lottery result is started. In step S724, the continuous effect flag is turned ON, and the instruction function related process ends. Note that the processing in steps S722 to S724 is the same as the processing in steps S707 to S709 described above, and thus details are omitted. In addition, when it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF, the indication effect is being performed, so the indication effect display (continuous effect display) is performed as the process of step S725, and the instruction function related process ends. . The processing in step S725 is the same as the processing described in step S717.

  As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 60, the control processing that the peripheral board (sub-board 510) manages for the state (for example, the precursor game or the special mode) that can be positioned as the precursor of the AT game. be able to. The determination process regarding the termination of the AT game and the management of the number of games (AT game determination process) is performed after the reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54), and details thereof will be described later in [11-8] and the like. .

[11-3-7. Expectation display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [11-3-4] and thereafter, the control processing (instruction function display processing) performed by the main board 409 causes the special display LED 612 to indicate the content of the instruction based on the winning combination. (Instruction content regarding a predetermined game operation) can be displayed as an instruction function display. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is performed on a display (special display LED 612) on which an instruction function is displayed by another control process (expected degree display process) performed by the main board 409. It is possible to display an expected display (hereinafter, referred to as “expected degree display”) indicating the expected degree of the privilege that can be performed. Hereinafter, such “expected degree display” will be described in detail.

  The degree of expectation display process by the main board 409 is an arbitrary process from the start of the internal lottery process (step S3) to the end of the unit game in the processing procedure of one game (unit game) shown in FIG. And the special display LED 612 displays the degree of expectation at an appropriate timing according to various specific examples of the degree of expectation display described later. Also, the expectation display need not always be displayed in the game in which the instruction function display is performed. For example, only the expectation display may be performed without performing the instruction function display, or the expectation display may not be performed. Alternatively, only the instruction function display may be performed.

  In addition, the expectation display is a display indicating the expectation of the privilege that can be given by performing the game, but the “privilege” in this case can include various benefits that are advantageous to the player. . Specifically, determination of an advantageous game (bonus game, AT game, etc.), transition to an advantageous AT lottery game state (high-accuracy state, ultra-high-accuracy state, etc.), stock of an advantageous game or extension of the period (AT stock, AT stock, etc.) The addition of the number of AT games, etc.) and the payout of gaming values (medals) associated with winning of a symbol combination based on a winning combination are all equivalent to “privileges”. In addition, when there is a special state (a so-called example of a chance zone) in which the execution of the advantageous game is determined based on whether or not the correct pushing order is correctly answered, the teaching of the proper pushing order is stocked (the so-called chance zone). , Navistock) can also be included in the “privilege”.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for at least one of such benefits, an expectation degree indicating the expectation degree can be displayed. The “expectation degree” for the privilege may be the expectation degree for the presence or absence of the above-mentioned benefit (for example, the expected degree of winning a bonus or an AT), or the expectation degree for the above-mentioned amount of the privilege (the AT game). Expectancy of the number of additional games in number addition). In the case of the degree of expectation for the presence or absence of the privilege, any of the display methods of the percentage display and the level display described later may be used. Because of the difficulty, the level display is preferable to the percentage display. In addition, in the case of the degree of expectation with respect to the amount of the award of the privilege, the amount of the award of the privilege that can be expected may be displayed in the degree of expectation display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the processes such as the lottery regarding the winning combination, the display of the instruction function, and the provision of the privilege are managed by the main board 409, the display of the degree of expectation is managed by the main board 409. As a result, the reliability of the display of the degree of expectation can be increased. Note that the degree of expectation indicated by the degree of expectation display does not always need to be the actual degree of expectation regarding the provision of the benefit, and the main board 409 may determine and display the degree of expectation in the effect. However, in the case of "fixed display" or "premier display" described later, in order not to discourage the player, based on the actual expectation degree, the display must be permitted only in the situation where the privilege is always given. Is preferred.

[11-3-7-1. Display Mode of Expectation Display (Type 1)]
In the expectation display process, the main board 409 selects a display mode of the expectation display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, display data is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation degree display can be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes that can be used in the indication function display. Hereinafter, the display of the degree of expectation according to such a display mode is referred to as “display of the degree of expectation of the first type”. When the first type of expectation display is performed, it is not necessary to newly provide a display mode for the expectation display. Therefore, the data of the display mode prepared in advance for the indication function display (for example, stored in the ROM 1112 or the like). ) Can be used to display the degree of expectation.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1 in which the first type of expected degree display is performed, how the indication function display and the expected degree display are performed will be described with reference to specific examples of patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
FIGS. 96 and 97 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining the first type of expectation display (pattern 1). FIG. 96 shows a display example of the indication function display. 97 shows a display example of the degree of expectation display. In this pattern, it is assumed that special display LEDs 612a and 612b are used as an example of a display on which an instruction function display and an expectation degree display are performed. At this time, the display mode of the instruction function display and the display mode of the expectation level display appear as a two-digit display combining the displays of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b).

  First, FIG. 96 (A) shows a display example of the special display LED 612a for displaying information indicating a guide of the pressed place in the instruction function display. FIG. 96 (B) shows a display example of a special display LED 612b for displaying information indicating a pressing order in the instruction function display. The display example of FIG. 96B is the same as the display example of the special display LED 612b in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. 81, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  The display example of FIG. 96A is expanded based on the display example of the special display LED 612a in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. More specifically, in FIG. 80, four types of segments are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with four types of instruction contents (“no designation”, “chance design”, “red 7 design”, “BAR design”). Although the display patterns (“0” to “3”) are prepared, in the case of FIG. 96A, 16 kinds of segment display patterns (“1” to “n”) correspond to the above four kinds of instruction contents. 0 ”to“ 9 ”,“ A ”to“ F ”) are prepared. For example, when "0", "4", "8", and [C] are displayed on the special display LED 612a as the instruction function display, all of the instruction contents indicate "no designation". It should be noted that which one of the display modes having the same instruction content is to be selected with respect to the standard of the pressed place (in the above example, which of “0”, “4”, “8”, and [C] is selected) is determined. May be determined according to a predetermined processing procedure, or may be selected at random.

  By using the display examples of FIGS. 96A and 96B, the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an instruction function consisting of two digits of characters or numbers. By the display, it is possible to show the instruction content based on a predetermined game operation (approximate pressing place and pressing order) in the game. Specifically, for example, when any one of “21”, “61”, “A1”, and “E1” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as the instruction function display, “the operation of stopping the forward push for the red 7 symbol” Is the instruction content of the instruction function display.

  Next, FIG. 97A is a display example of the special display LED 612a in the expectation display, and FIG. 97B is a display example of the special display LED 612b in the expectation display. As shown in FIGS. 97 (A) and 97 (B), the display of the degree of expectation by the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is performed by any of the segment display of “0” to “9” or “F”. Using the display examples of FIGS. 97 (A) and 97 (B), the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an expectation of two digits or characters. The display can indicate the degree of expectation of the privilege.

  Here, the expected degree indicated by the two-digit expected degree display as described above will be described with a specific example. Note that such expectation display is the same in other expectation displays (expectation display using the first type pattern 2 and the second type patterns 1 and 2) described later.

  When a two-digit number from “00” to “99” is displayed on the special display LED 612, the expected degree can be displayed as a percentage. That is, in the case of the lowest value “00 (0%)”, the privilege cannot be expected, and in the case of the highest value “99 (99%)”, the privilege can be expected to be much.

  When the display of the upper digit in the expectation display by the special display LED 612 (that is, the segment display of the special display LED 612a) is “F”, the grant of the privilege is determined or the amount of the privilege is determined to be equal to or more than a predetermined amount. This shall indicate the “determination status” at which the grant of the privilege is determined. Therefore, when "F" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, the display is "fixed display" regardless of the segment display of the special display LED 612b.

  Furthermore, when the segment display of both the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is "F" (that is, the segment display of the special display LED 612 is "FF"), a more special premier among the above-mentioned confirmed displays. Display. When the premium display appears, the freeze control of the reel 301 is performed in parallel, or a specific display effect is performed on the image display body 500 controlled by the sub-substrate 510. It is preferable to emphasize that this is a situation. In addition, when the premium display appears, a larger privilege may be provided than when other confirmed displays appear.

  When the first type of expectation display (pattern 1) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode used in the expectation display (see FIGS. 97A and 97B) is as follows. One of a plurality of display modes (combinations of segment display shown in FIGS. 96 (A) and 96 (B)) used in the instruction function display is matched. For example, the display of “91” on the special display LED 612 can indicate the instruction content of “operation to stop the forward push aiming at the change symbol” in the case of the instruction function display, whereas the display of the privilege for the privilege is displayed in the case of the expectation degree display. 91% ".

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is desirable to utilize the numerical information used for the indication function display for the expectation display, assuming the case where the expectation is indicated in this way, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, it is also possible to use only the alphabet and make it difficult to understand the degree of expectation at a glance. In this case, even if the alphabet is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is difficult for the player to determine the degree of expectation in an instant, so that the effect of maintaining the expectation of the player is expected. it can.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of pattern 2 when the first type of expectation display is performed will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the first type of expected degree display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expected degree display. In the pattern 2 of the first type, a display example of the instruction function display uses the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81.

  The expectation degree display of the pattern 2 of the first type is displayed in two digits by the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b), and FIG. FIG. 98B shows an example of a segment display on the special display LED 612b.

  According to FIG. 98 (A), any of “0” to “3” is displayed on the special display LED 612a when the degree of expectation is displayed. The seg display shown in FIG. 98 (A) can indicate, for example, an expected level of an expected degree, and the expected level becomes higher in the order of “0 (level 0)” to “3 (level 3)”. Further, according to FIG. 98 (B), any of “0” to “9” or “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612b when the degree of expectation is displayed. The segment display shown in FIG. 98B can be used to indicate the expected level of the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation from “0” to “9”), like the segment display shown in FIG. 98A. Is higher). At this time, the segment display of “F” means a final display in which the award of a privilege or the like is finalized.

  Further, the segment display shown in FIG. 98 (B) indicates the expected level of the degree of expectation and, for example, when the indicated function is displayed in the same game, is based on the instruction content of the indicated function display. It can be a segment display. Specifically, in the indication function display in the same game in which the degree of expectation is displayed, when any of “0” to “9” is segment-displayed on the special display LED 612b as the information indicating the pressing order, the degree of expectation is displayed. In this case, the same segment display may be performed on the special display LED 612b. By performing such a segment display, even when the player mistakes the expectation display as the indication function display, it is possible to perform the stop operation based on the proper pressing order, and the player is disadvantaged. Can be prevented.

  In the case of causing the segmentation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display to be performed in the expectation degree display, it is not necessary to perform the same segment display as the instruction function display as in the above example. Before the first stop, a seg display corresponding to the instruction content that can recognize the reel 301 to be first stopped may be displayed in the degree of expectation display. Specifically, for example, when “right first (two choices)” is determined as the instruction content of the pressing order, according to the display example of FIG. 81, “C” is seg-displayed on the special display LED 612b as the instruction function display. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the special display LED 612b in the expectation display may be “5 (middle right and left)” or “6 ( One of the seg displays of "center right and left)" and "9 (first right)" may be displayed.

  When the first type of expectation display (pattern 2) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode used in the expectation display (see FIGS. 98A and 98B) is as follows. It matches one of a plurality of display modes (combinations of the segment display shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) used in the instruction function display. For example, the display of “11” in the special display LED 612 indicates the instruction content of “the operation of stopping the forward push aiming at the change symbol” in the case of the instruction function display, whereas the expectation degree for the privilege is “ Level 1 ".

  Note that when the first type of expectation display shown in the above-described patterns 1 and 2 is performed, the order and timing in which the instruction function display and the expectation display are displayed on the special display LED 612 are described. Will be described in detail after [11-3-7-3]. In any case, by performing such a first type of expectation display, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform the expectation display using the display mode of the instruction function display.

  Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type of expectation display is performed, the special display LED 612 performs the display in a display mode that can be recognized as either the indication function display or the expectation display. The player can enjoy which display is being performed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is advanced by a game operation (appropriate stop operation) based on the instruction content of the instruction function display, an advantageous privilege advantageous to the player can be given. More specifically, for example, a winning order bell role is won, an instruction function display is performed, and an appropriate stop operation is performed according to the instruction content of the indicating function display. Of the symbol combinations with the largest payout number are stopped, and the medals with the largest payout number are awarded. On the other hand, in the expectation display, the expectation of the privilege can be suggested, but the benefit in which the expectation display indicates the expectation can be a different privilege different from the advantageous privilege guided by the instruction function display. The different privilege here specifically corresponds to, for example, the degree of expectation regarding determination of a bonus game, an AT game, or the like, the degree of expectation regarding addition of the number of AT games, or the like. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can display such an instruction function display and an expected degree display on a specific display (special display LED 612) using a common display mode, so that the display mode is displayed. In this case, it is possible to simultaneously have a sense of expectation for different types of benefits (advantageous benefits and different benefits), and to allow the player to enjoy whether the display mode is based on the instruction function display or the expectation level display. For. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the monotony of the game without getting tired of the game.

  For example, regarding the display on the special display LED 612, if a reel stop operation is performed assuming that it is an instruction function display, and the stop operation is performed and the display remains until the timing at which the instruction function display disappears, Since it is understood that the display is not the instruction function display but the expectation display, the player can expect to give a privilege according to the expectation indicated by the display. Therefore, the player proceeds with the game while praying that the display is not the instruction function display when any display appears on the special display LED 612. Therefore, the expectation degree display appears, that is, the privilege. To the player.

  In the example of the preceding paragraph, the case has been described in which the game can be advanced in a state where it is difficult to determine whether the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is based on the indication function display or the expectation level display. The form is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, by flashing the display mode that appears on the special display LED 612 or changing the display color, it is also possible to determine that the display mode is likely to be based on the expected degree display. Or, for example, by displaying in the same manner as the indication function display at the beginning, but then performing the above-mentioned blinking display or the like, so that the display form is based on the expectation degree display. May be high.

  In the display of the degree of expectation, the display content is determined by the main board 409 itself that determines the winning combination by lottery and determines the grant of the privilege based on the lottery result of the lottery. The special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 , It is possible to cause the player to assume that the expected degree of the privilege directly connected to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the expected degree display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the case where the first type of expectation display can be performed, even if the instruction function display is performed, the expectation display is further performed, so that the privilege is given. It can be expected that a winning combination having a high degree of expectation is selected (winning of a highly expected combination).

  More specifically, in a game state such as an AT game in which the instruction function display is frequently executed, the instruction function display is mainly performed at the time of winning such as a pressing order bell or a replay. However, as described above in the description of the winning combination (for example, [10-1]), the pushing order bell and the replay are high winning combinations that are relatively easy to be won by the internal lottery, and the degree of expectation regarding the advantageous game is low. "Low expected role". On the other hand, the watermelon role, cherry role, chance role, etc., which are regarded as “highly expected roles” with high expectations regarding advantageous games, are low winning roles that are relatively difficult to win by internal lottery. Since the winning combination is a pressing order regardless of the number of payouts, the indicating function is not necessarily required even during the AT game. That is, in a gaming state such as an AT game, at the time when the instruction function display is performed, it is highly likely that the player has won the low expected combination, and the degree of expectation regarding the award of the privilege tends to be low. .

  In order to solve such a problem, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the expectation display using the display mode of the instruction function display as the first type of expectation display. Even if the indication function is displayed on the display LED 612, it can be expected that the display is the expectation degree display. Then, if the display on the special display LED 612 is the expected degree display, it can be expected that the high expected combination has been won. Therefore, even if the indication function display is performed, the expectation for the high expected combination is maintained while maintaining the expected feeling. You can entertain the game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation is displayed more easily when the high expected combination is selected in the winning combination lottery than when the low expected combination is selected in the winning combination lottery. It is desirable to do. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination is a pushing order bell combination (an example of a low expected combination), the operation probability of the display of the degree of expectation is set to 0.01 (1%), while the winning combination is a weak watermelon combination. In the case of (an example of a highly expected combination), if the operation probability of the expected degree display is set to 0.50 (50%), there is a possibility that the high expected combination is won when the expected degree display is performed. Since it is high, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation on the display of the expectation.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of a method of setting the operation probability of the expectation display to increase the possibility of winning the high expectation combination when the expectation display is performed using the above example. Referring to the lottery table of the winning combination lottery (FIG. 49), in the general state or the bonus internal state, the winning probability of the entire bell in the pushing order (AT1 to AT10) is 3200/65535, and the winning probability of the weak watermelon role is , 800/65535, by multiplying the winning probability of each winning combination by the operating probability of the expected degree display, the expected degree display appearance probability of the winning combination (that is, the winning degree of the winning combination and the expected degree Display probability) can be calculated. The expected degree display appearance probability of the pushing order bell combination is (32000/65535 × 0.01), and the expected degree display appearance probability of the weak watermelon combination is (800/65535 × 0.50). Then, by comparing the ratio of the expected degree display appearance probability of the low expected combination with the expected degree display appearance probability of the high expected combination, when the expected degree display is performed, the ratio of the winning combination being the high expected combination ( Or the winning combination is a low expected combination). For example, when calculating the ratio of the expected degree display appearance probability between the pushing order bell role and the weak watermelon role, it is found that the weak watermelon role occupies 55.56%, and only when the pushing order bell role or the watermelon role is won. If the expected degree display can be performed, it means that the weak watermelon role (high expected role) has been won more than half of the time when the expected degree display was performed. If such a concept is extended to all winning combinations, the expected degree display appearance probability of the high expected combination occupies at least 50% or more of the expected degree display appearance probabilities of all winning combinations. When performed, it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the high expected role. If the operating probability at the time of winning the highly expected combination is set too high, there is a possibility that when the display of the degree of expectation is not performed, it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the highly expected combination. Therefore, a reference value (for example, 70%) relating to the upper limit of the operation probability may be provided so that a certain degree of expectation can be obtained even if the expectation degree is not displayed.

  Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type of expectation display is performed, since the expectation of the high expectation combination can be given as described above, the game operation according to the instruction function display is performed. Even during an AT game that tends to be a monotonous game just by repeating the game, it is possible to enjoy whether the display on the special display LED 612 is an instruction function display or an expectation display, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game. can do.

  In the first type of expectation display, not all display modes used for indicating function display need be used as the display mode of the expectation display. Also, for a very small part of the display such as the premier display, a display mode unique to the expectation display, which is not used for the indication function display, may be used.

  In addition, when performing the first type of expectation display, if the player misidentifies the expectation display displayed on the special display LED 612 as the instruction function display, the instruction content of the instruction function display corresponding to the display is performed. It is conceivable that the stop operation is performed according to the following. In such a case, if a disadvantageous operation procedure is guided to the player as a result, the interest of the player may be reduced. It is preferable to display the degree of expectation while avoiding a display mode in which the operation procedure when the degree display is replaced with the instruction function display can be an unfavorable operation procedure.

  Performing the expectation display while avoiding a display mode in which the operation procedure in the case where the expectation display is replaced with the instruction function display may be an adverse operation procedure is particularly performed by performing a reel stop operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. Previously, it should be considered when the degree of expectation is displayed. Specifically, for example, when the instruction content to be indicated in the instruction function display is “reverse push”, the degree of expectation is displayed in the segment display corresponding to the instruction content of “reverse push”, or at least the first It is preferable to display the degree of expectation using a display mode of the instruction function display such that the stopped reel 301 becomes the right reel 301c. Referring to the display example of FIG. 96, as the seg display on the special display LED 612b, the seg display of the instruction content for stopping the right reel 301c first is “5 (middle right and left)” and “6 (middle right and left)”. )), "9 (first right)", and "C (first right (two choices))". Therefore, in the case of performing the expectation display by the percentage display in such a case, the display of the lower digit of the special display LED 612 (that is, the display on the special display LED 612b) is any one of “5”, “6”, and “9”. You can do it. In consideration of the reels to be stopped second, the segment display “6 (right center left)” is a stop mode contrary to “reverse push”, and therefore, if possible, the lower digit of the expectation display is “5” or “9”. Is preferable.

[11-3-7-2. Display mode of expectation display (second type)]
In the first type of expectation display, it has been described that the expectation display is performed according to any one of a plurality of display modes that can be used in the indication function display. Then, the degree of expectation display can be performed in a display mode different from any of a plurality of display modes that can be used in the instruction function display. Hereinafter, the display of the degree of expectation according to such a display mode is referred to as “display of the degree of expectation of the second type”. In the case of performing the second type of expectation display, it is necessary to prepare a display mode for the expectation display separately from the display mode for the indication function display. A plurality of display data are stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1 on which the second type of expectation display is performed, how the indication function display and the expectation display are displayed will be described using specific examples of patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the second type of expected degree display (pattern 1), and shows a display example of the expected degree display. The expectation degree display of pattern 1 of the second type is displayed in two digits by special display LEDs 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b), and FIG. 99A shows an example of seg display in special display LED 612a. FIG. 99 (B) shows an example of seg display on the special display LED 612b. In the pattern 1 of the second type, as the display example of the instruction function display, the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81 is used. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed, any one of “0” to “3” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612a, and “0” to “9” and “A” to “A” are displayed on the special display LED 612b. F ”is seg-displayed.

  According to FIG. 99 (A), any of “L”, “H”, and “F” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612a when the degree of expectation is displayed. Here, the segment display of "L" in the special display LED 612a indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the segment display of "H" indicates that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Further, the segment display of “F” means that the grant of the privilege (or the grant of the privilege with the given amount equal to or more than the predetermined amount) is determined (fixed display). Further, according to FIG. 99 (B), any one of “0” to “9” and “F” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612b when the degree of expectation is displayed. Here, the seg display of “0” to “9” in the special display LED 612b indicates the expected level of the expected degree, “0” is the expected level with the lowest expected degree, and “9” is the expected level of the expected degree. High expected level. Further, the segment display of “F” on the special display LED 612b is used for a more special premier display among the final displays in which “F” is segment displayed on the special display LED 612a. Details of the premier display are the same as those described above with reference to FIG. When the premium display is performed in the expectation display of the pattern 1 of the second type, “FF” is displayed on the special display LED 612.

  When such an expected degree display of the second type pattern 1 is performed, the two-digit display mode of the special display LED 612 indicates a rough expected degree in the upper digits (“L”, “H”, “F”). The lower-order digits (“0” to “9”, “A” to “F”) can indicate more detailed expectations.

  The display mode of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) is not individually captured, but is captured as a special display LED 612 displayed in a two-digit display mode. When the display mode is compared with the display mode of the instruction function display (see FIG. 80 and FIG. 81), the upper digits (“L”, “H”, “F”) of the expectation display are shown in the upper digits of the instruction function display. Since it is not displayed, it can be seen that the display mode of the two-digit expectation display is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display.

  In other words, when the expectation display of the second type pattern 1 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, some indication is displayed on the special display LED 612 without clearly indicating whether the indication function display or the expectation display is performed. Even if the mode appears, if the upper digit (special display LED 612a) of the display mode is any one of "L", "H", and "F", the degree of expectation is displayed, and "0" to "3" are displayed. Can be determined to be the instruction function display.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of pattern 2 when the second type of expectation display is performed will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the second type of expected degree display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expected degree display. In the pattern 2 of the second type, the display example of the instruction function display uses the instruction function display of the second example shown in FIGS. 83 and 84. Therefore, in this case, the special display LED 612 on which the expected degree display and the instruction function display are displayed is more specifically one 7-segment LED with a dot (special display LED 612c).

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, in the indication function display using the special display LED 612c, a total of 8 bits of binary data (a total of 8 bits, in which the upper 4 bits indicate a guide of the pressing place and the lower 4 bits indicate the pressing order). By performing lighting control corresponding to each digit bit of the data based on the instruction function display data), it is possible to indicate both the indication of the pressing place and the pressing order by the special display LED 612c.

  On the other hand, according to FIG. 100, in the expectation display of the pattern 2 of the second type using the special display LED 612c, the segment display of “0” to “9” is performed based on the degree of the expectation. In the display of the degree of expectation of the pattern 2 of the second type, the seg display of “F” is a definite display. Note that, in FIG. 2 and No. 2 in FIG. In order to avoid duplication with the seg display (indicating the number "3") when the indication function is displayed in combination with 15, the dot seg is turned on when the "3" is displayed in the expectation display. I try to make it.

  When the expectation display of the pattern 2 of the second type is performed, the display mode of the expectation display is any one of alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “F”. On the other hand, the display mode of the indication function display is a lighting control corresponding to each digit bit of the 8-bit binary data (instruction function display data), so that there is a high possibility of a symbolic display. Comparing the specific examples in which the display examples of FIG. 84 are combined, none of the display modes of the degree of expectation display overlap.

  That is, when the expectation display of the pattern 2 of the second type is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 (special display) does not indicate whether the indication function display or the expectation display is performed. Even if any display mode appears on the LED 612c), if the display mode is any one of “0” to “9” or “F”, the display is the expectation degree display; otherwise, the indication function display is performed. It is possible to determine that there is.

  Note that, when the second type of expectation display shown in Pattern 1 and Pattern 2 is performed, the order and timing in which the instruction function display and the expectation display are displayed on the special display LED 612 are described. Will be described in detail after [11-3-7-3]. In any case, by performing the second type of expectation display, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform the expectation display in a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display. .

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second type of expectation display is performed, the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 indicates whether the indication function display or the expectation display is displayed. Since it is identifiable, it is possible to execute an expected effect by displaying the degree of expectation without causing the player to misunderstand, and the appearance of the degree of expectation can enhance the interest in the game. In addition, since the instruction function display and the expectation display are displayed by the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, the effect on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, the screen related to the navigation display and the expectation) Regardless of the presence or absence of (display)), it is possible to realize the improvement of the game entertainment as described above.

  In the display of the degree of expectation, the display content is determined by the main board 409 itself that determines the winning combination by lottery and determines the grant of the privilege based on the lottery result of the lottery. The special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 , It is possible to cause the player to assume that the expected degree of the privilege directly connected to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the expected degree display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type of expectation display can be performed, the expectation display is performed when a special display LED 612 displays a display mode different from the instruction function display. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of the privilege from the point during the game. In particular, as described in the first type of expectation display, when the high expectation is selected in the winning combination lottery, the expectation is displayed more easily than when the low expectation is selected. (For example, as exemplified in the first type, when the winning combination is the pushing order bell combination, the operation probability of the expectation display is set to 0.01, while when the winning combination is the weak watermelon combination, the expectation display is performed. , Etc.), it is possible to create a situation where it is highly likely that the player has won a high expectation role when the expectation display is performed, thereby increasing the player's expectation of the expectation display. Can be increased.

  In a gaming state in which an instruction function display is frequently executed, such as an AT game, the instruction function display is displayed at the time of winning such as a pushing order bell, and a monotonous operation in which the game operation in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function display is repeated. Although it tends to be game-like, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by displaying the second type of expected degree display, the expected degree display in a display mode different from the instruction function display can be performed. Possibility of occurrence can be created, and monotonization of a game such as during an AT game can be suppressed.

  The expected degree display illustrated in FIG. 96 to FIG. 100 indicates the expected degree when at least some display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612. However, the state where nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612 will be described. May be regarded as one expected degree display (for example, the lowest expected degree).

[11-3-7-3. Priority display related to expectation display]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 displays not only the instruction function display indicating the instruction content regarding the predetermined game operation but also the expectation display indicating the expectation of the privilege. Can be. Then, during the unit game (one game), the main board 409 can control to display on the special display LED 612 with priority on either the expectation display or the instruction function display (priority display).

  Here, from the viewpoint of priority control, the above-described priority display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes display control in which priority is given to display timing (priority display of timing) and display in which priority is given to display layers. Control (priority display of layers). In addition, the above-described priority display includes an expectation priority display in which the expectation display is displayed with priority over the indication function display, and an instruction function in which the indication function display is displayed with priority over the expectation display from the viewpoint of the priority target. It can be divided into priority display.

  Hereinafter, these various priority displays will be described in detail with specific examples.

[11-3-7-3-1. Timing priority display]
Here, the priority display of the timing will be described. In the priority display of the timing, by providing a priority difference in display timing between the expectation display and the instruction function display, when displaying the expectation display and the instruction function display in the unit game, The display with the higher priority is displayed on the special display LED 612 before the display with the lower priority. The setting of the difference in the priority on the display timing may be such that information in which the priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 may be set for each unit game based on a gaming state, a lottery result of a winning combination lottery, and the like. May be set.

  In the priority display of the timing, the display with the lower priority is not displayed on the special display LED 612 simply by turning off the display with the higher priority. After the display with the higher priority is turned off, the display with the lower priority is separately turned on, so that the display with the lower priority is performed. Both of the instruction function displays will be displayed on the special display LED 612.

(1) Expectation priority display First, an expectation priority display in which a higher priority is given to the expectation display than to the indication function display will be described. Although the priority of the indication function display is lower than the expectation display, a lower priority may be explicitly given to the indication function display, or the indication function display is handled in an initial state in which no priority is added. You may.

  In the case of displaying both the expected degree display and the instruction function display in the unit game in the expected degree priority display, the expected degree display is displayed earlier than the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. Even in such a case, it is preferable to switch to the instruction function display by the display timing at which the instruction function display is to be performed. Specifically, for example, in a game in which it is determined by the instruction function display to display the instruction content related to the first reel stop, before the first reel stop operation is performed (more specifically, the first reel stop operation is performed). Before the operation is ready to be accepted, and by a predetermined timing of “before start of accepting stop button pressing” shown in FIG. The display is turned off and the instruction function display is turned on so that the instruction display indicating the operation mode of the first reel stop operation is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the predetermined timing. Is preferred.

  Also, assuming that the instruction function display is performed after the expectation degree display is performed in the unit game, and after the game operation based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is completed (for example, after pressing the third stop button), Alternatively, the expectation degree display may be displayed on the special display LED 612 again. Then, the display mode of the expected degree display displayed again may be different from the display mode of the previously displayed expected degree display, and specifically, for example, “30%” in the previous expected degree display The expected degree is changed (increased or decreased) in the same unit game by displaying the expected degree of “80%” in the expected degree display again displayed. May be.

  FIG. 101 is a view for explaining a display example when priority display of the timing (expected degree priority display) is performed. FIG. 101A is a timing chart illustrating display periods of various displays, and FIG. 101B is a diagram illustrating a transition of a liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  Each item described on the horizontal axis in FIG. 101 (A) is a representative timing in the progress of the game, but is common to each item described in FIG. 90 and the like, except for the freeze start and freeze end items. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. Note that “freeze start” and “freeze end” indicate start timing and end timing at the time of performing the freeze control during the rotation control of the reel 301. During the period in which the freeze control is performed, the reel stop button Even if an operation is performed on the 211, the operation is not accepted and is invalidated. Therefore, a stop operation for stopping the reel 301 cannot be performed on the reel stop button 211.

  On the vertical axis of FIG. 101A, an instruction function display 701, an expectation display 702, and a liquid crystal effect display 703 are described as various displays indicating the display period. The indication function display 701 and the expectation display 702 are both displayed on the special display LED 612 (more specifically, at least one of the special display LEDs 612a, 612b, and 612c). When the display is ON, the display is performed. Means that the display is not performed. FIG. 101A shows an example of a seg display when the indication function display 701 or the expectation degree display 702 is ON. The seg display example is the indication function display example of FIG. 96 and the expectation degree of FIG. A seg display example corresponding to the display example is given. However, such a segment display example is merely an example, and other instruction function display examples (see, for example, FIG. 80, FIG. 81, FIG. 83, FIG. 84, FIG. 86 to FIG. 88, etc.) and other expected degrees A seg display example corresponding to a display example (for example, see FIGS. 98 to 100) may be used.

  The liquid crystal effect display 703 in FIG. 101 (A) corresponds to the effect display displayed on the image display 500 managed by the sub-substrate 510. When ON, the degree of expectation display or instruction is displayed on the image display 500. The effect display related to the function display is performed, and when OFF, the effect display related to the expectation display or the instruction function display is not performed on the image display body 500. In general, some effect display is displayed on the image display body 500 throughout the unit game, and even if the liquid crystal effect display 703 is OFF in FIG. 101A or a similar timing chart described later, the image display is performed. This does not mean that no effect display is performed on the body 500.

  FIG. 101 (B) shows an example of an effect display screen related to expectation display or instruction function display displayed on image display body 500 when liquid crystal effect display 703 in FIG. 101 (A) is ON. ing. The screen example of FIG. 101B is an example of displaying a predetermined effect display on the image display body 500 based on the display mode of the expectation display or the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. In such a case, In this case, the effect display by the image display body 500 assists, so that the display mode of each display on the special display LED 612 can be more reliably transmitted to the player. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to perform the effect display related to the display of the degree of expectation or the display of the instruction function.

  The above description of each item in FIGS. 101 (A) and 101 (B) is the same in similar drawings (FIGS. 102 to 104) to be described later, and description thereof will be omitted.

  A description will be given of a change in display accompanying the progress of the game with reference to FIGS. 101A and 101B. First, after the game starts, the expectation degree display 702 is turned ON during a period from the start of reel rotation to the start of freeze. Then, the expectation degree display of the display mode “30” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 97, the display of the degree of expectation in the display mode “30” means that the degree of expectation for the privilege is 30%. Note that the period in which the above-mentioned expectation degree display is displayed is before the start of accepting the press of the stop button, so that the player cannot perform a game operation for stopping the reel 301 (a stop operation for the reel stop button 211). In addition, while the special display LED 612 is displaying the degree of expectation in the display mode “30”, the effect display of “CHANCE?” (A) is performed on the liquid crystal effect display 730, so that something may be expected in the game. Suggests to the player that it may not. However, the sense of expectation by the effect display of (a) does not give as strong a sense of expectation as the effect display of (d) described later.

  After that, when the freeze control is started, the expectation display 702 is turned off. However, at the timing immediately after the start of the freeze, the indication function display 701 has not been turned on yet, so that nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the freeze, the instruction function display 701 is turned ON, so that the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function of the display mode “31”. With reference to FIG. 96, the indication function display of the display mode “31” means the indication content that “the indication of the pressing place is the BAR symbol and the pushing order is the sequential pushing”. Then, such an instruction function display is continuously displayed until the timing when the stop operation on all the reels 301 is completed (the third stop button is pressed), and then turned off. In the liquid crystal effect display 703, first, an effect screen dedicated to freeze is displayed while the freeze control is being executed (effect display of (b)). After the freeze is finished, a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode "31" is displayed while the instruction function display 701 is ON (the effect display of (c)). By performing the effect display of (b), the player is notified that the freeze control is occurring, and by performing the effect display of (c), the player assists the instruction content of the instruction function display to play the game. The player can be encouraged to perform an appropriate game operation.

  Then, after the third stop button is pressed, the indication function display 701 is turned off and the expectation display 702 is turned on again, and the special display LED 612 displays the expectation. As shown in FIG. 101 (A), in the expectation display 702 turned ON again, a display mode “80” different from the display mode “30” in the previous expectation display is displayed, and from 30%. Expectation increased to 80%. In addition, the display mode of the liquid crystal effect display 703 is also changed with the expectation degree display 702 being turned on again, and the effect display of “CHANCE !!” (d) is performed as shown in FIG. 101 (B). Thereby, the sense of expectation in the game can be raised more than the effect display of (a).

  Thereafter, when the game proceeds, the unit game (one game) ends when the payout is completed. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, an effect display of (e) "Bonus determined!" Is displayed on the liquid crystal effect display 703, so that a bonus as a bonus is provided in the previous game that has been completed. Is taught. The effect display of (e) is turned off at the timing when the start lever is pressed so as not to hinder the effect display in the next game.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display (expected priority display) of the timing illustrated in FIG. 100 is performed, so that the expected degree assigned a higher priority than the indication function display is displayed. Since the display is first displayed on the special display LED 612 in the unit game, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the privilege from a relatively early stage in the unit game. In particular, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, a display different from the instruction function display may be suddenly generated, so that the player feels nervousness and expectation every game. You can make it.

  Also, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, the expected degree display is displayed first, so that the instruction function display is not performed and the low-winning combination of the pressing order is not required. , [11-3-7-1], etc.), it can be foreseen that the winning has been achieved. Since such a low winning combination is a highly expected combination having a relatively high degree of expectation for the privilege, It is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation for giving the privilege.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (the expectation priority display) is performed, so that the instruction function display having a lower priority than the expectation display is also taught by the instruction function display. Since the instruction function display can be performed on the special display LED 612 at a timing when the player can execute the predetermined game operation, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the player cannot execute the predetermined game operation. it can. Further, after the display period of the instruction function display ends, by changing the display mode so that the expected degree display can be displayed again, even if the expected degree in the previous expected degree display is relatively low, the expected degree display is repeated. In the expectation display, the player can have a hope that the expectation may be higher. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (expected priority display) is performed, so that the player's interest in the game result can be maintained throughout the unit game, and the interest of the game is enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, according to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is the display content of the expectation display and the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612. , The information can be more reliably notified to the player.

(2) Instruction Function Priority Display Next, the instruction function priority display in which the instruction function display is given a higher priority than the expectation degree display will be described. Note that the priority of the expectation display is lower than that of the instruction function display. However, a lower priority may be explicitly given to the expectation display, or the expectation display is handled in an initial state in which no priority is particularly given. You may.

  In the case of displaying both the expected degree display and the instruction function display in the unit game in the instruction function priority display, the expected degree display is displayed after the instruction function display is displayed on the special display LED 612. The expectation display is displayed at a timing that avoids the period in which the instruction function display should be displayed.

  The specific “period during which the instruction function display is to be displayed” is, in many cases, at least a period from the start of accepting the press of the stop button (predetermined time before) to the pressing of the third stop button. In such a case, It is preferable that the expectation display is displayed at any timing after the third stop button is pressed. However, in the case where the instruction content by the instruction function display is satisfied at the time of performing the first reel stop operation (for example, in the case of the instruction content instructing only the first stop reel), the display of the instruction function display is performed. The “period period” is not limited to the above, and in such a case, without waiting for completion of the stop operation for all the reels 301a to 301c (pressing of the third stop button), the timing before (for example, the first The expected degree display may be performed after the reel stop operation).

  FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the priority display of the timing (the instruction function priority display) is performed. FIG. 102A is a timing chart illustrating display periods of various displays, and FIG. 102B is a diagram illustrating a transition of a liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  With reference to FIGS. 102 (A) and 102 (B), a description will be given of a change in display accompanying the progress of the game. First, after the game starts, the period from the start of reel rotation to the pressing of the first stop button via the freeze control, The indication function display 701 is turned on, and the indication function of the display mode “29” is displayed on the special display LED 612. With reference to FIG. 96, the indication function display of the display mode “29” means the indication content that “the indication of the pressing place is 7 symbols in red and the pressing order is the first right stop”. This instruction content corresponds to the instruction content for instructing only the first stop reel since the stop order of the remaining reels 301a and 301b may be any order as long as the reel 301c is stopped first. The instruction function display of the mode “29” is turned off at the timing when the first stop button is pressed. During this period, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “29” (effect display of (a)).

  At the timing of pressing the first stop button, the indication function display 701 is turned off and the expectation display 702 is turned on, so that the special display LED 612 displays the expectation of the display mode “F9”. With reference to FIG. 97, the display of the degree of expectation in the display mode “F9” is a definite effect regarding the grant of the privilege. The display of the degree of expectation is continuously displayed until the timing of stopping all reels. In the liquid crystal effect display 703 during this period, based on the display of the degree of expectation, an effect display (effect display of (b)) indicating that the degree of expectation for the privilege of "hot heat!" People's expectations can be increased.

  In FIG. 102A, the reason why the lower digit of the display mode of the degree of expectation display is “9” is that “9” of the display mode indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display is inherited. By doing so, even if the player does not notice that the display on the special display LED 612 has been changed from the instruction function display to the expectation display, the display mode indicating the pressing order is not changed, and the game operation is not changed. You can avoid giving anxiety.

  According to FIG. 102 (A), after the expectation display 702 is turned off at the timing of all reels stopping, both the instruction function display 701 and the expectation display 702 remain in an OFF state until the unit game ends. . At this time, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, the effect display of (c) is displayed to indicate that the bonus award has been determined in the game.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the priority display (instruction function priority display) of the timing illustrated in FIG. 101 is performed, so that the instruction function with a higher priority than the expected degree display is provided. Since the display is first displayed on the special display LED 612 in the unit game, even if the indication function display is displayed, the expectation display may be displayed in the subsequent unit game. The player has a sense of expectation that the game will appear, and has the effect of maintaining the entertainment interest throughout the unit game. In particular, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation degree display is subsequently displayed, the special function of the game is displayed. Since it can be expected to give, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (instruction function priority display) is performed, so that the special display LED 612 can display the instruction function early in the unit game. An appropriate game operation based on the function display can be reliably taught to the player, and the risk of the player performing an adverse game operation by overlooking the instruction function display can be avoided. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the gaming interest of a player due to performing an unfavorable gaming operation and provides a sense of security to the player. Can be.

  Further, according to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is the display content of the expectation display and the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612. , The information can be more reliably notified to the player.

[11-3-7-3-2. Layer priority display]
Here, priority display of layers will be described. In the priority display of layers, by providing a difference in display control priority between the display layer for displaying the expected degree and the display layer for displaying the indication function, the expected degree display and the display in the unit game are performed. Even when the indication function display is output to the display (for example, the special display LED 612) in parallel, the display layer (higher display layer) with the higher priority is displayed on the special display LED 612 with priority. You. The setting of the priority difference in the display control may be such that information in which the priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 may be set for each unit game based on a game state, a lottery result of a winning combination lottery, or the like. May be set.

  In the priority display of the layers, the output of the display layer (higher display layer) with a higher priority is output from the situation in which the expectation display and the indication function display are output in parallel (both are ON). When the display is turned off, the display on the special display LED 612 is switched to the display of a display layer (lower display layer) with a lower priority.

  In addition, regarding the priority display of the layer layer, when the display device that is the output destination of the display layer is a segment LED such as the special display LED 612, only the display layer having the higher priority among the display layers output in parallel is displayed. Although displayed, for example, when a display device capable of superimposed display such as a liquid crystal display is selected as an output destination, the output display layers are simultaneously superimposed and displayed, and a display layer having a high priority is displayed. , The color, the brightness, the display cycle, or the like may be provided with a difference. However, when such a superimposed display is performed, for example, when the display layer of the instruction function display is highlighted, an effect display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is performed on the image display body 500. It is preferable that auxiliary control be performed so that the player can recognize the displayed display layer.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such priority display of the layer layer, mutual display such that a blank display period does not occur between the respective displays (expected degree display and indication function display). Even if the output timing is not adjusted in consideration of the general display timing, the priority display of the upper display layer and the switching of the display layer can be realized only by outputting at each output timing. The above load can be reduced, and the program capacity of the main board 409 can be reduced.

  In the following, with respect to the priority display of the layer, the expectation priority display and the instruction function priority display will be described respectively. However, no matter what kind of priority display is performed, the display mode of the instruction function display is displayed at the display timing at which the instruction function display is to be performed. Is displayed on the special display LED 612 as in the case of the above-described timing priority display.

(1) Expectation priority display First, among the layer priority display, the expectation priority display realized by setting the display layer of the expectation display as the upper display layer and the display layer of the indication function display as the lower display layer will be described. I do.

  FIG. 103 is a view for explaining a display example when the priority display of the layer (expected degree priority display) is performed. FIG. 103A is a timing chart illustrating display periods of various displays, and FIG. 103B is a diagram illustrating a transition of a liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  The display example shown in FIG. 103 is a winning pattern that is not illustrated in FIGS. 49 and 50. However, a winning combination (for example, “BB1”) and a highly expected combination (for example, “strong watermelon”) are obtained by a winning combination lottery. And a display example in the case of simultaneous winning.

  Referring to FIGS. 103 (A) and 103 (B), a description will be given of a change in display accompanying the progress of a game. First, after a game is started, a period from the start of reel rotation to a predetermined timing after the start of a freeze is displayed on the upper display layer. A certain expectation display 702 is output (ON), and the special display LED 612 displays the expectation in the display mode “90”. Referring to FIG. 97, the display of the degree of expectation in the display mode “90” means a considerably high degree of expectation of 90% of the degree of expectation for the privilege. Note that the period in which the above-mentioned expectation degree display is displayed is before the start of accepting the press of the stop button, so that the player cannot perform a game operation for stopping the reel 301 (a stop operation for the reel stop button 211).

  On the other hand, the instruction function display 701, which is a lower display layer, is turned on a while after the reel rotation is started, but is not displayed on the special display LED 612 while the expectation degree display 702 is on (FIG. 103 ( A) corresponds to the broken line portion). If the expectation display 702 is turned off before the freeze control ends, the output of the upper display layer disappears, and the display of the special display LED 612 is switched from the expectation display 702 to the indication function display 701, and the display is switched. The indication function display of the mode “26” is performed. With reference to FIG. 96, the indication function display of the display mode “26” means the indication content that “the indication of the pressing place is seven symbols in red and the pressing order is the reverse pressing”. After that, the ON state of the instruction function display 701 continues until the third stop button is pressed, but during this time, the expectation degree display 702, which is the upper display layer, does not enter the ON state, so that the instruction function display is continuously displayed on the special display LED 612. Is done.

  Further, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, during the period from the start of the reel rotation to the end of the freeze, the effect display based on the display content of the expectation display 702 is "a heat!" By performing the display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation regarding the bonus of the game is extremely high. After that, after the freeze control is completed, the effect display of (b) is performed as a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display 701 such that the red 7 symbol is aimed by pressing in reverse, so that the special display is performed. Since not only the LED 612 but also the image display body 500 can teach the player a proper game operation, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an inappropriate game operation.

  Thereafter, when the game proceeds, the unit game (one game) ends when the payout is completed. Then, when the medal is inserted for the next game, the effect display (c) of “Bonus determined!” Is performed, so that it is possible to teach that the bonus award has been determined in the previous game that has been completed. .

  In addition, the sub-board 510 may change the display timing of the bonus confirmation effect of (c) based on the stop position of the reel 301, the operation mode by the player, and the like. More specifically, for example, when all reels are stopped by a reverse push in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, but the stop timing is shifted and the red 7 symbol alignment is not stopped, or a strong watermelon role simultaneously won When the symbol combination is stopped, the display in the next game as shown in FIG. 103 (A) is performed. On the other hand, as a result of performing an appropriate stop operation in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, when the seven red symbols are stopped, the bonus confirmation effect of (c) is displayed at the timing of stopping all the reels. What should I do? As described above, by adjusting the display timing of the liquid crystal effect display based on the stop position of the reel 301 by the sub-substrate 510, the effect display with little deviation from the game situation becomes possible, and the unnatural feeling in the progress of the game is obtained. You can not get it.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the layer priority display (expected degree priority display) illustrated in FIG. 103, the special display LED 612 displays the expected degree display, and the appropriate display is performed. By switching to the instruction function display at the timing, it is possible to teach the appropriate game operation to the player, so the expectation display shows the expectation of winning a high expected role and the expectation of the game result by performing the appropriate game operation The feeling and both can be enhanced. In particular, when a high degree of expectation display appears as shown in FIG. 103, a game designated by a subsequent instruction function display so as not to lose a chance to give a privilege due to an inappropriate game operation. You can be careful about the operation.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a situation where it is particularly important to cause the player to perform an appropriate stop operation, such as when a special replay combination having a different stop form is won depending on the pressing order, the layer priority display ( By performing (expected degree priority display), it is possible to greatly expect a deterrent effect that prevents a player from performing an adverse game operation.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the layer priority display (expected degree priority display), the expected degree display is preferentially displayed in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed such as during an AT game. At this time, it can be foreseen that the player has won the low winning combination (in detail, see the description in [11-3-7-1], etc.) of the pressing order regardless of the instruction function display. Since the low winning combination is a high expecting combination in which the degree of expectation for the privilege is relatively high, it is possible to greatly improve the player's feeling of expectation for granting the privilege.

(2) Instruction function priority display Next, of the layer priority display, the instruction function priority display realized by setting the display layer of the instruction function display as the upper display layer and the display layer of the expectation display as the lower display layer explain.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining a display example when the priority display of the layer (the indication function priority display) is performed. FIG. 104A is a timing chart illustrating display periods of various displays, and FIG. 104B is a diagram illustrating a transition of a liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example. The display example shown in FIG. 104 is a display example in a case where the weak cherry combination is won by the winning combination lottery.

  With reference to FIGS. 104 (A) and 104 (B), a description will be given of a change in display accompanying the progress of the game. First, after the game starts, from the start of reel rotation to the start of payout, the display of the degree of expectation as a lower display layer 702 is output in the display mode of “76” (ON). Referring to FIG. 97, the display of the degree of expectation in the display mode “76” means that the degree of expectation for the privilege is 76%. However, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 104A, the instruction function display 701 as the upper display layer is output (ON) from a predetermined timing after the start of the freeze to the pressing of the third stop button, The special display LED 612 does not display the degree of expectation. Therefore, the period in which the display of the degree of expectation of the display mode “76” is displayed on the special display LED 612 includes the “first display period” from the start of reel rotation to a predetermined timing after the start of freeze, and the period from the pressing of the third stop button to the start of payout. Is the “post-display period”.

  Then, the special display LED 612 displays the display mode “36” as the instruction function display from “first display period” to “after display period”. With reference to FIG. 96, the indication function display of the display mode “36” means the indication content that “the indication of the pressing place is the BAR symbol and the pushing order is the reverse pushing”. Since the winning combination in the game is a weak cherry, the pressing order is originally irrelevant. However, when the stop operation is performed by pushing backward in order to aim at the BAR symbol, the accessory 19 (weak) shown in FIG. Since the symbol combination of the cherry-compatible condition device) can be drawn on the activated line, even if a game operation is performed with the instruction content, a game result that is not disadvantageous for the player is not obtained.

  To summarize the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612 shown in FIG. 104 (A), the expected degree of the display mode “76” is displayed from the start of the reel rotation to a predetermined timing after the start of the freeze, and the subsequent display is performed. Until the three stop button is pressed, the display is switched to the indication function display of the display mode "36", and from the third stop button is pressed until the start of the payout, the display is switched again to the display of the expectation degree of the display mode "76".

  Looking at the transition of the liquid crystal display example of the liquid crystal effect display 703, during the period from the start of reel rotation to the end of the freeze, the effect display (a) of “!” May be performed, so that something may occur in the game. Indicates to the player that there is no such thing. Since this display period is before the start of accepting the pressing of the stop button, even if the meaning of the effect display of (a) is not understood, there is no effect that the player is confused about the subsequent game operation.

  Next, during the period from the end of the freeze to the time when the third stop button is pressed, the indication function display of the display mode “36” is performed on the special display LED 612. At this time, the indication function display 701 is displayed on the liquid crystal effect display 703. As the navigation display based on the instruction content, the effect display of (b) is performed such that the BAR symbol is aimed in reverse. By performing the effect display of (b), the appropriate game operation can be taught to the player not only from the special display LED 612 but also from the image display body 500, so that the player can perform an inappropriate game operation. It can be suppressed not to perform.

  During the period from the pressing of the third stop button to the start of payout, the special display LED 612 displays the expectation of the display mode “76”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 focuses the player on the expectation display. As an effect for causing the effect to be displayed, an effect display of “CAUTION TO SEG!” (C) is performed. By performing such an effect display of (c), even if there is a player who has missed the expectation display before the indication function display is performed, it is possible to prompt the player to recognize the expected display again. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can be surely recognized that the expected degree display is being performed.

  Thereafter, when the game proceeds, the unit game (one game) ends when the payout is completed. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, an effect display of “Sorry! Lost” (d) is made to teach that the privilege indicated by the expectation display was not given in the previous game. Is performed. In addition, when the privilege indicated by the expectation degree display is provided, an effect display that teaches the provision of the privilege such as “Additional success!” May be performed. As for the timing at which the effect display of (d) is performed, similarly to the effect display of (c) in FIG. 103 (B), the sub-substrate 510 may appropriately change the display timing.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the layer priority display (instruction function priority display) as illustrated in FIG. 104, even if the instruction function display is displayed, the subsequent unit game is executed. Since the expectation display may be displayed within the game, the player can have a sense of expectation that the expectation display will appear, and this has the effect of maintaining the interest in the game throughout the unit game. In particular, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation degree display is subsequently displayed, the special function of the game is displayed. Since it can be expected to give, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the layer (designation function priority display) is performed, so that the special display LED 612 is displayed with the highest priority as long as the display mode of the designation function display is output. In addition, it is possible to reliably execute the instruction function display at an appropriate timing for teaching the player a proper game operation. As a result, an appropriate game operation based on the instruction function display can be reliably taught to the player, and the risk of the player performing an adverse game operation by overlooking the instruction function display or the like can be avoided. be able to. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in the gaming interest of a player due to performing an unfavorable gaming operation and provides a sense of security to the player. Can be.

  Further, according to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is the display content of the expectation display and the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612. , The information can be more reliably notified to the player. In particular, as in the effect display of (c) described with reference to FIG. 104 (B), by performing an effect in which the special display LED 612 is noticed, the importance of the special display LED 612 can be increased.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a feature of performing the priority display of the layer, the special display LED 612 outputs another display layer below the upper display layer, thereby displaying the upper display. When the output of the layer is turned off, the lower display layer can be displayed without generating a time lag except for the time required for switching the display, so that the next display mode is displayed in a very short time. It is possible to realize a display effect with a sense of urgency. Specifically, for example, the moment the player presses the third stop button (or the third stop button), such as switching from the effect display of (b) to the effect display of (c) described in FIG. At the moment when the hand is released from the stop button), it is possible to switch from the display mode of the instruction function display to the display mode of the expectation display, so that the display mode of the special display LED 612 changes every time each game operation is performed. Expect the player.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display (the special display LED 612) managed by the main board 409 which controls the progress of the game, regardless of whether the priority display of the timing or the priority display of the layer is performed. )), It is possible to display different types of indications, that is, the indication function display and the expectation degree display, and furthermore, the indication function display or the expectation display under the condition that both the indication function display and the expectation degree display can be displayed during the unit game Any one of the degree displays can be preferentially displayed. In a conventional general slot machine, various effects are displayed on an effect display device (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment) managed by the sub-board, so that a player can receive a lot of information. Was provided, but it was difficult to maintain the interest of the player by itself. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a problem was solved. It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a new game property not provided in a conventional gaming machine.

[11-3-7-4. Other expectations display]
In [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3] described above, the processing when the expectation degree display is displayed on the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed has been described. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, other expectations can be displayed. In the following, other expected degree displays executable in the slot machine of the present embodiment will be enumerated and described. It should be noted that the expected degree displays listed below can be used in combination with the expected degree displays described in [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3] as appropriate.

(1) Expectation display based on change of display mode of instruction function display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612 is changed while maintaining the display content. By changing the value, the degree of expectation can be displayed.

  To change the display mode, specifically, for example, in the normal case where the expected degree display is not performed, when the seg display according to the instruction content is merely lit, a slow blinking (blinking in a long cycle) is performed. In this case, a low expectation degree display such as the seg display “L” in FIG. 99A is performed, and when high-speed blinking (blinking in a short period) is performed, the segment in FIG. A high expectation display such as a display “H” may be used. Although such a display mode is merely an example, by executing an expectation display having a different degree of expectation based on various display modes, the degree of expectation relating to the privilege is, for example, the degree of expectation at which an additional AT game is performed. It is possible to make a difference or to indicate the number of games to be added.

(2) Expectation display as a notice display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612, the display is performed before the display mode indicating the specific instruction content is displayed. A predetermined display mode different from the mode (a blinking display or a fake display similar to the indication function display) can be displayed, and when the predetermined display mode is displayed, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege increases. Display may be performed.

  Specifically, for example, when the indication function display is to be performed in the special display LED 612 in the display mode of “13”, when the segment flashes rapidly before the display mode of “13” is completely displayed. Alternatively, a degree of expectation display indicating that the game has a high degree of expectation for the privilege may be performed. Further, when such a high-speed blinking occurs, the display mode "13" of the instruction function display is not completely displayed (the instruction function display is stopped), and the display mode is changed to the predetermined expectation degree display. May be switched, or an effect may be performed on the image display body 500 indicating a sense of expectation for the privilege. When the instruction function display is stopped, internally, it is not a game that is determined to perform the instruction function display at the time of winning the small push order or the like. Or a watermelon role).

(3) Expectation degree display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], special When the display LED 612 is capable of displaying a predetermined degree of expectation display, the degree of expectation display is increased by increasing the display time and the number of times of display by displaying the display mode of the degree of expectation display in multiple stages. May be performed.

  Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the display mode “50” is finally displayed as the expectation display, the special display LED does not display “50” at one time, but “10”, It is possible to divide the display into a plurality of stages, such as "20" and "50", so as to perform display in which the degree of expectation gradually increases. The specific display process of the step-by-step expectation display is not limited to the gradually increasing display as in the above-described example. After displaying the degree of expectation several times, the final degree of expectation may be displayed.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the special display LED 612 displays the degree of expectation, the target function of the degree of expectation (target privilege) indicated by the degree of expectation display is displayed in the same unit game. It can also be indicated by a display. Specifically, after the display mode of “50” is finally displayed on the special display LED 612 through the display modes of “10” and “20” as the expectation level display, the instruction “Aim at the red 7 symbol” is displayed. When the instruction function display of the content is displayed, the degree of expectation of “50%” by the expectation degree display is the degree of expectation of “red 7 symbols aligned” suggested by the instruction function display. That is, even if the expected degree display indicates a 100% expected degree, the target privilege changes depending on the instruction content of the instruction function display. In some cases, a low privilege such as bell symbol matching may be obtained. In this way, by associating the target of the degree of expectation by the expectation display with the instruction function display, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation display but also the indication of the instruction function display is indicated. Since the target privilege can have a meaning, the interest of the player can be maintained through the unit game.

(4) Expectation level display indicating whether or not a specific mode indicating the execution of a lottery related to a winning is displayed In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific mode is displayed on a display (special display LED 612) on which an instruction function is displayed. Is displayed, when a lottery relating to a payout is to be performed, the special display LED 612 displays a predetermined degree of expectation so as to gradually determine whether or not a specific mode is displayed. Degree production can be realized.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the display of the degree of expectation for producing the display possibility of the specific mode. FIG. 105 shows the display transition of the expectation degree display in which the display mode changes stepwise in one segment LED (special display LED 612c). Here, it is assumed that when “3” is displayed in the seg display, the “specific mode” is displayed, and a lottery (for example, an increase in the number of AT games) related to payouts is performed. As shown in FIG. 105, in the special display LED 612c, first, the seven segment portions are “(a) upper stage lighting”, “(b) middle stage lighting”, “(c) lower stage lighting”, and “(d) upper right stage lighting. Are additionally lit in this order. After that, if “(e) lower right lighting” is turned on after a certain standby time, “3” in the specific mode is completed as a seg display, so that it is determined that the lottery relating to the payout will be performed (expectation degree). Success of the production). On the other hand, if “(f) lower left lighting” is displayed after (d), “2” is displayed as a seg display, which indicates that the lottery relating to the payout is not performed (expected). Degree result of failure). Note that it is preferable that the result of the expectation effect is clearly indicated on the image display body 500 as well.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display of the indication function (for example, the special display LED 612 c) for displaying the indication function is performed by displaying the degree of expectation as illustrated in FIG. 105. In addition to enabling display of the degree of expectation display, it is also possible to execute a degree of expectation effect completed only with the display device. Thus, a novel gaming machine capable of executing an important effect can be provided on the display managed by the main board 409. When the display device (for example, the special display LED 612) managed by the main board 409 performs the expectation effect as described above, “7” is displayed on the display (for example, the image display body 500) managed by the sub-board 510. It is preferable to display an alert such as "Look at the segment display" to attract the player's attention to the display on which the expected degree effect is performed.

  The above is a description of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but there is no need to use only one lottery table for various internal lotteries in controlling such a gaming state. Alternatively, a plurality of setting values (for example, four levels from setting values 1 to 4) may be provided, and a different lottery table may be used for each setting value. Specifically, in each set value, a difference (gradual difference, extreme difference, etc.) is given to the internal lottery probability. The set value may be set such that the higher the set value, such as set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4, such that a lottery probability such as a bonus winning combination or an AT winning rate is preferentially provided. For example, since the winning probability of BB1 is determined to be higher in the setting value 4 than in the setting value 1, the possibility of winning the BB1 is higher. By providing stepwise set values in this manner, each set value is provided with a characteristic to provide a clue for a player to guess the set value, or the slot machine 1 can be set with a set value suitable for management of a hall or the like. And can be used. Note that the present invention is not limited to the above set values.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
Upon completion of the start-up processing, the operation waits for an operation for stopping the reel rotating at a constant speed (a stop operation, that is, a pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c). FIG. 106 shows the contents of the reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the process of the reel stop control will be described.

  In the reel stop processing, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected according to a condition device that has been operated according to the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all the condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device established in step S201 described above, a standby state is entered until a press operation of each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is received (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, it is determined whether each of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c is already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF). State), and it is also determined whether any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has been pressed. Until the pressing operations of all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are accepted, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in step S202 and thereafter are repeated.

  Here, as described above, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is “forward pressing”, “pinch pressing”, “middle pressing”, “middle reverse”. 106, which is divided into six types, namely, "push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push". In the following description with reference to FIG. 106, these push orders are focused on the reel stop button 211 for which the first push operation is performed. And sort them in three different pressing orders. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is called "forward push", the case where the first stop reel is the middle reel 301b is "medium push", and the case where the first stop reel is the right reel 301c is "reverse push".

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and whether a pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been received. I do. In step S201, assuming that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) along the stop operation procedure of "forward push" from the standby state of the press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, step S202. Is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). Here, the “first reel” refers to a reel for which a first stop operation is accepted or a first stop. In this example (“forward push”), since the stop operation of the left reel 301a is received first, the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). Accordingly, the determination at Step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In the first reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, a reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, the effective lines of the slot machine 1 are only two lines, the upward line and the downward line. At this point, the stop control tables of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) are reduced to one. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), particularly the symbol at the upper position or the lower position can be the winning combination symbol. In the case of a symbol having a characteristic, a reel stop control table capable of aligning the winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the pay line based on the symbol is selected. Will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is turned ON (F = 1), and the routine goes to the next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON (LF = 1), and the routine goes to step S209.

  Then, in a step S209, it is determined whether or not all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c have stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has just been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeated. Execute.

  Then, when the processing after step S202 is executed again, the determination in step S202 is not satisfied because the left reel 301a has already been stopped, and the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0), and whether a pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been received. I do. Here, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward push”. Therefore, the determination at Step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203. Since the first reel stop flag has already been turned ON (F = 1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the winning combination symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206). Execute Then, at this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the reel that stops second (second reel), steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). To step S209.

  Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and stopped (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since there is no such condition, this determination is not satisfied, the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and whether a pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c has been received. In other words, the subsequent steps S218, S220 and the like are the same as the above-described steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is turned ON (MF = 1), and the routine goes to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in the stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop processing ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description can be given as above, and thus the details are omitted. However, in the case of the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, so that the description will be made below.

  The difference between the stop operation procedure of "reverse push" and the stop operation procedure of "forward push" or "middle push" is that step S221 (determination of remaining reel stop control table after first reel stop processing) is performed. is there. That is, in the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", if only the right reel 301c is in the stopped state and any of the winning symbols is located at the lower position among the stopped eyes of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid combinations. The winning combination symbols can be arranged on any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any of the activated lines may be prepared, and one of the reel stop control tables may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop processing described above, reel stop control is performed to draw a winning combination symbol (corresponding winning combination symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when a reel stop operation by the player is received, a range in which the symbol can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn in, for example, four symbols) ) Is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination symbol in the range, the control is drawn into the symbol display window 401 to stop the reels. Here, the “pullable range” refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the reel rotation direction from the time when the reel stop operation is received until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the retrievable range is set to a maximum of four symbols, when a stop operation of the reel is received, the reel can be further rotated and moved up to four symbols starting from the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even when there is no corresponding winning combination in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning combination is within a range where the winning combination can be drawn. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol into the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. In addition, by performing the pull-in control, even if the timing of pressing the corresponding winning symbol is somewhat earlier, if the winning symbol is within the retrievable range, the player displays the winning symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a miss (the game privilege cannot be obtained and the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination cannot be acquired and the game privilege disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay role or the bell in any order (bell 1 and bell 2) is activated, the corresponding winning combination symbol is always displayed without the need for the player to push. Can be aligned. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay combination, the bell 1, the bell 2, and the like, the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged at intervals of a maximum of four symbols. See FIG. 46 above). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum pull-in number is four (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of a maximum of four as described above are always valid regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to draw in the line.

  Specifically, for example, when it is assumed that the replay symbols are aligned in the middle when a predetermined replay combination is won, focusing on the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, other symbols are the largest between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. Four are arranged (see FIG. 46). Thus, no matter where the stop operation is received on the left reel 301a, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating, the left reel 301a always draws the replay symbol to any of the activated lines and stops. be able to.

  Also, when the result of the internal lottery is a duplication of the bonus combination and the small combination, the small combination is drawn in preferentially to the bonus symbol. When a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the won game, the formation state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game is executed. In subsequent games in which the small combination (or replay combination) is not established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  The above is an example of the reel stop processing by the table method. Apart from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but a known process is also applicable to this process, so a specific description is omitted here. Further, in the first embodiment, either the control type or the table type reel stop processing may be executed, and the type to be used may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, the main board 409 displays whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed). A) is determined. FIG. 107 specifically describes the content of this determination processing.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines is determined from the mode of the stop eyes in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination). It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed). In addition, a stop point when all the reels 301 are in a stop state is called a stop point.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and the OFF state (= 0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game in-progress flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF (= 0), the determination at Step S301 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S312.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). The determination of the symbol combination will be described using a specific example. If the bonus is two types BB shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to the two types BB is a symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the activated line. (See condition device “BB1” in FIG. 53). When such symbol arrangement is stopped on any diagonal line, it can be determined that two kinds of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbol has stopped on the activated line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process relating to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. I do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination). If it is determined that the symbol combination is a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In the replay game process, a MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process in step S305, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S306), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the symbol combination is a small combination symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small combination winning) as the next determination process. ) Is determined (step S308). When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small combination symbol, a payout of a specified number of medals according to the aligned small combination symbol is executed as a process of step S309 (the specified number of medals is paid out from the medal discharge device 110). put out). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small combination have been paid out. Then, after the processing of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small role winning flag is turned off (= 0) (step S310), and the processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the activated line is not a small symbol (NO in step S308), none of the above determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 are satisfied, and any of the combinations on the activated line are not satisfied. No winning symbols are available. Note that the roll at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (combination mode of disjointed patterns)”. In such a case, a losing process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, if the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is another winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (the loss flag is ON (= 1) at this time), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

  The processing from step S302 to step S311 is processing executed when the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. This process is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

  In step S312, it is determined whether or not the payout symbols for the bonus game are aligned on the activated line. Here, the “bonus game payout symbol” refers to a generic term for a symbol combination in which medals are paid out during the bonus game, and specifically, a payout during the bonus game (in this example, general payout combination). It is the same as the small combination for which the payout is defined in the state or the internal state, but a special bonus exclusive combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a payout process of a specified number of medals according to the bonus game payout symbols aligned is executed (step S313). In the medal payout process, a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal discharging device 110, and the number of paid out medals is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. By such a medal payout process, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the payout in the bonus game has been paid out.

  Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 109), and then the determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S315), and the process ends. A pattern that is NO in step S312 may be a case where the payout in the bonus game is won but is eliminated, and a case where the payout in the bonus game is not won. In the processing of step S315, in the former case, the bonus game payout establishment flag is turned off, and in the latter case, the loss flag is turned off. In the case where a bonus exclusive role that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and when the bonus exclusive role is won, it is possible to win the winning combination without taking any part. It may be omitted.

  The processing of steps S301 to S315 described above is the game state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (in particular, the CPU 1110).

[11-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 in FIG. 107 is satisfied, a bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, a BB flag) is ON (= 1). If the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process moves to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned ON (= 1), and the bonus flag is turned OFF (= 0). Next, in step S406, the total payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. Thus, the accumulation of the total payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the specified number of bonus games (the specified number of BB games is 2 in this example).

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402, and error processing is performed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, it can occur in any case where any illegal means (for example, goto) has been performed or the slot machine 1 has failed. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and the above-described LED and the like are displayed to notify the occurrence of the error.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end determination processing]
Next, the above-described bonus game end determination processing in step S314 in FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the medal payout in step S313 of FIG. 107 described above, the payout number of the bonus game is added to the total payout number in the bonus game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether the total number of payouts exceeds the total number of payouts (for example, 200) specified for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S454, in which the total number of payouts during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the number-of-payouts display LED 612 and the like. It may be displayed on this).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is turned off (= 0) (step S460), and the process ends.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of the control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, the control of various rendering operations is executed by the sub-board 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. This is executed by the sub-board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118, etc.) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the effect mode includes one that is completed only with the game (hereinafter, referred to as a single effect mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, a continuous effect mode), and the like. Among these, in the single-shot effect mode, an effect indicating the winning flag (indicative effect, announcement effect, details will be described later), an effect notifying medal payout (pay appearance, it is also possible to notify the number of payouts, etc.), etc. There is.

  The suggested effect is different from the effect (notification effect) in which the winning flag is directly notified to the player, and is an effect in which the winning flag is indirectly notified. For example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag is described. , Colors, etc. are displayed. The suggestion effect is also performed when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of a loss). In this case, the effect is such that the content is hard to be noticed as a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game has been lost.

  For example, when the winning flag is a bonus combination or when an AT is won by an AT lottery, the notification effect clearly informs the player of the game-related result such as “Bonus determined!” Or “AT winning!”. It is something that can be done. This effect is particularly effective when executed for a winning combination (such as a bonus or an AT) that is pleasing to the player (because there is a possibility that a large number of medals can be acquired). That is, when the player wins the AT or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to bless the fact.

  Further, as the continuous production mode, there are modes corresponding to game states such as a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state. These are intended to clarify the state of the game, and the player can determine whether the current game state is, for example, the general state by performing these effects (continuous effects). It is easy to make a distinction as to whether the state is a state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the continuous production mode corresponding to the above-mentioned gaming state (general state, bonus internal state, bonus state) but also [11-3-3] and the like are described. A continuous effect can be executed in a manner that suggests or teaches whether or not to shift to a special game (for example, an AT game) that is advantageous to the player, such as a sign effect of the AT. Further, such a continuous effect is not limited to the control by the peripheral board (for example, the sub-board 510), but may be controlled by the main board 409. Further, such a continuous effect may be completed in one game, but is performed continuously in a manner in which related effect contents are displayed over a plurality of games, and finally the result is displayed. That is common. In the instruction function process of the first embodiment, as an example of the display mode of the “forewarning effect”, an example is shown in which a title display of one game is performed first, and then “continuous effect” from one game to a plurality of games is performed. As explained above, it can be said that, on the whole, the "foreboding production" is also a continuous production. Then, when the result of such a continuous effect (for example, an indication effect) is displayed, the player can recognize whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game is performed in a subsequent game.

  Note that the various effect modes described above can be executed as displaying an image on the image display body 500, generating a sound effect using the speaker 512 or the like, emitting light or lighting using an LED decoration or the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, for example, when the player has been playing the game for a long time. It should be noted that the effect mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll imitating a character, a movable model, etc., and a side reel (for example, arranged at a position different from each reel, and the start and stop thereof can be performed independently of the player's operation as part of the production) Or an illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp) to execute various effects. With such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[11-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during a game, an error is notified according to the type of the detected error. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or blinks), and the special display LED 612 can display an error indicating the type of the error. Note that the special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In some cases, an error is not detected, but a sudden power-off is also included in the abnormal state.

  When the abnormal state as described above occurs, it is necessary to release the error in order to return to the normal game state (if the power is turned off, it is sufficient that no error display remains after the power is restored). The method of canceling the error depends on the error that has occurred, but often requires power-off (OFF / ON).

[11-7-1. RAM clear]
Here, clearing of the data value (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the time of a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF / ON, the value of data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized within an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) for rewriting to a value is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned off and on even when the error cancellation processing is performed, a part of the data held in the RAM 1114 may be cleared.

  However, when the error clearing process is performed during the display of the instruction function, or when the power is cut off during the payout of medals, if the data used for the display of the instruction function and the number of payouts is cleared by RAM clear, It is assumed that the game may be interrupted. In the slot machine 1, in view of such a problem, a target range of the RAM clear in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining a data block of the RAM. FIG. 110 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, in which the upper end is the start of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area in which data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is arranged at the end of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 110, in RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are predetermined in accordance with the type of data to be stored. Further, five types of “clear range 0” to “clear range 4” are defined as RAM clear target ranges. Note that each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

  First, the clear range of the RAM clear will be described. “Clear range 0” means a target range that is basically not executed and corresponds to all erasures. That is, RAM clearing in the clear range 0 is not performed in normal maintenance or error processing. From another viewpoint, the data value is not cleared in the set value data area 1114a except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is not basically cleared.

  “Clear range 1” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

  “Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110, the data areas below the lamp ON data area 1114d are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

  "Clear range 3" means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the end of the bonus. The RAM clear from the clear range 0 to the clear range 2 requires work by a hall clerk or the like as a trigger for executing each RAM clear, but the RAM clear at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus is completed. Is executed. When clearing the RAM at the end of the bonus, specifically, of the data area in the used area shown in FIG. 110, the data area equal to or smaller than the replay insertion number area 1114j is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area 1114i is not cleared.

  The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned off / on. That is, when the power is turned off / on without performing the setting change or the reset operation, the data area that is the target range in the “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the “clear range 3”, the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning off / on the power.

  “Clear range 4” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the number of medals bet is determined. In clearing the RAM at the start of each game, specifically, of the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 110, the data areas below the display flag area 1114l are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the interrupt check area are used. Timer area 1114k is not cleared.

  Next, each data area shown in FIG. 110 will be briefly described. The set value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the set value data area 1114a.

  The door flag area 1114b stores information indicating the open / closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90). The door monitoring timer area 1114c stores the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90). Time information for recognizing the open state is stored.

  In the lamp ON data area 1114d, information on lighting of a lamp (for example, a display device arranged on the display panel 501, such as a replay lamp 606 or a start lamp 608) is stored. Information indicating the number of credits (the number of stored medals) is stored in the credit number area 1114e. Information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613 is stored in the credit display area 1114f. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payouts) indicating how many game values have been paid out in the game. In the payout display area 1114h, information for displaying the medal payout number on the special display LED 612 is stored. The instruction function display area 1114i stores information corresponding to the instruction content of the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612.

  The replay insertion number area 1114j stores the number of game values to be inserted at the time of a replay operation (medal insertion number at the time of replay). The timer information necessary for executing the interrupt processing is stored in the interrupt check timer area 1114k.

  In the display flag area 1114l, information indicating an error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored. In the medal payout area 1114m, the payout number of the game value to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. Information indicating a state as to whether or not a game value can be inserted is stored in the insertable number area 1114n. In the medal insertion number area 1114o, the number of gaming values inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114p stores a random number used in the condition device.

  As described above, in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, by setting the range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (eg, when setting is changed or when the power is turned off / on), it is expected that efficient memory control can be realized.

  Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the gaming machine, and data such as a program must be stored in the defined range. However, in recent years, with regard to the processing relating to the test signal and the processing relating to fraud, data relating to a program for the processing is stored in an unused area (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 110) outside the above-defined range. Is allowed. However, it is assumed that the use of such an unused area is limited to a gaming machine having an instruction function.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off, etc., whether or not the data displayed before the RAM was cleared should be displayed again is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each data type. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may redisplay data as much as possible by referring to the data stored in the data area that has not been cleared in the RAM when the power is restored, or the specific data (for example, , Payout number display data, navigation display data, etc.) may theoretically be redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referencing the data saved at the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[11-7-2. error indication]
Next, an error display on the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining an error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “report type” column of FIG. 111 (which will be described later, some errors are not included) is displayed in the “SEG” column by the special display LED 612. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in an identifiable manner. Of the errors indicated in the “report type” column of FIG. 111, for each error other than “communication abnormality (at the time of a series code error)” detected by the sub-board 510, a detection signal of each error is generated when the error occurs. The substrate 409 is notified. Note that the errors shown in FIG. 111 are some of the errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub-board 510 in addition to the illustrated errors.

  In the following, an overview of each error shown in the “report type” column of FIG. 111 will be described.

  “RAM error” is an error that is notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication abnormality (at the time of series code error)” is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub-board 510, but is detected by the sub-board 510, so that the special display is performed. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

  Although “setting is being changed” or “setting is being checked” is not an error, the “setting value” is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the work, and is therefore described in FIG. The set value of the slot machine 1 is stored in, for example, a set value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114. In addition, the notification timing of “under setting change” is the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing of “under setting check” is at the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

  “Illegal payout error” is an error that is notified when an abnormal payout occurs. More specifically, a payout count switch (not shown. This switch is for counting the number of payout medals, except when medals are paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of the driving means (not shown) of the medal discharge device 110. (Provided in the medal discharge device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 111, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing of detecting the error is “when the main game is not stopped” or “when the main game is stopped”. Detecting when the main game is not stopped "has a higher priority. However, the same “HF” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612 at any timing.

  The “medal passing time 1 error”, the “medal passing time 2 error”, the “medal passing order 1 error”, the “medal passing order 2 error”, the “medal passing interval time error”, and the “medal passing backward error” This error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process from the insertion of a medal through the medal insertion slot 203 to the arrival at the hopper 1110b. The abnormalities here include abnormalities related to the passage of medals, as well as abnormalities caused by foreign objects other than medals, and the like.

  In the slot machine 1, when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 203 is detected as being passed by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is in an OFF state), then, each of a lever sensor, a selector sensor, and a chute sensor is detected. And reaches the hopper 110b while the passage is detected. The lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the shoot sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect passage of a medal at a predetermined position where each is provided (not shown). When the solenoid 207a is ON, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal passes through the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the receiving pan 201. When the medal detected to be passed by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (prescribed medal passing sequence), the main board 409 determines whether or not each sensor has detected the detection, the detection time, and the like. Each of the above errors is detected.

  An outline of each error will be described. The “insertion medal passing time 1 error” is an error that is notified when medals (including foreign substances other than medals) stay near the insertion sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the insertion sensor 207b is not performed. It is detected when a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) continues. The “inserted medal passing time 2 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign matter other than the medal) stays near the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is performed for a predetermined time. (E.g., 500 ms). Note that the detection target period of the “insertion medal passing time 2 error” is always set, but the error notification timing is set at the start of the medal reception (or at the end of the game such as after the completion of the payout process).

  The “medal passing order 1 error” is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the selector sensor is performed while the medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, if the medal is not detected by the lever sensor during a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor, the error is detected. The “medal passing order 2 error” is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the shoot sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, if the medal is not detected by the shoot sensor during a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor, the error is detected.

  The “medal passing interval time error” is an error that is reported when a medal passes in an unexpected manner in a normal state. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, any object is detected at a passage interval shorter than the shortest medal passage interval assumed in normal times (that is, the passage interval when medals are continuously inserted). When the situation of passing is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five consecutive times), the error is detected.

  The “inserted medal backward error” is an error that is notified when a medal moves on a path other than the prescribed medal passing sequence and, in particular, detects a backward movement. Specifically, the detection is performed based on the detection order of the medal detection by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, shoot sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

  The “payout medal jam error”, “payout medal empty error”, and “auxiliary storage full error” are errors that are notified when there is an abnormality regarding medal payout or storage. To explain the outline of each error, first, a “payout medal jam error” is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the payout of medals from the hopper 110b. Specifically, when the payout count switch has been turned ON for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more, the error is detected. The “payout medal empty error” is an error that is notified when the medal in the hopper 110b becomes empty. Specifically, when the payout is retried (payout retry) when the medal from the hopper 110b is not paid out normally and the payout count switch is ON for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) or more after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage box full error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects storage of medals exceeding a predetermined reference, the error is detected.

  The “priority” column in FIG. 111 indicates the priority of notification between errors. In this example, the priority means a priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time. Even if an error having a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. The display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above-described example, it may be determined that the display is switched to a display of an error with a higher priority detected later. In the “SEG” column, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, the game cannot be restarted (the next game is performed) unless the errors are cleared.

  In the “notification method” column, when “video” is “○”, an image notifying an error is displayed on the image display body 500, for example. However, the notification image based on the "video" is required to have display contents that are not different from the error display on the special display LED 612. When “sound” is “「 ”, for example, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the “lamp” is “○”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output or lamp output, the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error.For example, when a high-priority error is detected, a low-priority error is set. The notification mode may be emphasized in comparison.

  The “Reset Release” column indicates whether or not the error can be released by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. For an error that can be reset, when the error is reset by reset, the data area (see FIG. 110) of the “clear range 2” of the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared.

  If “immediately” is described in the “response” column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side while the slot machine 1 is operating. For example, when an illegal payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command for notifying the detection. That is, even if it is described as "immediately", it is not always necessary to immediately display the error when the error is detected. For example, after the result of the game is obtained (after the payout process is completed, or (Before the start), an error display may be performed. It should be noted that the illegal payout error is a highly urgent error which means that the gaming value is paid out illegally.

[11-7-3. Error processing]
In the following, a process when the error described in the previous chapter occurs during a game in the slot machine 1 (error occurrence process) will be described. Specific details of the processing at the time of occurrence of an error differ depending on what kind of requirement definition the slot machine 1 has regarding an error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 has a requirement definition (first requirement definition) regarding an error as described below, and details of an error occurrence process performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping (for example, strong errors and weak errors) based on importance is not performed for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 112 and FIG. 113 are flowcharts (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining an error occurrence process in the first embodiment. FIG. 112 and FIG. 113 are combined into one flowchart. In this flowchart, the overall processing procedure of one game is based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 54, and further details processing performed when an error occurs. Is shown. FIGS. 112 and 113 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses when there is no power interruption (that is, when the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 114, which will be described later, is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure of a power interruption recovery process according to the first embodiment. In FIG. 114, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned off / on in the processing of FIGS. 112 and 113.

[11-7-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (when there is no power interruption)]
With reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of error occurrence (at the time of non-power interruption) will be described. Since the overall processing flow is the same as the series of processing shown in FIG. 54, detailed description of the already described processing will be omitted. Unless otherwise specified, the processes in FIGS. 112 and 113 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). In addition, in order to make it easier to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with “the state of the gaming machine” shown in FIG. 90 is also shown.

  First, in FIG. 112, as described in the BET processing of FIG. 54, after a predetermined number of game values (specifically, medals) are inserted, the player presses the starting lever 210 to perform the game. The process is started (Step S801). Such a flow of the game corresponds to “medal insertion” to “pressing of the starting lever” shown in FIG.

  When the start lever 210 is pressed and the game is started, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device that is permitted to operate based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

  Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the section is a section where the indication function can be displayed by the special display LED 612. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game in which the instruction function can be displayed by the instruction function (for example, during an AT game). It has been mainly described that the instruction function display is performed during the AT game. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the AT game (for example, the AT is relatively won). The indication function may be displayed even in a chance zone (CZ) that is easy to perform. In such a case, an affirmative determination is obtained in step S804 even in games other than the AT game.

  If it is determined in step S804 that the section is capable of displaying the instruction function (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 issues an instruction using the instruction function) (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S803. Based on the acquired condition device, the content of the instruction by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to "reel rotation start" shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform the navigation display at a predetermined display timing for the navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the transmission of the instruction information command in step S808 may be performed at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

  After that, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing relating to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). A specific display example of the instruction function display is as shown in FIGS. In addition, the predetermined display timing regarding “navigation display” and “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. Then, after the instruction function is displayed in step S809, in step S810, reception of a pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible in the section (specifically, when it is not determined that the main board 409 gives an instruction using the instruction function) (NO in step S804). The rotation of the reel 301 is started without performing the processing related to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 (step S811), and the reception of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started (step S811). Step S812).

  Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptable” shown in FIG. 90. Then, after the processing of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

  In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to “press the first stop button” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the time when the first stop button is pressed in step S813 and the time when the second stop button is pressed thereafter (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process in step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process in step S819 is performed. FIG. 113 shows that if an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for a stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 being rotated. The process of step S819 may be performed after the reel stop operation for the remaining reels 301 is performed. This is the same in the case of step S816. In the processing after error detection, a difference in priority (importance) may be provided according to the type of error, and the processing may be selectively used based on the priority. For example, an error that is unlikely to occur in a situation where the player is playing a game normally, such as “HF (illegal payout error)”, should be a high-priority error. Then, when such a high-priority error is detected, it is better to perform the processing of step S819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 being rotated. preferable.

  In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (the second stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to “pressing the second stop button” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the time when the second stop button is pressed in step S815 and the time when the third stop button is pressed thereafter (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process in step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process in step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 being rotated.

  In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (the third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 106 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing in step S817 corresponds to “pressing the third stop button” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected until a predetermined time elapses after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 stop). (Step S818). After that, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of whether an error is detected in step S818.

  In step S819, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is terminated. However, when it is determined in step S804 that the section is not a section in which the instruction function can be displayed (NO in step S804), the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, and thus special processing needs to be performed in step S819. There is no.

  Thereafter, in step S820, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to "all reels stopped" shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the processing in steps S819 and S820 is performed irrespective of whether or not an error has been detected during the game, and the subsequent processing is performed based on whether or not it is determined that an error has been detected. It depends. Specifically, if an error has not been detected during the game up to that point, the processing from step S821 is performed. If an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing from step S825 has started. Is performed.

  First, as a normal process in which no error is detected during a game up to that time, in step S821, it is determined whether or not a game value has been paid out. In the payout of the gaming value, if the stop of the winning combination is confirmed based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. When it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), the error is not detected, and the game is terminated. When it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), the display of the number of payouts on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and payout processing of the game value (medal) is performed (step S823). . Thereafter, since no error has been detected, the game is terminated.

  On the other hand, as a process when an error is detected during a game up to that time, first, it is determined whether or not a game value is paid out (step S824).

  The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821), and steps S822 (payout number display) and S823 performed when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824). The processing of (payout processing) is the same.

  However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that time, steps S826 and S827 are performed to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. If the payout processing is performed in step S823, after the payout processing is completed, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processing from step S826 is performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the process from step S826 is performed.

  In step S826, the type of the error detected so far is displayed on the special display LED 612 (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. Thereafter, an error release process is performed according to the error notified by the hall clerk or the sales office in the error display (step S827), and the game ends.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when an error is detected during a game, the indication function display and the number of payouts are displayed on the special display LED 612. Without interrupting the display, the type of the detected error can be notified to the player or the hall clerk by displaying the error.

  In the following, when an error occurs in the progress of the game based on the processing procedures shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, what the display periods of various display devices and the like are will be specifically described. Under typical circumstances.

  FIGS. 115 to 118 are timing charts showing examples (Nos. 1 to 4) of display periods when an error occurs in the first embodiment. FIGS. 115 to 118 all show a situation in which an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  First, in the case of FIGS. 115 to 117, when an error occurs (at the time of detection), the timing is set so that the details of the error are immediately displayed on a display (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub-board 510. A chart is shown. That is, the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on at the same time when the error occurrence 807 is turned on. However, it is assumed that the liquid crystal navigation 805 cannot “display” while the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Such a setting can be realized, for example, by transmitting a command to the sub-board 510 at the timing when the main board 409 detects an error.

  In FIG. 115, in the game in which the gaming value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of starting the reel rotation. At this time, while an error display (liquid crystal error 806) on the image display body 500 is performed at the same time, an error display (seg error 804) on the special display LED 612 is not performed until the reels are completely stopped.

  In FIG. 116, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error has occurred at the timing of starting accepting the press of the stop button. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is simultaneously turned on (displayed), and the navigation display 805, which has been turned on (displayed) before the occurrence of the error, is changed to off (not displayed) with the turning on of the liquid crystal error 806. You. Then, the seg error 804 is turned ON (displayed) only when the reels are completely stopped and thereafter the payout processing of the game value is completed.

  In FIG. 117, in the game in which the gaming value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 turns ON (display) at the same time, and the navigation display 805 that has been “displayed” before the occurrence of the error is changed to OFF (non-display) with the ON of the liquid crystal error 806. Then, the seg error 804 is turned ON (displayed) only after the reels are completely stopped.

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 115 to FIG. 117, when an error occurs, the error is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the end of the game, while the occurrence of the error is immediately displayed on the image display body 500. The occurrence of an error of a player or the like can be notified promptly. Further, the special display LED 612 can display the indication function display, the payout number display, and the error display without overlapping the respective display periods. However, in the case of FIG. 115 to FIG. 117, although the game progress is not interrupted, the liquid crystal navigation 805 is set to “non-display” when the liquid crystal error 806 becomes “display”. In some cases, the stop operation cannot be performed according to the function.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 118, the detailed display of the error on the display (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub-board 510 is performed at the timing of the error display (error display on the special display LED 612) controlled by the main board 409. The timing chart is shown by setting to match. That is, even if the error occurrence 807 is turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is not set to “display” until the seg error 804 changes to “display”. Such a setting can be realized, for example, by the main board 409 not only transmitting error detection information to the sub-board 510 but also notifying the timing at which the special display LED 612 displays an error.

  In FIG. 118, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button. At this time, the display related to the instruction function (the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805) is continuously displayed until the third stop button is pressed, and proceeds as usual until the subsequent payout processing. When the payout is completed, an error display (segment error 804 and liquid crystal error 806) on the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 is performed. Thereafter, when the error is canceled by performing an error canceling process corresponding to the error, the seg error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 are turned off (not displayed), and the error occurrence 807 is also turned off.

  In this manner, in the case of FIG. 118, even if an error occurs, the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 are displayed after the end of the game (strictly, when the payout is completed when payout is completed, or when the payout is not completed). The error is displayed when the reel is stopped, so that the game progress and the game operation (specifically, the stop operation according to the instruction function while watching the navigation display, etc.) are not interrupted, and the error in the game is detected. Can be reliably notified. That is, in the case of FIG. 118, regarding the indication function display, the number-of-payouts display, and the error display on the special display LED 612, a display period in which each display is meaningful (the display works effectively) can be secured, and each of them can be secured. Display periods can be prevented from overlapping.

[11-7-3-2. Power interruption recovery processing]
With reference to FIG. 114, a description will be given of the processing procedure of the power interruption recovery processing in the slot machine of the first embodiment. The power interruption recovery processing shown in FIG. 114 is performed when all power interruptions are restored, such as power OFF / ON in error cancellation processing, simple power OFF / ON when no error occurs, or recovery from sudden power interruption due to power failure or the like. Done in

  In FIG. 114, first, the power interruption processing from all states is started. In step S901, it is determined whether any of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold. As a specific example of the predetermined threshold value determination, assuming that the power supply device 112 includes a 24V power supply and a + 12V power supply, the power supply voltage of the 24V power supply is 20.4V or less, or the power supply voltage of the + 12V power supply. Is 10.5 V or less. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S901), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold value (YES in step S901), a process of storing the stack pointer in the save area in the RAM 1114 is performed (step S902). The processing in step S902 and the processing in step S907 described later are as described in the description of the data area of the RAM 1114 in [11-7-1] (see also FIG. 110).

  Then, after performing data protection processing (RAM protection processing) for the RAM 1114 (step S903), the slot machine 1 is turned off (step S904). Note that the above-described processing regarding the RAM is not limited to the RAM 1114 on the main board 409, and the same processing may be performed on the RAM 1122 on the sub-board 510.

  Then, when a power-return operation is performed by a person related to the hall or by automatic restart (step S905), first, it is determined whether or not any power supply voltage is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (step S906). As the predetermined threshold here, the same threshold as exemplified in step S901 may be used. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S906), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S906 that the power supply voltage is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (YES in step S906), the stack pointer stored in the save area of the RAM 1114 is read in step S902 to read necessary data (step S902). S907).

  Then, processing for returning the stored number display LED 613 to a displayable state is performed (step S908), and processing for returning the special display LED 612 to a displayable state is performed (step S909).

  Next, it is determined whether or not any of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in a state immediately before the power-off state in step S904 (a state before power interruption) (step S910).

  If it is determined that any of the reels 301a to 301c was rotating in the state before the power interruption (YES in step S910), it means that the reel stop operation has not been completed, And the instruction content of the instruction function stored in the RAM 1114 (more specifically, the instruction function display area 1114i shown in FIG. 110) is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S911). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  When it is determined that none of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the state before the power interruption (NO in step S910), it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption is “all reels stopped” and “payout”. Is determined (step S912). If it is determined that the state is “all reels stopped” and “with payout” (YES in step S912), the payout number is displayed on the special display LED 612. Information on the number of payouts can be read out, for example, by referring to the evacuated stack pointer in the RAM 1114 or by referring to the payout display area 1114h. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  On the other hand, in step S912, if it is determined that the status is not “all reel stop” or “no payout” (NO in step S912), it is determined whether an error is detected (step S914). ). If it is determined that an error has been detected (YES in step S914), information regarding the detected error is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S915). At this time, the error lamp 604 may be turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916. If a negative determination is obtained in step S914, the process directly proceeds to step S916.

  After the processes in steps S905 to S915 are performed, in step S916, other return processes (details are omitted), and the slot machine 1 enters the power-supply state before the power-off state in step S904. Return to.

  As described above, by performing the power-off recovery process shown in FIG. 114, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment can prevent data loss before power-off while preventing data loss even after power-off occurs. Appropriate return such as display can be realized.

  In the following, when a power failure occurs during the progress of the game, the power-off recovery processing is performed based on the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. Or an example under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 119 to FIG. 121 are timing charts showing examples (No. 1 to No. 3) of display periods (by various display devices) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 114 is performed during the game. Each of FIGS. 119 to 121 shows a situation where an instruction function is generated (for example, during an AT), and shows examples of display periods by various displays, as in FIGS. 90 and 91 described above. Although not shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, if at least one of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating before the power is turned off, the slot machine 1 The rotation of the reel 301 that has been rotated by the internal processing is restarted.

  In the case of FIG. 119, the power is shut off between "start accepting pressing of the stop button" and "pressing of the first stop button" without detecting any error. In FIG. 119, the power may be cut off at the same time as “start accepting pressing of the stop button”. At this time, the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805, which had "displayed" the instruction content, are turned "non-display" by shutting off the power. However, when the power is restored thereafter, the display content before the power was turned off is again displayed. (Corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 114). Then, after the power interruption is restored, the game proceeds as usual. Further, since no error is detected throughout one game, the seg error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 remain “non-display”.

  In the case of FIG. 120, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of “start accepting pressing of the stop button”, and thereafter, the power is shut off before “pressing of the first stop button”. . The power cut-off here may be a power cut-off due to an error that has occurred or a power cut-off for another reason. In such a case, if it is assumed that the liquid crystal error 806 is immediately "displayed" in response to the occurrence of the error, the liquid crystal navigation 805 ends the "display" and becomes "non-display". After that, even if the power is restored after the power is turned off, the error is not necessarily canceled, so that the state where the liquid crystal navigation 805 is “non-display” and the liquid crystal error 806 is “display” in the image display body 500 is maintained.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 120, the error is not immediately displayed on the special display LED 612, so that the instruction function 802 is "displayed" from the timing of starting the reception of the stop button press. Even after the power is restored after the power is turned off, the contents of “display” can be displayed again by reading the contents of “display” from the RAM 1114 (corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 114). Then, in the special display LED 612, the seg error 804 is "displayed" after the payout is completed.

  In the case of FIG. 121, in the game in which the gaming value is paid out, no error is particularly detected, and the power supply is interrupted during the payout processing after the reels are completely stopped. At this time, the number of payouts 803 becomes “non-display” due to the power cutoff as in the normal game until the payout starts, but is “displayed” again after the power is restored (corresponding to step S913 in FIG. 114). ), So that the payout can be completed.

  As described above, as illustrated in FIGS. 119 to 121, in the slot machine 1, even if the power is cut off during the game, the power cut-off recovery processing shown in FIG. Can be restored before shutting down.

[11-7-4. Other error processing]
In the above [11-7-3], an example of the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1 has been described, but other processing examples of the processing at the time of error occurrence will be described below.

[11-7-4-1. Common points and differences in processing when each error occurs]
In the following description of the other processing when an error occurs, an error will be described for each of the cases where the slot machine 1 has the second to sixth requirement definitions different from the first requirement definition as the “requirement definition relating to the error”. The processing at the time of occurrence will be described. Further, in order to avoid confusion in the course of the description, the slot machine 1 having the first requirement definition is referred to as a slot machine 1a, and the slot machines 1 having the second to sixth requirement definitions are referred to as slot machines 1b to 1 Notated as machine 1f. Therefore, for example, “the processing at the time of error occurrence in the first embodiment” described in the description of FIG. 112 or FIG. 113 or the like should be read as “the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1a having the first requirement definition”. be able to.

  Comparing the slot machines 1b to 1f and the slot machine 1a, the requirement definition regarding the processing at the time of error occurrence is different, so that the processing procedure of the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the requirement definition is different. This is common to the slot machine 1 described above. Therefore, the description of the common parts will be omitted, and the description will focus on the differences.

[11-7-4-2. Error processing based on the second requirement definition]
The slot machine 1b has the following requirements as the second requirement definition regarding the processing when an error occurs.
(1) A plurality of errors are grouped based on importance. More specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is released.
(4) If a strong error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is restored after the error is released.

  According to the second requirement definition, processing required when only a weak error occurs is not different from the first requirement definition. Therefore, in the slot machine 1b, when only a weak error has occurred, the display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) of the various displays shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition are replaced by the second. It can be applied as an error occurrence process based on the requirement definition.

  Also, the slot machine 1b can use the processing of the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 114 for the return processing at the time of power failure, and therefore, the display period example at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. Can be applied to the slot machine 1b.

  The classification criteria for the “strong error” and the “weak error” are not particularly limited. For example, based on the “priority” of the error shown in FIG. What should I do? Further, for example, all errors may be set to “strong error”.

  FIG. 122 and FIG. 123 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. Hereinafter, the processing procedure of the error occurrence process based on the second requirement definition will be described, focusing on the difference from the flowchart (FIGS. 112 and 113) of the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition.

  First, the processing in steps S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 122 is the same as the processing in steps S801 to S812 in FIG. 112, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, in FIG. 123, the first stop button is pressed by the player, and a reel stop process is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed (step S830).

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error is detected between the time when the first stop button is pressed in Step S830 and the time when the second stop button is pressed thereafter (Step S831). If no error is detected in step S831 (NO in step S831), the process in step S833 is performed. If an error is detected in step S831 (YES in step S831), it is determined as a process in step S832 whether the detected error is a strong error. If it is determined that the error is a strong error (YES in step S832), the process of step S839 is performed. If it is determined that the error is not a strong error, that is, a weak error (NO in step S832), step S833 is performed. Proceed to processing.

  In step S833, the second stop button is pressed. Thereafter, similarly to steps S831 to S832, whether an error has been detected (step S834) and whether the detected error is a strong error is determined. (Step S835) is determined. Also, after the third stop button is pressed in step S836, the same determination processing (steps S837 and S838) is performed.

  If a strong error is detected as a result of the determination of an error in steps S830 to S838, the progress of the game is stopped while maintaining the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error as the process of step S839. . When the progress of the game is stopped, the player cannot stop the reel 301 being rotated. As a specific process for retaining the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error, it is assumed that various data are saved in the RAM 1114 or the like.

  Then, after the game progress is stopped in step S839, an error clearing process corresponding to the generated strong error is required. In step S840, it is determined whether the error clearing process has been performed and the strong error has been cleared. Is determined. In step S840, the process does not proceed to the next process unless cancellation of the strong error is confirmed. Then, when the cancellation of the strong error is confirmed (YES in step S840), the process is restarted from the time of occurrence of the error as a return of the process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination of the error detection in steps S830 to S838, if no strong error is detected in any of the periods (NO in step S837 or NO in step S838), the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is performed. Is terminated (step S841). Note that when the process of step S841 is performed, only a strong error is not detected, and a case where a weak error is detected is included.

  Thereafter, in step S842, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it is possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the activated line. In step S843, it is determined whether or not the gaming value has been paid out. If it is determined that there is a payout, the payout number is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S844) and a payout process is executed (step S845).

  If it is determined in step S843 that there is no payout, or if it is determined that there is payout and the process of step S845 is completed, the presence or absence of error detection is determined as the process of step S846. If it is determined in step S846 that there is no error (NO in step S846), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S846 that there is an error (YES in step S846), it means that a weak error has been detected between steps S830 to S838, and it is necessary to display the error of the weak error. There is. Therefore, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S847), and the details of the weak error are displayed on the special display LED 612 as an error (step S848). After that, when an error cancellation process for the error displayed in step S848 is performed (step S827), a series of processes ends.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, in the slot machine 1b, when a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error display of the weak error is displayed after the game ends. On the other hand, if a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is immediately stopped, and execution of the error release processing is required. Further, although the progress of the game is interrupted when a strong error occurs, the instruction function display is restored after the error cancellation processing, so that the player can continue the game while confirming the instruction content.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1b, when an error occurs during the progress of the game based on the processing procedures shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 122 and 123, what is the display period of various displays and the like? An example will be described under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 124 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. FIG. 124 shows a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  In FIG. 124, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and a strong error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). ). In the slot machine 1b, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the display of the instruction function on the special display LED 612 is maintained. In the example of FIG. 124, the image display body 500 does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error in place of the instruction function display (“non-display” of the instruction function 802 and “display” of the seg error 804), and the image display body 500 In this case, the error is displayed instead of the navigation display ("non-display" of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and "display" of the liquid crystal error 806), thereby interrupting the game. However, the instruction function 802 and the navigation display 805 which are set to “non-display” are again displayed when the error clearing process for the strong error is completed. Can be resumed.

[11-7-4-3. Error processing based on third requirement definition]
The slot machine 1c has the following requirements as the third requirement definition regarding the processing when an error occurs.
(1) A plurality of errors are grouped based on importance. More specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is released.
(4) If a strong error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is stopped, and the error is not restored even after the error is canceled.

  The third requirement definition (1) to (3) is the same as the second requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, similarly to the slot machine 1b provided with the second requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, the various display devices shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition (FIGS. 115 to 118) can be applied. Also, as for the return processing at the time of power failure occurrence, the processing of FIG. 114 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, so that the processing at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1c.

  FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. When comparing the processing in FIGS. 125 and 126 with the processing in FIGS. 122 and 123 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, only the step S880 in FIG. 126 is different. That is, in FIG. 126, when it is determined in step S840 that the strong error has been released, the main board 409 clears the display content of the special display LED 612 as the processing of step S880, and then performs the processing again from the time of occurrence of the error. Is started.

  Then, by performing the processing of step S880, the slot machine 1c can prevent the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 from being restored after the error is cleared when a strong error occurs.

  According to such a slot machine 1c, when a "strong error" having a high degree of influence on the game occurs, even if the strong error is canceled, the state before the occurrence of the strong error is completely restored. Can be suppressed. Specifically, by not displaying the instruction function after the error recovery, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game operation in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function in an abnormal game in which a strong error has occurred. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being easily given to the player when an illegal act that causes a strong error is performed.

  Hereinafter, in the slot machine 1c, when an error occurs during the progress of the game based on the processing procedures shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. An example will be described under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 127 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. FIG. 127 shows a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  In FIG. 127, similarly to FIG. 124 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and further, at the timing of pressing the second stop button. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). However, in FIG. 127, according to the requirement definition (third requirement definition) of the slot machine 1c, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is kept "display". In the example of FIG. 127, the image display body 500 does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error in place of the instruction function display (“non-display” of the instruction function 802 and “display” of the seg error 804), and the image display body 500 In this case, the error is displayed in place of the navigation display ("non-display" of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and "display" of the liquid crystal error 806), thereby interrupting the game. Then, even if the error canceling process is performed thereafter, the display contents of the instruction function display are cleared as shown in step S880 of FIG. 126. Therefore, after the return, the instruction function display is again displayed on the special display LED 612. Do not show. Also, in the example of FIG. 127, the display after the return is not similarly performed on the liquid crystal navigation. Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, after the cancellation of the strong error, the player cannot recognize the instruction content of the instruction function, and proceeds with the game while the instruction function does not occur.

[11-7-4-4. Error processing based on fourth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1d has the following requirements as a fourth requirement definition regarding the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) A plurality of errors are grouped based on importance. More specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, an outer end board communication command) to the external relay terminal board 131, so that the main board 409 transmits the command via the external relay terminal board 131. The error information is output to an external device (e.g., hall computer 1200, data display, etc.) that is connected by the connection.

  The fourth requirement definition in such a slot machine 1d has only (1) in common with the third requirement definition, but in view of other requirement definitions, processing required when only a weak error occurs. Is the same as the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the third requirement definition (that is, the same as the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first or second requirement definition).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1d, similarly to the slot machine 1b provided with the second requirement definition and the slot machine 1c provided with the third requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, the first requirement definition is used. The example of the display period (FIGS. 115 to 118) by the various display devices shown in the error occurrence processing based on FIG. Also, as for the return processing at the time of power failure occurrence, the processing of FIG. 114 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, so that the processing at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1d.

  In the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1d, a predetermined error detection result is output to the outside via the external relay terminal plate 131 (may be abbreviated as "outer end plate"). And The slot machine 1 d is provided with the external relay terminal plate 131 on the main board 409, and is connected to external devices (such as a hall computer 1200 and a data display) of the game arcade via the external relay terminal plate 131. The external relay terminal plate 131 has a role of relaying various signals (insertion medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to an external device.

  FIGS. 128 and 129 are flowcharts (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. The following description focuses on differences from the flowchart (FIGS. 112, 113, 122, and 123) of an error occurrence process based on the first or second requirement definition, and focuses on the error occurrence based on the fourth requirement definition. The processing procedure of the time processing will be described.

  First, the processing in steps S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 128 is the same as the processing in steps S801 to S812 in FIG. 122, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, in FIG. 129, similarly to the processing in steps S813 to S832 in FIG. 123, in steps S850 to S852, after pressing the first stop button, it is determined whether or not an error has been detected. It is determined whether there is. However, in the case of FIG. 123, the game is temporarily stopped when it is determined that the error is a strong error (step S839 in FIG. 123), whereas in the case of FIG. The progress is continued, and instead, a command indicating the occurrence of a strong error (outer end plate communication command) is transmitted to the external relay terminal plate 131 (step S853).

  In FIG. 129, the strong error occurrence information is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 in step S853, so that a strong error occurs in the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) connected via the external relay terminal board 131. Information can be output. In the meantime, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1d does not stop, and the process proceeds to the next stop button pressing process (step S854).

  In FIG. 129, when the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), the processing after the stop button is pressed as shown in steps S850 to S853 is repeated. The detailed description of is omitted.

  In summary of the processing in steps S850 to S861, it is repeatedly determined whether or not an error has been detected until the reel stop button 211 is pressed and the stop operation on all the reels 301 is performed. If it is determined, the occurrence of a strong error is immediately notified via the external relay terminal plate 131.

  The processing in steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 129 is the same as the processing in steps S819 to S827 in FIG. 113, and thus detailed description will be omitted. As an outline of the processing in steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 129, the instruction function display is cleared when the stop operation on all the reels 301 is completed, the stop processing of all the reels 301 is performed, and then the processing based on the winning combination is performed. If the payout is made and an error is detected during the game, an error is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the payout processing is completed, and the error release processing is waited.

  The error display shown in step S869 in FIG. 129 is that an error display is performed even if the error detected during the game is a strong error (the error display (weak error error) shown in step 826 in FIG. 113). Display). That is, in FIG. 129, when a strong error is detected, an error occurrence is notified to the external device via the external relay terminal board 131, and after the game is over, the error display of the error is also performed by the slot machine 1d itself. Therefore, occurrence of a strong error can be more reliably reported.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the slot machine 1d continues the game progress even if any strong or weak error is detected during the game, and displays an error display of the error after the game ends. Will be Further, when a strong error is detected during the game, the occurrence of the error is immediately notified to the external device via the external relay terminal plate 131, so that the hall which manages the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) is controlled. Related persons can easily notice the occurrence of an important error, and it is also possible to accurately manage the state of occurrence of the error. In addition, even if such a strong error occurs, the progress of the game is not interrupted, so that an effect of suppressing the burden on the player can be expected.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1d, when an error occurs during the progress of the game based on the processing procedures shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 128 and 129, what is the display period of various displays and the like? An example will be described under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 130 shows a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Further, in FIG. 130, an outer end plate communication 808 is added to indicate a timing at which the main board 409 transmits a command indicating strong error detection to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is ON, it means that the command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is OFF, it means that the above command is not transmitted.

  In FIG. 130, similarly to FIG. 124 used in the description of the slot machine 1b and FIG. 127 used in the description of the slot machine 1c, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON). Further, a strong error has occurred at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  However, in FIG. 130, according to the requirement definition (fourth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, the game is not interrupted even if any error occurs, and the error display is performed after the game ends. Therefore, the “display” of the instruction function display 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805 is not hindered by the occurrence of the error. However, when a strong error is detected, the main board 409 immediately transmits a command indicating strong error detection to the external relay terminal board 131 (the outer end plate communication 808 is ON). The occurrence of a strong error can be notified almost in real time to an external device connected via the device.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130, an error is displayed after the game is over (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game without payout, after all reels are stopped)) ("Seg error 804"). "Display" and "display" of the liquid crystal error 806), and the error can be canceled before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-5. Error processing based on fifth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1e has the following requirements as a fifth requirement definition regarding the processing when an error occurs.
(1) A plurality of errors are grouped based on importance. More specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, a display mode change command) to a display dedicated to the error, thereby changing the display mode on the display. Change to the specific display for the time of occurrence.

  The fifth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1e is the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Accordingly, in the slot machine 1e, only a weak error is generated in the same manner as the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, and the slot machine 1d having the fourth requirement definition. Occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) of the various display devices shown in the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition can be applied. Also, as for the return processing at the time of power failure occurrence, the processing of FIG. 114 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, so that the processing at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1e.

  FIG. 131 and FIG. 132 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. When comparing the processing in FIGS. 131 and 132 with the processing in FIGS. 128 and 129 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, only the steps S881, S882, and S883 in FIG. 132 are different.

  In FIG. 132, when the first stop button is pressed (step S850), it is determined whether an error has been detected (step S851). If it is determined that there is an error, whether the error is a strong error is determined. Is determined (step S852). When a strong error is determined in step S852 (YES in step S852), as a process in step S881, the main board 409 transmits a “display mode change command” to a display dedicated to the error, and displays the display mode on the display. To a specific display for when an error occurs.

  Here, the “display mode change command” is one of means for informing a specific display (for example, the error lamp 604 may also be used) that at least a strong error has occurred. It is not necessary to use a command format as long as a specific display for notifying the occurrence of a strong error can be performed on a specific display. Further, the "display mode change command" may not only report the occurrence of a strong error but also report details (type, etc.) of the error that has occurred.

  Also, in the processing of step S882 and step S883, in the error detection check after the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), the same processing as step S881 is performed. Since it is performed, the description is omitted.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1e, by performing the processing of steps S881, S882, and S883, the occurrence of the strong error can be notified on the specific display. The slot machine 1e is provided with such a specific display separately from the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed, so that when a strong error to be immediately reported occurs, the instruction function display ( Further, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of the strong error while continuing the progress of the game without disturbing the navigation display).

  In the following, in the slot machine 1e, when an error occurs during the progress of the game based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 131 and 132, what is the display period of various displays and the like? An example will be described under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 133 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. FIG. 133 shows a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). In FIG. 133, when the main board 409 detects a strong error, a display mode change 809 is added to indicate the transmission timing of a “display mode change command” for changing the display mode for a specific display. . When the display mode change 809 is ON, it means “transmission”, and the display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. When the display mode change 809 is OFF, it means “standby”, and no display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. Further, FIG. 133 does not show the timing of changing the display mode on a specific display, but it is assumed that the display mode is changed immediately after the display mode change 809 is turned “ON (transmission)”.

  In FIG. 133, similarly to FIG. 130 and the like used in the description of the slot machine 1d, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and further, the timing of pressing the second stop button. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (fifth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, (1) to (3) are the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and (4) Only). Focusing on this point, a comparison between FIG. 133 and FIG. 130 used in the description of the slot machine 1d shows that in FIG. 130, a command was transmitted to the external relay terminal plate 131 when a strong error was detected. FIG. 133 is different in that the display mode on a specific display device is changed by transmitting the display mode change command at the same timing. However, the display periods of the other display devices are the same between FIG. 130 and FIG. 133.

  Although not shown in FIG. 133, it is preferable that the change of the display mode on the specific display device is continued until the error of the strong error that caused the change is canceled.

  In addition, as an example of the display mode of the “specific display for the occurrence of a strong error” on a specific display, when the error lamp 604 that is normally used to notify the occurrence of an error is also used, the light is turned on when the normal error is notified. On the other hand, in the case of the specific display based on the strong error detection, the display mode may be changed such as blinking. In addition, when a dedicated specific display is used, a more detailed error notification is realized by changing a notification pattern (lighting pattern, display image, audio output pattern, volume, etc.) according to the type of the strong error. Can be.

  According to the slot machine 1e, by enabling such a "specific display for when a strong error occurs", it is possible to promptly and reliably report the occurrence of an error when a strong error having a large influence on a game occurs. In addition, the special display LED 612 for displaying the instruction function and the number of payouts, and the image display body 500 for performing the navigation display do not interfere with the respective display contents, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Can be expected.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 133, an error is displayed after the game is over (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are completely stopped)) ("Seg error 804"). "Display" and "display" of the liquid crystal error 806), and the error can be canceled before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-6. Error processing based on sixth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1f is provided with the following requirements as a sixth requirement definition relating to error occurrence processing.
(1) A plurality of errors are grouped based on importance. More specifically, an error having a relatively high degree of importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower degree of importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) If a strong error is detected during the game, the display pattern of the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is changed by changing the control pattern of the indication function display by the main board 409, and the strong error is detected. Is changed to a display mode in which is understood.

  The sixth requirement definition (1) to (3) in such a slot machine 1f is the same as the fourth or fifth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1f, similarly to the slot machines 1b to 1e provided with the other requirement definitions described above, when only a weak error occurs, when only a weak error occurs, the slot machine 1f The display period examples (FIGS. 115 to 118) of the various display devices shown in the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition 1 can be applied. Also, as for the return processing at the time of power failure occurrence, the processing of FIG. 114 shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the first requirement definition can be diverted, so that the processing at the time of power failure shown in FIGS. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1f.

  FIGS. 134 and 135 are flowcharts (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1f. When comparing the processing of FIGS. 134 and 135 with the processing of FIGS. 128 and 129 used in the description of the slot machine 1d and the processing of FIGS. 131 and 132 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, step S884 in FIG. 135 is performed. Only S885 and S886 are different.

  That is, in the error occurrence process based on the sixth requirement definition, as shown in FIG. 135, a strong error is detected in the strong error determination (steps S852, S856, S860) in the error check after each stop button is pressed. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the main board 409 transmits a command for displaying an instruction function for the occurrence of an error (steps S884, S885, S886), thereby changing the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. Then, the display mode is changed from the display mode in which only the instruction content is displayed (the indication function display of the pattern 1) to the display mode in which the detection of the strong error is displayed together with the instruction content (the display function of the pattern 2).

  Here, an example of a specific control for changing the display form of the instruction function display when the instruction function display is controlled by a command will be described. By setting a predetermined bit that is not used in the command for pattern 1, a command can be transmitted together with information indicating the instruction content and information indicating a strong error. In addition, as a display example of the pattern 2 in the special display LED 612, in the case of the pattern 2, a blinking display, an error information and an instruction information are alternately displayed, or a bit segment is turned on. Good.

  As described in the description of the "display mode change command" in the description of the slot machine 1e, in order to satisfy each requirement definition in the slot machines 1a to 1f, the communication format of the information does not necessarily have to be the command format, but the instruction format. In the control of the function display, the input / output control may be performed in a format other than the command.

  In this way, in the slot machine 1f, by performing the processing of steps S884, S885, and S886, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a strong error with the special display LED 612 without interrupting the indication function display.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs during a game, even if the error is a strong error, the progress of the game is not interrupted, so that a game opportunity by the player can be reliably provided. Further, on the other hand, the occurrence of the strong error can be promptly notified at a place (the special display LED 612 on the display panel 501) that is easily visible from a player or the like, so that the safety of the slot machine 1f can be ensured. Can be expected.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs during the progress of the game based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 134 and 135, what is the display period of various displays and the like? An example will be described under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 136 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. FIG. 136 shows a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). In FIG. 136, when the strong error is detected, the display pattern of the instruction function display is changed from the normal pattern 1 to the pattern 2 at the time of error occurrence, so that the display period of the instruction function display in each pattern is shown. As an example, “instruction function (pattern 1) 802a” and “instruction function (pattern 1) 802a” are added in place of “instruction function 802” used in other drawings.

  In FIG. 136, similarly to FIG. 130 used in the description of the slot machine 1d and FIG. 133 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, a weak error occurs at the timing of pressing the first stop button (weak error 807a occurs). ON), and a strong error has occurred at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (sixth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1f, (1) to (3) are the same as the fourth or fifth requirement definition (1) to (3). , (4) are different. Paying attention to this point, when the display period of the slot machine 1f (FIG. 136) is compared with the case of the slot machine 1d (FIG. 130) and the case of the slot machine 1e (FIG. 133), when a strong error is detected, FIG. 133, the command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131, and in FIG. 133, the display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. On the other hand, in FIG. 136, the display mode pattern of the instruction function display is changed at the same timing. The difference is that the special display LED 612 displays the indication function display of the pattern 2 by changing. However, the display periods of the other display devices are the same in FIGS. 130, 133, and 136.

  In addition, according to FIG. 136, at the timing of pressing the second stop button in which the strong error has occurred (timing when the strong error occurrence 807b is turned on), the “display” of the function display 802a is switched to the “display” of the instruction function 802b. Can be The indication function display of the pattern 2 is continuously displayed until the timing of pressing the third stop button. That is, in the slot machine 1f, even if the indication function display is changed to the pattern 2 due to the detection of the strong error, the indication function display of the pattern 2 is continued until the original display period of the indication function display ends. Means that.

  According to such a slot machine 1f, the progress of the game is not interrupted by the occurrence of an error, and the instruction content of the instruction function is continuously displayed. On the other hand, when an important strong error occurs, the instruction function is displayed. Since it is possible to notify the occurrence of the error by changing the aspect, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that achieves both a smooth progress of the game and a prompt response to the abnormal state.

  Although the details are as illustrated, the liquid crystal error 806 controlled by the sub-board 510 is also “displayed” at the same timing as the seg error 804 after the end of the game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, the error display is performed after the game is over (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game without payout, after the reels are completely stopped)), so that the next game is played. You can have the error cleared before you start.

  The slot machine 1a to the slot machine 1f may be appropriately combined as long as the requirement definitions regarding the processing when an error occurs do not interfere with each other. For example, if the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition is limited to a weak error process, it can be combined with the second to sixth requirement definitions. Further, for example, by combining the processes at the time of detecting a strong error in the fourth to sixth requirement definitions, a wide range of notification can be realized at the time of detecting a strong error.

[11-8. Reincarnation production]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “rebirth effect” is prepared as a special game effect executed in a specific game section when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game. When the reincarnation effect is executed, a new privilege (for example, an increase in the number of AT games) can be expected to be given, and the degree of expectation is higher than during a normal AT game.

  The game section in which the reincarnation effect is performed can be divided into a stacking zone and a release zone, and the games played in each zone are called a stacking game and a release game. The stacking game is performed over a plurality of unit games (one game multiplied by a game value), and in each unit game, predetermined information (for example, information on a flag of a winning combination or reel stoppage) Etc.) is stored. The release game is performed after the stacking game in a shorter game period than the unit game in which the stacking game is performed a plurality of times, and a new privilege can be provided based on predetermined information stored in the stacking game To That is, the privilege expectation accumulated by storing the information of the accumulation game is released collectively in the emission game of a shorter game period than the accumulation game.

  In addition, the privilege (for example, the addition of the number of AT games) that can be given in the release game is a different opportunity from the privilege (for example, the payout of game value, the addition of the number of AT games, and the like) given when the accumulation game is executed. Is a new privilege different from the privilege that can be provided in the normal unit game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, before execution of the reincarnation effect, a precursor effect indicating the execution can be executed, and a game in which the precursor effect (reincarnation effect) is performed is referred to as a reincarnation sign game.

  In the following, after describing the outline of the AT game in the present embodiment, the incarnation effect during the AT game will be described in detail.

[11-8-1. Overview of AT Games]
An outline of the AT game will be described. Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the AT function, the slot machine 1 determines the AT game number counter for each game, and determines the continuation and termination of the AT game, management of the number of games, and the like (AT Game determination processing). The AT game determination processing is executed by the main board 409 because it corresponds to performance processing that affects the generation of an instruction.

  The AT game is started when an AT game start condition is satisfied, and is continuously executed in a subsequent game period until the AT end condition is satisfied. [11-3-2] As described in the following instruction function processing, when the start condition of the AT game is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (AT flag) is turned ON (= 1) and the AT game is started. Is started, and at the end of the AT game, the AT flag is turned OFF (= 0). Note that information such as an internal flag relating to the AT game, such as an AT flag, and the number of AT games to be described later are held in a memory (for example, a RAM 1114) in the main board 409 for controlling the AT game. Similar information may be held in a memory (for example, the RAM 1122).

  The conditions for starting the AT game (conditions for turning on the AT flag) are as described in detail in [11-3-2] et seq. In short, the AT was won by the AT lottery. In the state (AT internal flag is ON), the start condition of the winning AT is satisfied. Also, as described above, when the AT flag is turned on and the AT game is started, the AT internal flag is turned off.

  At the start of the AT game, an effect of starting the AT game and specifying the number of AT games to the player is performed (for example, displaying an AT start screen). In addition to the start game number determined at the start of the AT game, an additional function of adding the AT game number based on satisfying a predetermined condition during the AT game is provided.

  FIG. 137 below shows a process in which the game period (AT game period) controlled to the game state for the AT game is decremented by one count for each game. For example, in the case where the AT game period is managed by the number of appearances of the AT navigation, it is desirable to perform an appropriate AT game determination process according to the subtraction method.

[11-8-2. Control processing related to reincarnation (main board)]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a part of the detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation processing. In particular, the processing by the main board 409 for the AT game is shown (step S1001 in FIG. 137 corresponds to FIG. 58). This is performed following YES in step S601 (AT flag is ON)). Then, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game, a “reincarnation effect” is performed. In the following, each process of FIG. 137 will be described focusing on the process related to the reincarnation effect.

  First, in step S1001 of FIG. 137, it is determined whether the reincarnation flag is ON. Here, the reincarnation flag is an internal flag for indicating that the reincarnation effect is being executed (including immediately before the start of execution), and when ON (= 1), the reincarnation effect is being performed (including the time when the reincarnation effect is started). ), And OFF (= 0) means that a non-reincarnation effect is being produced. The reincarnation flag is turned ON when the reincarnation lottery is won and the number of remaining games of the preincarnation game is 0 (step S1029 described later). Then, the reincarnation flag that has been turned on is turned off at the timing when the lottery process for the release zone in the reincarnation effect ends (step S1013 described later).

  If the reincarnation flag is ON in step S1001 (YES), the processing after step S1002 is performed as "processing during reincarnation effect". If the reincarnation flag is OFF in step S1001 (NO), the processing after step S1021 is performed as “processing for non-reincarnation production”.

  In step S1021, it is determined whether the reincarnation sign game flag is ON. The reincarnation sign game flag is an internal flag for indicating that the reincarnation sign game is being executed (including immediately before the start of execution), and if ON (= 1), the reincarnation sign game is in progress (the reincarnation sign game is started). And OFF (= 0) means that a non-reincarnation precursor game is in progress.

  If the incarnation sign game flag is ON in step S1021 (YES), the processing after step S1022 is performed as "processing for the incarnation sign game". On the other hand, if the incarnation sign game flag is OFF in step S1021 (YES), the processing after step S1031 is performed as “processing for a non-incarnation sign game”.

  In the following, in order to facilitate understanding of the progress of the game with respect to each process shown in FIG. 137, “process for non-reincarnation precursor game (steps S1031 to S1038)”, “process for reincarnation precursor game” (Steps S1021 to S1030) ”,“ Processing during reincarnation effect (Steps S1002 to S1013) ”, and finally“ Processing relating to remaining number of AT games (Steps S1041 to S1045) ”.

(1) Processing for Non-Reincarnation Prediction Game During Reincarnation Flag is not ON in Step S1001 (NO), and Reincarnation Presence Game Flag is not ON in Step S1021 (NO), that is, during reincarnation effect or reincarnation game The processing in the case where there is no data will be described.

  First, in step S1031, an AT-addition lottery for selecting the number of additional games to be added to the number of continuous games of the AT game is performed. In the case of winning in the AT addition lottery in step S1031 (when the number of additional games other than 0 games is selected), the winning value (the number of additional games) is added to the current “number of AT games”, and then the processing in step S1034 (YES in step S1032, S1033). If no win is made in the AT addition lottery in step S1031 (when the number of additional games 0 is selected), there is no AT game number to be added, and the process directly proceeds to the processing in step S1034 (NO in step S1032). The “number of AT games” is managed by storing values in predetermined rewritable variable data. However, in this example, detailed description at the time of rewriting is omitted, and “the number of AT games” is simply added to the “number of AT games”. "Yes". Then, such abbreviated description is applied to other variable data.

  The variable data of “the number of AT games” shown in FIG. 137 and the like counts the “number of internal AT games” used for the processing in the main board 409, and the variable data of “the number of AT games” The value of the data is not always taught to the player at the same timing. That is, even when the “internal number of AT games” is added, the timing at which the number of AT games after addition is taught to be identifiable by the player can be arbitrarily determined by the main board 409 or the sub board 510. Can be controlled. Specifically, for example, if the number of additional AT games is added to 30 during the AT game and the number of internal AT games is 50, the number of internal AT games is 80. At this time, the display of the number of AT games on the image display 500 controlled by the sub-board 510 may be immediately added to the display of the number of AT games from “50 games” to “80 games”. May be displayed such that “30 games” are added to the game, or “30 games” may be divided and added a plurality of times, or after 50 games (the remaining games of the AT game). The display may be such that "30 games" is added to the display (when the number becomes 0) (so-called post-addition). As described above, by allowing the number of AT games recognizable by a player to be changeable at a timing that does not necessarily match the internal change in the number of AT games, various game characteristics can be realized, It can contribute to the improvement of entertainment.

  FIG. 138 is an example of a lottery table used for the AT addition lottery. The lottery table shown in FIG. 138 can be used for the AT addition lottery in step S1031, and is based on the winning combination selected in the game (see steps S106 and S111 in FIG. 55). Lottery of the number of additional games. Note that selecting the number of additional games of 0 games is substantially the same as not adding the number of AT games (not winning the additional game). When the number of additional games is randomly selected using the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 142 and 143 described later, the AT additional lottery using the lottery tables shown in FIG. 138 is not performed.

  In the lottery table of FIG. 138, the winning combinations are two groups of “replay, pushing order bells (AT1 to AT10), two kinds of BB, out of place” and “other than the above (watermelon, cherry, chance, strongest)” , And the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision (addition of the number of AT games) is set to be different for each group. When the expected degree is specifically confirmed, in the case of a winning combination included in the former group, the number of additional games 0 is selected, and the number of AT games is not added. On the other hand, in the case of the winning combination included in the latter group, although the 0 game may be selected (108/256), the AT game number may be added (148/256). An additional game number of 300 games is selected.

  That is, the winning combination included in the former group is a “low expected combination” having a low degree of expectation regarding the privilege granting of adding the number of AT games, and the winning combination included in the latter group is more than the low expected combination. This is a “high expectation role” that has a high degree of expectation regarding the grant of the privilege of adding a number. Note that, strictly speaking, “outside” is not a winning combination, and thus may not be included in the low expected combination.

  Referring to FIG. 49, the high expected combination is also a "low frequency winning combination (low winning combination, rare combination)" in which a winning probability equal to or less than a predetermined probability is set. For example, assuming that the predetermined probability is 1/80, in the general state shown in FIG. 49, the winning probability is 1 / 81.9 even for a weak watermelon having the highest winning probability among the high expected combinations, and the predetermined probability is You can see that it is below. On the other hand, the above low expected combination is also a “high frequency winning combination (high winning combination, non-rare combination)” in which a higher winning probability is set than the low frequency winning combination.

  Note that such grouping of winning combinations is also used in FIGS. 139 to 143 described later, but the same description is omitted. In addition, in FIGS. 138 to 143, all winning combinations are divided into two groups and the distribution is set for each. However, a lottery table applicable to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is in such a form. It is not limited to. For example, the distribution may be set for each winning combination. Further, for example, two groups in FIG. 138 may be subdivided, and the winning combination may be divided into three or more groups. However, considering the load on the program processing, it is better to set the distribution by grouping to some extent than to set the distribution according to each winning combination, so that the program capacity can be reduced and the processing load is also reduced. can do.

  In addition, in the AT addition lottery in the present embodiment, as in the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 138, the number of additional games may be lottered in one lottery based on the winning combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, a two-stage lottery may be performed in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of AT games, and when the lottery is won, the number of additional games is randomly selected.

  In step S1034, a reincarnation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a reincarnation effect. If the player has won the reincarnation lottery, the process proceeds to step S1036. If the player has not been won (non-winning), the process for the non-reincarnation precursor game ends, and the process proceeds to step S1041 (step S1035).

  FIG. 139 is an example of a lottery table used for reincarnation lottery. The lottery table shown in FIG. 139 can be used for the reincarnation lottery in step S1034, and when the winning combination of the game is “low expected combination”, it is relatively difficult to win (1/256), while When the winning combination is “high expected combination”, the winning combination is set relatively easily (80/256).

  In the case where the reincarnation effect in step S1034 has been won, in step S1036, a reincarnation precursor game number lottery is performed to determine the number of executed games (the number of precursor games) of the precursor effect for the selected reincarnation effect.

  FIG. 140 is an example of a lottery table used for the reincarnation game number lottery. The lottery table shown in FIG. 140 can be used in the lottery of reincarnation sign game in step S1036, and the number of sign games is drawn based on the winning combination of the game. In FIG. 140, the distribution of the number of precursor games is set to be the same regardless of the winning combination of the game, but the distribution setting mode is not limited to this. For example, when the winning combination of the game is “high expected combination”, the number of precursor games for a relatively long period may be more easily selected than in the case of “low expected combination”. In addition, it may be set so that the number of precursor games of 0 games is included in the lottery result. In such a case, when the number of precursor games of 0 games is selected, the game is directly transmitted without passing through the reincarnation precursor game. The game progress in which the reincarnation effect is started can be realized.

  In step S1037, the number of predictive games determined by the lottery of reincarnation sign game in step S1036 is set to “number of reincarnation precursory games”. Then, in step S1038, the reincarnation precursor game flag is turned ON (= 1), and the process proceeds to step S1041.

  As described above, the main part of the processing in steps S1031 to S1038 is summarized. When the reincarnation lottery in step S1034 is won, the reincarnation sign game number lottery in step S1036 is performed, and the reincarnation sign game flag is turned on in step S1038. This satisfies the start condition of the game of reincarnation precursor.

(2) Processing for During Reincarnation Sign Game When the reincarnation flag is not ON in step S1001 (NO) and the reincarnation sign game flag is ON in step S1021 (YES), that is, the reincarnation effect is not in progress and the reincarnation sign is not in progress. The processing when the game is executed will be described. At the time of execution of the game of reincarnation, an indication effect (a whole effect, continuous effect, etc.) in a display mode different from the normal game state is displayed on a display (for example, the image display body 500) managed by the sub-board 510. At the end of the reincarnation game, the start of the reincarnation effect is taught. Note that a dummy precursor effect that does not lead to the start of the reincarnation effect may be prepared.

  First, in step S1022, an AT addition lottery is performed. This AT addition lottery is the same processing as the AT addition lottery in step S1031, and for example, the lottery table in FIG. 138 can be used. In the case where the winning in the AT addition lottery in step S1022 is won, the winning value is added to the number of AT games, and then the process proceeds to step S1025 (YES in step S1023, S1024). If the AT addition lottery in step S1022 has not been won, there is no game to be added, and the process directly proceeds to step S1025 (NO in step S1023).

  In step S1025, “1” is subtracted from the number of preincarnation games. Then, in a step S1026, it is determined whether or not the number of games of the reincarnation sign after the process of the step S1025 is “0”. If the reincarnation sign game number is “0” (YES), it means that the reincarnation sign game ends and the reincarnation effect starts from the next game, and the processing in step S1027 and thereafter is performed. If the number of preincarnation games is not “0” (NO), the processing for the preincarnation game ends, and the process proceeds to step S1041.

  In step S1027, the number of games to be reincarnated, ie, the number of games for which the game for accumulating reincarnation effects is to be performed (the number of games for accumulation), is determined. FIG. 141 is an example of a lottery table used for the reincarnation stacked game number lottery. The lottery table shown in FIG. 141 can be used in the lottery of reincarnation stacked games in step S1027, and the number of stacked games is drawn based on the winning combination of the game. According to the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 141, when the winning combination is “low expected combination”, the number of stacked games of three games is always selected, and when the winning combination is “high expected combination”, three games, Any one of the five games and the seven games is selected. The winning combination referred to in the lottery table of FIG. 141 is not limited to the winning combination of the game (the winning combination in the game in which the number of reincarnation games is “0”). It may be a winning combination in a game won in the lottery.

  Although details will be described later, information of the game (for example, a flag of a winning combination) is stored in each stacking game, and a privilege can be given based on the stored information in the release game. The longer the is, the higher the degree of expectation regarding the grant of benefits in the entire reincarnation effect. Therefore, in the case of performing the lottery of the reincarnation game using the lottery table of FIG. 141, when the winning combination of the game is “high expected combination”, when the winning combination of the game is “low expected combination” Rather, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation regarding the provision of the privilege in the reincarnation effect executed later.

  Then, the number of the stacked games determined by the lottery of the number of games to be reincarnated in step S1027 is set to “the number of games for which reincarnation is added” (step S1028), and the reincarnation flag is turned ON (step S1029), thereby producing the incarnation effect. Ready to start. Therefore, the reincarnation sign game is ended, and in step S1030, the reincarnation sign game flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1041.

(3) Process during reincarnation effect The process when the reincarnation flag is ON in step S1001 (YES), that is, when the reincarnation effect is set will be described.

  Of the processes from steps S1002 to S1013, steps S1002 to S1007 are processes for the stacking zone, and steps S1008 to S1012 are processes for the discharge zone. Explaining the outline of the reincarnation effect of the present example, information of the game in the stacking zone (stacking game) is stored, and a privilege is provided in the release zone based on the held information.

  First, in step S1002, information on the game (unit game) is stored in the reincarnation memory counter. The reincarnation memory counter is an example of an information holding unit for holding information in the stacking game for each unit game. In the processing example of FIG. 137, the winning combination selected by the random number extraction in the start-up processing as the information regarding the game. (See steps S106 and S111 in FIG. 55). That is, in step S1002, information indicating the flag of the winning combination in the stacking game is set in the reincarnation storage counter.

  The “information about the game” held in the reincarnation memory counter is not limited to the information (flag information) indicating the flag of the winning combination as described above. For example, the operation of the reel 301 in each unit game of the stacking game Information indicating the mode (stop order, rotation time, stop position, etc.) may be used. By holding the information indicating the operation mode of the reel 301 in this way, it is possible to reproduce and display the operation mode of the reel 301 in the stacking game in the later release game. Note that the “reproduction display” in the reincarnation effect means, for example, a display at which the reproduction target can be recalled at least, and does not necessarily repeat the same mode as the reproduction target. Specifically, the replay display is performed at the stop roll with the missing part corrected, the replay display is promoted by elevating the winning role, or the winning role that was not displayed among the multiple winning roles that were simultaneously won (duplicate winning) Performing a replay display with a stop roll based on the (condition device) is also included in the “reproduce display” in the reincarnation effect (dropouts and promotion will be described in detail later).

  Next, in step S1003, the value of the rebirth release counter (for reels) is added by "1", and in step S1004, the value of the rebirth release counter (for lottery) is added by "1". The reincarnation release counter is a counter for processing in the release game of the reincarnation effect, and is a reincarnation release counter (for reels) for reel control and a reincarnation release counter (for lottery) for adding lots of AT games. ) And are prepared.

  The counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for reels) means the number of executions of the pseudo game performed in the release game (the number of pseudo games), and is referred to in step S107 in FIG. 55 and the like. Then, the pseudo game is executed in the release game the number of times indicated by the counter value. Also, the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) means the number of times the additional lottery is executed in the release game, and the counter value is decremented every time the reincarnation release AT additional lottery is performed in step S1009 described later.

  Next, in step S1005, "1" is subtracted from the number of reincarnation stacked games indicating the number of remaining games in the stacked zone.

  In step S1006, an AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation stacking in which the number of additional games of the AT game in the stacking game is selected is performed. Note that the AT addition lottery when reincarnation is added can be positioned as an alternative to the AT addition lottery (steps S1022 and S1031) in the non-reincarnation effect. The additional game number of the lottery result is added to the AT game number in step S1007.

  FIG. 142 is an example of a lottery table used for the AT addition lottery during the reincarnation stacking. The lottery table shown in FIG. 142 can be used for the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation loading in step S1006, and the number of additional games is selected based on the winning combination of the game. More specifically, according to the lottery table of FIG. 142, when the winning combination is “low expected combination”, at least 10 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 53. 5 games (13700/256). When the winning combination is “high expected combination”, at least 30 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 104.1 games (26660/256). That is, when the winning combination is “high expected combination”, the minimum number of added games and the expected value are higher than when the winning combination is “low expected combination”.

  After the processing in step S1007, processing for the release zone is started. First, in step S1008, it is determined whether or not the number of reincarnation stacking games is 0 (that is, whether or not to end the stacking zone).

  If the number of the reincarnation stacking games is 0 in step S1008 (YES), the stacking zone ends and the discharge zone starts, and the process proceeds to step S1009. On the other hand, if the number of reincarnation stacked games is not 0 in step S1008 (NO), since the stacked games remain and do not shift to the release zone yet, the processing for the release zone is not performed. The process proceeds to step S1041.

  In step S1009, an AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release is performed to randomly select the number of additional games of the AT game in the release game. The added game number of the lottery result is added to the AT game number (step S1010), and the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is decremented by "1" (step S1011).

  FIG. 143 is an example of a lottery table used for the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release. The lottery table shown in FIG. 143 can be used for the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release in step S1009, and the number of additional games is randomly selected based on the winning combination of the game. More specifically, according to the lottery table of FIG. 143, when the winning combination is “low expected combination”, at least 20 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 59. 4 games (15200/256). When the winning combination is “high expected combination”, at least 50 or more additional games are selected, and the average expected value of the additional games is about 121.9 games (31200/256). That is, when the winning combination is “high expected combination”, the minimum number of added games and the expected value are higher than when the winning combination is “low expected combination”.

  In addition, the number of additional games by the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release performed using the lottery table of FIG. 143 (step S1009) and the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation loading performed by using the lottery table of FIG. 142 (step S1006) When the number of added games is compared with the number of added games, the expected value of the number of added games by the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release is higher than the expected value of the number of additional games by the AT lottery at the time of reincarnation addition (a specific difference is that In the case of +5.9 games, and in the case of a highly expected combination, +17.8 games). That is, the degree of expectation of a new privilege that can be given in the release game is higher than the degree of expectation of the privilege that can be given in the stacking game.

  Next, in step S1012, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is 0 (that is, whether or not to end the processing for the release zone). If the counter value of the rebirth release counter (for lottery) is other than 0 in step S1012 (NO), since the stock for the release zone remains, the process returns to step S1009 to return to the rebirth release counter for release zone (for lottery). Until the counter value in ()) becomes 0, the processing such as the addition of AT at the time of reincarnation release is repeated. On the other hand, if the counter value of the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is 0 in step S1012 (YES), the reincarnation flag is turned off to end the processing for the release zone (step S1013), and the processing in step S1041 is stopped. Proceed to processing.

  As described above, by performing the processing of steps S1002 to S1013, the processing during the reincarnation effect is completed.

  According to FIG. 137, the processing for the release game (especially, the processing in steps S1009 to S1013) is the same after the processing for the stacking game (steps S1002 to S1007) ends in the final game of the stacking game. Is described as being performed in the unit game described above, but this is merely an example of processing in the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, and may be another processing timing or processing procedure.

  Describing concretely by taking the additional lottery at the time of reincarnation release as an example, when the process of FIG. 137 is performed, the reincarnation release counter (for lottery) is set in the same game after the number of reincarnation accumulation games reaches zero. Since the game is repeatedly executed the number of times corresponding to the counter value, the number of additional games in the release game is all determined internally at the end of the final game of the stacking game.

  On the other hand, as another processing example, after the final game of the stacking game (for example, a unit game in which the release game is executed), the reincarnation is performed by the number of times set in the reincarnation release counter (for lottery). An additional lottery at the time of release may be repeatedly performed. Further, for example, when a plurality of stacking games are executed in the stacking zone, an additional lottery at the time of reincarnation release may be performed for each unit game. Further, for example, during the unit game in which the release game is executed, an additional lottery at the time of reincarnation release may be performed before execution of each pseudo game.

  However, regardless of the timing and procedure of the process for the release game, the additional number of games determined by the process for the release game (the number of additional games at the time of reincarnation release) is not displayed on reels or the like in the release game. It is preferred that the player be instructed and notified at the timing of the execution. That is, even if the "internal AT game number" is added according to the number of games added at the time of reincarnation release, the timing of teaching the number of games added at the time of reincarnation release to the player before and after the reel operation for the release game is performed. It is preferable that by performing such teaching control, it is possible to strongly impress on the player that a new privilege is provided in the release game. Amusement interests can be greatly enhanced. Basically, the above-described teaching timing is preferable. However, it is also possible to take measures to change the teaching timing only in some cases. Specifically, for example, when the number of additional games is smaller than a predetermined number, the number of additional games is taught immediately after the reel stops, but when the number of additional games is larger than the predetermined number (or a part thereof). ) May be taught at a timing further delayed by a predetermined time immediately after stopping the reels. In such a case, a difference in the teaching timing can give a sense of the number of additional games, so It can enhance interest.

(4) Process Regarding Remaining Number of AT Games As described above, since the reincarnation effect of this example is performed during the AT game, after the processes shown in steps S1001 to 1038 are performed, in step S1041, the AT The number of games is decremented by "1".

  Then, in a step S1042, it is determined whether or not the number of AT games is zero. If it is determined in step S1042 that the number of AT games is not 0 (that is, the AT game does not end), the instruction function generation processing in the game ends, and the AT game continues in the subsequent game.

  If it is determined in step S1042 that the number of AT games is 0 (that is, the AT game is to be ended), the end condition of the AT game is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S1043 to perform a process at the time of ending the AT.

  Specifically, the reincarnation flag is turned off in step S1043, the reincarnation sign game flag is turned off in step S1044, and the AT flag is turned off in step S1045. Then, after the processing in step S1045, the instruction function generation processing in the game ends.

  As described above, by performing the processing of steps S1001 to S1045 in FIG. 137, the processing for the AT game (including the processing relating to the reincarnation effect) ends. In the process illustrated in FIG. 137, even if the reincarnation lottery is won in step S1034, the reincarnation effect is not executed if the AT game ends while the incarnation game is being executed. As a countermeasure against such a case, for example, when the reincarnation lottery is won, the maximum value of the number of preincarnation games (four games in the case of FIG. 140) that can be selected in the reincarnation game number lottery in step S1036. It is also possible to ensure that a large number of games are added, so that the reincarnation effect is always executed without terminating the AT game. During the execution of the game of reincarnation, while the subtraction of the number of AT games is temporarily stopped internally, the subtraction display of the number of AT games is continued on the image display body 500, so that before the start of the reincarnation effect that has been won. The termination of the AT game may be avoided. Further, when the subtraction of the number of AT games is temporarily suspended internally, if the indication of reincarnation remains even after the display of the number of AT games on the image display body 500 becomes 0, the AT on the image display body 500 The display of the number of games may be kept at 0, or a display indicating a special extension (for example, a display such as “EXTRA”) may be made to appear as if the AT game is continuing.

[11-8-3. Reincarnation production game progress]
Hereinafter, the game progress in the reincarnation effect will be described using a specific display example in the reincarnation effect.

  FIG. 144 is a view for explaining the game progress at the time of the reincarnation effect. In FIG. 144, during the AT, a rebirth precursor game is performed over three games (first game to third game), and as a subsequent rebirth effect, a stacking game is performed for three games (fourth game to sixth game). The release game is performed during one game (seventh game). In the seventh game, the release games (the 7-1st game to the 7-3th game) by three pseudo games (three game pseudo games) are performed while the main game of one game is performed.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram for describing an example of a liquid crystal display and a reel display at the time of the reincarnation effect. In each of FIGS. 145 (a) to (d) and (a ') to (c'), a liquid crystal display example is shown in the upper part, and a reel display example is shown in the lower part. Here, the liquid crystal display means image display by the image display body 500, and the display mode is controlled by the sub-substrate 510. The reel display means a stop appearance of the reel 301 which is made visible to a player through the symbol display window 401. Since the operation of the reel 301 is controlled by the main board 409, the reel display is also controlled by the main board 409. Note that (a) to (d) and (a ') to (c') in FIG. 145 correspond to the same symbols in FIG. 144, respectively, and show an example of a display mode at each timing.

  Here, the outline of the reincarnation effect described in FIG. 137 will be described again. The reincarnation effect is determined to be executed when the reincarnation lottery (step S1034) is won, and before the execution of the reincarnation lottery, the reincarnation sign game is executed over the number of lottered reincarnation sign games (step S1036). In addition, during the reincarnation effect, a stacking game and a release game are performed. When the stacking game is executed for the number of lottery reincarnation stacked games (step S1027), information on the game is stored (step S1027). S1002), based on the information stored in the plurality of stacked games, the release game over a game period shorter than the total number of stacked games (the game period of the number of games in the main game multiplied by the game value). Is executed. Then, in the release game, a new privilege is provided (step S1010), separately from the provision of the privilege in the stacking game (step S1007).

  Referring to FIGS. 144 and 145, when the game progress of such a reincarnation effect is followed, first, in the first to third games, a reincarnation precursor game (reincarnation) indicating whether or not a reincarnation effect is to be executed is performed. A sign effect) is performed.

  The effect form in the reincarnation sign effect is not particularly limited, but may be an effect that can give an impression different from usual or a continuous effect that can suggest execution of the reincarnation effect. For example, a battle effect may be displayed on the image display body 500, and if a battle effect is won, execution of a reincarnation effect may be suggested. Also, for example, by causing various effect displays to appear to the extent that they are noisier than usual (to make them turbulent) without performing a clear predictive effect as in the above-described battle effect, it is expected that a sense of expectation for some advantageous state is high. You may make it suggest and then teach execution of a reincarnation effect.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various teaching effects may be performed at a predetermined timing during the reincarnation effect in addition to the teaching effect in the reincarnation sign effect. Specifically, for example, on the image display body 500, at the start of the reincarnation effect, a display such as “entry into the stacking zone” is performed to teach the execution of the stacking game, or the game in which the release game is executed (the first game in FIG. 144). At the start of the game (corresponding to 7 games), a display such as "entering the release zone" may be displayed to teach execution of the release game. Furthermore, in addition to the effect display by the image display body 500, various outputs related to the execution of the reincarnation effect may be performed by activating a predetermined effect means (for example, an LED or an accessory).

  Next, in the fourth to sixth games, a reincarnation effect is started, and a stacking game corresponding to the first half is performed. In the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, a stacking game is executed over a plurality of continuous unit games (real games).

  Specifically, in the fourth game shown in FIG. 145 (a), a stop symbol of the pushing bell (any of AT1 to AT10) is displayed as a reel display, and an additional number of AT games is displayed as a liquid crystal display ( It is taught that 10 games have been added. More specifically, the bell symbols are stopped in line with the lower right line, and it is determined that the bell has been won, and nine medals are paid out (see FIG. 51). In other words, the winning combination of the fourth game is the bell in the push order (any of AT1 to AT10), and since the AT game is being performed, the stop operation of the reel 301 is performed according to the instructed navigation display. , The stop symbol of the pushing order bell is displayed on a reel, and the number of added games of 10 games is selected in the AT addition lottery (step S1006 in FIG. 137) in the reincarnation stacking in the game.

  The remaining games (fifth game and sixth game) of the stacking game also proceed in the same manner as the fourth game. In the fifth game, it is assumed that the strong watermelon is selected as the winning combination, and that the number of additional games in the 30 games is selected in the AT addition lottery when reincarnation is added. However, in the fifth game, it is assumed that the stop timing of the reel 301 (the timing of pressing the reel stop button 211) is not an appropriate timing. At this time, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the strong watermelon combination cannot be sufficiently drawn in. In the reel display of FIG. 145 (b), the stop appearance due to the missing of the strong watermelon combination is displayed. More specifically, the watermelon symbol is stopped at the middle of the left reel and the middle reel, but the blue symbol is stopped at the right reel because the watermelon symbol cannot be drawn. At this time, it is not determined that the strong watermelon combination has been won, and no medals are paid out (see FIG. 53). However, even if the reel display is a missing eye, the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation loading is performed based on the winning combination, so the liquid crystal display teaches the addition winning of 30 games (30G).

  In the sixth game, it is assumed that the replay is selected as the winning combination, and the number of additional games in the 20 games is selected in the AT addition lottery when reincarnation is added. In FIG. 145 (c), the stop appearance of the replay combination is displayed as a reel display. More specifically, the replay symbols are stopped in line with the middle line, and it is determined that the replay combination has been won, and a replay is provided (see FIG. 53). In addition, additional winning of 20 games (20G) is taught as a liquid crystal display.

  At the time of execution of each stacking game, for example, by setting flag information as information of the game in the reincarnation memory counter (step S1002 in FIG. 137), in a later release game, based on the winning combination in the stacking game. It is possible to perform reel display.

  Then, even when the winning combination is missed as in the fifth game, the flag information of the winning combination (in this case, the flag information of the strong watermelon combination) is set in the reincarnation memory counter as the information of the game. Thus, a reel display corresponding to the strong watermelon combination can be performed in a release game described later. Further, if information (for example, a stop bit) indicating the stop position of the reel 301 is stored in the reincarnation memory counter, it is possible to perform the reel display with the same dropout in the release game as in the stacking game.

  Next, in the seventh game, a release game corresponding to the latter half of the reincarnation effect is performed. In the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, in the unit game period (one game in the above example) shorter than the total number of unit games (three games in the above example) of a plurality of stacked games executed continuously. The release games by the pseudo game for the number of the total unit games are performed. In addition, at least a part of the release game is characterized in that the information of the winning combination shown in the past game (stacking game) is reproduced and displayed over another game.

  In the seventh game, after the start operation of the start lever 201 for the main game is performed and before the reception of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop button 211 is started, the release game by the pseudo game is performed. (Corresponding to the 7-1 to 7-3 games shown in FIG. 144).

  As described with reference to FIG. 55, the processing of the main board 409 related to the release game is based on the information set in the reincarnation memory counter (for example, the flag information of the winning combination at the time of the stacking game). Pseudo game information is set for each game (steps S107 to S110 in FIG. 55), and pseudo games corresponding to the number of set pseudo game information are executed (step S113 in FIG. 55). When a plurality of pseudo games are continuously executed, between the pseudo games, the reel 301 is controlled to a stop state with a slight swing in a predetermined range (pseudo stop), and a predetermined time elapses. It is assumed that the next pseudo game is executed later. By performing such processing, the information of the winning combination shown in each of the stacked games can be reproduced and displayed in each of the release games (each of a plurality of pseudo games). In addition, by performing AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release (step S1009 in FIG. 137) for each release game, a new privilege can be provided at a different opportunity from the time of the accumulation game. Since the seventh to seventh games are pseudo games, no winning determination is made.

  Here, a specific reproduction display example in the release game will be described. 144 and 145, the display contents are shown in the order of (a), (b), and (c) in the fourth to sixth games, which are stacking games, as described above. In the 7-1 to 7-3 games corresponding to the release game, the display contents are shown in the order of (c ′), (b ′), and (a ′). b ′) and (a ′) mean that the images are reproduced and displayed in (c), (b) and (a), respectively. That is, in the example of the reincarnation effect shown in FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, the reproduction display by the release game is performed in order from the new unit game information among the unit game information held in the reincarnation memory counter at the time of the stacking game.

  In the 7-1 game shown in FIG. 145 (c ′), a reproduction display of the sixth game is performed, and a stop appearance of the replay combination is displayed as a reel display. In addition, on the liquid crystal display, an additional winning of 30 games (30G) is taught as a result of the AT additional lottery at the time of incarnation release.

  In the 7-2 game shown in FIG. 145 (b '), the reproduction display of the fifth game is performed, and the stop appearance of the strong watermelon combination is displayed as the reel display. More specifically, the watermelon symbols are stopped and displayed on the middle line. Here, the stop appearance of the fifth game was the missing of the strong watermelon role, but in the 7-2 game, the stop may not be performed when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop timing instead of the missing. “Stop appearance of strong watermelon combination” is displayed as a stop appearance. In this way, in the 7-2th game of the pseudo game, instead of reproducing the missed fifth game as it is, it is possible to display a stop roll that has not been missed, so that the strong watermelon role is achieved in the fifth game. This allows the player to recognize the game result that the player has missed the game, and gives the player the impression that the loss due to the missed game has been complemented in the seventh-second game. In addition, on the liquid crystal display, the additional winning of the 200 game (200G) is taught as a result of the AT additional lottery at the time of incarnation release.

  In the seventh-third game shown in FIG. 145 (a '), a reproduction display of the fourth game is performed, and a stop appearance of the pushing order bell combination (AT1 to AT10) is displayed as a reel display. In addition, on the liquid crystal display, the additional winning of the 50 games (50G) is taught as a result of the AT additional lottery at the time of incarnation release.

  As described above, in the release game shown in FIGS. 145 (c ') to (a'), the stacking game is reproduced and displayed in reverse order, and a new privilege is provided by the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release. Then, since the expected value of the additional game by the AT addition lottery at the time of the reincarnation release is larger than the AT addition lottery at the time of the reincarnation accumulation (refer to the lottery table of FIGS. 142 and 143), the release game is performed at the time of the release game. Benefits may be granted to a higher degree than at times.

  Then, in the seventh game, at a predetermined timing (d) after the release game by the pseudo game (the 7-1 to 7-3 games) ends, the total amount of the privilege grant taught during the release game is determined. The instructed liquid crystal display (addition of a total of 280 AT games) is performed, and the rotation of the real game reel 301 of the seventh game is started (FIG. 145 (d)).

  Note that the number of remaining AT games is described in the upper right part of the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 145. During the stacking game in FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (c), the remaining game number of the AT game is subtracted one by one for each game, and the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation stacking is performed because the game period is the main game. Is added. On the other hand, during the release game shown in FIGS. 145 (c ′) to (a ′), since the game period is a pseudo game, the remaining game number of the AT game is not subtracted, and the reincarnation release time AT in FIG. 145 (d) is not subtracted. The number of additional games by the additional lottery is added together. However, such subtraction of the number of AT games is only an example. For example, the subtraction of the number of AT games may be stopped during a game period in which the reincarnation effect is performed (first to seventh games in FIG. 144). Good.

  In the liquid crystal display illustrated in FIG. 145, “!” Is added to the number of additional games taught in the release games (c ′) to (a ′) in the stacking games (a) to (a). This shows that the additional performance is higher than (c). Also, by increasing the number of “!”, Such as “200G !!” in (b ′) and “280G !!” in (d) indicating the total number of added games, particularly high additional performance is exhibited. ing. The display mode having the meaning of emphasizing the additional performance and the number of additional games is not limited to “!”, And other symbols may be used, and the color and size of the character to be taught may be changed. It may be. In addition, the output mode by an output unit other than the image display body 500 (for example, the speaker 512 or the lighting device 502) may be changed, such as performing audio output in the case of high additional performance.

  As the game progress of the reincarnation effect is performed as described above, in the release game in which the number of games (one game in the above example) is smaller than the total number of games in the stacking game (three games in the above example), in the case of the release game, The indicated stop roll is reproduced and displayed in the release game, and a new privilege (rebirth release) different from the bonus in the stacking game (payout of game value or addition of the number of AT games by the AT lottery at the time of reincarnation loading). It is possible to add the time AT addition lottery by the lottery.

[11-8-4. Display pattern of reproduction display]
In the present embodiment, the display pattern for reproducing and displaying the stacking game in the release game of the reincarnation effect is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 144 and 145. Hereinafter, representative display patterns of the reproduction display will be described.

[11-8-4-1. Reproduction contents]
The reproduction content of the stacking game in the release game is determined by determining what kind of information the main board 409 stores in the RAM 1114 (for example, a reincarnation storage counter) as “information of the game” during the stacking game (step S1002 in FIG. 137). ) Or what information the main board 409 extracts to set the pseudo game information based on the “information of the game” stored in the reincarnation storage counter (step S108 in FIG. 55). can do. However, in the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment, it is required that the reproduction display accompanied by at least the reel operation is performed.

(1) Reproduction display of stop appearance As described with reference to FIG. 137 and the like, a representative reproduction content is reproduction display of a stop appearance based on flag information of a winning combination. At the time of the stacking game, by setting flag information as information of the game in the RAM 1114 (transmigration storage counter) (step S1002 in FIG. 137), in the later release game, the stoppage based on the winning combination in the stacking game is performed. The eyes can be reproduced and displayed.

  Further, if the information indicating the stop position of the reel 301 (for example, a stop bit) is stored in the RAM 1114, the stop roll in the stacking game can be completely stored. The same stop number as at the time can be reproduced and displayed.

(1-1) Change of Missing Eye In the case of reproducing and displaying the stop appearance, as described with reference to the difference between the stop appearances in FIGS. 144 (b) and (b '), the winning combination may not be missed in the stacking game. In the case of occurrence, a stop roll when not missed in the corresponding release game may be made to appear.

  Further, in the case where a missing game occurs in the stacking game, the stop roll of the missing game may be reproduced as it is in the release game. In such a case, by giving the same stop roll as the stacking game in the release game, it is possible to give the player a strong impression that the past game is reproduced. In any case, it is possible to provide a novel playability in which a privilege (addition to the number of AT games) is newly given along with the reproduction of the past game, regardless of whether or not there is a correction to the stop result of the dropout. it can.

(1-2) Promotion of Winning Combination As a derivative example of the reproduction of the stop roll of the stacking game in the release game, the stop roll of another winning combination of the same type as the winning roll in the stacking game is displayed in the release game. You may make it do. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination in the stacking game is “push order bell (AT1 to AT10)” of “low expected combination”, in the release game, the “high expected combination” of the same bell combination is performed. This is to display a stop roll such as “strong bell (bell 2)”, which corresponds to a so-called “promotion of a winning combination”.

  In order to perform such promotion of the winning combination in the release game, when the pseudo game information is set based on the flag information at the time of the stacking game set in the RAM 1114 (transmigration memory counter), the flag information is set to It is sufficient to add a process that can change the winning combination shown to a winning combination higher in the winning combination of the same type (higher expectation regarding the privilege), and a pseudo game based on the winning combination changed by the processing. By setting the information, it is possible to cause a winning roll of the winning combination after promotion to appear.

  Then, when the winning combination is promoted in the release game, it is preferable that the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release is performed based on the winning combination after promotion, and in this way, the promotion is performed by performing the lottery. Since the degree of expectation of the privilege (the number of added games) can be made higher than in the case where the winning combination is not performed (that is, the winning combination before promotion), the interest of the player can be enhanced when the promotion of the winning combination occurs. In addition, when the winning combination is promoted, it is preferable that an emphasized effect that clearly indicates that the promotion has occurred is performed on the image display body 500. The effect of surely notifying the promotion of the winning role can be expected.

  However, when the winning combination is promoted between the winning combinations of the same type as described above, the AT addition lottery at the time of reincarnation release is not performed based on the winning combination after promotion, but is performed based on the winning combination before promotion. Even if this is done, the expected amount of the bonus that can be expected during the release game by the reloading AT addition lottery is higher than the expected amount of the privilege that can be expected during the stacking game by the reloading AT addition lottery ( 142 and 143), it can be seen from the player's point of view that many benefits have been given by promotion of the winning combination.

  In addition, the promotion of the winning role in the release game is not limited to promotion from “low expected role” to “high expected role” as in the case of pushing bell to strong bell, but like weak watermelon to strong watermelon. Among the “highly expected combinations”, promotion to a winning combination with a high degree of expectation of a privilege may be performed. When a winning combination is promoted between the winning combinations of the same type included in the “high expected combination”, it is preferable that the groups of the winning combinations in the lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 142 and 143 are subdivided and corresponded. In such a case where a plurality of winning combination promotion patterns are arranged, more complex gaming properties can be provided.

  As another modification example of the reproduction display of the stop appearance, the symbol combination of the winning combination displayed in the symbol display window 401 during the stacking game may be reproduced and displayed on a different line during the release game.

(2) Reproduction display in reel mode other than stop appearance In addition to the above, reproduction and display of the reel modes of the reels 301a to 301c in the stacking game may be mentioned. For example, at the time of a stacking game, the order in which the reels 301a to 301c are stopped can be stored in the RAM 1114 by storing the order in which the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are accepted as the game information in the RAM 1114. it can. Then, by setting the pseudo game information based on the storage of the order in which the pressing operations are received, in the release game, it is possible to perform a reproduction display in which the reels 301a to 301c are pseudo-stopped in the same stop order as in the stacking game. Can be enhanced.

  Further, when the RAM 1114 holds the operation intervals of the pressing operations on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c as information of the game at the time of the stacking game, the stop intervals of the reels 301a to 301c can be reduced in the pseudo game of the release game. Reproducibility becomes possible, and reproducibility can be improved.

  In addition, when the elapsed time from the start of rotation of the reels 301a to 301c to the stop of the rotation is stored in the RAM 1114 as information of the game at the time of the stacking game, the rotation of each of the reels 301a to 301c is performed in the pseudo game of the release game. Time can be reproduced, and reproducibility can be improved.

  Note that the reproduction contents described in (2) allow the reel operation in the stacking game to be reproducible in the release game. However, from the viewpoint of appealing reproduction display to the player, the reproduction contents are described in (1). It is preferable that the processing be executed in conjunction with the reproduction display of the stop appearance.

  In addition, the above reproduction display example has the effect of enhancing the reproducibility of the stacking game in the release game.However, in the release game of the reincarnation effect, the specialty of the release game is emphasized rather than the improvement of the reproducibility. For the purpose, a reel control different from the stacking game may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the release game, the rotation speed of the reels 301a to 301c is set to a rotation speed different from that in the stacking game, or the rotation direction of some or all of the reels 301a to 301c is changed to the opposite direction to the normal direction. You may do it. In this way, by performing reel control different from the stacking game of the present game, it is possible to emphasize the reproduction of the stacking game by displaying the stop appearance while emphasizing that the release game is a special game. Can be.

[11-8-4-2. Reproduction order]
The order of reproducing the stacking game in the release game is determined by the main board 409 in a series of processing (steps S107 to S110 in FIG. 55) for extracting information on the stacking game from the reincarnation memory counter and setting pseudo game information. The pseudo game information is set in an appropriate order, or is changed depending on the order in which the pseudo game information in which the main board 409 is set is executed at the time of execution of the pseudo game process (step S113 in FIG. 55). be able to.

  In the following, in the reproduction display of the stacking game in the release game, a pattern of the reproduction order (release pattern) will be enumerated and described, as an example, in which the stop result in the stacking game is set as the reproduction content.

  Note that in any release pattern, the release game is a game period (game value) that is shorter than the total number of the stack games for a plurality of stack games in which game information is stored in the reincarnation memory counter. ), And the same number of pseudo games as the stacking game are performed during the game period, whereby each game of the stacking game is reproduced and displayed in the release game. .

(1) First Release Pattern In the first release pattern, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the reproduction display in the release game is performed in the reverse order of the execution order of the stacking game.

  Specifically, in the case of FIG. 144 and FIG. 145, when the stacking game is executed in the order of (a), (b), and (c) in the fourth to sixth games, the release game is 7-1. In the 7th to 7th games, the pseudo game based on each piece of information is sequentially performed from the new unit game information among the unit game information set in the reincarnation memory counter, so that (c ′), (b ′) ), The release game is executed in the order of (a '). Then, in each release game, a new privilege is provided (at the time of reincarnation release AT addition lottery) based on the winning combination at the time of the corresponding stacking game (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted). Is added to the number of AT games).

(2) Second release pattern In the second release pattern, the reproduction display in the release game is performed in the same order (normal order) as the execution order of the stacking game.

  Specifically, taking FIGS. 144 and 145 as an example, when the stacking game is executed in the order of (a), (b), and (c) from the fourth game to the sixth game, it corresponds to a release game. In games 7-1 to 7-3, the set unit games are set in the order set in the reincarnation memory counter (that is, in order from the oldest unit game information among the unit game information set in the reincarnation memory counter). Is performed, the release game is executed in the order of (a '), (b'), and (c '). Then, in each release game, a new privilege is provided (at the time of reincarnation release AT addition lottery) based on the winning combination at the time of the corresponding stacking game (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted). Is added to the number of AT games).

(3) Third Release Pattern In the third release pattern, for each winning combination in a plurality of stacking games, a product in which a “high expected combination” is selected as compared to a stacking game in which a “low expected combination” is selected. Reproduction display in the release game is performed in the order in which the upper game is prioritized (highest expected order).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 138 in [11-8-1], the “high expected combination” is a winning combination in which the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant of adding the number of AT games is higher than the low expected combination. Is a "low-frequency winning combination (rare combination)" in which a winning probability equal to or less than a predetermined probability is set. For example, the winning combinations “other than the above” described in the lottery tables of FIGS. 138 to 143 correspond to “high expected combinations”, and are Bell 1 (weak bell), Bell 2 (strong bell), and Bell 2 shown in FIG. Weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, weak chance, strong chance, and strongest.

  In addition, the “low expected combination” is a winning combination that has a lower degree of expectation regarding the privilege granting of adding the number of AT games than the high expectation combination. In other words, it is higher than the high expectation combination (low frequency winning combination). This is a “high-frequency winning role (non-rare role)” for which a winning probability is set. For example, the winning combination of “replay / push order bell / 2 types BB / out” described in the lottery tables of FIGS. 138 to 143 corresponds to the “low expected combination”, and the replays AT1 to AT10 shown in FIG. BB and two types of BB.

  The third emission pattern will be specifically described. In the example of FIGS. 144 and 145, among the stacking games performed in the fourth game to the sixth game, the winning combination of the fourth game shown in (a) is the pushing order bell (any of AT1 to AT10). Since the winning combination of the sixth game shown in (c) is a replay, the winning combination of (a) and (c) is a “low expected combination”. On the other hand, the winning combination of the fifth game shown in (b) is the “highly expected combination” of the strong watermelon (however, missing eyes).

  Therefore, in the 7-1 to 7-3 games corresponding to the release game, the stacking game in which the winning combination of “high expected combination” is selected is preferentially reproduced and displayed, so that, for example, (b ′), (b ′), ( The release game is performed in the order of a ') and (c'). In addition, when the stop roll of the push order bell is displayed (a ') and the stop roll of replay is displayed (c'), when the same "low expected combination" is considered, which release game is played. It may be executed first. In addition, when the group of the winning combination in the lottery table is subdivided to provide a difference in the degree of expectation (for example, the expected value of the number of added games to be drawn) among the “low expected combinations” in the “low expected combination,” The release game with the higher expected degree is executed first.

  Then, in each release game, a new privilege is provided (at the time of reincarnation release AT addition lottery) based on the winning combination at the time of the corresponding stacking game (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted). Is added to the number of AT games). Here, since the release game based on the winning combination of the “high expected combination” is preferentially executed, it is possible to expect a large amount of privilege from the first game (pseudo game) of the release game.

  When the “elevated winning combination” described in [11-8-4-1] is performed, the execution order of the release game is not the winning combination in the stacking game but the winning combination after promotion. It is preferable to be determined based on the degree of expectation regarding the grant of benefits. Such processing is the same for the fourth emission pattern.

(4) Fourth Release Pattern In the fourth release pattern, for each winning combination in a plurality of stacking games, a product in which a “low expected combination” is selected as compared to a combination game in which a “high expected combination” is selected. The reproduction display in the release game is performed in the order in which the upper game is prioritized (low expected role).

  Specifically, taking FIGS. 144 and 145 as an example, among the accumulation games performed in the fourth to sixth games, the winning combination of the fourth game shown in FIG. AT1 to AT10), and since the winning combination of the sixth game shown in (c) is a replay, the winning combination of (a) and (c) is a “low expected combination”. On the other hand, the winning combination of the fifth game shown in (b) is the “highly expected combination” of the strong watermelon (however, missing eyes).

  Therefore, in the 7-1 to 7-3 games corresponding to the release game, the stacking game in which the winning combination of the “low expected combination” is selected is preferentially reproduced and displayed, and thus, for example, (a ′), ( The release game is performed in the order of c ′) and (b ′). In addition, when the stop roll of the push order bell is displayed (a ') and the stop roll of replay is displayed (c'), when the same "low expected combination" is considered, which release game is played. It may be executed first. In addition, when the group of the winning combination in the lottery table is subdivided to provide a difference in the degree of expectation (for example, the expected value of the number of added games to be drawn) among the “low expected combinations” in the “low expected combination,” The emission game with the lower expected degree is executed first.

  Then, in each release game, a new privilege is provided (at the time of reincarnation release AT addition lottery) based on the winning combination at the time of the corresponding stacking game (the winning combination after promotion if the winning combination can be promoted). Is added to the number of AT games). Here, since the release game based on the winning combination of the "low expected combination" is preferentially executed, as the pseudo game is performed a plurality of times in the release game, the amount of grant of the new privilege increases, and You can expect to receive a large amount of benefits until the end.

(5) Fifth Release Pattern In the fifth release pattern, at the start of the release game, the grant amount (number of additional games) of the privilege associated with all the release games (reproduced display by multiple pseudo games) is determined. In this case, the reproduction display in the release game is performed so that the amount of the award of the privilege is in the ascending order or the descending order. It is determined whether or not the amount of award associated with all release games has been determined at the start of the release game, as described in (11-8-2) (3) Processing during reincarnation effect. (Particularly, the processing of steps S1009 to S1013) is determined by the processing timing and processing procedure.

  Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 144 and 145, it is assumed that the stacking game is performed in the fourth to sixth games. Then, before the release game is started in the 7-1th game, the number of additional games in all the release games of the 7-1st game to the 7th game is, for example, 280 as shown in FIG. 145 (d). It is assumed that a game (30 games + 200 games + 50 games) has been determined. At this time, assuming that the reproduction display is performed such that the awarding amounts of the benefits are in descending order, the release game is performed in the order of (b '), (a'), and (c ').

  Note that, in the above example, it has been described that the benefits are displayed in descending order without changing the grant amounts of the benefits corresponding to the repeat displays (a ′) to (c ′). A certain 280 game may be appropriately allocated to each of the reproduction displays performed the same number of times as the total number of the stacked games. Specifically, the order of reproduction display is (b ′), (a ′), (c ′), but the number of additional games taught in each case is 150 games, 100 games, and 30 games. Good. Further, in the case of distributing the total grant amount of the privilege as described above, the order in which the stacking games are reproduced and displayed may be appropriately changed as long as the condition of increasing or decreasing the grant amount is satisfied. For example, as described in the first release pattern, the display may be performed in the reverse order, or as described in the third release pattern, the highly expected combination may be displayed in the priority order. .

  By employing such a fifth release pattern, the amount of the privilege to be taught is reliably increased (in ascending order) or decreased (in descending order) each time the reproduction display is performed a plurality of times in the release game. ), It is possible to enhance the effect of producing a new privilege. Further, in the case of assigning the amount of each release game based on the total amount of addition, a more effective effect can be realized such as teaching a large number of additional games at the end of the release game.

[11-8-5. Features and effects]
Although the reincarnation effect of the present embodiment has been described in detail above, the slot machine 1 of the embodiment capable of executing such a reincarnation effect has the following features and effects.

  First, as a general feature of the reincarnation effect, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the unit game of the stacking game, based on the winning combination, a bonus (payout of game value, the number of AT games by AT addition lottery when reincarnation is added). Is added, and a release game of a pseudo game is performed based on the unit game information (for example, flag information) held in the reincarnation memory counter, and in the release game, each of the unit game information is On the other hand, a new privilege different from that at the time of the stacking game (addition of AT games at the time of reincarnation release by AT lottery) can be given. Further, the giving of the privilege in the release game is taught to the player with the operation of the reel (for example, a stop roll) in such a manner as to reproduce the stacking game.

  That is, according to the slot machine 1 in which such a reincarnation effect is performed, it is possible to give a new privilege to the information on the stacking game by the release game, even after the stacking game is completed. In other words, in other words, the privilege expectation accumulated by storing the information of the accumulation game can be released collectively in the release game. In addition, in the release game, a reel operation similar to (or similar to) the stacking game is performed, and it is possible to teach the player to give a new privilege to the player. Can be realized.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, even if various advantageous games (for example, a bonus game, an AT game, an ART game, etc.) are prepared, the reel rotates based on a start operation and stops on a stop operation. The basic game progress of the unit game (one game) of playing is not particularly changed, and there is a considerable possibility that the player will get tired of the repetition. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by providing the above-described reincarnation effect, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine that does not make the player tired while repeating the unit game.

  Further, as another feature of the reincarnation effect in general, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a low frequency winning combination (high expected combination) in which a winning probability equal to or less than a predetermined probability is set, and a winning probability higher than the low frequency winning combination. Is set, but in a normal gaming state, a reincarnation effect is provided in which a plurality of winning combinations including at least a high-frequency winning combination (low-expected combination) having a lower value related to privilege provision than the low-frequency winning combination are prepared. Is executed, information of the past game (flag information of the winning combination in the stacking game) is held, and a pseudo game is performed based on the information in the release game, so that the past game is straddled over another game. The information of the winning combination shown in the game (for example, the number of stops in the stacking game) is reproduced and displayed. Specifically, for example, the stop roll shown in the fourth game in FIG. 144 (see FIG. 145 (a)) is referred to as the fifth and sixth games, and further, the 7-1 and 7-2 games. The game is reproduced and displayed in the 7th game over another game (see FIG. 145 (a ')).

  In the release game, the winning combination in the past game has a high ratio of high-frequency winning combination (low expected combination). By additionally granting the privilege at a high degree, the value of the privilege grant for the winning combination selected in the past game can be increased.

  Specifically, when the additional bonus of the number of AT games is given as a privilege, the “normal game state” corresponds to, for example, a normal AT game other than the time of the reincarnation effect. By comparing the increase in the number of AT games in the normal AT game (see FIG. 138) and the increase in the number of AT games in the reincarnation effect (see FIGS. 142 and 143), especially in the release game, the reproduction display of the stacking game It is shown that the additional grant of the privilege associated with is performed to a high degree.

  That is, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if only a high-frequency winning combination (low expected combination) such as a replay or a pushing order bell can be won at the time of the main game (stacking game), reincarnation is performed. By adding the number of AT games to the game to a high degree by the release game of the effect, the value of the privilege granting to the high-frequency winning combination such as replay and pushing order bell is enhanced. Therefore, even if a low expectation combination is selected and many benefits are not given, if a reincarnation effect occurs thereafter, it is possible to greatly expect additional giving of benefits, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Stated another way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a low-expected role having a low value related to the award of a privilege is selected in the stacking game and a low-value game is played, the slot game 1 Since a bonus is given to a high degree in the release game to be reproduced and displayed, the game can be converted into a high-value game, so that the value of the low expected combination selected in the stacking game can be increased. Thus, even if a low-value game is played, there is a possibility that the game will be converted to a high value later, so that a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed and the game development can be expected.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machines, it is common that the winning probability of the high expected combination is set lower than the winning probability of the low expected combination, and in many games, the low expected combination is selected as the winning combination. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest of the player is apt to be reduced if the winning of the low expected combination continues. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by providing the reincarnation effect described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest of the player even if the winning of a low expected combination continues.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has, in addition to the features of the general reincarnation effect described above, a release game in a game period shorter than a plurality of unit games in which the stacking game has been performed after the stacking game. Is performed, and a new privilege can be given based on the predetermined information stored in the stacking game, and the grant of the new privilege is performed in a reel operation in a mode that reproduces the stacking game (for example, a stop operation). It has the feature of being taught to a player with an eye). According to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, along with the pseudo game for realizing the reel operation reminiscent of the reproduction of the stacking game, the privilege expectation accumulated by storing the information of the stacking game is Since the release is performed collectively in the release game of a shorter game period than the stacking game, the release of the privilege expectation accumulated in the past game can be condensed and taught to the player, and the interest of the player can be enjoyed. It can be greatly improved.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, even if a bonus such as an additional number of AT games is provided, the bonus is not provided to the player with a low degree of advantage (for example, a relatively small number of games such as 5 games and 10 games). In the case of the addition, there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be rather lowered. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-described reincarnation effect is performed to condense and teach the release of the privilege expectation accumulated in the past game. A gaming machine that can provide a privilege can be provided.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has, in addition to the features of the general reincarnation effect described above, a plurality of consecutive past games (stacking games) regardless of the winning combination in each past game. By causing the release game to be reproduced and displayed within the game period shorter than the plurality of times and by giving a privilege during the game period, the winning combination in the stacking game becomes a low expected combination (high frequency winning combination). ), It is possible to increase the chance of giving a privilege.

  That is, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment having such features, the winning combination in the stacking game is a low expected combination, and whether the privilege is not provided at the end of the stacking game is determined. Even if the number of games is small, in the release game that reproduces and displays the stacking game, the privilege is given in a shorter period than the total number of the stacking games, and as a result, the winning combination in the stacking game is Irrespective of the above, it is possible to increase the opportunity to give the privilege, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation of the privilege grant with the reincarnation effect.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, since the degree of expectation for the addition of the number of games greatly changes depending on the winning combination in the game, when a low expected combination that cannot be expected for the addition of the number of games frequently appears, the player with respect to the award of the privilege is provided. It was not easy to maintain expectations. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by providing the above-described reincarnation effect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's expectation of giving a privilege.

  Further, when the reincarnation effect is executed in the first release pattern of [11-8-4-2], according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of unit games are executed in the stacking game. In this case (fourth to sixth games), information on each unit game is stored in the reincarnation memory counter, and based on the stored information, a game period (seventh game) shorter than the plurality of unit games. In addition, a release game can be performed in a mode involving the operation of the reels (reproduced display of stop appearances). Then, in the release game, a new privilege (addition to the number of AT games in each pseudo game of the release game) different from the privilege given in the stacking game is added to each of the unit game information held in the reincarnation memory counter. ) Can be given, and the giving of the new privilege is condensed and taught in the short game period (addition of three AT games accompanying the release game is taught during the seventh game). Can be. Furthermore, by performing the condensed teaching of the new privilege in order from the teaching corresponding to the information of the new unit game held in the reincarnation memory counter, the player can be given an impression as if it is going back to the past stacking game. Can give.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the opportunity to obtain the privilege is generally limited to once for each game, and it has been difficult to expect the bonus to be given to the game that has ended. Therefore, if the game period in which the privilege is not provided continues, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to play is spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a reincarnation effect is performed by the first release pattern, a plurality of game results performed in the stacking game are reproduced and displayed in reverse order in the release game. At the same time, in the release game performed in a shorter period of time than in the stacking game, the player is instructed that a new privilege different from that in the stacking game is condensed and given, so the game that has been ended ( In this case, it is possible to expect that a new privilege will be given to the stacking game) at another opportunity of the release game. For this reason, even if a game period in which a privilege is not provided or a game period in which the amount of award is relatively small continues, a new award can be expected to be provided by a reincarnation effect, so that a game that can maintain a player's willingness to play is provided. Machine can be provided.

  In addition, in the release game, by teaching the new privilege grant while reproducing and displaying the stacking game in the reverse order, the privilege is newly awarded in each of the past stacked games that have been completed while going back in time. In this way, it is possible to realize a novel effect that makes the player feel as if it is being played, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In addition, the expected value of the amount of the award in the release game is higher than the expected value of the amount of the award in the AT game or the stacking game at the time of the non-reincarnation effect (see the lottery tables in FIGS. 138, 142, and 143). ), Even if a game period in which the player is not satisfied with a sufficient amount of benefits continues, if the reincarnation effect is performed, a greater amount of benefits can be expected to be provided; Can be.

  Also, when the reincarnation effect is executed in the third release pattern of [11-8-4-2], the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs a plurality of consecutive stacking games more than the plurality of times. Within a short game period, the information of the winning combination selected in the stacking game is reproduced and displayed in an order that gives priority to the stacking game elected to the high expectation combination over the stacking game elected to the low expectation combination (for example, stop) The release game to reproduce the symbol) is executed. Furthermore, in this release game, each time the reproduction display of each of the plurality of stacking games is performed, a higher degree than the normal game state (during the non-reincarnation effect during the AT game or during the stacking game) ( 138, 142, and 143), a new privilege can be given (specifically, for example, an additional AT at the time of reincarnation release and an additional AT game number by lottery).

  According to the slot machine 1 in which the reincarnation effect of the third release pattern is performed, in the release game, the reproduction display based on the high expected combination is preferentially executed, and the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant in the release game is performed. Since the higher the expected role, the higher the role, the player can expect a large amount of privilege from the first game (simulated game) of the release game.

  Further, according to such a slot machine 1, in the release game, the reproduction display based on the high expected combination is prioritized, immediately after the start of the release game, irrespective of the winning history of the winning combination in a plurality of stacking games. Since a large amount of benefits can be granted from, there are many winnings of low expected roles during the game period of the stacking game, and even if the benefits are not so much granted, the situation that the player can be discouraged quickly recovers, An effect that keeps the player interested can be expected.

  Here, with conventional gaming machines, the probability of winning a high expectation role having a high degree of expectation regarding the grant of a privilege is low, so that there are few chances that the player can expect the grant of the privilege, and the interest of the player in most games is There was no small risk of loss. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the reincarnation effect of the third release pattern is performed, even if the low expected combination is won many times in a plurality of past games (stacking games). In the release game, since a new privilege can be provided in a higher order than usual with the reproduction display and in the order of higher expected degree, a gaming machine that can interest the player regardless of the winning combination Can be provided.

[12. External output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a signal (also referred to as an external output signal) can be output to the outside of the slot machine 1 via the external relay terminal plate 131. Such an external output will be described in detail. Note that the external output at the time of occurrence of an error has already been described in [11-7] and thereafter, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the external relay terminal plate 131 is a substrate connected to the main substrate 409, and relays a signal input from the main substrate 409 and outputs the signal to the outside of the slot machine 1. The signal output to the outside of the slot machine 1 by the external relay terminal board 131 is input to an external device (for example, a hall computer 1200 in FIG. 48) communicably connected to the slot machine 1, and the external device Thus, the game information can be managed and displayed on the slot machine 1 based on the input signal.

  In addition to the hall computer 1200, a so-called data display can be included as the external device. Here, the data display is, for example, a device that is installed above each gaming machine (slot machine) and displays game information (number of big hits, number of starts, acquired number, etc.) of the gaming machine, And a device that can collectively display game information on a plurality of gaming machines. The data display is communicably connected to, for example, the hall computer 1200 so that the game information can be displayed using information output from each gaming machine (slot machine 1) to the hall computer 1200.

  The external relay terminal plate 131 relays a signal input from the main board 409 and outputs the signal to the outside. The communication relationship between the slot machine 1 and the external device via the external relay terminal plate 131 is always constant. It is limited to one-way signal output from the slot machine 1 (main board 409) to an external device (for example, the hall computer 1200). Therefore, the output timing and the output content of each signal that is output to the outside via the external relay terminal plate 131 are controlled by the main board 409.

[12-1. Configuration of external relay terminal board]
A configuration example of the external relay terminal plate 131 in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment will be described. The external relay terminal plate 131 includes an input connector (CN1) to which a signal is electrically input from the main board 409 and an output connector (CN2) to output a signal electrically to the outside of the slot machine 1. Suppose. Each of CN1 and CN2 has eight terminals (pins), and a predetermined signal is transmitted (input or output) at each terminal. Each pin has an ON or OFF state, and when set to ON, a signal corresponding to each pin is transmitted. Individually, the pins of CN1 are CN1_1 to CN1_8, and the pins of CN2 are CN2_1 to CN2_8. The signals transmitted at the pins CN1 and CN2 correspond to each other. For example, a signal input from CN1_1 is output from CN2_1, and a signal input from CN1_2 is output from CN2_2. Hereinafter, the output connector (CN2) will be described in detail, and the description of the input connector (CN1) having the same configuration will be omitted.

  Note that such CN1 and CN2 are merely examples for describing the external relay terminal plate 131 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and other configurations (for example, more Etc.).

  FIG. 146 is a diagram for describing a signal output from the external relay terminal plate. FIG. 146 summarizes an example of signals (external output signals) transmitted by the pins CN2_1 to CN2_8 in the output connector CN2 of the external relay terminal plate 131. Each signal will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the insertion signal output at the pin CN2_1 is a signal for indicating the number of inserted medals consumed in the game. For example, when the game is started using the specified number of three, "3" Is output in such a manner as shown in FIG. More specifically, the process of turning off / on again is added twice (after that, the process is turned off again) while a predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the first input signal, and a total of three input signals are intermittently output. , A signal indicating the consumption of three medals is output. In FIG. 146, the output timing of the insertion signal is the timing when the starting operation (lever ON) by the starting lever 210 is performed, that is, immediately after the medal is consumed, the insertion signal is output.

  The payout signal output at the pin CN2_2 is a signal indicating the number of payouts of medals (gaming value) given as a result of the game, for example, a payout process of nine medals by the main board 409 (FIG. When the step 54 (see step S7) is performed, a payout signal is output in a mode indicating "9". Specifically, a process of turning off / on again is added eight times (after that, the process is turned off) while a predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the first payout signal, and a total of nine payout signals are intermittently output. , A signal indicating the payout of nine medals is output. “At the time of payout of medals” shown as the output timing of the payout signal in FIG. 146 is the timing (at the start of payout) at which the medal payout process by the main board 409 is started and medals are actually paid out. Alternatively, the timing may be the timing at which the medal payout process by the main board 409 is completed and the payout of all medals is completed (when payout is completed). These timings are specific examples in the case where a medal (gaming value) is paid out as a result of the game. For example, in the case where a replay privilege is given as a result of a game that has won the replay combination. By reading in the following manner, a specific example of the output timing of the payout signal can be obtained, as in the case where the payout of medals is performed. In other words, "timing when medals are started to be paid out" can be read as "timing when processing for setting a replay has begun" and "timing when all medals have been paid out" can be read as "timing when replaying has been completed." The timing at which the setting has been completed. "

  The type signals 1 to 3 output at the pins CN2_3, 2_4, and 2_5 are signals assigned according to the present embodiment, and a plurality of types related to the game are obtained by combining ON / OFF of the type signals 1 to 3. Is determined in advance so as to indicate the information. In FIG. 146, as an example, the output timing of the type signals 1 to 3 is set to a time after all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, that is, after all the reels are stopped. Specific information indicated by the type signal will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The signal for the number of games output from the pin CN2_6 is a signal for indicating information on the number of executed games, and is used for displaying the number of games on a specific external device (for example, a data display 1300 described later). . For example, when the counter of the number of executed games is to be increased by one game for the specific external device, the signal for the number of games is output once (ON). Note that the game number signal is mainly an external output signal to be used in a “second example of external output” described later, and is not used in the first, third, and fourth examples. Is also good.

  The security signal 1 output from the pin CN2_7 is a signal indicating occurrence of an error or the like. When the slot machine 1 detects a predetermined error or the like, the security signal 1 is output. By outputting such a security signal 1, it is possible to notify an external device of the occurrence of the error or the like. For example, if the output of the security signal 1 is recorded by the hall computer 1200, an error history in the slot machine 1 can be recorded, which is useful for management of the gaming machine. Also, if the data display 1300 is caused to emit light when the security signal 1 is output, the hall clerk can quickly detect the occurrence of the error. Since the security signal 1 is preferably output as soon as possible, it is output immediately when an error or the like is detected.

  The security signal 2 output from the pin CN2_8 is a signal indicating that the door-shaped front member 200 has been opened (door open), and is a signal provided by a door open detection switch that detects the open state of the door-shaped front member 200. In response to the detection, the security signal 2 is output. Note that the security signal 2 is output immediately like the security signal 1.

[12-2. External output control example]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for the external output signal output from the external relay terminal plate 131 to the outside, the main board 409 controls the type of the external output signal to be output, the output condition, and the output timing, so that A characteristic external output can be realized. Hereinafter, the characteristic external output by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to first to fourth examples.

[12-2-1. First example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first example of the external output, in the internal lottery of the winning combination, the winning combination (the strong rare combination) having a relatively high degree of advantage among the low winning combinations (the rare combination) is selected. In this case, information that enables the winning of the strong rare role to be determined is output to the outside. Hereinafter, such external output will be described in detail.

  Here, the specific winning combination will be described. In the case of the winning combination shown in FIG. 49, “bell 1 (weak bell)”, “bell 2 (strong bell)”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak” The “chance chance”, “strong chance eye”, and “strongest strength” correspond to “low winning role (rare role)” which is relatively difficult to be selected in the internal lottery of the winning role. Among these rare roles, Bell, Cherry, and Watermelon have different strengths depending on the degree of advantage at the time of winning (the chances are excluded for convenience of explanation). The winning role with the higher degree of advantage (specifically, "Bell 2 (Strong Bell)", "Strong Cherry", "Strong Watermelon") is classified into the "High Advantage Low Winning Role (Strong Rare Role)" The winning combination with the lower degree of advantage (specifically, "bell 1 (weak bell)", "weak cherry", "weak watermelon") is classified into "low advantage low winning role (weak rare role)". .

  FIG. 147 is a diagram for describing information indicated by a combination of type signals. FIG. 147 shows an example of a combination of the type signals in the first example of the external output for the type signals 1 to 3 among the external output signals shown in FIG. FIG. 147 shows an example of setting the type signal on the assumption that a BB bonus, an RB bonus, and an AT game are prepared as advantageous gaming states of the slot machine 1.

  According to FIG. 147, as an external output indicating that the BB game has started, an external output signal based on a combination of “information No. 1” (type signal 1 is ON and type signals 2 and 3 are OFF) is output. As an external output indicating that the RB game has started, an external output signal based on a combination of “information No. 2” (type signal 2 is ON and type signals 1 and 3 are OFF) is output.

  The external output (information No. 1) indicating that the BB game has started is a symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination (for example, the two BB symbol combinations shown in FIG. 53) on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401. Is output when the RB game is started, and a symbol combination (not shown) corresponding to the RB combination is displayed on the activated lines 623a and 623b of the symbol display window 401. Output when stopped.

  If the target bonus combination (BB or RB) is not prepared in the slot machine 1, an unnecessary combination of the type signals 1 to 3 may be used for transmitting other information.

  According to FIG. 147, as an external output indicating that the AT game has started, an external output signal based on a combination of “information No. 3” (type signal 3 is ON and type signals 1 and 2 are OFF) is output. , An external output signal based on the combination of “information No. 7” (type signals 1, 2, and 3 are all ON) is output as an external output indicating that the AT game has ended.

  An external output (information No. 3) indicating that the AT game has started is output when it is determined that the start condition of the AT game is satisfied (for example, after the AT flag is turned on in step S608 in FIG. 58). At the time of game execution). The external output (information No. 7) indicating that the AT game has ended is determined when the end condition of the AT game is determined to be satisfied (for example, the AT flag OFF shown in step S1045 in FIG. 137 is performed). At the time of game execution after the game).

  The method of determining the start of the AT game (or the method of determining the end of the AT game) is not limited to the method based on the ON (or OFF) of the AT flag as described above. A method of estimating the start (or end) of the AT game from the game situation (for example, the appearance of a reel) can be considered.

  As a specific determination procedure, for example, an event that an appropriate pressing order stop operation is performed in the game that has won the pressing order bell role (9 coins are paid out in the bell role winning) for a predetermined period of time. When a predetermined number of times occur (for example, twice in three games), the start of the AT game can be estimated. This is because it is considered that an AT game is being played in a situation in which a stop operation of an appropriate pressing order is frequently performed after winning the pressing order bell role. Similarly, an event in which an improper pushing order stop operation is performed in the game that has won the pushing order bell role (one or two payouts have been performed in the bell role winning) occurs within a predetermined period of time. When the number of times (for example, two times in five games) has occurred, the end of the AT game can be estimated. During the AT game, if the player wins the pressing order bell role, the proper pressing order stop operation is performed according to the teaching of the navigation, so it is considered that the improper pressing order stop operation does not occur frequently. is there. If such a determination procedure is adopted, the start (or end) of the AT game is estimated based on the game situation, and the information No. No. 3 and information No. 7 external outputs can be realized.

  In FIG. 147, when the start or end of the AT game is indicated, the information No. No. 3 and information No. Although the external output of No. 7 is performed, if the advantageous gaming state prepared in the slot machine 1 is not AT, but is, for example, ART, information No. 7 is output. No. 3 and information No. 7 may indicate the start / end of the ART game.

  As a method of determining the start of the ART game, for example, a case where a predetermined symbol combination indicating the start of the ART game (a symbol combination of a special replay that shifts to the upper RT mode) stops on the activated line 623 can be considered. . As a method for determining the end of the ART game, for example, a predetermined symbol combination indicating the end of the ART game (a symbol combination of a special replay (falling replay) for shifting to the lower RT mode) is stopped on the activated line 623. You can think of the case. In addition, for example, in a case where nine payouts are obtained when the push order bell is won after the game following the game shifted to the upper RT mode (when the push order is correct, a stop operation in an appropriate push order is performed). ), It may be determined that the ART game has started, or if one or two payouts are obtained when the player wins the push order bell after the game following the game shifted to the lower RT mode (push). It may be determined that the ART game has ended when the answers are incorrect in the order or when a stop operation is performed in an improper pressing order. Furthermore, the start / end determination of the ART game may be used in combination with the various specific determination conditions described above. Also, when the advantageous gaming state of the slot machine 1 is RT, the start / end can be determined by using the same determination method as in the case of the ART game, but the detailed description is omitted.

  According to FIG. 147, a combination of “information No. 4” as an external output indicating that “strong cherry” has been won in the internal lottery of the winning combination (type signals 1 and 2 are on and type signal 3 is off) An external output signal is output according to the combination of “information No. 5” (type signals 1 and 3 are on and type signal 2 is off) as an external output indicating that “strong watermelon” has been won. Then, an external output signal based on a combination of “information No. 6” (type signals 2 and 3 are ON and type signal 1 is OFF) is output as an external output indicating that “strong bell” has been won. That is, when an external output signal indicating any one of “Information No. 4” to “Information No. 6” is output, the external device of the slot machine 1 uses the internal lottery of the winning combination as the “strong rare role”. You can understand that you have won.

  As for the external output indicating “information No. 4” to “information No. 6”, the symbol combination (see FIGS. 52 and 53) corresponding to each strong rare role stopped on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401. Output if Note that, in the present embodiment, a so-called “zero-zero” symbol combination is stopped without performing a stop operation at an appropriate stop timing corresponding to the winning combination in the game that has won the strong rare combination. It is also assumed that the main board 409 can output an external output signal indicating the winning of the strong rare role. In addition, when the strong rare role is a target of simultaneous winning with another winning role, even if the strong rare role is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the strong rare role is not necessarily stopped in the symbol display window 401. However, in such a case, for example, it may be determined whether or not to perform the external output indicating the winning information of the strong rare combination based on the operation of the condition device corresponding to the strong rare combination.

  In addition, in FIG. 147, the external signal output may not be allocated to the winning of all the strong rare roles so that the allocation of the external signal output regarding the winning of the “strong chance” is not shown in FIG. 147. Which of the strong rare combinations is to be assigned the external signal output may be determined in consideration of the number of terminals of the external relay terminal plate 131, the importance of the strong rare combinations in the game, and the like.

  As described above, the output setting of the external output signal as illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 147 is performed, so that in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined strong rare role (specifically, If a strong cherry, a strong watermelon, or a strong bell) is won, the type signals 1 to 3 are externally output after all the reels 301 are stopped in the game. Therefore, based on the combination of the type signals 1 to 3, The strong rare role won in the game can be determined outside the slot machine 1.

  In the external device serving as the output destination of the external output, for example, the hall computer 1200 can not only acquire information on the winning of the strong rare role, but also the data display can teach the player etc. of the winning of the strong rare role. Become like

  Here, a data display 1300 installed above the slot machine 1 as an external device other than the hall computer 1200 will be described. FIG. 148 is a diagram for describing an example of a data display. A data display 1300 shown in FIG. 148 is communicably connected to the slot machine 1 (including a connection via the hall computer 1200 or the like), and is a general data set mainly above the slot machine 1. An external device for display, which receives an external output signal of the slot machine 1 via the external relay terminal board 131 and the hall computer 1200 and, based on the external output signal, game information (the number of jackpots) in the slot machine 1 , The number of starts, the number of acquired sheets, etc.). In the first to fourth examples of the external output, description will be given on the assumption that the hall computer 1200 and the data display 1300 are communicably connected to the slot machine 1 as an example of the external device.

  The configuration of the data display 1300 shown in FIG. 148 will be briefly described. The display contents and the display method in the light emitting area 1310, the number of hits display area 1320, the number of start times display area 1330, the acquired number display area 1340, and the information display area 1350 described below are all functions of the data display 1300. The hall side can be set appropriately within the range, and a specific display is controlled by a control unit (not shown) provided in the data display 1300 or a control unit (not shown) of the hall computer 1200. Each display area is realized by a liquid crystal display panel, a dot display, a seg display, or the like.

  The light emitting area 1310 is an area that can be lit or blinked as appropriate according to a gaming situation in the slot machine 1. For example, it lights up when a big hit is won to congratulate the player, or lights up when an error is detected to notify the clerk of the error. It also lights up when the player presses the call button. The light emitting area 1310 is mounted by a component having a built-in LED, lamp, and the like.

  The number-of-hits display area 1320 is an area where the number of transitions to the advantageous game state (number of wins) can be displayed. The number of wins in the advantageous game state can be appropriately selected on the hall side. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a novel display of the number of wins in the advantageous game state can be realized in the third example of the external output by using the display in the hit number display area 1320.

  The number-of-starts display area 1330 is an area where the number of game executions (the number of games) in the slot machine 1 during a predetermined period can be displayed. The “predetermined period” can be selected by the hall or by the player, and for example, the total number of games per day or the number of executed games during the advantageous game state can be displayed. In the following description, the number of games displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1330 may be referred to as “the number of games displayed (in the data display 1300)”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the display in the number-of-starts display area 1330, it is possible to realize a novel display of the number of displayed games in the second example of the external output.

  The acquired number display area 1340 is an area in which the acquired number of gaming values in a predetermined period can be displayed. The hall can be selected as appropriate for the predetermined period, but in general, it is often in an advantageous gaming state, for example, displaying the total number of cards acquired during the BB bonus or displaying the total number of cards acquired during the AT game. be able to. Note that the “acquired number in the predetermined period” may be the total amount of gaming values paid out in the period (the number of medals paid out), but in this example, the gaming value paid out in the period The “difference number” between the (medal payout number) and the consumed game value (medal insertion number).

  For example, the difference number of medals acquired during the AT game (the number of acquired ATs) is determined by the combination of the input signal, the payout signal, and the type signals 1 to 3 indicating the information on the AT among the external output signals (the information in FIG. 147). No. 4 and information No. 7), and the data display 1300 displays the calculated value in the acquired number display area 1340, so that the AT acquired number can be displayed to the player. Can be taught. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the display in the acquired number display area 1340, novel control relating to the display of the acquired number can be realized in the fourth example of the external output.

  The information display area 1350 can provide teaching and notification using characters and images. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by using the display in the information display area 1350, in the first example of the external output, the winning of the specific winning combination can be taught to the player.

  The display of the data display 1300 in the first example will be further described. When such a data display 1300 is connected to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment so as to be able to communicate directly or indirectly, the slot of the present embodiment is used. When the machine 1 performs an external output as shown in the first example of the external output, the data display 1300 causes the information display area 1350 in FIG. 148 to display, for example, “strong watermelon win!” The predetermined low winning combination selected by the internal lottery can be taught in such a manner that the degree of advantage can be determined.

  That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the external output as shown in the first example, and through the display of the external device (in this case, the data display 1300), the low winning combination selected by the internal lottery. Can be taught even to the degree of advantage of the low winning combination. This is because even if it is difficult to determine the degree of advantage of the low winning combination from the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window 401 (for example, it is not known whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon), the data display 1300 It is possible to determine the degree of advantage of the low winning combination from the display content in. Furthermore, according to such a slot machine 1, when the winning combination of the low winning combination can be detected from the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display window 401, the winning information of the strong rare combination is taught via an external device. Otherwise, it is possible to infer that the winning combination in the game is a weak rare combination, and as a result, it is possible to determine the degree of advantage of the winning combination (low winning combination). To give a specific example, if "watermelon winning" is not displayed in the information display area 1350 of the data display 1300 even if the winning of the watermelon can be detected, it is inferred that the winning role is weak watermelon. it can.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, it is not necessary to perform a stop operation (so-called “push”) for determining a winning combination and aiming at a predetermined stop timing in order to reliably stop the winning combination. Also, since it is possible to teach the degree of advantage of the low winning combination without depending on the skill of the player, it can be expected to eliminate unfairness that can occur due to the skill of the player.

  In particular, even when the so-called “zero” symbol combination is stopped, by outputting an external output signal indicating the winning of the strong rare combination, the reel display (symbol combination) in the symbol display window 401 is strong. Even if it is difficult to recognize the winning of the rare role, the external device (the hall computer 1200 and the data display 1300) is notified that the strong rare role has been won, and the external device (the data display 1300) is used to notify the strong rare role. It is possible to reliably notify the player of the winning.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can determine the degree of advantage of the low winning combination selected by the internal lottery from the player through the display of the external device by performing the external output as shown in the first example. However, by setting the output timing of the external output signal (especially the type signals 1 to 3) after all the reels are stopped, the pleasure of the game by the fluctuation display of the reel 301 performed in the symbol display window 401 is reduced. It is possible to provide convenience that enables the determination of the winning combination without making the winning combination. In other words, by making it possible to execute the teaching of the winning of the strong rare role by the external device only after all the reels 301 have stopped, firstly, after securing a period in which the game effect in the slot machine 1 body is enjoyed, The entertainment of the game can be additionally or supplementarily enhanced by the instruction of winning the strong rare role by the external device.

  In the case of performing the external output as shown in the first example, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment sets the output timing of the type signals 1 to 3 indicating the winning information of the strong rare combination to “after stopping all reels”. However, this is in order to secure an effective timing to enhance the game entertainment by the teaching of the winning of the strong rare role. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the output timing of the type signals 1 to 3 may be another timing (for example, when operating the starting lever 210). In such a case, it is possible to teach the strong rare role winning via an external device before the reel 301 stops, so that a so-called “advance notice” teaching can be performed. Before the game result is displayed, the player's entertainment interest can be enhanced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the external output of the information regarding the winning of the strong rare role in the first example of the external output, the condition for externally outputting the information is changed, thereby expanding the range of the gaming ability. Becomes possible. In the following, a description will be given by specifically showing some pattern examples regarding the conditions of the external output. In these descriptions, the “watermelon role” is used as an example of the rare role, and for simplicity, an external output signal indicating the winning of the strong watermelon (type by combination of “information No. 5” shown in FIG. 147) The signals 1 to 3) are called “strong watermelon winning signals”.

(1) First condition pattern (complete notification)
First, in the first condition pattern, whenever a strong watermelon is won, a strong watermelon winning signal is output. The strong watermelon winning signal is output even when the symbol combination due to the winning is stopped.

  In the case of the first condition pattern, when a watermelon role (strong watermelon or weak watermelon) is won, whether the winning role is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon is completely determined depending on whether or not a strong watermelon winning signal is output. Can be determined.

  Therefore, when the display based on the external output signal is performed by the data display, the player can surely know the strength of the advantage of the winning combination. (Since it is sufficient to check the teaching on the data display), it is possible to reduce the operation fatigue of the player and suppress the unfairness due to the skill difference of the player.

(2) Second condition pattern (incomplete notification)
Next, in the second condition pattern, a strong watermelon winning signal is output as part of the case where the strong watermelon is won.

  In the case of the second condition pattern, even if the strong watermelon is won, the strong watermelon winning signal may not be output. Therefore, the strong watermelon winning signal is output and the strong watermelon winning is taught through the display of the external device. If it is, it can be determined that the strong watermelon has been won, but even if the strong watermelon winning signal is not output, there is a possibility that the strong watermelon was won (possibility that the winning role was not a weak watermelon) Is left, so that the player can have hope.

  In the second condition pattern that “a strong watermelon winning signal is output in a part when the strong watermelon is won”, three specific examples of “part” are shown.

  For example, “a strong watermelon winning signal is output when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed among symbol combinations corresponding to (a condition device of) the strong watermelon”. Specifically, as the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the strong watermelon is won, there are "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol" and "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"BAR symbol". For example, when the former symbol combination is displayed, a strong watermelon winning signal is output. Here, assuming that the former symbol combination is a symbol combination that can be displayed even when a weak watermelon is won, when "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol" is displayed, the strength of the watermelon role is weakened. Cannot be determined. At this time, if a strong watermelon winning signal is output, information that cannot be determined from the symbol combination can be taught to the player through the display of the external device.

  Further, when the output control of the strong watermelon winning signal is performed as described above, another symbol combination (“watermelon symbol”-“watermelon symbol”-“BAR symbol”) corresponding to the strong watermelon is displayed only when the strong watermelon is elected. If the symbol combination "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"BAR symbol" is displayed, the player is delighted to be sure that the strong watermelon has been won. On the other hand, even if the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol"-"watermelon symbol" with the possibility of weak watermelon election is displayed, by having the possibility of strong watermelon election, It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Then, when the strong watermelon winning signal is output in such a situation that the expectation can be given, the strong watermelon winning is taught through the display of the external device, so that the player is given joy in response to the expectation of the player, Can be improved. Further, when the “watermelon symbol” stops on the active line of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, the player's game style such as whether or not to aim at the “BAR symbol” on the active line of the right reel 301c. , The teaching by the external device can be made selectable, so that the range of playability can be expanded. Specifically, for example, if the player performs a game operation to stop the symbol combination of “watermelon symbol”-“watermelon symbol”-“BAR symbol” by pushing at the time of winning the strong watermelon, Since the strong watermelon winning signal is not output even at the time of winning, the teaching of the strong watermelon winning by the external device is not executed, and only the player himself / herself enjoys the game result without being noticed by the surrounding players. Playability can be selected. On the other hand, when the player does not particularly push, since it is not known when the strong watermelon winning will be taught from the external device, the player should select the gaming ability to enjoy the thrilling feeling including the surrounding players. Can be.

  Further, for example, “a strong watermelon winning signal is output at a predetermined ratio at the time of strong watermelon winning” may be used. If the strong watermelon winning signal is output at 50% of the strong watermelon winning, if the winning of the strong watermelon is instructed to the player by the display of the external device at the time of the winning of the watermelon, the strong watermelon is won. On the other hand, even if the strong watermelon winning signal is not output and the teaching is not performed by the external device, the possibility of winning the strong watermelon remains, so that the player is not discouraged. be able to.

  Further, for example, “when a strong watermelon is won and a reel stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order, a strong watermelon winning signal is output” may be used. If the specific push order is reversed, the strong watermelon winning signal is output when the strong watermelon is won only when the game is played by the reverse push, and the strong watermelon is won through the display of the external device Therefore, the player who wants to receive the teaching can play the game by pressing the button backward, and the player who does not need the teaching can perform the reel stop operation other than the pressing of the button reversely.

  In addition, if a player is guided to perform a reverse push by generating a push order navigation in a specific game state such as a chance zone, if a strong watermelon is won in a specific game state, the winning is determined by an external player. Since it is possible to reliably teach through the display of the device, it is possible to realize an unprecedented gaming machine that externally outputs winning information of the strong rare role according to the gaming state. For example, when a rare role is won in the above chance zone, the expected degree of transition to the advantageous gaming state is set high, and particularly when a very rare role is won, a very high expected degree of transition is set. By being taught that the player has won the role of strong rare in the chance zone, even a player having a skill that cannot perform sufficient eye-catching can greatly increase the expectation of a game advantageous state.

(3) Third condition pattern (incomplete notification)
Next, in the third condition pattern, a strong watermelon is won, and a strong watermelon winning signal is output in a part when the zeroth symbol combination is stopped. That is, in the third condition pattern, when a stop operation by accurate eye-pressing is performed so as not to cause a pick-up, a strong watermelon winning signal is not output because the zero-symbol combination is not stopped. The "part of the case where the zeroth symbol combination is stopped" may be, for example, a predetermined ratio (for example, 50%) when the zeroth symbol combination of the strong watermelon is stopped. The case where the zero symbol combination of the strong watermelon is stopped by a stop operation other than the forward push may be a predetermined symbol combination of the zero symbol combination of the strong watermelon (for example, For example, a stop roll that does not appear when a weak watermelon is removed may be displayed. Further, by combining these zeros, a zero for outputting a strong watermelon winning signal may be set. .

  Here, in the case of a rare role, such as a watermelon role, in which a zero occurs if a stop operation is not performed at an appropriate stop timing, when a zero occurs and the “zero” stops, The player may not be aware that the rare role has been won. Further, even if the winning of the rare role can be guessed, it is often not easy to determine the strength (strong watermelon or weak watermelon).

  In consideration of such a background of the zero, since the strong watermelon winning signal is output according to the third condition pattern, it is possible to teach the winning of the strong watermelon through the display of the external device. A player who has not noticed the winning or a player who has noticed the winning of the watermelon role but cannot determine the strength can be made aware of the winning of the strong watermelon. As a result, a novel function of teaching a winning combination via an external device can be realized, and unfairness with a player having a high skill, such as pushing, can be eliminated.

  Further, in the case where the zero of the strong watermelon is a symbol combination that is hard to remain in the impression for the player (for example, a symbol combination that can remind the player of a loss), even if the zero is stopped, the player can stop the strong watermelon. Since the winner is not noticed, surprise and joy can be given by performing the teaching via the external device based on the output of the strong watermelon winning signal. In addition, the fact that such teaching is performed in a part of the election of the strong watermelon means that, from another viewpoint, even if the teaching is not performed, there is a possibility that the strong watermelon has been elected. By reminding the player of such a possibility, if a strong watermelon has not been won (specifically, a watermelon symbol is aligned, a symbol combination with an alternative symbol, Even if the game does not stop), the player may feel that he / she may have won the strong watermelon role, thereby increasing the entertainment interest of each game.

  In addition, in the slot machine of the present embodiment according to the first example of the external output, in addition to the above-described condition patterns, even if the strong watermelon is not won in the winning combination lottery, limited specific conditions are set. An external output condition for outputting a strong watermelon winning signal when the condition is satisfied may be provided (contradiction pattern).

  The “limited specific condition” in such a contradictory pattern is, for example, a high winning combination (for example, a pushing order bell, which may include a loss) in a winning combination lottery, and an advantageous game in this game. In the case of winning (for example, AT winning), a strong watermelon winning signal may be externally output. By outputting a strong watermelon winning signal when such a `` limited specific condition '' is satisfied, a strong watermelon winning signal is externally output even though the strong watermelon has not been won, “Strong watermelon winning!” Can be displayed in the information display area 1350 of the data display 1300 (contradiction display). When the contradictory display is performed, a privilege (in this case, AT win) having a higher degree of advantage than the teaching content (strong watermelon win) is given, and the strong watermelon is given to the player. It can give greater joy than winning. That is, according to the slot machine 1 capable of externally outputting a contradictory pattern, an external output signal that can indicate that a predetermined low winning combination has been selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination is output to the external device when the low winning combination is not elected. By causing the external device to output the inconsistency teaching, it is possible to suggest that a privilege that is more advantageous than when the low winning combination is won is given.

  The “limited specific conditions” in the contradictory pattern are not limited to specific examples such as “winning of high winning combinations” and “winning of advantageous games” as described above. For example, “after stopping all reels 301, That a symbol combination in which medals are not paid out (or a symbol combination in which the number of payouts is relatively small, such as one or two when the bell is released, is displayed). Good. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a small amount of medals are paid out when the pushing order bell is lost (see FIG. 49). However, even if at least a part of the pushing order bell is lost, the medal payout is not performed. Good. When such “display of symbol combinations with no (or little) medal payout” is set as “limited specific conditions” in the contradictory pattern, the symbol combination is regarded as a strong watermelon zero. Inconsistent teaching can be performed in advance, or inconsistent teaching can be performed while assuming that a streak with a low degree of expectation is displayed, and an effect of giving unexpected joy to the player can be expected.

  In addition, instead of “winning of an advantageous game”, “winning of a rare role other than strong watermelon” may be added as “limited specific condition” in the contradiction pattern. However, it is preferable that such a rare role is a rare role having a higher degree of advantage than a strong watermelon (such as a high probability of winning the AT lottery). By being able to expect, it is also possible to produce high expectations for advantageous games.

  When a strong watermelon winning signal is externally output when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped, as in the first condition pattern or the third condition pattern, a symbol combination in which strong watermelon winning is clearly indicated is used. If it is difficult to determine the winning combination of the strong watermelon as a "predetermined symbol combination", it is possible to teach the winning of the strong watermelon even in the situation where it is difficult to determine the winning of the strong watermelon, as described above. Therefore, it is preferable from the viewpoint of enhancing game characteristics.

  The first to third condition patterns have been described above. However, in the first example of the external output in the present embodiment, the external output signal may be output according to other conditions. For example, the information indicating that the winning of the strong rare role (strong watermelon) has been output to the outside, but the information indicating the winning of the weak rare role may be output to the outside.

  Even when the winning information of the weak watermelon is output externally instead of the winning information of the strong watermelon, the external output is performed by performing the external output based on the above-described first to third condition patterns and the like. Through this, the player can be taught to win the weak watermelon. Then, since the player can determine the winning of the weak watermelon, an effect of expecting the winning of the strong watermelon when the weak watermelon cannot be determined can be produced.

[12-2-2. Second example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a second example of the external output, a signal (“insertion signal” shown in FIG. 146) indicating the number of game media consumed in executing the game in the slot machine 1 is output. A slot is provided for an external device (for example, a data display 1300) having a purpose of teaching game information to a player or the like, while accurately outputting to an external device for managing game information (for example, a hall computer 1200). A signal based on the number of games executed by the machine 1 (“the signal for the number of games” shown in FIG. 146) is output to the outside while being partially limited. Hereinafter, such external output will be described in detail.

  First, as described with reference to FIG. 146, the main board 409 is provided with an insertion signal for indicating the number of inserted medals consumed in the game and a payout for indicating the number of paid medals paid out in the game. Output the signal to the outside. Since information on medal insertion and withdrawal is important information for managing the business of the hall, accurate insertion and payout signals for each game are sent to the hall computer 1200 for managing game information of the slot machine 1. It is required to be output.

  Apart from such an input signal, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game number signal for indicating information on the number of executed games is externally output. Conventionally, when the consumption of three medals is notified to an external device by an insertion signal externally output from a gaming machine, it is determined that a game for one game is to be executed, and a specific external device (hereinafter, referred to as a game) is executed. , A data display 1300) is generally displayed. On the other hand, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is characterized in that, in the case of the second example of the external output, the game number signal is prepared as a new external output signal different from the input signal. Is displayed on the data display 1300 based on the information indicated by.

  Here, the “number of games” refers to the number of times the game has been executed in a predetermined period satisfying a predetermined condition, such as the total number of games executed per day (total number of games) or the latest advantageous game state. Of the game since the end of the game (the number of games during the advantageous gaming state). As described with reference to FIG. 148, the number of games (the number of displayed games) displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1330 on the data display 1300 depends on the setting on the data display 1300.

  As a specific example of the processing related to the display of the number of games displayed on the data display 1300, for example, when the number of games between ATs is set to be displayed, the data display 1300 outputs an external output signal indicating the end of the AT. (Refer to Information No. 7 in FIG. 147), the counter for displaying the number of games between ATs in the data display 1300 is reset (displayed as “0”), and thereafter, an external output indicating the start of AT is performed. Until a signal (see information No. 3 in FIG. 147) is received, the value of the counter is incremented by 1 every time the game number signal is received. By displaying the value of the counter controlled in this way in the number-of-starts display area 1330, the data display 1300 can display the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the previous AT game.

  Then, in the second example of the external output, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the external output of the game number signal is performed, so that even if the game is performed, the output of the game number signal corresponding to the game is performed. It is configured to be able to limit (however, the insertion signal is externally output every time the game is played). Whether or not to output the external output signal including the game number signal and the insertion signal to the outside is controlled by the main board 409, and the above-described predetermined condition is set in the main board 409 in advance. Hereinafter, predetermined conditions for externally outputting the game number signal will be described in detail.

  First, in the second example of the external output, when the "predetermined low winning combination (rare combination)" is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination, a game number signal indicating execution of the game is always externally output. And Here, the "predetermined low winning combination" may be a plurality of rare combinations in general (cherry, watermelon, common bell, chance eyes, etc.) or some of them. Furthermore, a "predetermined low winning combination" may be set according to the difference in the degree of advantage among rare combinations (for example, only strong watermelons among watermelon combinations). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, a plurality of types of rare roles are generally referred to as “predetermined low winning combinations”.

  On the other hand, when any other than the above “predetermined low winning combination” is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination, the external output of the game number signal indicating the execution of the game is at least partially limited.

  As an example of the limitation of the external output of the game number signal, the game number signal is externally output until the number of games (games to be limited) other than the “predetermined low winning combination” reaches a predetermined number. For example, a predetermined counter may be provided on the main board 409 to count the number of established games to be restricted, and to output one game number signal when the number of restricted games becomes four. For example, in the game to be restricted, the game number signal is externally output at a rate of one in four (1/4). As a result, the number of display games displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1330 of the data display 1300 is increased only once in four when the game to be restricted is executed.

  Further, as another example of the limitation of the external output of the game number signal, for a game selected other than the “predetermined low winning combination” (a game to be restricted), the game corresponds to the winning combination of the game (or a condition device that operates). By setting the limit ratio in advance, a game in which the game number signal is not output to the outside is created. When such a restriction is provided, the degree of contribution to the number-of-games display in the number-of-starts display area 1330 of the data display 1300 can be made different depending on the selected winning combination (condition device). The winning combination (condition device) whose output is less likely to be restricted can influence (count up) the number of games displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1330, and the degree of contribution can be increased.

  By limiting the external output of the number-of-games signal as in the above two examples, the game in which the “predetermined winning combination” is selected in the internal lottery (for example, a low winning combination winning game) and the “predetermined winning combination” The rate at which the number of games signal is output changes depending on the game selected other than (for example, a low winning combination non-winning game). As a result, the number of games displayed on the external device (data display 1300) is It can be less than the actual number of games. Furthermore, in the case of a low winning combination winning game, the number of games displayed on the data display 1300 is reliably counted one game at a time, whereas in the case of a low winning combination non-winning game, the number of games displayed on the data display 1300 is displayed. Is counted up only below the actual number of executed games, the probability of winning a low winning combination based on the number of games counted by the data display 1300 is higher than the probability of winning in the internal lottery of the winning combination. Get higher.

  This will be described using a simple numerical example. When the winning probability of the low winning combination defined as “predetermined winning combination” is 5% (1/20), the winning probability of the non-low winning combination is 95% (19/20), and the non-low winning combination is selected. It is assumed that the number-of-games signal is externally output at a rate (20%) of five games. If 1000 games are executed and the winning combination is selected according to the probability, the number of low winning combinations is 50, and the number of non-low winning combinations is 950. At this time, the number of games that can be counted by the hall computer 1200 based on the insertion signal (the actual number of executed games) is 1,000 games. On the other hand, as for the game number signal, for a game that has won the low winning combination, a signal for the game number of 50 times is externally output based on the number of wins of 50 times, and for a game that has won the non-low winning combination, it is non-low. Since 20% of the number of wins of the winning combination of 950, that is, 190 games number signals are externally output, a total of 240 games number signals are externally output. As a result, the number-of-games display on the data display 1300 is 240 games (breakdown is 50 games for low winning combinations and 190 games for non-low winning combinations).

  In this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games displayed (240 games) on the external device (data display 1300) can be made smaller than the actual number of games (1000 games), and the winning game state is not won. Even if the game progresses, it is possible to show the player a smaller number of games to be displayed. Generally, when the number of times the game is executed increases without being able to win an advantageous game state such as a bonus or an AT (in a so-called humble state), the player's willingness to play decreases. In the case of the second example of the external output, the display of a large number of games is suppressed from being performed even when the game is in a humble state. Further, since a decrease in willingness to play can be suppressed, an effect of increasing the operation rate of the gaming machine (slot machine 1) can be expected.

  Considering further the display of the number of games of 240 games on the data display in the above example, the number of games displayed by winning the low winning combination is 50 games. The winning probability of the role is about 20.9% (50/240), which is much higher than the winning probability (5%) of the low winning role in the internal lottery of the winning role. In this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make the winning probability of “predetermined winning combination (low winning combination)” higher than the actual winning probability of the internal lottery on the display of the data display 1300. Yes, it is possible to give an impression to the player that a low winning combination is relatively easy to win. Furthermore, by giving the player an impression that is easy to win the low winning combination, it is possible to expect that the setting value of the slot machine 1 is higher than the actual setting value.

  Further, in the slot machine, when the game is repeated and reaches a predetermined upper limit number without being able to win the transition to the advantageous gaming state by the internal lottery based on the winning combination, the gaming state is improved regardless of the winning combination. It is generally known to have a function of canceling the number of games by shifting to a gaming state. Such a function is also called a “ceiling function”, and the “upper limit number” at which the number of games is released is also called a “ceiling number”. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may also have such a ceiling function. However, when performing the external output according to the second example, the slot machine 1 is indicated not by the number of games actually executed but by a signal for the number of games. It is preferable to activate the “ceiling function” based on the count of the number of games (the number of games displayed on the data display 1300).

  The mounting of the ceiling function based on the count of the number of games (the number of displayed games) indicated by the signal for the number of games will be described in detail. For example, a counter for counting the number of times the signal for the number of games is output while the main board 409 is in the advantageous game state is provided. (Also referred to as a ceiling counter), and when the value of the counter exceeds a predetermined ceiling count (for example, 240 times), the main board 409 controls the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state regardless of the winning combination. What should I do? By doing so, the main board 409 can grasp the number of games (the number of displayed games) that can be displayed on the external device (the data display 1300) even inside the slot machine 1, and can determine the number of games based on the number of displayed games. The ceiling function can be activated by the number of times of the ceiling.

  According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to reduce the number of ceilings even if the same number of ceilings is provided as compared with the case where the number of ceilings is set based on the actual number of game executions. Specifically, as calculated in the above specific example, if the number of display games based on the number-of-games signal is 240 when 1000 games are executed, the actual number of game executions is As a setting of the ceiling function equivalent to the case where the number of ceilings based on 1000 is set, the number of ceilings based on the number of displayed games based on the game number signal can be set to 240.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the second example of the external output, by providing the ceiling function based on the display game number indicated by the game number signal, the payout rate of the gaming machine can be reduced. The number of ceilings can be kept low without any change. By setting the number of ceilings to be much lower than before, the player can feel that the gaming machine is easy to win in the advantageous gaming state (it is hard to get hooked) and the impression on the slot machine 1 is improved. be able to. Also, even if the game is in a humble state, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her willingness to play due to the low ceiling frequency. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the gaming machine is easy to play, maintenance and improvement of the operating rate can be expected.

  Further, as described above, in the second example of the external output, the game in which the “predetermined winning combination (for example, the low winning combination)” is selected is more effective than the games in which the other winning combinations are selected. Since it greatly contributes to the external output of the signal, when a ceiling function based on the number of displayed games indicated by the game number signal is provided, the number of ceilings is easily approached when a low winning combination is won. That is, when a low winning combination is won, the counter up to the ceiling count always advances, but when a low winning combination is not won, the counter up to the ceiling number does not always advance. According to such a slot machine 1, it is possible to further increase the significance of winning the low winning combination.

  Here, furthermore, if there is a strong rare role and a weak rare role having different degrees of advantage among the low winning combinations, and if the strong rare role is won, it is easy to shift to an advantageous gaming state by the winning. On the other hand, when the player wins the weak rare role, there is a tendency that, although the winning is low, the transition to the advantageous game state is not so much expected. However, in the case of the ceiling function based on the number of displayed games indicated by the above-mentioned number-of-games signal, the number of games (whether a strong rare role or a weak rare role) is determined irrespective of the degree of advantage as long as the low winning role is won. Since the use signal is output to the outside, even if the winning combination is a weak rare combination, it contributes to approaching the ceiling frequency. Thus, the value of the weak rare combination can be increased, and the player's expectation of the overall low winning combination can be increased.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the second example of the external output, in the normal gaming state, the progress of the counter (ceiling counter) up to the number of ceilings is made different depending on the winning combination as described above. On the other hand, even if the "predetermined low winning combination" is not won, a new advantageous state (so-called chance zone) may be provided in which the counter up to the ceiling count always advances. In such a new advantageous state, no matter which winning combination is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination (including the case where the winning combination is selected), control is performed so that the counter up to the ceiling count is always advanced. This makes it easier to approach the ceiling frequency than in the normal gaming state, so that a gaming state with a high sense of expectation for granting benefits by reaching the ceiling can be realized. In such a new advantageous state, when the "predetermined low winning combination" is won, the ceiling counter proceeds in the same manner as when the winning combination other than the "predetermined low winning combination" is won. Minute counter may be increased, or in a form such as supplementing the ceiling counter that did not advance when a winning combination other than `` predetermined low winning combination '' was selected in the normal gaming state until then Alternatively, the ceiling counter may be advanced by a larger amount than when the "predetermined low winning combination" is won in the normal gaming state. In any case, by providing such a new advantageous state, it is possible to realize a gaming state in which the progress of the ceiling counter is different, so as to prevent the player from getting tired, and to enhance the game entertainment for the new advantageous state. Can also be expected.

  In the above description of the second example of the external output in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, the output timing of the signal for the number of games is set after all reels are stopped (see FIG. 146). This is for avoiding the occurrence of a serious problem. For example, when the start lever 201 is depressed, a signal for the number of games can be output immediately after the start operation is performed. Therefore, whether or not the display of the number of games is updated on the data display 1300 determines the game. The player may be able to determine whether or not the player has won the "predetermined low winning combination", and since the winning combination can be detected before the result of the game is displayed on the slot machine 1, the gaming interest is reduced. There is a possibility that it will. By setting the output timing of the number-of-games signal after all reels are stopped, such a problem can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game progress in the slot machine 1 itself. However, in the second example of the external output, the output timing of the number-of-games signal does not necessarily have to be after all the reels are stopped. For example, by setting the timing at which the start lever 201 is pressed, the “predetermined low winning combination” May be realized so as to be able to detect in advance the winning. Even in such a case, the number of games displayed on the external device 1300 can be made smaller than the number of games actually executed, so that the effect of the second example of the external output can be obtained.

[12-2-3. Third example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a third example of the external output, when a specific condition for controlling the transition to the advantageous gaming state is satisfied, a signal relating to the advantageous gaming state is output to the outside, and the identification is performed. Even when a predetermined condition different from the above condition is satisfied, the external signal (for example, the data display 1300) having the purpose of teaching game information to a player or the like can be output by outputting the signal to the outside. It is possible to display a number of wins greater than the actual number of wins in the advantageous game state.

  Regarding the third example of such external output, the “advantageous game state” is set to “BB game”, and the “satisfaction of specific conditions” is set to “symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination” (for example, the two types of BB shown in FIG. 53). When the symbol combination stops on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401, the "signal relating to the advantageous gaming state" is "external output indicating that the BB game has started (hereinafter referred to as BB winning information output)", An example in which the “establishment of the predetermined condition”, which is different from the specific condition, is defined as “when an external output indicating that a strong cherry has been won by the internal lottery of the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as a strong cherry winning information output) is performed”. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

  First, as described with reference to FIG. 147, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination stops on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401 (when a specific condition is satisfied) ) Is the information No. By outputting the external output signals of the type signals 1 to 3 in a combination of 1, “BB winning information output” is realized. As a result, on the external device (for example, the data display 1300) communicably connected to the slot machine 1, the number of winnings of BB can be increased by one and displayed. As described with reference to FIG. 148, on the data display 1300, the number of wins in the advantageous gaming state is displayed in the number-of-hits display area 1320.

  Further, in the third example of the external output, when the strong cherry is selected by the internal lottery of the winning combination, and the symbol combination (including the zero crossing) corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped on the activated line 623 of the symbol display window 401. (When the predetermined condition is satisfied), the information No. By outputting the external output signals of the type signals 1 to 3 in combination of type 4 (type signals 1 and 2 are ON and type signal 3 is OFF), “strong cherry winning information output” is realized. "BB winning information output" is also performed. That is, the main board 409 stores the information No. In the case of performing “Strong cherry winning information output” of No. 4, “BB winning information output” is also performed as a set. However, as for the order of the external output, it is preferable that the BB winning information output is performed first. As a result, in the external device (for example, the data display 1300) communicably connected to the slot machine 1, the number of wins of BB shown in the hit count display area 1320 is changed, although the game does not actually shift to the BB game. It can be displayed once more.

  According to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the number of wins in the advantageous game state is relatively small, the number of wins in the advantageous game state that can be displayed on an external device can be increased. (Additional display of winning times).

  Generally, a player may determine whether or not to play a gaming machine with reference to the history of game information displayed on a data display. Specifically, when the number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state is small, the player does not have a good impression on the gaming machine, such as suspicion that the setting value is low, and there is a tendency for the gaming motivation to decrease. . However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the external device (data display 1300) displays a large number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state, so that it is possible to give an impression that the set value of the slot machine is high. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In addition, even when the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is relatively small, the number of wins in the advantageous game state can be displayed relatively large, so that the operating rate is felt to be high or the setting value is high. We can expect effect to make you feel.

  From the viewpoint of the hall side, the additional display of the number of winnings in the advantageous gaming state makes it difficult for the slot machine 1 to be conveyed to the player even when the slot machine 1 is set to a low setting value. it can.

  The timing of adding the number of wins in the advantageous game state is not limited to the time when the predetermined strong rare role is won (in the above specific example, when the strong cherry is won), but, for example, when the low win role including the weak rare role is generally won. It may be. However, if the probability of establishment of the opportunity becomes too high, it is assumed that the number of wins in the advantageous game state is increased to such an extent that the player can feel uncomfortable, and the effect of the additional display is rather reduced. Therefore, although it depends on the winning probability in the internal lottery, it is preferable that the opportunity to add the number of wins in the advantageous gaming state be at the time of winning the predetermined strong rare role or at the time of winning the strong rare role in general. Further, it is also preferable to set an opportunity to add the number of wins in the advantageous game state on condition that the probability is within a predetermined range based on the win probability of the advantageous game state (for example, the probability does not exceed the win probability of the BB combination). .

  When “BB winning information output” is performed in combination with “strong cherry winning information output” as in the above example, it is preferable that the order of external output be “BB winning information output” first. This is a problem that, when external output signals are continuously output, an external device (for example, a hall computer 1200 or the like) communicably connected to the slot machine 1 does not correctly receive a subsequent external output signal. This is in consideration of what to do when it occurs. By controlling the main board 409 in such an output order, "BB winning information output", which is more important information, can be reliably detected by the hall computer 1200, and the game information is reliably managed by the hall computer 1200. To contribute. The continuous output of the external output signal is determined in advance so that the interval between the output of the previous external output signal and the output of the subsequent external output signal is within a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms). Is also good.

  Further, according to the third example of the external output, it is described that the additional display of the number of winnings in the advantageous game state can be performed on the external device (for example, the data display 1300), but the additional display is not desired depending on the hall. Hope is expected. In order to respond to such a request, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall computer 1200 (or the main body of the data display 1300) determines whether or not to display the number of winnings in the advantageous game state on the data display 1300. May be settable.

  A specific mounting method for enabling the above setting will be described. First, when "BB winning information output" is performed along with "strong cherry winning information output", it is determined that "BB winning information output" is output first. Then, the upper limit (for example, 2000 ms) of the continuous output interval of the external output signal is determined.

  In this way, when the BB winning information is raised based on the winning of the strong cherry, the hall computer 1200 receives the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 1) corresponding to “BB winning information output”. Later, within 2000 ms of the predetermined time, the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 4) corresponding to “strong cherry winning information output” will be received. On the other hand, when the BB winning information is raised based on the fact that the BB role is actually won, the hall computer 1200 receives the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 1) corresponding to “BB winning information output”. After that, the type signals 1 to 3 (information No. 4) corresponding to “strong cherry winning information output” are not received within 2000 ms of the predetermined time.

  Then, the setting of the processing control in the hall computer 1200 is changed to "When the type signal indicating the strong cherry winning information output is received within the upper limit predetermined time after receiving the type signal indicating the BB winning information output, If the "count-up of the BB winning number display on the data display 1300" is canceled (or the count-up itself is not performed) based on the received BB winning information, the hall computer 1200 can execute the advantageous game on the data display 1300. It is possible to control so as not to display the number of winnings in the state. Further, the setting of the processing control in the hall computer 1200 is set, for example, as follows: “After receiving the type signal indicating the BB winning information output, if the type signal indicating the strong cherry winning information output is not received within a predetermined time of the upper limit. Only when the display of the number of BB winnings on the data display is counted up ", the additional display of the number of winnings in the advantageous game state on the data display 1300 may not be performed.

  In the third example of the external output, regarding the “signal relating to the advantageous gaming state” externally output, in the above-described specific example, the “advantageous gaming state” is set to “BB game”. Another advantageous game state that the slot machine 1 of the embodiment can have may be used. For example, the AT may be set to the "advantageous gaming state". In such a case, an external output signal corresponding to the "signal relating to the advantageous gaming state" is prepared (AT winning information signal). A data display for directly or indirectly receiving an AT winning information signal by outputting the information externally not only when the AT is won but also when another predetermined condition (for example, strong cherry winning) is satisfied. At 1300, the number of winnings of the AT game that can be displayed in the hit number display area can be increased.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 according to the third example of the external output, even if the number of wins in the advantageous game state is relatively small, the number of wins in the advantageous game state that can be displayed on the external device is increased. Since the number can be increased, a gaming machine for entertaining a player can be provided. Further, by allowing the hall to select whether or not to display an additional display of the number of wins, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can flexibly respond to the business policy of the hall.

[12-2-4. Fourth example of external output]
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a fourth example of the external output, a signal (for example, insertion) indicating the number of game media consumed when a game start operation (start operation) is performed in the slot machine 1 Signal), and controls so as to output the signal at a timing later than the timing at which the start operation is performed. Hereinafter, such external output will be described in detail.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, as the game progresses, information on medal insertion and payout is externally output for each game by the insertion signal and the payout signal. Here, FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the output of the input signal and the output signal.

  FIG. 149 (A) shows the output timing of the input signal and the output signal described in the first to third examples of the external output. In FIG. 149 (A), first, when the start lever 201 is pressed and the start operation (start operation) is performed, the number of medals consumed for the game (the number of inserted medals) is inserted a number of times. The signal is externally output (three times in the example of FIG. 149). Thereafter, when the game progresses and medals are paid out according to the formation of a winning combination, the number of medals paid out as a prize of the game (payout number) is triggered by the start of the payout process. The payout signal is output to the outside (9 times in the example of FIG. 149). The output timing as shown in FIG. 149 (A) can also be seen in a conventional general slot machine.

  On the other hand, FIG. 149 (B) and FIG. 149 (C) show output timing examples of the input signal and the output signal in the fourth example of the external output. In FIG. 149 (B), the output timing of the insertion signal is delayed, and the first stop button (for example, the reel stop button 211a) that is executed not immediately after the start lever 201 is pressed but after the start operation in the progress of the game. After the pressing operation is performed, control is performed so that a closing signal is output. The output timing of the payout signal is the same as that in FIG.

  Further, in FIG. 149 (C), the output timing of the input signal is further delayed than in the case of FIG. 149 (B), and control is performed so that the input signal is output when the payout process is started. The output of the payout signal is started at a timing later than the output of the input signal, for example, after the payout process is completed.

  As described above, as illustrated in FIG. 149 (B) or FIG. 149 (C), in the fourth example of the external output, the input indicating the information on the game value consumed in the game (specifically, the number of inserted medals). The signal is controlled so as to be externally output at a game stage after the “timing at which the start operation (start operation) is performed” at which the consumption of the game value is determined. Since the output control of the external output signal is performed by the main board 409, the delay of the output timing is also controlled by the main board 409.

  Here, when the insertion signal and the payout signal shown in FIGS. 149 (A) to (C) are output in a predetermined advantageous game state (for example, an AT game), data connected to the slot machine 1 in a communicable manner. The display 1300 displays the acquired number of gaming values in the advantageous gaming state (for example, the difference number of medals acquired in the AT game, hereinafter referred to as “AT acquired number” for simplicity). It can be displayed in area 1340.

  The AT acquired number displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 on the data display 1300 is the difference number of medals, and therefore decreases when the medals are consumed for the game, and the medals are paid out based on the result of the game. And increase. Therefore, the number of acquired ATs displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 increases as the AT game is executed over a plurality of games while repeatedly decreasing and increasing the payout number in one game unit. , Often increasing

  A change in the display of the number of acquired ATs displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 will be specifically described in the case of FIG. 149 (A). First, assuming that the number of AT acquisitions at the start of the game in the first game is 200, the number of AT acquisitions is displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 as "200" until the start lever of the first game is pressed. Is done. Then, when the start lever is pressed, the input signal is output three times in succession to the outside, and based on the input signal, the data display 1300 subtracts three from the AT acquisition number to obtain the acquisition number display area 1340. Is displayed as "197".

  After the AT acquired number is subtracted based on the input signal, the AT acquired number displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 does not change from the start of the payout until the external output of the payout signal is performed. This is "197" which is smaller than at the start of the game. Thereafter, if payout processing of, for example, nine medals is performed by stopping the winning combination, the payout signal is externally output nine times in succession. Therefore, based on the payout signal, the data display 1300 displays the AT acquisition. By adding nine, the display of the acquired number display area 1340 is set to “206”. As a result, the number of AT acquisitions in the first game increases from “200” at the start to “206” at the end. When the payout number in the game is equal to or less than the insertion number (including the case where there is no payout), the AT acquisition number does not increase but is maintained or decreased at the end of the first game.

  By the way, in the case of FIG. 149 (A), since the time from the start of the payout until the external output of the payout signal is relatively long, the data display 1300 is displayed despite the advantageous game state of the AT game. , The number of game value differences (the number of AT acquisitions) displayed decreases, and the displayed period becomes longer. Specifically, in the acquired number display area 1340 of the data display 1300, the period in which the AT acquired number reduced to “197” based on the input signal of the first game is displayed is indicated by the oblique lines in FIG. 149 (A). It is shown in sections. Since the execution of the game in the slot machine 1 involves the consumption of a game value, it is inevitable that the number of acquired ATs will temporarily decrease even in the advantageous gaming state. If a display that reduces the number of acquisitions becomes visible, the impression given to the player is not good, and there is a considerable possibility that the interest in the game will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the fourth example of the external output, it is possible to suppress the period in which the difference in the game value is reduced and displayed as the game value is consumed. By doing so, it is possible to overcome the above-described problem of giving a bad impression to the player and reducing the gaming interest, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Regarding the effect of the fourth example of such external output, how the number of acquired ATs displayed in acquired number display area 1340 of data display 1300 is as shown in FIGS. 149 (B) and 149 (C). This will be described in detail by specifically explaining whether the change occurs. As conditions, as in the case of FIG. 149 (A), the number of AT acquisitions at the start of the game of the first game is 200, three medals are consumed for executing the game, and 9 medals are stopped by stopping the winning combination. Assume that medals have been paid out.

  First, in the case of FIG. 149 (B), the output timing of the closing signal is not immediately after the start lever 201 is pressed as shown in FIG. 149 (A) but after the first stop button (for example, reel stop). It is after the pressing operation of the button 211a). Then, the output timing of the payout signal is the same as that in FIG. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 149 (B), the period during which the AT acquired number subtracted to “197” based on the insertion signal of the first game is displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 is the hatched area in FIG. 149 (B). As shown in the part, it is suppressed in a shorter time than that of FIG.

  As described above, the display period of decrease in the number of acquired ATs is suppressed in a short time as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. 149 (B), thereby making it difficult for the player to notice the decrease in the number of acquired ATs. The player can enjoy the AT game without giving the player a bad impression, and an effect of suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game can be expected.

  In particular, in the case of FIG. 149 (B), the reduction display of the number of acquired ATs is performed after the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 is started, so that in such a game stage, the player's line of sight is the symbol display window 401. , And the possibility of noticing the subtraction display on the data display 1300 (acquired number display area 1340) can be further reduced. Further, although the output timing of the insertion signal is suppressed, since the insertion signal is reliably output in the target game (in this case, the first game), the management of the game information in the hall computer 1200 or the like is adversely affected. Do not give.

  Next, in the case of FIG. 149 (C), the output timing of the input signal is further later than in the case of FIG. 149 (B), and is after the start of the payout processing. The output timing of the payout signal is slightly later than in the case of FIG. 149 (A) or FIG. 149 (B). For example, the payout signal is output after the payout process is completed. Since it starts before it ends, there is no significant delay. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 149 (C), the period during which the AT acquired number subtracted to “197” based on the insertion signal of the first game is displayed in the acquired number display area 1340 is the hatched area in FIG. 149 (C). As shown in the part, it is suppressed in a shorter time than in any of the cases of FIGS. 149 (A) and 149 (B), and in the image of the actual progress of the game, there is almost no period of reduced display.

  As described above, the display period of decrease in the number of acquired ATs is suppressed in a very short time as shown by the hatched portion in FIG. 149 (C), so that it is difficult for the player to notice the decrease in the number of acquired ATs. In this way, the player can enjoy the AT game without giving the player a bad impression, and can expect an effect of suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In particular, in the case of FIG. 149 (C), after the reel operation of the first game is completed and the payout process is started in the slot machine 1, the display of decreasing the number of acquired ATs is performed. Even if the player notices the subtraction display on the data display 1300 (acquired number display area 1340), immediately after that, the increase in the number of acquired ATs is displayed based on the output of the payout signal in a manner that looks almost continuous. Is performed. Specifically, the display content of the number of acquired ATs in the acquired number display area 1340 is increased from “200” to “197” due to the consumption of the medals, and then is increased to “206” due to the payout of the medals. Therefore, it is highly likely that the display looks like a series of display changes, and as a result, it is easy to give only the image that the number has increased from “200” to “206” to the player.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the fourth example of the external output, the control (especially, the narrowing of the output timing interval between the input signal and the payout signal externally output in the same game) , Control of delaying the output timing of the input signal), it is possible to suppress the period in which the difference value of the game value is reduced and displayed in an external device such as the data display 1300, The effect of suppressing a decrease in interest can be obtained.

  In the above specific example, the difference value display of the game value in the advantageous game state has been described. However, the application of the fourth example of the external output is the difference of the game value that can be displayed on the data display 1300. The number display is not limited to the advantageous game state. For example, even in the case of displaying the difference in game value in the total game of one day, by applying the fourth example of the external output, the period of the subtraction display due to the medal consumption in each game can be suppressed short. Therefore, an effect of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest can be obtained.

  By the way, the most important role of the external output signal output externally via the external relay terminal board 131 of the slot machine 1 is that the hall computer 1200, which is one of the external devices, grasps the game information of the slot machine 1. It is useful for the business management of the hall. In the fourth example of the external output, the control for changing the output timing of the external output signal is performed. However, in such a case, the output control of the external output signal is performed so as not to cause a problem in the management in the hall computer 1200. It is preferable to adopt at least one of the following first to third additional conditions.

  First, as a first additional condition, in the fourth example of the external output, the output timing of the insertion signal is set at a game stage after the “timing at which the start operation (start operation) is performed” at which the consumption of the medal is determined. However, when compared with the output timing of the payout signal, it is preferable that the insertion signal be output first, and furthermore, all outputs of the insertion signal in this game (for example, three It is preferable that the output of the payout signal in the same game is started after the completion of the three insertion signals in the case of indicating the number). In this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in this manner, the insertion of the medals indicated by the insertion signal and the payout of the medals indicated by the payout signal can be clearly managed by the hall computer 1200 or the like without being confused. It is possible to clearly grasp the sales on the hall side.

  As a second additional condition, in the fourth example of the external output, control for delaying the output timing of the insertion signal or the payout signal as compared with the conventional gaming machine is possible, but the output of each signal is a target. It is preferable to start the game. More strictly, it corresponds to a series of signal outputs in which the same type of external output signal is continuously output (e.g., that the payout signal is continuously output nine times corresponding to the payout of nine medals). ), It is required that at least the first signal output (the first output of the payout signal) be started during the target game. By doing so, when the hall manages game information with the hall computer 1200 or the like, it is possible to reliably link the game to the target game based on the output start timing of the external output signal relating to insertion and payout of medals. , It is possible to contribute to the management of accurate game information of the slot machine 1 in the hall computer 1200.

  In the second additional condition, at least the first signal output is always started during the target game for a series of signal outputs in which the same type of external output signal is continuously output. In such a case, a third additional condition can be provided as a preferable control for the remaining signal outputs of the series of signal outputs.

  As a third additional condition, when a series of signal output by the same type of external output signal is performed, and when the series of signal output is not completed in the target game, a game for the next game in the hall computer 1200 is performed. It is preferable to perform control so as not to affect information management. The control corresponding to the third additional condition will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 149 (C).

  In the case of FIG. 149 (C), the payout signal is output nine times in a row, but before the output of the ninth payout signal is completed, medals can be inserted in the second game. At this time, if an external output signal accompanying the progress of the game of the second game is output to the hall computer 1200, a problem may occur in the management of the game information by the hall computer 1200. Suitable control as a third additional condition for such a situation includes the following first or second control.

  As the first control, the main board 409 determines whether the payout process for the current game is completed, the output of the payout signal for the current game is completed, or the payout process and the payout signal for the current game are completed. Until both of the outputs are completed, control is performed so as not to accept a BET for the next game. More specifically, the control of not accepting a BET means that the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX bet button 206 is not accepted, and the bet counting by directly inserting medals is not performed.

  In the case where the first control is performed, the state as shown in FIG. 149 (C) does not occur, and after the output of all payout signals in the first game is completed, the medal insertion (BET possible) in the second game is performed. . By performing such first control, for example, the start of the second game is permitted in the slot machine 1 until the processing (payout processing and payout signal output processing) performed in the first game is completed. Therefore, the game information can be accurately managed by the hall computer 1200.

  As a second control, the main board 409 allows the next game to be started (for example, BET acceptance is possible) even if the output of the payout signal is not completed. Control to continue to output no payout signal. Further, even when the payout signal is received, the hall computer 1200 that receives the payout signal also receives a signal notifying the start of the next game until it is determined that the output of the payout signal by the series of signals has been completed. Even if this is done, control is performed so that the payout signal of the previous game is continuously received. For example, if the next payout signal is not received until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) has elapsed from the last reception of the payout signal in the first game, the output of the payout signal in the first game is completed. If the next payout signal is received before the predetermined time has elapsed, the payout signal may be processed as the payout signal for the first game.

  When the second control is performed, the state is as shown in FIG. 149 (C). However, even after the second game is started, the payout signal of the first game is continuously processed in the hall computer 1200. By performing the second control, the hole computer 1200 can continuously perform the payout process performed in the first game, independently of the progress of the game in the slot machine 1, and thus the hole computer 1200 The management of game information by 1200 can be performed accurately.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment according to the fourth example of the external output, by providing at least one of the first to third additional conditions, it is possible to accurately output the external output signal by the hall computer 1200. While maintaining the management of the game information, it is possible to realize the enhancement of the game entertainment through the display of the game information on the data display 1300.

  As described above, the first to fourth examples have described the characteristic external output by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. Note that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may be configured to include any one of the external outputs shown in the first to fourth examples alone, or may be configured to include a plurality of external outputs in combination. It may be configured. When a plurality of examples are combined, it can be expected that the effects of each example are obtained together.

  The slot machine 1 described above as a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can execute an internal lottery for a winning combination and repeatedly execute a game that displays a game result based on the result of the internal lottery. In such a slot machine 1, the main board 409 is an example of a role lottery means for executing a role lottery (winning role lottery) for selecting a winning role from a plurality of roles. It is an example of symbol display means for displaying a symbol mode based on a result. The main board 409 and the external relay terminal plate 131 are an example of an external output unit that can output an external signal indicating predetermined information regarding a game to an external device that can communicate with the gaming machine. This is an example of a type notification unit that outputs an external signal so that the type of a winning combination can be determined. More specifically, the main board 409 controls the output of the external signal, and the external relay terminal board 131 relays the output of the external signal output by the control of the main board 409 to the external device. Here, the hall computer 1200 and the data display 1300 correspond to external devices, and the data display 1300 displays such that the type of the low-frequency winning combination can be determined using an external signal output from the gaming machine. It is an example of an external device that can be executed. In addition, the low-frequency winning combination is a role (rare role) that is harder to be selected than a high-frequency winning role (non-rare role) that is relatively easy to be selected in the role lottery. As a specific example of the winning role, as shown in FIG. 63, a cherry role (a weak cherry and a strong cherry) and a watermelon role (a strong watermelon and a weak watermelon) which are the same kind of a rare role but have different winning probabilities at the first AT. And the like. The explanation on these winning combinations is described in detail in [10-1] and the like. The output of the external signal by the type notification means of outputting the external signal so that the type of the low frequency winning combination can be determined through the external device is described in [12-2-1]. This is described in detail as a first example.

  The above is one mode of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than the slot machine, for example, a pachinko machine, a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine, and the like.

1 Slot machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiating port 104b Code outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection 107 Mounting Piece 108 mounting piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device main body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow gutter 110e payout sensor 111 game medal auxiliary storage box 111a medal full sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg 112i Ventilation space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Projection 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wirings 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 This opening 128 Supporting cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Medal slot 205 Single slot button 206 MAX slot button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop Button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Supporting piece 216 Frame frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a -2 light guide plate 217b reflecting member 218 fixing member 219 concave groove 300 symbol variation display device 301a left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (third reel)
302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 305 Top plate 306 Right plate 307 Left plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Retainer 316 Handle 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Recessed step 413 Tapered section 414 Wheel 415 Flange 416 Hook section 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 4 0 Hinge fitting 420a Fixed member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle opening 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Play hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Lock hole 443 Skylight 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main board 500 Image display 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Illumination device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving part 509 Engaging part 510 Sub-substrate 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Stored number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Rightward descending line 623b Rightward rising line 700 Recorder 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 Input / output interface 1130 Input / output interface 1200 Hall computer 1300 Data display

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a lottery regarding winning in a plurality of hits included,
A symbol display area on which a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means is displayed,
A gaming machine in which a plurality of symbol combinations can be displayed as a result of the one lottery even though the result of the lottery by the lottery means is one in one game,
In one first game, a symbol combination composed of symbols of the same type but not the same symbol is displayed as a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
In one second game performed after the first game, as a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a symbol combination composed of symbols of the same type but not the same symbol is displayed. ,
In a third game, which is a single game following the second game, a symbol combination that is the same as the symbol type displayed in the first game and that includes the same symbol; it possible to perform display of a plurality of symbol combinations by displaying composed symbol combination from the same a was in and the same pattern as the type of the displayed symbols in the second game,
In the third game, in the situation of displaying the symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol a plurality of times, the symbol combination is displayed by a temporary stop with a swing fluctuation in each of the plurality of times,
After the symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol is displayed by the temporary stop accompanied by the fluctuation, the next symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol undergoes the fluctuation. There is a predetermined time until it is displayed by the accompanying temporary stop,
After the symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol is displayed by the temporary stop accompanied by the fluctuation, the next symbol combination of the same type and composed of the same symbol undergoes the fluctuation. A gaming machine, wherein a special effect can be executed during the predetermined time until the temporary effect is displayed by the accompanying temporary stop.